Part 2 - English

Emirate of Abu Dhabi
Municipalities & Agricultural Dept.
Health & Safety

Codes of Practice
for
Construction Projects
Site
Standards & Guidelines
for
Consultants & Contractors
Foreword
Table of Contents
Definitions and Contact Details
PRELIMINARIES
SITE TRANSPORT, PLANT & EQUIPMENT
SITE TOOLS & MACHINERY
LIFTING OPERATIONS
CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS
WORKING AT HEIGHT
SPECIAL PROCESSES
Municipalities & Agricultural Department
H&S Construction Codes of Practice
PART TWO
Foreword
In an industry such as ours with its diversity of activities, personal injury and health risks are,
unfortunately, an ever present hazard.
To successfully combat these hazards it is important that all of us contribute to the health and safety of
ourselves and others in all our work activities.
This H&S Construction Codes of Practice (Part Two) is intended to provide a base at which the
highest level of safety can be achieved on all our construction projects. It provides not only for the
physical working environment, but for appropriate consultation and discussion between the
department, consultants and contractors on accident prevention and occupational Health & Safety
matters;
Although the standards and guidelines contained in this manual have been developed from the best
and most appropriate international health and safety standards, they are not intended to replace any
present, or future Ministerial Orders applicable to health and safety of persons at work, nor any
specific health and safety requirements incorporated in contract specifications, all of which should be
fully adhered to at all times.
All concerned should note that as these manuals are controlled documents and as such, various forms
and checklists contained in them are sample formats only and should not be removed. A master file of
all the forms checklists and drawings are held with ADM Health and Safety Unit, copies of which are
readily available on request by quoting the Document No. located in the footers.
Both manuals will be regularly reviewed by ADM’s H&S Committee, and any amendments or additions
made by that committee, will be circulated to all concerned.
I look forward to the full co-operation of all concerned in, over a period of time, adopting the standards
and guidelines laid down in this manual, and to work together to achieve an improved safety record for
this very important industry.
Signed:
Undersecretary of Municipalities & Agricultural Department
Document No. Revision Date Section title (i)

ADM/H&S/Pt 2 01 March 2005 Foreword 1 of 1
PART TWO
TABLE OF CONTENTS - PART TWO
FOREWORD
(i) Foreword
TABLE OF CONTENTS
(ii) Table of Contents
DEFINITIONS & CONTACT DETAILS

(iii) Definition of terms used in Part Two
(iv) Municipalities & Agricultural Dept. Abu Dhabi Municipality H&S Contact Details +
Emergency Contacts
PRELIMINARIES
1.0 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
2.0 WORKING IN HIGH TEMPERATURES AND REMOTE LOCATIONS
3.0 NOISE AT WORK
4.0 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH
5.0 SUBSTANCES HAZARDOUS TO HEALTH
6.0 OVERHEAD AND UNDERGROUND SERVICES
7.0 ELECTRICITY AT WORK
8.0 MANUAL HANDLING & LIFTING
9.0 HIGHLY FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS & LIQUEFIED PETROLEUM GASES
10.0 SAFETY SIGNAGE
11.0 PERMIT TO WORK
12.0 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (P.P.E)
SITE TRANSPORT, PLANT & EQUIPMENT

13.0 SITE TRANSPORT
14.0 MOBILE PLANT & EQUIPMENT
15.0 STATIC PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
TABLE OF CONTENTS - PART TWO continued
Document No. Revision Date Section title (ii)

ADM/H&S/Pt 2 01 March 2005 Table of Contents 1 of 2
PART TWO
SITE TOOLS & MACHINERY

16.0 PORTABLE TOOLS
17.0 ABRASIVE WHEELS
18.0 WOODWORKING MACHINERY
LIFTING OPERATIONS
19.0 CRANES AND HOISTS
20.0 LIFTING GEAR
CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS
21.0 CONFINED SPACES
22.0 ROAD WORKS - BRIDGES
23.0 EXCAVATIONS - COFFERDAMS
24.0 TUNELLING - SHAFT SINKING
25.0 FALSEWORK
26.0 PILING
27.0 WELDING
28.0 WORKING OVER OR ADJACENT TO WATER
WORKING AT HEIGHT
29.0 SCAFFOLDING – LADDERS – CRADLES – SAFETY NETS
30.0 ERECTION OF STRUCTURES
31.0 DEMOLITION
32.0 SAFE WORKING ON ROOFS
33.0 REFURBISHMENT
34.0 MAINTENANCE
SPECIAL PROCESSES
35.0 High Pressure Water Jetting
Lasers
Site Investigation
Watercraft & Dredging
Diving
Document No. Revision Date Section title (ii)

ADM/H&S/Pt 2 01 March 2005 Table of Contents 2 of 2
PART TWO
Definition of terms used in Part Two
H&S Health and Safety
ADM Municipalities & Agricultural Dept. Abu Dhabi Municipality
Consultant Company appointed by the Owner/Client for all

Design/Management aspects of Project
Contractor Main Contractor appointed by the Owner/Client for the

Construction of the Project
Sub Contractor Company appointed by the Contractor, Owner or Client to

carry out designated aspects of the Project
Health & Safety Plan Format used by the Consultant to identify the main H&S risks
during the design stage of a contract
Lifting Appliances A grab, winch, pulley block, gin wheel, hoist, crane,
excavator, dragline.
Lifting Gear A chain, sling, rope sling, webbing sling or similar gear and a
ring, link, hook, shackle, swivel or eyebolt.
SWL Safe Working Load.
ASLI Automatic Safe Load Indicator.
Scaffold Any temporarily provided structure on or from which persons
perform work in connection with operations or works to which
this manual applies.
Site Any place where building operations or works of engineering
construction, or both such operations of such works are
being carried on, and any temporary storage or workshop
area associated with the works.
Sloping Roof A roof with a pitch of more than 10 degrees.
CE mark Recognised mark for personal protective equipment tested

and approved to international standards.
ADWEA. Abu Dhabi Water and Electricity Authority

RCCB Residual Current Circuit Breakers
mA milli Amp
Document No. Revision Date Section title (iii)
ADM/H&S/Pt 2 01 March 2005 Definition of Terms used in Part 2 1 of 1

SECTION 1
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
DEFINITION 1
INTRODUCTION
MAIN APPLICABLE U.A.E. LEGISLATION
MAIN APPLICABLE BEST PRACTICE AND TECHNICAL GUIDELINES
EXECUTIVE REGULATIONS AND LOCAL ORDERS
1.1 GENERAL 2
1.2 ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT –
IDENTIFYING POTENTIAL IMPACTS ON THE ENVIRONMENT 3
1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT AND MINIMISATION OF IMPACTS 3
1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING AND ONGOING INSPECTIONS 4
1.5 THE FEDERAL LAW ON PROTECTION AND DEVELOPMENT OF THE 5

ENVIRONMENT (1999)
SECTION 1
Health & Safety at Work
PART TWO
SECTION 1
DEFINITION
The key issues that must be taken into consideration when undertaking any work which may, to any
extent, impact the environment.
INTRODUCTION
During construction certain development projects pose a significant risk to the environment. This risk
must be addressed through the consideration of Environmental Protection which involves
environmental assessment, management and monitoring to ensure that the effects of development
are not significantly detrimental. All personnel are responsible for considering the environmental
implications of their activities. This should be overseen by the consultant, or a specialist
environmental consultant where appropriate. Construction practices that fail to control pollution can
cause damage to the terrestrial environment, upset ecological systems and wildlife communities, and
result in the contamination of land and groundwater.
The issue of environmental protection during the contract period should be discussed with the
consultant prior to the site hand-over. Where deemed appropriate the consultant should seek
guidance from an approved specialist environmental consultant. Stiff penalties can be brought to bear
upon individual persons and companies whose actions result in damage, be it temporary or
permanent, direct or indirect, to the environment.

Federal Law No. 24 (1999) on Protection and Development of the Environment
Ministerial Order No.32 (1982) regarding protection of employers against occupational hazards
Local orders on discharge and disposal of wastes (Environmental Protection Section - Food and
Environmental Control Centre - Abu Dhabi Municipality)
Document No. Revision Date Section title 1

ADM/H&S/Pt 2 01 March 2005 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION 1 of 6
PART TWO

ERWDA (2003).Technical Guidance Document (TG-0003R)
Standards and Limits for:
A. Pollution to Air and Marine Environments.
B. Occupational Exposure.
C. Pesticides and Chemical Use. Draft July 6 2003.
ERWDA (2003). Technical Guidance Document

Development of Construction Environmental Management (CEMP) - Onshore. Draft November 2003.

The contractor should contact the Environmental Protection Section of the Food and Environmental
Control Centre of Abu Dhabi Municipality to ascertain what standards and/or regulations are currently
in force.
1.1 GENERAL
• all contracts, whether new or existing, must comply with the Federal law and enforcing
regulations on environmental protection and also any local orders currently in place.
• it is recommended that all contracts, whether new or existing, comply with best practice
and technical guidance.
• in accordance with best practice recommendations, the contractor must have in place/be in
the process of developing an integrated Health, Safety Environmental Management
System in order to minimise risks.
• the contractor should make himself aware of any risks to the environment which may occur
within or outside the agreed site area as a result of his activities.
• the contractor should seek advice from an approved specialist environmental consultant as
to what measures should be taken to prevent or reduce to an acceptable level (as agreed
by the local authorities) the impact on the environment of activities taking place under the
contract in question.
• the contractor should have procedures in place to enable the monitoring of all discharges
into the environment, be they liquid, solid or gaseous and ensure adherence to permissible
threshold emission levels. Scrutiny of data arising from environmental monitoring may be
undertaken by the relevant authorities.

PART TWO
1.2 ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT-

IDENTIFYING POTENTIAL IMPACTS ON THE ENVIRONMENT
In order the have a full appreciation of the all potential environmental implications of a project,
the consultant must be familiar with all details any previous environmental studies,
conducted/instructed by Abu Dhabi Municipality. This should include the identification of all
direct and indirect impacts including secondary and cumulative implications of the works. In
particular the consultant, should be aware of any significant impacts that may occur as well as
any sensitive receptors. For example when construction occurs near built-up areas, poor
practices may result in air and noise pollution which may cause annoyance and affect the health
of neighbouring communities.
If necessary the contractor should seek advice from an approved specialist environmental
consultant.
The contractor should be aware that potential sources of pollution could include, but may not be
limited to, the following:-
• noise generated by machinery or construction activities.
• dusts and/or fumes produced by construction activities.
• disposal of solid wastes arising from construction activities, be they on or off site.
• discharge of waste waters, sewage or ground waters to land, sewer, surface water drain,
the marine environment or any other location.
• the disturbance of species or habitat either within or in the immediate vicinity of the site.
1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT AND MINIMISATION OF IMPACTS

Contract documents, specifications and drawings should be examined to establish whether any
activities which take place as part of the contract may have an impact upon the environment,
e.g.;
a) the disposal of waste waters to surface water drain, sewer or on land,
b) the production of noise, dusts or fumes,
c) the de-watering of ground and disposal of water arising,
d) the disposal of waste materials arising,

e) the damage to existing wildlife habitats due to construction activities.
In order to ensure that the contractor minimises all potential environmental impacts, and has
best working practices to minimise risks the consultant must also ensure that the contractor has
an appropriate Health, Safety Environmental Management System (HSEMS) in place. The
HSEMS aims to establish quality systems to consistently high health, safety and environmental
outcomes for the project as a whole.

PART TWO
For projects which are deemed to be environmentally sensitive, as defined by the regulatory
authority, the contractor will be required to develop a Construction Environmental Management
Plan (CEMP).
The CEMP is required to contain all aspects of a projects environmental management, and
should be prepared by the main contractor before work commences. This aims to implement
mitigation measures that may be required as defined by any previous environmental
assessments conducted by the Municipality. The CEMP should contain best practice sources
documents which can be used to address significant environmental impacts. These are generic
and should be applied to the site conditions via the environmental control plan.
The CEMP should be developed in accordance with ERWDA Techncial Guidance and should
include details of:
• Environmental Control Plan

• Work Scheduling
• Land Disturbance
• Stormwater Management
• Control Installations and Measures
• Soil Stockpiles
• Special Operational Precautions
• Contingency Plans
• Rehabilitation
• Maintenance, Inspections and Surveillance
• Ongoing Assessment and Management
The CEMP is the responsibility of the contractor. The consultant is required to ensure that the
contractor fulfils all their obligations as stated in the CEMP. Both the consultant and the
contractor may require the input of an approved specialist environmental consultant.
1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING AND ONGOING INSPECTIONS

Construction sites are constantly changing and systems need to be in place to modify control
measures to maintain their effectiveness. Frequent inspection and monitoring may therefore be
required to continually check the effectiveness of measures. The CEMP should also be
updated to address deficiencies identified by the monitoring or audit program as new impacts
are identified through surveillance.
Any laboratory testing is required to be conducted in ERWDA approved laboratories.

Monitoring methodologies and plans need also to be approved by ERWDA.

PART TWO
1.5 THE FEDERAL LAW ON PROTECTION AND DEVELOPMENT OF THE

ENVIRONMENT (1999)
The contractor should make himself aware of relevant articles in the above law. In particular
he should be aware of the following:-
The law aims at achieving the following purposes:-
article 2
To combat pollution of all forms and to prevent any immediate or long-run damage or effects
due to economic, agricultural, industrial or reconstruction development plans and programs
aimed at improving quality of life and to secure co-ordination between the Authority and the
parties involved in the environment protection, conservation of its diversity and natural
balance and to spread environmental awareness and anti-pollution principles.
articles 49-55
The contractor should make himself fully aware of the Executive Regulations which relate to
the above articles.
article 49
Machinery, engines or vehicles generating combustion beyond the limits specified by the
Executive Regulations shall not be used.
article 52
In carrying out drilling, construction, demolition, or transportation of whatsoever results
therefrom, including garbage or sands, all parties and individuals shall take the necessary
precautions in the course of practising such activities, as well as the precautions, needed for
their safe storage and transportation to prevent their scattering, in the manner to be shown in
the Executive Regulations.
article 54
• in carrying out production or service activities or otherwise, especially in operating
machinery, equipment, horns, loudspeakers all parties and individuals shall not exceed
the permissible limits for noise.
• the Executive Regulations shall show the tolerable limits for the maximum volume of
sound and the time limit to exposure thereto.
The contractor should make himself aware of the penalties which may applied for non-
compliance with this Law which could include:-
• death penalty,
• imprisonment
• maximum fine of 10 million Dirhams.

PART TWO
article 71
Any person, whose act or negligence causes damage to the environment or a third party,
due to violation of the provisions of this law or the regulations or decisions issued in
implementation thereof, shall be held responsible for all costs required for the handling or
elimination of such damage. He shall be bound as well to pay any consequent indemnity.
article 77
Whosoever pollutes drinking or ground waters, shall be punished with imprisonment for a
period of not less than one year and a fine not less than five thousand Dirhams and not more
than one hundred thousand Dirhams.

PART TWO
ADM & TP H&S Contact Details

Telephone No. Fax No.
Chairman of ADM H&S
Committee Eng. Ibrahim Hussain Baquer 02-6771821 02-6724417
Building Directorate
Health and Safety Unit Eng. Raafat Radi Elias 02-6955173 02-6724417
Building Directorate
Health and Safety Unit Eng. Mohammed Saleh Al Naqeeb 02-6955787 02-6724417
Buildings Directorate
Quality Assurance Eng. Marie Mahmoud Al Ghadi 050-6153144 02-6724417
Roads Directorate Eng. Issa Mubarak Al Mazrouie 02-6772227 02-6794518
Roads Directorate Dr. Rasin Kadri Mufti 02-6764002 02-6956367
Sewerage Directorate Eng. Nader Asaad Bin Taher 02-6711244 02-6790218
Town Planning Eng.Fadel ali Al Briki 02-6978283 02-6786716
Agriculture Section Eng. Helmy Abbas Abu Atia 02-6956716 02-6793699
Forestry Section Eng. Abdul Hakeem Eida El Jaberi 02-5839159 02-5839030

Agriculture Guidance
Marketing and Livestock Eng. Ahmed Mohd. Al mutwaly Salim 02-6955451 02-6788724
Public Health and
Environment El Wathiq Tibara Idris 02-6980349 02-6785961
Municipality Garage Mohamed Saeed Muhair El Qubaisi 02-4446500 02-4444038
Municipality Garage Hakeem Abdulla Nasser Shayaa 02-4446500 02-4444037
Stores Directorate Abdul Latif Ali Ibrahim Al Mansoori 02-4446619 02-4444746

General Transport Tariq Mohammed Abdul Rahman Al
Directorate Shahie 02-4071614 02-4431800
Financial Affairs Directorate Mohammed Osman Abasher 02-6955518

Traffic Signals (Roads
Directorate) Eng. Majid Eid Ali Eidat Al Katheiry 02-6727324 02-6779173
Abdel Fatah Mohammed Abu El
Abu Dhabi Compost Factory Nass 02-5554450 02-5555605
Industrial Security
Directorate Elmor Mohammd El Neyadi 02-6956001 02-6790684
I.T. Section Zayed Ahmed El Hamely 02-6955910 02-6775877
Statistics Section Eisa Ali Al Hosani 02-6955055 02-6774919
Public Relations Section Fahad Salmeen Al Madhi 02-6955036 02-6780064
Document No. Revision Date Section title (iv)

ADM/H&S/Pt 2 01 March 2005 ADM TP & Emergency H&S Contact Details 1 of 2
PART TWO
Emergency Contact Details Telephone No.
FIRE/CIVIL DEFENCE 997
AMBULANCE SERVICE 998
POLICE 999
ELECTRICITY 4464677
WATER 991
ETISALAT 8005500
ADNOC 6023177
COAST GUARD 6731900
Document No. Revision Date Section title (iv)

ADM/H&S/Pt 2 01 March 2005 ADM TP & Emergency H&S Contact Details 2 of 2
SECTION 1
DEFINITION 1
INTRODUCTION
1.1 GENERAL 2
1.2 ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT –
IDENTIFYING POTENTIAL IMPACTS ON THE ENVIRONMENT 3
1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT AND MINIMISATION OF IMPACTS 3
1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING AND ONGOING INSPECTIONS 4
1.5 THE FEDERAL LAW ON PROTECTION AND DEVELOPMENT OF THE 5

ENVIRONMENT (1999)
SECTION 1
PART TWO
SECTION 1
DEFINITION
The key issues that must be taken into consideration when undertaking any work which may, to any
extent, impact the environment.
INTRODUCTION
During construction certain development projects pose a significant risk to the environment. This risk
must be addressed through the consideration of Environmental Protection which involves
environmental assessment, management and monitoring to ensure that the effects of development
are not significantly detrimental. All personnel are responsible for considering the environmental
implications of their activities. This should be overseen by the consultant, or a specialist
environmental consultant where appropriate. Construction practices that fail to control pollution can
cause damage to the terrestrial environment, upset ecological systems and wildlife communities, and
result in the contamination of land and groundwater.
The issue of environmental protection during the contract period should be discussed with the
consultant prior to the site hand-over. Where deemed appropriate the consultant should seek
guidance from an approved specialist environmental consultant. Stiff penalties can be brought to bear
upon individual persons and companies whose actions result in damage, be it temporary or
permanent, direct or indirect, to the environment.

Federal Law No. 24 (1999) on Protection and Development of the Environment
Ministerial Order No.32 (1982) regarding protection of employers against occupational hazards
Local orders on discharge and disposal of wastes (Environmental Protection Section - Food and
Environmental Control Centre - Abu Dhabi Municipality)

PART TWO

ERWDA (2003).Technical Guidance Document (TG-0003R)
Standards and Limits for:
A. Pollution to Air and Marine Environments.
B. Occupational Exposure.
C. Pesticides and Chemical Use. Draft July 6 2003.
ERWDA (2003). Technical Guidance Document

Development of Construction Environmental Management (CEMP) - Onshore. Draft November 2003.

The contractor should contact the Environmental Protection Section of the Food and Environmental
Control Centre of Abu Dhabi Municipality to ascertain what standards and/or regulations are currently
in force.
1.1 GENERAL
• all contracts, whether new or existing, must comply with the Federal law and enforcing
regulations on environmental protection and also any local orders currently in place.
• it is recommended that all contracts, whether new or existing, comply with best practice
and technical guidance.
• in accordance with best practice recommendations, the contractor must have in place/be in
the process of developing an integrated Health, Safety Environmental Management
System in order to minimise risks.
• the contractor should make himself aware of any risks to the environment which may occur
within or outside the agreed site area as a result of his activities.
• the contractor should seek advice from an approved specialist environmental consultant as
to what measures should be taken to prevent or reduce to an acceptable level (as agreed
by the local authorities) the impact on the environment of activities taking place under the
contract in question.
• the contractor should have procedures in place to enable the monitoring of all discharges
into the environment, be they liquid, solid or gaseous and ensure adherence to permissible
threshold emission levels. Scrutiny of data arising from environmental monitoring may be
undertaken by the relevant authorities.

PART TWO
1.2 ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT-

IDENTIFYING POTENTIAL IMPACTS ON THE ENVIRONMENT
In order the have a full appreciation of the all potential environmental implications of a project,
the consultant must be familiar with all details any previous environmental studies,
conducted/instructed by Abu Dhabi Municipality. This should include the identification of all
direct and indirect impacts including secondary and cumulative implications of the works. In
particular the consultant, should be aware of any significant impacts that may occur as well as
any sensitive receptors. For example when construction occurs near built-up areas, poor
practices may result in air and noise pollution which may cause annoyance and affect the health
of neighbouring communities.
If necessary the contractor should seek advice from an approved specialist environmental
consultant.
The contractor should be aware that potential sources of pollution could include, but may not be
limited to, the following:-
• noise generated by machinery or construction activities.
• dusts and/or fumes produced by construction activities.
• disposal of solid wastes arising from construction activities, be they on or off site.
• discharge of waste waters, sewage or ground waters to land, sewer, surface water drain,
the marine environment or any other location.
• the disturbance of species or habitat either within or in the immediate vicinity of the site.
1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT AND MINIMISATION OF IMPACTS

Contract documents, specifications and drawings should be examined to establish whether any
activities which take place as part of the contract may have an impact upon the environment,
e.g.;
a) the disposal of waste waters to surface water drain, sewer or on land,
b) the production of noise, dusts or fumes,
c) the de-watering of ground and disposal of water arising,
d) the disposal of waste materials arising,

e) the damage to existing wildlife habitats due to construction activities.
In order to ensure that the contractor minimises all potential environmental impacts, and has
best working practices to minimise risks the consultant must also ensure that the contractor has
an appropriate Health, Safety Environmental Management System (HSEMS) in place. The
HSEMS aims to establish quality systems to consistently high health, safety and environmental
outcomes for the project as a whole.

PART TWO
For projects which are deemed to be environmentally sensitive, as defined by the regulatory
authority, the contractor will be required to develop a Construction Environmental Management
Plan (CEMP).
The CEMP is required to contain all aspects of a projects environmental management, and
should be prepared by the main contractor before work commences. This aims to implement
mitigation measures that may be required as defined by any previous environmental
assessments conducted by the Municipality. The CEMP should contain best practice sources
documents which can be used to address significant environmental impacts. These are generic
and should be applied to the site conditions via the environmental control plan.
The CEMP should be developed in accordance with ERWDA Techncial Guidance and should
include details of:
• Environmental Control Plan

• Work Scheduling
• Land Disturbance
• Stormwater Management
• Control Installations and Measures
• Soil Stockpiles
• Special Operational Precautions
• Contingency Plans
• Rehabilitation
• Maintenance, Inspections and Surveillance
• Ongoing Assessment and Management
The CEMP is the responsibility of the contractor. The consultant is required to ensure that the
contractor fulfils all their obligations as stated in the CEMP. Both the consultant and the
contractor may require the input of an approved specialist environmental consultant.
1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING AND ONGOING INSPECTIONS

Construction sites are constantly changing and systems need to be in place to modify control
measures to maintain their effectiveness. Frequent inspection and monitoring may therefore be
required to continually check the effectiveness of measures. The CEMP should also be
updated to address deficiencies identified by the monitoring or audit program as new impacts
are identified through surveillance.
Any laboratory testing is required to be conducted in ERWDA approved laboratories.

Monitoring methodologies and plans need also to be approved by ERWDA.

PART TWO
1.5 THE FEDERAL LAW ON PROTECTION AND DEVELOPMENT OF THE

ENVIRONMENT (1999)
The contractor should make himself aware of relevant articles in the above law. In particular
he should be aware of the following:-
The law aims at achieving the following purposes:-
article 2
To combat pollution of all forms and to prevent any immediate or long-run damage or effects
due to economic, agricultural, industrial or reconstruction development plans and programs
aimed at improving quality of life and to secure co-ordination between the Authority and the
parties involved in the environment protection, conservation of its diversity and natural
balance and to spread environmental awareness and anti-pollution principles.
articles 49-55
The contractor should make himself fully aware of the Executive Regulations which relate to
the above articles.
article 49
Machinery, engines or vehicles generating combustion beyond the limits specified by the
Executive Regulations shall not be used.
article 52
In carrying out drilling, construction, demolition, or transportation of whatsoever results
therefrom, including garbage or sands, all parties and individuals shall take the necessary
precautions in the course of practising such activities, as well as the precautions, needed for
their safe storage and transportation to prevent their scattering, in the manner to be shown in
the Executive Regulations.
article 54
• in carrying out production or service activities or otherwise, especially in operating
machinery, equipment, horns, loudspeakers all parties and individuals shall not exceed
the permissible limits for noise.
• the Executive Regulations shall show the tolerable limits for the maximum volume of
sound and the time limit to exposure thereto.
The contractor should make himself aware of the penalties which may applied for non-
compliance with this Law which could include:-
• death penalty,
• imprisonment
• maximum fine of 10 million Dirhams.

PART TWO
article 71
Any person, whose act or negligence causes damage to the environment or a third party,
due to violation of the provisions of this law or the regulations or decisions issued in
implementation thereof, shall be held responsible for all costs required for the handling or
elimination of such damage. He shall be bound as well to pay any consequent indemnity.
article 77
Whosoever pollutes drinking or ground waters, shall be punished with imprisonment for a
period of not less than one year and a fine not less than five thousand Dirhams and not more
than one hundred thousand Dirhams.

SECTION 2
WORKING IN HIGH TEMPERATURES

AND REMOTE LOCATIONS
DEFINITION 1
INTRODUCTION
2.1 DRIVING TO REMOTE SITES 2

2.2 WEATHER 3
2.3 INSECTS, SPIDERS AND SNAKES 4
2.4 EFFECT OF HEAT WHILST WORKING ON SITE 5
2.5 PREVENTION OF HEAT RELATED CONDITIONS 6
2.6 VEHICLES, HEAVY EQUIPMENT AND PLANT 7
2.7 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT 7
SECTION 2
PART TWO
SECTION 2
WORKING IN HIGH TEMPERATURES

AND REMOTE LOCATIONS
INTRODUCTION
Driving and working in remote areas such as the Deserts of the UAE, and working on sites where the
temperature exceeds 75° F, requires planning and preparation to assure the safety of the men and
resources involved in the activity.
Complacency while working in the desert, and not appreciating the effects of excessive heat on sites
can lead to serious problems.
It is the management’s responsibility to ensure that the appropriate resources and training are in place
before sending his workforce into remote areas, and working in high temperatures.
DEFINITIONS
remote locations
A remote work site e.g. (working in the desert), that requires all resources brought in to complete the
activity safely.
high temperature
When temperature on any site in any location, exceeds 210 Celcius (750Farenheit)

Ministerial Order No. 32 (year 1982) Articles 5 & 7

ADM/H&S/Pt 2 01 March 2005 WORKING IN HIGH TEMPERATURE AND REMOTE LOCATIONS 1 of 7
PART TWO
2.1 DRIVING TO REMOTE SITES

• make sure of the location of the site and how to get there, if not take someone who does.
• allow plenty of time to make the journey.
2.1.1 check your vehicle

• oil pressure. • radiator level.
• tire pressure and condition, including • petrol tank level.

the spare.
• battery.
2.1.2 ensure the availability of the following

• drinking water. • shovel
• tool kit, jack and jack handle. • block of wood for the jack.
• owners manual. • mobile phone or two-way radio.
• tire pressure gauge.
2.1.3 supplies required

• warm clothing. • fluorescent marking strips.
• food. • flares and smoke canisters.
• toilet roll • 10 litres of water per man.
• sunshade (space blanket).
2.1.4 checking out procedure

• a plan of your route, be specific. • the name of the driver and all
passengers.
• your time of departure.
• remember to book in on your arrival and
• your time of arrival.
call departure point to confirm your
• type, colour and vehicle number. arrival.

PART TWO
2.1.5 break down or lost

• never leave the vehicle. • drink water as you require it, do not
save it for later.
• call for help.
• keep in contact with base site if possible,
• get comfortable and wait for help to
use high ground.
come to you.
• keep calm and rest as much as possible.
• set up sunshade.
• release a flare and smoke canister if you
• layout marking strip on high ground.
hear an approaching vehicle or aircraft.
2.2 WEATHER
2.2.1 dust storm
• slow down immediately and get off the highway
• turn your lights off
• stay in your vehicle and wait until it is all over
2.2.2 flash flood

• monitor road and weather reports before
travelling
• flash floods can fill low spots to dangerous levels

very quickly
• do not drive into water on the road if you can’t

tell how deep it is

PART TWO
2.3 INSECT, SPIDERS AND SNAKES

2.3.1 bark scorpion
• this is the small light – coloured one (a little over 2 inches fully
grown).
• a sting will be very painful to touch and commonly causes

numbness around the area.
• allergic sensivity may result in swelling of the tongue and

difficulty in breathing. If so, you should get emergency medical
assistance.
2.3.2 black widow spider

• symptoms may include muscle cramps, nausea, vomiting,
headache and hypertension.
2.3.3 bees, wasps, ants and other bugs

• Any of these may result in itching, welts, nausea,
headache, and in more severe reactions, difficulty in
breathing.
2.3.4 general recommendations for avoiding insect danger

• never put your hands or feet anyplace you cannot see.
• shake out all clothes and shoes before reaching into them.
• never go barefoot.
• do not wear perfume or bright clothes in the desert.
2.3.5 general treatment

Since you may not know what bit you, the following are a few things you can do that are
generally recommended for most of the above insect stings:-
• wash the affected area with soap and water.
• apply ice, using a layer of cloth between it and the skin (no longer than 10 minutes at a
time).
• elevate the area if possible.
• seek medical attention as soon as possible.
If you have not had a Tetanus booster in the past 10 years, you should get one within 72 hours
following the sting.

PART TWO
2.3.6 snakes
Snakes are best avoided by never putting
your hands or feet where you can’t see.
If you should sustain a snake bite, keep as

quiet as possible and get emergency medical
aid immediately.
2.4 EFFECT OF HEAT WHILST WORKING ON SITE
The two main effects are called heat exhaustion and heat stroke. They are quite different and
must be recognised since the treatment of the two conditions differs.
Heat exhaustion can be compared to a faulty radiator and heat stroke can be compared to a
breakdown of the thermostat.
2.4.1 heat exhaustion

This is caused by failure of the body’s cooling process due to a lack of water and salt caused
either by excessive sweating or insufficient intake.
look for
• complaints of tiredness, drowsiness, • there may be a feeling of sickness or

thirst, dryness of the throat, cramps and actual vomiting.
headache.
• sweating still occurs.
• a decrease in the amount of urine
• a tendency to faint.
produced.
• the temperature may be normal or

slightly raised.
treatment
• replace fluids, large quantities of water or isotonic saline (1/4 teaspoon of salt in 1 litre
of water.
• if the patient is vomiting give water as above and seek medical treatment immediately,
as intravenous fluid replacement may be required.

PART TWO
2.4.2 heat stroke

This is caused by a breakdown or overload of the body’s heat regulating mechanism as a
result of an excessive build up of heat in the body due to a high surrounding temperature
and/or the production of excessive heat by muscular exercise.
look for
• a sudden dramatic rise in body temperature above 40 o c.
• the cessation of sweating.
• the patient will feel very hot and dry.
• there may be disorientation, struggling or convulsions or unconsciousness.
treatment
• immediate cooling of the body is essential to prevent death.
• remove patient to a cool environment.
• wrap in wet sheets and/or sponge down with cold water. Immerse in cold water bath if
possible until temperature is down to 39oc, at which time cooling should be stopped to
avoid shock.
• seek medical attention as soon as possible.
2.5 PREVENTION OF HEAT RELATED CONDITIONS

• drink enough water to replace sweat loss. This may be from 5 litres to 10 litres per day
during summer months.
• take sufficient salt (the best way is with food).
• avoid alcohol intake before or during work.
• eat sparingly during the day.
• avoid exposure to the sun in the heat of the day, if possible arrange work during the
cooler hours.
• while working outside prepare shade over the task area if possible.
• wear light, loose clothing a hat and sunglasses.
• avoid overexposure to the direct rays of the sun.
• if stranded in the desert, take steps to maintain good fluid intake until rescued. Prepare
shade and stay with your vehicle. Reduce exercise.
• move workers to activities in shaded areas in shifts to prevent a build up of body heat.
Alternate heavy and light work activities.

PART TWO
2.6 VEHICLES, HEAVY EQUIPMENT AND PLANT

• keep equipment fluids up by regular inspections and checks.
• clean cab areas of rags and inflammable materials.
• keep a fire extinguisher in the cab of all equipment.
• prepare shade for the cab of equipment so as not to hinder the operator’s field of vision.
• park equipment in the shade whenever possible.
• inspect heavy equipment electrical system’s regularly.
• equipment and operators in remote areas of the site should be checked every 3 hours
min.
2.7 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT

• labourer’s in the field should be provided with light, loose coveralls.
• sunglasses and helmets to prevent direct exposure to the sun.
• gloves to prevent damage to hands when handling tools or equipment that has been
sitting in the sun.
• coolers and shade tents set-up at work activity areas.

SECTION 3
NOISE AT WORK
INTRODUCTION 1
3.1 WHAT IS NOISE 2

3.2 HEALTH HAZARDS ASSOCIATED WITH NOISE 2
3.3 ESTABLISHING NOISE LEVELS 3
3.4 NOISE LEVELS AT PLANNING STAGE 4
3.5 REDUCING NOISE LEVELS 4
3.6 RECOMMENDED MAXIMUM EXPOSURE WITH PROTECTION 6
3.7 TYPICAL SOUND LEVELS OF THE MOST POPULAR
CONSTRUCTION AND PILING EQUIPMENT 6
SECTION 3
PART TWO
SECTION 3
NOISE
INTRODUCTION
Safety in the building industry has a high priority, however, health hazards are often less understood.
Many causes of occupational ill-health, including noise, are recognised by industry but can be difficult
to manage because there is often a long latency period before the disease or effect develops and
susceptibility varies.
Strategies for controlling occupational health risks are on the whole led by legislation and are seen as
requiring time and resources to develop and as not producing immediate direct cost benefits, for
example audiometry
Little wonder then that difficulty is often experienced by:

• designers (when taking into account health risks in the design and specifications)
• consultants (in highlighting health risks in the pre-tender health and safety plan)
• contractors (in determining when and at what level, health protection should be provided to their
employees)
• employees (in being aware of health risks and in using correctly the controls put in place or issued
to them for their protection)

Ministerial Order No.32 Year 1982 - Article (1)
Ministerial Order No.32 Year 1982 - Article (5) d
Ministerial Order No.32 Year 1982 - Article (15)

ADM/H&S/Pt 2 01 March 2005 NOISE AT WORK 1 of 7
PART TWO
3.1 WHAT IS NOISE?

Noise is usually defined as unwanted sound. But strictly noise and sound are the same.
noise can:
• be a nuisance, resulting in disturbance and loss of enjoyment of life, loss of sleep and
fatigue
• it can distract attention and concentration, mask audible warning signals or interfere with
work, thereby being a factor in workplace accidents; and
• result in hearing impairment.
The danger levels for noise are identified as being, 85dBA and 90dBA. At 85dBA which is
known as the first action level, employees will probably have to shout to be heard at a
distance of 2m away from the person they are talking to, and must be provided with hearing
protection at their request.
At the second action level which is 90dBA or above, employees will probably have to shout
to be heard at a distance of 1 m away from the person they are talking to. The exposure of
employees to noise must be reduced as far as reasonably practicable, without the use of
hearing protection. If it cannot be reduced below this level then hearing protection must be
provided and reasonable steps taken to ensure that it is used; employees have a duty to use
hearing protection in such circumstances.
3.2 HEALTH HAZARDS ASSOCIATED WITH NOISE

The human ear is a delicate organ which is highly susceptible to damage, and this can
frequently be induced by the working environment,
There are two types of hearing loss associated with damage to the receptive hairs,
temporary and permanent threshold shift.
Temporary threshold shift is a temporary dullness in hearing after exposure to loud noises.
Hearing will subsequently recover, the time taken depends on factors such as loudness and
duration of the noise. If hearing does not fully recover after 48 hours, the level of hearing
loss that remains can be considered permanent.
There are two categories of ‘permanent threshold shift’
noise induced or occupational deafness, which results when the sufferer has been
regularly exposed to noise over a long period of time. Normally, hearing loss will be similar in
both ears and increase with continued exposure to the noise.
acoustic trauma, occurring with exposure to a very high sound level over a short period of
time, in some cases resulting in perforation of the eardrum. Once permanent damage has
occurred to the inner ear, it is irreversible.

PART TWO
3.3 ESTABLISHING NOISE LEVELS

3.3.1 unit of measurement
• the unit of measurement for sound levels is the
decibel dB.
• this scale is logarithmic which means that 90dB is

ten times the intensity of 80 dB and a hundred
times the intensity of 70dB.
• an increase of 3dB doubles the sound intensity, so

that 87dB is twice as noisy as 84dB.
• sound level meters, used for measuring noise

levels have standard characteristics built into them,
which attenuate, or emphasis signals at different
frequencies, this is known as 'frequency weighting'.
• an instrument with a weighting corresponding to

the frequency response of the human ear (known
Fig. 1- Examples of Sound Level Meters
as an ‘A’ weighted scale) is commonly used on
Measuring “A” weighted scale.
building sites to measure noise from the dB(A).
(see Fig.1)
• noise meters vary considerably depending on type, size and cost, but even the
inexpensive range will give a reasonable indication of sound levels being produced. Most
instruments can be switched to 'slow' response which dampens the oscillation of the
reading needle to allow easier reading.
3.3.2 surveys
• noise surveys should only be carried out by a person who has received adequate training
in noise measurement techniques.
• surveys are advisable when it is necessary to shout in order to be audible to a person

about one metre away.
• if conversation would be difficult in the nearest building (with windows closed) noise
levels are probably excessive.
• when the sound level at a building facade is to be estimated, an addition of 3dB(A)

should be allowed for reflection.
• noise levels may be irregular or steady.
• a reasonably steady sound level is where the level fluctuates through a total of less than
8dB(A) on a slow response scale.

PART TWO
3.3.3 maximum exposure

• recommended maximum exposure to equivalent continuous sound levels without
protection are listed (see table in section 24.6).
• these are minimum requirements and everything possible should be done to improve on
them and reduce exposure to noise.
3.4 NOISE LEVELS AT THE PLANNING STAGE

Attention should be given at the planning stage to the following factors:
• design of project, and of processes and equipment involved.
• alternative methods and processes.
• phasing of operations (especially if a number of contractors are working on site).
• municipality requirements.
• location of site, or sites if work involves changing locations.
• noise levels likely to be produced.
• site layout (i.e. siting of access points, batching plants etc.)
• hours of working.
• provision for controlling noise on site.
• disturbance of nearby residents (if this is likely, the situation and measures to be taken to
reduce noise should be explained to persons likely to be affected).
Note: Failure to plan the control of noise may lead to delay and increased cost later.
3.5 REDUCING NOISE LEVELS

Where noise cannot be avoided, it may be reduced by:
• siting or location of noise source (i.e. static plant)
• control of noise at source e.g. acoustic hoods/covers
• equipping individual with ear protectors
• a combination of these methods will often be necessary

PART TWO
3.5.1 siting or location

• removing source of noise - i.e. static plant, loading/unloading areas - to a distance
whenever possible
• orientating plant to direct noise away from living/working zones
• placing site buildings, stores, etc between noise source and noise sensitive areas.
• screening source with a barrier, wall, acoustic screen, spoil heap or locating source
behind partly completed buildings.
• the effectiveness of a noise barrier will depend on its dimensions, its position relative to
the source and the listener, and the material used for the barrier.
• care must be taken to ensure barriers do not, by reflecting sound, transfer the nuisance
from one sensitive area to another.
3.5.2 control of noise at source

• design and manufacture of equipment.
• mufflers, acoustic shields and exhaust silencers

for equipment. (see Figs. 2&3)
• use of alternative, less noisy equipment or Fig.2 - Acoustic Gaskets fitted

methods. to a compressor.
• acoustic screens and sheds enclosing operator.
• regular inspection and maintenance.
• absorbent mountings to reduce noise

transmission through structures.
Fig.3 - Soundproofing foam

3.5.3 ear protectors used for wall insulation.
• all practicable methods should be used to reduce noise

levels, but where these remain excessive and harmful,
ear protectors must be worn. Ear protectors are not a
substitute for other methods of noise control.
• individuals may be reluctant to wear protection, and

personnel at risk should be made aware of the damage
caused to hearing by excessive noise levels, which can
result in permanent less of hearing.
Fig.4 - Standard pair of Ear protectors.

PART TWO
3.6 RECOMMENDED MAXIMUM EXPOSURE WITHOUT PROTECTION
Average Noise Level dB (A) Maximum Exposure in one working day
90 8 hours
93 4 hours
96 2 hours
99 1 hour
102 30 minutes
105 15 minutes
108 7 1/2 minutes
111 3 3/4 minutes
Notes:
• this is the noise level at the ear and not at the source
• the table above is based on the logramithic calculation where an increase of 3 dB (A) is
regarded as doubling the noise level or halving the exposure time.
3.7 TYPICAL SOUND LEVELS OF THE MOST POPULAR CONSTRUCTION

AND PILING EQUIPMENT
Sound Level dB (A) General Construction Equipment Piling Equipment

95 Hand tools - Electric
100 Hand tools - Air
101 Fork lifts
102 Hammer Drill
103 Dumpers
104 Concrete Mixer
105 Hand Tools
106 Tower Cranes
107 Circular Saw Bench
108 Trucks
109 Excavators 6Ton Drop hammer (Cased Piles)
110 Crawler Cranes
111 Ready Mix
112 Heavy Lorries
113 Hoists - Diesel
114 Loading Shovel
115 Rock Drill

PART TWO
Sound Level dB (A) General Construction Equipment Piling Equipment

116 Batching Plant Trench Hammer (Sheet Piles)
117 Generators Rotary Bored Piles
118 Loaders Screened Drop Hammer (Sheet Piles)
119 Cranes Lorry mounted
120 Compressors - Compactors Impact Boring (Driving Case Method)
121 Bulldozer - Graders 2 ton drop hammer (precast concrete
piles)
125 Vibration System (sheet piles)
126 Resonant sheet 'H" Section
128 Single Acting Air Hammer (precast
Concrete)
136 Diesel Hammer (sheet piles)
138 Double acting air hammer (sheet
piles)
Notes:
• sound levels are for guidance only and are taken at source.
• for accurate measurement of site noise - a survey is necessary.
• information should be sought from plant hire company regarding machines on site.
• noise level emitted from the machines will be affected by the competence of the operator
and the quality of maintenance.

SECTION 4
OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH
INTRODUCTION 1
4.1 HEALTH HAZARDS 2

4.2 TOXICITY OF SUBSTANCES 2
4.3 ROUTES OF ENTRY 3
4.4 MINSTRIAL DECISON NO. (37/2) YEAR 1982 – 4
MEDICAL CARE WHICH THE EMPLOYER IS
OBLIGED TO PROVIDE TO HIS WORKERS.
SECTION 4
PART TWO
SECTION 4
OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH
INTRODUCTION
Occupational health anticipates and prevents health problems which are caused by the work which
people do. In some circumstances the work may aggravate pre-existing medical condition and
stopping this is also the role of occupational health.
Health hazards often reveal their effects on the human body only after the passage of time; many have
cumulative effects, and in some cases the way this happens is not fully understood.
Because the effects are often not immediately apparent, it can be difficult to understand and persuade
others that there is a need for caution and control.
Good occupational hygiene practice encompasses the following ideas:-
• recognition of the hazard or potential hazard
• quantification of the extend of the hazard - usually by measuring physical/chemical factors and
their duration, and relating them to known or required standards.
• assessment of risk of actual conditions of use, storage, transport and disposal.
• control of exposure to the hazard through design, engineering, working systems, the use of
personal protective equipment and biological monitoring.
• monitoring change in the hazard by means of audits or other measurement techniques, including
periodic re-evaluation of work conditions and systems.

Ministerial Decision No. (37/2) Year 1982 re-
The Medical - Care which the Employer is Obliged to Provide to his Workers.

ADM/H&S/Pt 2 01 March 2005 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH 1 of 7
PART TWO
4.1 HEALTH HAZARDS

Health hazards can be divided into four broad categories: physical, chemical, biological and
ergonomic. Examples of the categories are:
• physical — air pressure, heat, dampness, noise, radiant energy, electric shock
• chemical — exposure to toxic materials such as dusts, fumes and gases
• biological — infection, e.g. tetanus, hepatitis and legionnaire’s disease
• ergonomic — work conditions, stress, man-machine interaction
4.2 TOXICITY OF SUBSTANCES

Toxicity is the ability of a substance to produce injury once it reaches a site in or on the body.
The degree of harmful effect which a substance can have depends not only on its inherent
harmful properties, but also on the route and the speed of entry into the body.
Substances may cause health hazards from a single exposure, even for a short time (acute
effect) or after prolonged or repeated exposure (chronic effect). The substance may affect
the body at the point of contact, when it is known as a local agent, or at some other point,
when it is described as a systemic agent.
Absorption is said to occur only when a material has gained access to the bloodstream and
may consequently be carried to all parts of the body.
4.2.1 what makes substances toxic?

The effect a substance will have on the body cannot always be predicted with accuracy, or
explained solely on the basis of physical and chemical laws. The influence of the following
factors combines to produce the effective dose:
• quantity or concentration of the substance
• the duration of exposure
• the physical state of the material, e.g. particle size
• its affinity for human tissue
• its solubility in human tissue fluids
• the sensitivity to attack of human tissue or organs
4.2.2 long and short-term exposure

Substances which are toxic can have a toxic effect on the body after only one single, short
exposure. In other circumstances, repeated exposure to small concentrations may give rise
to an effect. A toxic effect related to an immediate response after a single exposure is called
an acute effect. Effects which result after prolonged (hours or days or much longer) are
known as chronic effects. Chronic implies repeated doses or exposures at low levels: they

PART TWO
generally have delayed effects and are often due to unrecognised conditions which are
therefore permitted to persist.
4.3 ROUTES OF ENTRY

Substances harmful to the body may enter it by three main routes.
These are:
Absorption - through the skin, including entry through cuts and abrasions, and the
conjunctiva of the eye. Organic solvents are able to penetrate the skin, as a result of
accidental exposure to them or by washing. Tetraethyl, lead and toluene are examples.
Ingestion - through the mouth, which is generally considered to be a rare method of

contracting industrial disease. However, the action of the main defence mechanisms
protecting the lungs rejects particles and pushes them towards the mouth, and an estimated
50 per cent of the particles deposited in the upper respiratory tract and 12.5 per cent from
the lower passages are eventually swallowed.
Inhalation - the most important route of entry, which can allow direct attacks against lung
tissue which bypass other defences such as those of the liver. The lungs are very efficient in
transferring substances into the body from the outside environment, and this is the way
inside for 90 per cent of industrial poisons.
4.3.1 results of entry

Having gained entry into the body, substances can have the following effects:
Cause diseases of the skin such as:
Non-infective dermatitis - an inflammation of the skin especially on hands, wrists and

forearms. This can be prevented by health screening, good personal hygiene, use of barrier
creams and/or protective clothing.
Scrotal cancer - produced by rubbing contact with workers’ clothing impregnated with a
carcinogen such as mineral oil, in close contact with the scrotum. This can be prevented by
substitution of the original substance, by use of splash guards, and by provision of clean
clothing and washing facilities for soiled work clothing.
Cause diseases of the respiratory system such as:
Pneumoconiosis - resulting from exposure to dust which deposits on the lung, such as
metal dust and man-made mineral fibre. Other examples of these fibroses of the lungs are
silicosis due to the inhalation of free silica, and asbestosis from exposure to asbestos fibres.
Humidifier fever — giving influenza-like symptoms and resulting from contaminated
humidifying systems.
Legionnaire’s disease - from exposure to legionella bacteria.
Cause cancer and birth defects - by encouraging cells to undergo fundamental changes by
altering the genetic material within the cell. Substances which can do this are carcinogens,

PART TWO
which cause or promote the development of unwanted cells as cancer.
Examples are asbestos, mineral oil, hardwood dusts and arsenic. Teratogens cause birth
defects by altering genetic material in cells in the reproductive organs, and cause abnormal
development of the embryo. Examples are organic mercury and lead compounds. Mutagens
trigger changes affecting future generations.
Cause asphyxiation - by excluding oxygen or by direct toxic action. Carbon monoxide does
this by competing successfully with oxygen for transport in the red cells in the blood.
Cause central nervous system disorders - by acting on brain tissue or other organs, as in
the case of alcohol eventually causing blindness.
Cause damage to specific organs - such as kidneys and liver. An example is vinyl chloride
monomer (VCM).
Cause blood poisoning - and producing abnormalities in the blood, as in benzene

poisoning, where anaemia or leukaemia is the result.
4.4 MINSTRIAL DECISON NO. (37/2) YEAR 1982 RE MEDICAL - CARE

WHICH THE EMPLOYER IS OBLIGED TO PROVIDE TO HIS WORKERS.
The Minister of Labour and Social Affairs,
After taking cognizance of the Federal Law No (I) for the year 1972 in respect of the
jurisdiction of Ministries and power of and the laws amending thereto. And, the Federal Law
for the years 1980 in respect of the Regulation of Labour Relations and on the submission of
the Ministry’s undersecretary.
Is hereby decided:
Article (1)
The obligation of an employer for the medical treatment of workers shall be in accordance
with the medical care standards set forth in the provisions of this decision and within the
limits of available treatment in the State.
Article (2)
An employer whose the number of employees in his establishment in not more than fifty in
one place or within an area the radius of which is twenty kilometres, shall provide at the work
place in his establishment with first aid kits.
Article (3)
An employer whose the number of his workers in one place or within an area the radius of
which is twenty kilometres, is exceeding fifty workers and less than two hundred, and in

PART TWO
addition to his obligation to provide first aid kits, must employ; nurse holding a nursing
certificate recognised by the Ministry o Health who shall be entrusted with rendering first aid
treatment The employer shall also appoint a doctor to treat workers at the place prepared by
him for that purpose and shall give then medicines required, all free of charge.
And if treatment requires a specialist doctor, the establishment doctor shall recommend in
writing for the treatment of the worker by a specialist provided that in such case. Treatment
expenses shall equally be shared by both the employer and the worker.
Article (4)
An employer whose employees are two hundred workers or more in one place or within an
area the radius of which is twenty kilometers shall provide the treatment facilities stipulated in
Article (2) and (3) of this decision in addition to his obligation to provide all other treatment
facilities in cases the treatment of which require specialist doctors, or undergo surgical
operations or otherwise, as well as necessary medicines, all of which are at the expense of
the employer.
If the worker is treated in a hospital or a governmental or private or charity clinic, the

employer shall pay to such hospital or clinic the expenses of treatment, medicines and the
admission fees of the worker as determined by the Ministry of Health for hospitals and
governmental clinics or according to the rates fixed by the management of such hospital, or
private clinic.
Article (5)
The doctor of an establishment which the number of its’ workers is two hundreds or more
must treat any disease in the normal way and dispense necessary medicines.
He shall refer the worker to a specialist doctor or to the hospital in cases which require so. In
such case the worker may not ask that his treatment shall he by a specialist doctor, or
undergoes a surgical operation or be treated at a hospital except upon the decision of the
establishment doctor or on the basis of a certificate issued by specialist and approved by the
medical administration or the concerned medical zone within which jurisdiction the
establishment is situated.
The worker may not ask for treatment by specialist doctors other than those determined by
the employer, nor in hospital not been agreed.
Article (6)
The place assigned for the workers clinic and for their treatment shall be as near as possible
from the work place and shall have adequate ventilation, lighting and healthily conditions;
and it shall be equipped with necessary equipments and devices.

PART TWO
Article (7)
The expenses of transportation of workers to the clinic shall be paid by the employer and at
the times specified for treatment or medical check-up.
However, the worker shall not be entitled to such expenses unless he complies with the
instructions of the employer as to the times specified for treatment or medical examination at
the clinic except in emergencies or urgent cases.
The employer may designate means of transportation for transporting patients and injured
workers, and in such a case the worker may not refuse such transportation means if they are
suitable and shall not be entitled to transportation expenses if he refuses to use the
transportation means without justifiable reason.
Article (8)
If there is a fund in the establishment or a scheme providing medical services in which the
worker is contributing which gives the right to receive medical treatment for himself and the
members of his family, the employer shall reduce the subscription fees of the worker in such
fund or scheme to an amount equal to the expenses of his treatment which the employer
bears, pursuant to the provisions of this decision. be pu
shall t
Article (9)
An employer who employs fifty workers or more must display at the main gates used by
workers to enter to the workplace, the following information:
• The location of workers clinic.
• Days, and working hours of such clinic.

• Address of the hospital, and the specialist doctors who are entrusted to treat workers, and
timings of such treatment if the employer is bound to provide according to the provisions
of this decision.
Inspectors of the labour inspection division at the Ministry may instruct to display all the
foregoing information or some of them, as the case may be, at another place or suitable
places whenever they deem it necessary.
Information must be displayed in an easy a manner for workers to see.
Article (10)
Any employer who is employing workers from out of the country must be sure of their
physical fitness, through a certified medical certificate proving that which must be
authenticated by the official concerned authorities.
In all cases, the employer must be sure of the physical fitness of the worker employed by
him before he joins work after subjecting him to medical examination; the result of which
must be included in a written report approved by the competent authority at the Ministry.

PART TWO
Article (11)
Any employer must prepare for every worker employed by him a medical file including the
following:
• The result of medical examination of the worker at the time he joined work.
• The result of medical check-up, and the prescribed treatment whenever the worker
reports for medical check-up and any date thereof.
• The Results of medical analysis, or treatment and X-ray, if any.
• Result of medical examination to know whether the worker is suffering from chest or
dermatological disease.
• The period for which the worker was absent because of illness provided that every (4)
days of absence due to illness or accidents shall be shown separately.
Such files shall be confidential, and shall not be seen except by the treating doctor, or the
employer or who represents him.
Article (12)
An employer who employs fifty workers or more must send a list of two copies every three
months to the concerned labour department showing the number of workers who received
medical treatment at the expense of the employer, the nature ol their diseases and the days
of absence because of illness.
Article (13)
Compliance with the provisions of this decision shall not prejudice nor nullify any other
regulations related to medical treatment in the establishment if such regulations achieve
better medical care than those set forth herein.
Article (14)
This decision shall be published in the official gazette and shall come into force from the date
of its publication.
Seif Al Jarwan - Minister of Labour and Social Affairs

SECTION 5
SUBSTANCES
HAZARDOUS TO HEALTH
INTRODUCTION 1
DEFINITION & CLASSIFICATION
5.1 SUBSTANCES HARMFUL BY INHALATION 2

5.2 SUBSTANCES HARMFUL BY INGESTION 4
5.3 PENETRATION HAZARDS 4
5.4 HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE CONTROL 5
SECTION 5
PART TWO
SECTION 5
SUBSTANCES
HAZARDOUS TO HEALTH
INTRODUCTION
Hazardous substances are considered to be chemical materials and products which are used every
day for a variety of purposes, many of which are dangerous if not handled correctly, majority are toxic,
corrosive, flammable, oxidising or irritants and all pose a risk to workers, the public, and the
environment.
There are four routes by which chemical substances may enter the body and cause harm, inhalation,
ingestion, penetration and skin absorption, but the one by which building site workers are more at risk
is that of inhalation, and this section, in the main, gives priority to this.

Chemicals are defined and classified according to type of hazard:
Class I Explosives
Class 2 Gases (flammable, non-flammable compressed gas oxidising gas and poisoning gas)
Class 3 Flammable liquids
Class 4 Flammable solids (spontaneously combust - dangerous on wetting)
Class 5 Oxidising agents & organic materials (Peroxides)
Class 6 Poisons & Infectious substances
Class 7 Radioactive substances
Class 8 Corrosives
MAIN APPLICABLE UAE LEGISLATION

Ministerial Order No. (32) For the Year of 1982. Article 6, 9, 18 & 23

ADM/H&S/Pt 2 01 March 2005 SUBSTANCES HAZARDOUS TO HEALTH 1 of 5
PART TWO
5.1 SUBSTANCES HARMFUL BY INHALATION

When material in the air is breathed in it can consist of dust, vapour, gas, fumes or mist. It
may be mildly irritant or be highly poisonous.
The material may lodge in the mouth, nose or throat or be comprised of small enough
particles to penetrate the deep lung. It may be cleared from the respiratory tract by the
body’s natural mechanisms or may lodge in the lungs, or it may be absorbed by the body
and transported in the blood to other organs.
Solvent vapours, welding fumes, asbestos, legionella and silica are all inhalation toxins or
hazards.
5.1.1 dust, fumes and gasses

Some dusts are directly composed of toxic materials, such as silica or hardwood. Dusty
conditions are common in construction, especially on dry, windy sites and where there is
blasting, excavation, batching, plastering, crushing or demolition.
Where possible, dust inhibiting measures, including dampening of floors and surfaces,
vacuum cleaning and exhaust ventilation of power tools should be used. Some materials,
particularly metals and metal coatings, may be hazardous as dusts from cutting or grinding,
or as fumes when welding or gas cutting is in operation.
The fumes to which construction workers are typically exposed are related to hot work,
either welding or cutting. The standards of control, in order to prevent lead poisoning, metal
fume fever, or ill-health arising from inhaling paint fumes when paint burning therefore relate
to the materials made airborne in such processes.
Typical dangerous dusts fumes and gasses encountered in the Building and Construction
Industry are tabled below:
Substance/Hazard Main Risk Main Precautions Required
DUST
ASBESTOS Asbestosis: Chronic Industrial Lung • dampen asbestos during cutting/sawing

disease. operations.
Mesothelioma: Serious form of Lung • Wear appropriate R.P.E.
Cancer.
• exhaust ventilation
CADIUM (DUST OR FUMES) Cadium Poisoning, Long Term – • personal hygiene
• no eating, drinking or smoking on the job
Emphysema & Kidney Damage.
• RPE may be necessary.
• adequate ventilation (where appropriate
HARDWOOD DUST Dermatitis and Asthma • extraction equipment should be fitted to
machines
• suitable gloves where the wood is a
dermatitic agent

PART TWO

• total enclosure, where practicable
LEAD (DUST OR FUMES) Lead poisoning, anemia and systemic • protective clothing which does not hold
dust
poisoning
• good personal hygiene and welfare
facilities (including showers, where
necessary)
Silicosis, Breathing Difficulties leading • no eating, drinking or smoking on the job
SILICA and QUARTZ DUST eventually to respiratory disablement. • where appropriate, the use of wet
methods
• total enclosure
• air-fed RPE
• impervious clothing
• segregation of other workers
• where appropriate, the use of wet
CEMENT DUST Breathing Difficulties leading eventually to
methods
respiratory disablement.
• respiratory protection
FUMES
• ventilation at source
WELDING & CUTTING Metal fume fever: Flu-like illness. • respiratory protection
• personal hygiene
FUMES
GASES, VAPOURS AND MISTS

• high standard of ventilation, especially in
CO poisoning; Drowsinness; Loss of
CARBON MONOXIDE (CO) excavations and confined spaces
Muscular Control; Vomiting; Unconscious
• controlled entry (e.g. by a permit to work)
(Toxic Gas) and Death.
• removal of source of CO from confined
spaces
• forced ventilation and extraction,
CARBON DIOXIDE (CO2) Being heavier than Displaces Oxygen in
(especially where working in confined
the Atmosphere, can lead to death due to
spaces)
(Asphyxiant Gas) lack of oxygen.
• air monitoring
• controlled entry by permit to work
• breathing apparatus and a rescue
procedure may be necessary
Low concentrations: Irritation of eyes, • forced ventilation and extraction
HYDROGEN SULPHIDE nose and throat, headaches and • air monitoring
dizziness. • controlled entry by permit to work
(H2S)
• breathing apparatus and a rescue system
(Highly Toxic and Flammable). High concentrations: rapid death from
may be necessary
respiratory paralysis.
• adequate high and low level ventilation in
GASES LIQUEFIED Asphyxiation due to depletion of Oxygen,
site huts
could also have a narcotic effect.
• some appliances may need individual
PETROLEUM GASES
flues
(LPG).
• high standard of ventilation
METHANE Asphyxiant gas-highly - flammable and • air monitoring
explosive.
may be necessary

PART TWO

Inhalation or absorption through the skin • adequate ventilation
SOLVENTS can cause impaired judgement and • air monitoring and the use of breathing
dizziness, followed by confusion, apparatus in confined spaces.
(commonly used in paints, sleepiness and unconsciousness. • rescue arrangements may be necessary.
paint strippers, varnishes, • avoid skin contact, wear impervious
mastics, glues, surface Other symptoms are irritation of the
respiratory tract and headache. The clothing where appropriate.
coatings, etc). • prevent accidental ingestion by good
inhalation risk is greatest when solvents
are used in confined spaces; skin contact hygiene;
can also lead to dermatitis. • forbid the carrying of cigarettes in work
areas.
5.2 SUBSTANCES HAZARDOUS BY INGESTION

The hazards of such substances are not always obvious, and poisoning still occurs on
construction sites. In most cases the hazard can be eliminated or significantly reduce by
using substitute materials which are safer or less toxic, and ensuring that employees are
aware of the hazard when:
• using poisonous substances.
• establishing and instructing employees on safe systems of use and handling of chemical
products.
• ensuring clear and correct labelling - especially when products are decanted from their
original containers, prohibition of drinking and smoking in areas when chemicals are
used, or on sites where general contamination may be present.
• actively promoting programmes of health education, with particular regard to the need for,
and value of good personal hygiene,
• provision of appropriate personal protection including gloves respirators, etc., and

actively ensuring the use of special equipment.
5.3 PENETRATION HAZARDS

Construction workers can be exposed to infection through micro-organisms which can give
rise to a number of specific conditions, e.g.:
5.3.1 tetanus (lock-jaw)

This is a serious disease resulting from wound infection by an organism which has specific
ability to form spores. They are found in animal intestines and excreta and are highly
resistant to destruction, even by heat or antiseptics. They are, therefore, ubiquitous although
the disease itself is more commonly encountered in tropical countries.

PART TWO
Construction workers are vulnerable when breaking new ground and particularly when
working on sites previously used for agriculture. Large, dirty, lacerated wounds are very
susceptible, but infection can result from minor pricks or puncture wounds, e.g. treading on a
nail.
Workers should be encouraged to arrange an appropriate course of immunisation with

Tetanus through their own doctor. This should be arranged by the employer where company
medical facilities exist.
5.4 HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE CONTROL

5.4.1 symbol signs
A systematic approach to the identification of potential chemical hazards is an essential
requirement
Signs shown below are an example of hazardous substance control safety signs
commonly used to identify hazards and mark areas to protect employees.

SECTION 5
SUBSTANCES
HAZARDOUS TO HEALTH
INTRODUCTION 1
5.1 SUBSTANCES HARMFUL BY INHALATION 2

5.2 SUBSTANCES HARMFUL BY INGESTION 4
5.3 PENETRATION HAZARDS 4
SECTION 5
PART TWO
SECTION 5
SUBSTANCES
HAZARDOUS TO HEALTH
INTRODUCTION
Hazardous substances are considered to be chemical materials and products which are used every
day for a variety of purposes, many of which are dangerous if not handled correctly, majority are toxic,
corrosive, flammable, oxidising or irritants and all pose a risk to workers, the public, and the
environment.
There are four routes by which chemical substances may enter the body and cause harm, inhalation,
ingestion, penetration and skin absorption, but the one by which building site workers are more at risk
is that of inhalation, and this section, in the main, gives priority to this.

Chemicals are defined and classified according to type of hazard:
Class I Explosives
Class 2 Gases (flammable, non-flammable compressed gas oxidising gas and poisoning gas)
Class 3 Flammable liquids
Class 4 Flammable solids (spontaneously combust - dangerous on wetting)
Class 5 Oxidising agents & organic materials (Peroxides)
Class 6 Poisons & Infectious substances
Class 7 Radioactive substances
Class 8 Corrosives

Ministerial Order No. (32) For the Year of 1982. Article 6, 9, 18 & 23

PART TWO
5.1 SUBSTANCES HARMFUL BY INHALATION

When material in the air is breathed in it can consist of dust, vapour, gas, fumes or mist. It
may be mildly irritant or be highly poisonous.
The material may lodge in the mouth, nose or throat or be comprised of small enough
particles to penetrate the deep lung. It may be cleared from the respiratory tract by the
body’s natural mechanisms or may lodge in the lungs, or it may be absorbed by the body
and transported in the blood to other organs.
Solvent vapours, welding fumes, asbestos, legionella and silica are all inhalation toxins or
hazards.
5.1.1 dust, fumes and gasses

Some dusts are directly composed of toxic materials, such as silica or hardwood. Dusty
conditions are common in construction, especially on dry, windy sites and where there is
blasting, excavation, batching, plastering, crushing or demolition.
Where possible, dust inhibiting measures, including dampening of floors and surfaces,
vacuum cleaning and exhaust ventilation of power tools should be used. Some materials,
particularly metals and metal coatings, may be hazardous as dusts from cutting or grinding,
or as fumes when welding or gas cutting is in operation.
The fumes to which construction workers are typically exposed are related to hot work,
either welding or cutting. The standards of control, in order to prevent lead poisoning, metal
fume fever, or ill-health arising from inhaling paint fumes when paint burning therefore relate
to the materials made airborne in such processes.
Typical dangerous dusts fumes and gasses encountered in the Building and Construction
Industry are tabled below:
DUST
ASBESTOS Asbestosis: Chronic Industrial Lung • dampen asbestos during cutting/sawing

disease. operations.
Mesothelioma: Serious form of Lung • Wear appropriate R.P.E.
Cancer.
CADIUM (DUST OR FUMES) Cadium Poisoning, Long Term – • personal hygiene
Emphysema & Kidney Damage.
• RPE may be necessary.
• adequate ventilation (where appropriate
HARDWOOD DUST Dermatitis and Asthma • extraction equipment should be fitted to
machines
• suitable gloves where the wood is a
dermatitic agent

PART TWO

• total enclosure, where practicable
LEAD (DUST OR FUMES) Lead poisoning, anemia and systemic • protective clothing which does not hold
dust
poisoning
• good personal hygiene and welfare
facilities (including showers, where
necessary)
Silicosis, Breathing Difficulties leading • no eating, drinking or smoking on the job
SILICA and QUARTZ DUST eventually to respiratory disablement. • where appropriate, the use of wet
methods
• total enclosure
• air-fed RPE
• impervious clothing
• segregation of other workers
• where appropriate, the use of wet
CEMENT DUST Breathing Difficulties leading eventually to
methods
respiratory disablement.
• respiratory protection
FUMES
• ventilation at source
WELDING & CUTTING Metal fume fever: Flu-like illness. • respiratory protection
• personal hygiene
FUMES
GASES, VAPOURS AND MISTS

• high standard of ventilation, especially in
CO poisoning; Drowsinness; Loss of
CARBON MONOXIDE (CO) excavations and confined spaces
Muscular Control; Vomiting; Unconscious
• controlled entry (e.g. by a permit to work)
(Toxic Gas) and Death.
• removal of source of CO from confined
spaces
• forced ventilation and extraction,
CARBON DIOXIDE (CO2) Being heavier than Displaces Oxygen in
(especially where working in confined
the Atmosphere, can lead to death due to
spaces)
(Asphyxiant Gas) lack of oxygen.
• air monitoring
• breathing apparatus and a rescue
procedure may be necessary
Low concentrations: Irritation of eyes, • forced ventilation and extraction
HYDROGEN SULPHIDE nose and throat, headaches and • air monitoring
dizziness. • controlled entry by permit to work
(H2S)
(Highly Toxic and Flammable). High concentrations: rapid death from
may be necessary
respiratory paralysis.
• adequate high and low level ventilation in
GASES LIQUEFIED Asphyxiation due to depletion of Oxygen,
site huts
could also have a narcotic effect.
• some appliances may need individual
PETROLEUM GASES
flues
(LPG).
• high standard of ventilation
METHANE Asphyxiant gas-highly - flammable and • air monitoring
explosive.
may be necessary

PART TWO

Inhalation or absorption through the skin • adequate ventilation
SOLVENTS can cause impaired judgement and • air monitoring and the use of breathing
dizziness, followed by confusion, apparatus in confined spaces.
(commonly used in paints, sleepiness and unconsciousness. • rescue arrangements may be necessary.
paint strippers, varnishes, • avoid skin contact, wear impervious
mastics, glues, surface Other symptoms are irritation of the
respiratory tract and headache. The clothing where appropriate.
coatings, etc). • prevent accidental ingestion by good
inhalation risk is greatest when solvents
are used in confined spaces; skin contact hygiene;
can also lead to dermatitis. • forbid the carrying of cigarettes in work
areas.
5.2 SUBSTANCES HAZARDOUS BY INGESTION

The hazards of such substances are not always obvious, and poisoning still occurs on
construction sites. In most cases the hazard can be eliminated or significantly reduce by
using substitute materials which are safer or less toxic, and ensuring that employees are
aware of the hazard when:
• using poisonous substances.
• establishing and instructing employees on safe systems of use and handling of chemical
products.
• ensuring clear and correct labelling - especially when products are decanted from their
original containers, prohibition of drinking and smoking in areas when chemicals are
used, or on sites where general contamination may be present.
• actively promoting programmes of health education, with particular regard to the need for,
and value of good personal hygiene,
• provision of appropriate personal protection including gloves respirators, etc., and

actively ensuring the use of special equipment.
5.3 PENETRATION HAZARDS

Construction workers can be exposed to infection through micro-organisms which can give
rise to a number of specific conditions, e.g.:
5.3.1 tetanus (lock-jaw)

This is a serious disease resulting from wound infection by an organism which has specific
ability to form spores. They are found in animal intestines and excreta and are highly
resistant to destruction, even by heat or antiseptics. They are, therefore, ubiquitous although
the disease itself is more commonly encountered in tropical countries.

PART TWO
Construction workers are vulnerable when breaking new ground and particularly when
working on sites previously used for agriculture. Large, dirty, lacerated wounds are very
susceptible, but infection can result from minor pricks or puncture wounds, e.g. treading on a
nail.
Workers should be encouraged to arrange an appropriate course of immunisation with

Tetanus through their own doctor. This should be arranged by the employer where company
medical facilities exist.

5.4.1 symbol signs
requirement
Signs shown below are an example of hazardous substance control safety signs
commonly used to identify hazards and mark areas to protect employees.

SECTION 6
OVERHEAD AND UNDERGROUND

SERVICES
INTRODUCTION 1
6.1 UNDERGROUND SERVICES 2

6.2 DIGGING – MECHANICAL OR MANUAL 5
6.3 PILING 6
6.4 GENERAL PRECAUTIONS 6
6.5 BACKFILLING 7
6.6 OVERHEAD SERVICES 7
SECTION 6
PART TWO
SECTION 6
OVERHEAD AND UNDERGROUND

SERVICES
INTRODUCTION
Live overhead lines have been responsible for a number of serious and fatal accidents on construction
sites when contact with the lines has been made by workmen or machines. The voltages may lie in
the range between 240 and 400,000 volts, and they all have lethal potential.
Underground services are, to a great extent, out of sight and out of mind until the time comes for
someone to dig a hole or start excavating. Accidental contacts with buried services such as electricity
cables and gas pipes may lead to serious injury or fatality.
The damage and injury can be avoided if the proper procedures outlined in this section are followed.

Ministerial Order No. (32) Year 1982 – Article (20)

ADM/H&S/Pt 2 01 March 2005 OVERHEAD / UNDERGROUND SERVICES 1 of 9
PART TWO
6.1 UNDERGROUND SERVICES

6.1.1 types of buried services
The most obvious examples of buried services are those used to carry gas, electricity, water,
sewerage, and telecommunications services.
There are many other types of buried services, often confined to specific locations, which
are not likely to be the subject of public knowledge at all, they include services associated
with:
• hydraulics process fluids,
• pneumatics,
• petroleum and fuel oils,
• highway authorities,
• street lighting,
• military authorities.
Work in the vicinity of oil & gas transmission pipelines, often requires special measures to be
taken and the oil & gas company will supply detailed procedures on request.
6.1.2 risks and cost of damage

The greatest risk of injury lies in contacting electricity cables. Some people are electrocuted,
but the majority suffer major burns from the explosive arcing of the damaged cable. (see
Fig.1)
Most injuries are caused to persons using pneumatic drills of jackhammers, ruptured gas
pipes can cause a leak, a fire, or an explosion.
The consequences of damaging water pipes

and telephone cables may be less immediately
evident, but are nonetheless serious, both in
terms of disruption and costs. The interruption
of services can create serious problems for
places critically dependent upon them, for
example, hospitals, and many people are likely
to be inconvenienced.
Fig.1 - This is what can happen when

you cut a live underground
electrical cable.

PART TWO
The cost of damage can be considerable. The new generation of fibre optic
telecommunication cables are very expensive - and an apparently simple break may mean
the replacement of two kilometre length, at a cost measured in thousands of dirhams.
Indirect costs, in some cases resulting from loss of production and disruption of business
activities, will be borne by all affected, including those whose negligence caused the
incident.
6.1.3 checking for buried services

Before any digging takes places, a check must be made with all public and private utilities
and the owner or occupier of the land for the existence of services in the proposed work
area, and, where applicable, a site clearance/no objection form received from the
department concerned.
The following are the main points to be considered:
• any service said to exist, should be clearly marked on the site plans.
• when looking at plans, it should be borne in mind that reference points may have been
moved, surfaces may have been re-graded, services moved without authority or consent,
and that not all service connections or private services are shown.
• plans must be interpreted with care; a pencil on a map may cover a width equivalent to a
metre on the ground.
• where appropriate the route, when established, should be identified with paint, tape or
markers - not steel spikes, which might penetrate a cable or pipe.
• a line on a plan does not mean a pipe or cable is located exactly in the position marked. It
only indicates that it is roughly in that location.
• the exact position will only be known when the buried service is found, as in many cases,
there is no indication above the ground that a buried service exists. They may be found
almost anywhere and at any depth from immediately beneath the surface of the
pavement, or tarmac, to 1.5 metres or more.
• indications that buried services do exist include the presence of lamp posts, illuminated
traffic signs, telephone boxes, concrete or steel manhole covers, hydrant and valve pit
covers, etc.
• small concrete indicator posts, usually on the verge, or plaques on walls have this
specific function. Indicator posts belonging to water authorities often give the size of the
pipe and its distance from the post.
• the absence of posts or covers, must not be taken as evidence that there are no buried
services. Access covers can be a substantial distance apart.

PART TWO
• cables or pipes may be laid loose in the ground, run in earthenware, concrete, metal,
asbestos or plastic ducts, or be buried in cement-bound sand, loose sand, fine backfill or
material dissimilar from the surrounding ground.
• plastic marker tape, tracer wire, boards, tiles or slabs may have been laid above the
service to indicate that there is something below. These may, however, have been
removed or damaged in the past; they are also liable to be laterally displaced by ground
water or movement and thus no longer indicate the true location of the service.
It is now becoming a widespread

practice for brightly coloured
polythene tape or expanded plastic
mesh, sometimes incorporating
metallic tracer wire, to be placed in
the backfill above the pipe or service.
A text on the tape usually identifies
the service below, when uncovered, Fig.2 - Example of Fig.3 - Example of
these tapes indicate the presence of a expanded brightly
plastic mesh coloured tape
pipe or cable before any damage is
incorporating a used to identify
done. metallic tracer underground
(see Figs. 2 & 3) wire. services.
Note: The absence of a tape should not be taken as evidence that there are no pipes or
cables at the location; it may simply mean that no marker tape was used.
6.1.4 use of cable and pipe locators

A wide range of instruments
is available for the detection
of buried services. Several
different principles may be
applied in the task of
detection, and an instrument
may incorporate more than
one of these like Hum
Detection, Radio Frequency,
Transmitter and Receiver,
Metal Detectors, etc. (see
Fig. 4)
Fig.4 - Typical examples of cable and pipe locators

commonly used to detect underground services

PART TWO
6.2 DIGGING - MECHANICAL OR MANUAL

Once the approximate location of a service has been identified using all available information
(including plans, marker posts, cable detection results etc). trial holes should be dug
carefully by hand to establish the exact location and depth of the service.
The following points should be considered prior to, and during digging operations:
• where two holes are dug at intervals, it should not be assumed that the service runs in a
straight line between them.
• mechanical excavators and power tools should not be used within 0.5 metres of the
indicated line of a service, unless prior agreement on a safe system of work has been
reached with the service owner.
• power tools may be used to break paved surfaces, but great care must be taken to avoid
over-penetration, since a service may have been laid at an unusually shallow depth,
especially in the vicinity of buildings or other services.
• power tools must never be used directly over the indicated line of a cable unless it has
been made dead or steps have been taken to prevent damage.
• excavations must be adequately supported, especially it more than 1.2 metres deep, or
dug in poor ground, at a location exposed to traffic vibration or near a building, or
embankment, etc.
• check with all utilities and land owners before commencing.
• assume presence of service when digging, even though nothing is shown on plans.
• detectors must be used, and close watch kept for signs or tapes, etc., indicating a buried
service.
• although there are recommended minimum depths for all services, they may be closer to
the surface than normal, especially in the vicinity of works, structures, or other services.
• markers such as plastic tape, tiles, slabs or battens may have been displaced, and not
indicate the exact location of the buried service.
• some electric cables, gas pipes and water pipes look alike. Ensure proper identification
before working on them.
• spades and shovels are safer than forks and pickaxes.
• careful use of spades and shovels enables services, which could easily be damaged by a
fork or a pickaxe forced into the ground, to be safely uncovered.
• rocks, stones, boulders, etc., should be carefully levered out.
• over-penetration of the ground or surface with hand-held power tools is a common cause
of accidents.

PART TWO
• if an excavator or digger is being used near any service, extra care must be taken in case
the service is damaged or broken.
• when possible, no one should be near the excavator or digger while it is digging.
• if the service is embedded in concrete or paving material, the utility or owner should de-
energise it or otherwise make it safe, or approve a safe system of work before it is broken
out.
• closed, capped, sealed, loose or pot ended services should always be assumed to be live
or charged, not dead or abandoned, until proven otherwise.
• follow the guidelines and advice issued by the electricity, gas, water and
telecommunication authorities.
6.3 PILING AND DRILLING

Piling, drilling, thrust boring, bar holing and augering must never be commenced until all the
necessary steps and precautions have been taken, and a safe system of work has been
devised and implemented. (see Pt 2 section 26) for further information on Piling.
Services shown or thought to be nearby should be exposed by hand digging to establish

their precise location.
6.4 GENERAL PRECAUTIONS

6.4.1 protection of services
Even if a service is exposed in the bottom of a trench or excavation, it should be protected
with suitable timber or other material to prevent damage; e.g.
• services across a trench or along a trench above the bottom should be supported by
slings or props, to avoid unnecessary stresses. In cases of doubt, advice should be
sought from utilities or the owner.
• cables and services must never be used as jacking or anchorage points, or as footholds
or climbing points.
• if a service pipe or cable needs to be moved to allow work to progress, the owner should
be consulted and advice sought.
6.4.2 reporting damage

Any damage to buried services must be reported to the owners. Minor damage to the sheath
of a cable or to a coating on a pipe can result in moisture penetration, corrosion and
subsequent failure. A cable pulled and stretched may result in a conductor or core broken
and an earthenware or concrete duct broken may prevent a service being installed.

PART TWO
6.4.3 gas pipe is fractured or starts leaking

• evacuate all personnel from area.
• enforce no smoking no naked lights.

where
• prevent approach by public or vehicles. applicable.
• inform gas authority immediately.
6.4.4 if an electricity cable is broken

• avoid contact with it.
• do not attempt to disentangle it from excavator or digger buckets, etc.
• jump clear of excavators or diggers - do not climb down.
• inform electricity authority.
• keep everyone clear.
6.4.5 underground telecommunication cables

• leave alone.
• Inform Etisalat
6.4.6 breakage of any other service pipe or cable

• leave alone.
• inform owner.
6.5 BACKFILLING
• surplus concrete, hard core, rock, rubble, flint, etc., must never be tipped onto a service
while backfilling a trench or hole, since it may result in damage.
• selected backfill material should be adequately settled and compacted, care being taken
to avoid mechanical shocks to the service pipe or cable.
• warning tapes, tiles, etc., should be placed above the service.
• when gas service pipes have been exposed, advice on backfill should be sought from the
gas companies.
6.6 OVERHEAD SERVICES

6.6.1 general

PART TWO
On sites the electricity supply will generally be obtained either from Electricity Department or
from site generators.
Overhead lines belonging to A.D.W.E.A. are subject to the requirements of their rules. High
voltage overhead lines are not normally insulated and comprise bare conductors mounted
on insulators on steel or wooden towers or poles.
Low and medium voltage lines may be insulated or uninsulated but, in either case, care is
necessary if hazards and accidents are to be avoided.
Where any electrically charged overhead cable or apparatus is liable to be a source of

danger to persons employed on the sites, all practicable precautions shall be taken to
prevent such danger by the provision of adequate and suitably placed barriers. (see Fig.5)
275 or 440KV 132 KV 33KV 11KV Low Voltage

Minimum Minimum
Clearance 7m Minimum Clearance 5.2m
Clearance 6.7m
Fig.5 - Showing the Minimum clearance required on both Low, Medium and High
Voltage Overhead Electricity Lines.
6.6.2 precautions against danger from overhead lines

sites where plant, e.g., mobile cranes, excavators, trucks may pass under overhead
lines
• where a roadway or passage is required under a line the crossing should be at right
angles to the line and be restricted to the smallest possible working width for the type of
plant using the roadway.
• this width should not exceed 10 metres.
• such crossings should be restricted to the smallest possible number and should be
fenced to give a clear indication of the roadway, and goalposts should be erected on both
sides of the overhead line to act both as gateways and height limits.
• the height and position of such goalposts will depend upon the voltage of the overhead
line and A.D.W.E.A. will advice on these points. (see Fig.6) below.

PART TWO
Traffic Passing Beneath Overhead Power Lines
6m Absolute minimum 10m Maximum
Advance
Warning Sign
Between 3 – 6m
Height to be specified by A.D.W.E.A.
Fig.6 - Showing various safe heights required for traffic to safely pass under Overhead Power Lines.
Note: If any work takes place after dark, notices and cross bar should be
illuminated.
• danger notices should be installed which give a clear

indication of the working height and instructions given to
plant drivers to lower crane jibs, to tip bodies of lorries,
etc., and to drive carefully.(see Fig.7)
Fig.7 - Showing type of approved sign used to

indicate presence of overhead lines.
6.6.3 sites where work will be done under lines

• additional precautions are necessary where work must be carried out under overhead
lines and in each case early consultation with A.D.W.E.A is necessary.
• A.D.W.E.A. will advise on safe working clearances and all plant, equipment or hand tools
to be used must be of such construction or be so restricted that these safe working limits
cannot be exceeded. In extreme cases it is usually possible for the Department to make
the line dead for certain periods of time so that work can proceed.

SECTION 7
ELECTRICITY AT WORK
INTRODUCTION 1
INTERNATIONAL STANDARDS
7.1 DUTIES 2
7.2 SUPPLIES 2
7.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE 5
7.4 PLUGS, SOCKET-OUTLETS, COUPLERS 6
7.5 EQUIPMENT EARTHING (PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS) RCD 7
7.6 SYSTEM VOLTAGE 8
7.7 CABLES 9
7.8 PLANT AND TOOLS 10
7.9 LIGHTING 11
SECTION 7
PART TWO
SECTION 7
ELECTRICITY AT WORK
INTRODUCTION
The use of electrical energy to assist in the construction process is extensive. The misuse or
malfunction of electrical equipment could have harmful effects on people and plant, but electricity is
perfectly safe if treated with respect.
This section is aimed to assist site managers, safety advisors and people in similar positions to satisfy
themselves that necessary steps are taken to ensure that electrical installations are safe.

Government of Abu Dhabi Water & Electricity Authority (ADWEA)
Regulations for Electrical Installation Works (1980)
BS 7671 : Requirements for electrical installations
(Formerly the IEE Wiring Regulations Sixteenth Edition)
BS 4343 : Industrial plugs, socket outlets and couplers for AC and DC supplies.
BS 4363 : Specification for distribution units for electricity supplies for construction and building
sites.
BS 7375 : Code of Practice for distribution of electricity on construction and building sites
BS 7430 : Code of Practice for earthing

ADM/H&S/Pt 2 01 March 2005 ELECTRICITY AT WORK 1 of 14
PART TWO
7.1 DUTIES
7.1.1 consultants
The consultant engineering company shall ensure that:-
• the necessary and appropriate approvals are given for a selected electrical contractor or
sub contractor.
• the fixed and temporary ‘Electrical Distribution System’ and utilisation of ‘Electrical
Energy’ required for the construction phase of the contract complies and is operated
within the requirements of this section.
7.1.2 contractor
The Contractor shall ensure that:-
• both the fixed and temporary ‘Electrical Distribution System’ is designed with due
consideration of its purpose, external influences, compatibility of equipment and
maintainability of equipment used.
• they appoint, in accordance with ADWEA regulations, a ‘Competent Person’ who shall be
responsible for the installation, its use and modification during the construction phase of
the contract. The name of the designated person shall be prominently and permanently
displayed close to the main switch or circuit breaker controlling the installation.
• appropriate ‘Electrical Safety and First Aid’ signs are displayed.
7.2 SUPPLIES
7.2.1 incoming supplies
In making an assessment of the incoming supply requirements due consideration shall be
given to the size and locations of electrical loads and the manner in which they vary with
time during the project.
Ample allowance should be made in respect of welfare facilities. It should be noted that in
practice the air conditioning plant, heaters, drying room heaters, water heaters and canteen
cooking equipment, tend to be in continuous use. The use of thermostats, time or light
sensitive switches should be considered.
On large sites, allowance has to be made for the use of large items of equipment, e.g. tower
cranes. Where the load is sizeable or where there are special problems, such as remote
locations or large site areas, early and detailed planning of the site electrical system will be
necessary.
For large and complex installations, design and circuit drawings should be prepared,
showing the type and location of equipment.

PART TWO
When this estimated load is known, a decision as to how the supply is to be obtained may
be made. The options being from the Public Utility or where such a supply cannot be
obtained or where perhaps such a supply would be uneconomical, the only alternative is to
generate the electricity locally on site.
7.2.2 temporary supplies

Distribution of electricity on site is essentially quite different from a permanent installation.
There is constant need for convenient means of connecting plant which operates on a
variety of voltages, phases and currents in different places at different times. Load
requirements vary considerably. (see Fig.1)
Incoming
Stand by
Supply
Generator
Site Incoming
Unit
Main Distribution Unit

Fitted with 300mA
Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers Batching
Outlet panel Plant
fitted with
30mA- ELCB,s
Portable
Tools
oooo
oooooo
Accommodation
Outlet panel Outlet Units
fitted with Tower Crane
30mA- ELCB,s
Outlet
oooo Units
Tower
Flood
oo Extension Compressor Lighting
o Outlet Units
Festoon Lighting
FIG. 1 - Shows a Site Electricity Distribution Scheme designed to I.E.E.Standards.

Note: All equipment specified in B.S. 4363 includes provision for major switches to be
locked off.

PART TWO
Wiring problems can arise because runs require re-routing or extension. Site conditions
themselves are scarcely conducive to planning a safe distribution system and the long
flexible cables for portable tools and lighting only make the overall situation the more
hazardous. Control gear may need to be portable thus its siting should be carefully planned.
7.2.3 unit distribution problems

In light of the less hazardous situations arising from the use of reduced voltage, a unit
distribution system has been evolved which is efficient, safe, flexible and economic for all
site work. It provides for the control and distribution of electricity from a main AC supply of
415 V (3-phase: 4 wire) and incorporates:-
• protection for the heavier electrical gear (415V: 3-phase) by using monitored earth
systems with or without sensitive earth – leakage circuit breakers.
• Reduced voltage (single – and three – phase) facilities for safety and flexibility with
portable tools and lighting. BS EN6039, 4363, 5486 & 7375 cover the technical
specifications for plugs, socket outlets, distribution units etc.
It should be stressed that this system is for site work only. Stores, site offices, canteens,
drying rooms etc. should be regarded as standard installations at normal mains voltage
(230V: 1 – phase) and conform to BS 7671.
Note: It is strongly recommended that this system be adopted for all site work and that a
clause requiring its use be included in all contract specifications.
7.2.4 main earthing terminal

Due consideration shall be given to the following earthing requirements:
• it is the responsibility of the consumer to provide and maintain an effective means of
earthing, the public utility regulations stipulates earthing electrodes.
• shall be driven to depth such that it penetrates the summer water table by a minimum of
2 metres.
• the resistance of any point in the earth continuity system shall not exceed 0.5 ohms.
• where the incoming supply is from the public utility and emergency standby generation is
also provided, then the supplies shall be mechanically and electrically interlocked so as
to ensure only one incoming supply can be switched into use.
7.2.5 existing services

Existing electrical installations will often be present on the site before the contract
commences, in the form of overhead lines, or underground cables. A survey should always
be conducted before work commences to determine the position and nature of such
installations and the results recorded and kept on site. The electricity supplier should
always be contacted for help and advice. (see Pt 2 section 6) for further advice on
Overhead/Underground cables.
Note: No work must be carried out on any live cable, or so near as to cause danger, unless
it is not practicable to make the cable dead and all necessary precautions are taken to
ensure safety.

PART TWO
7.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

7.3.1 maintenance
All electrical systems (which include all constituent parts) must be properly maintained to
ensure safety. Thus, inspection, tests and maintenance must be carried out on a routine
basis.
in addition to an initial inspection and test:
• fixed installations must be inspected and tested at least at three monthly intervals, routine
maintenance being carried out in accordance with equipment manufacturers’
recommendations.
• moveable and portable/transportable electrical equipment (as defined in BS 7671) should
be inspected, tested and maintained on a routine basis, depending on the use and
application of the particular item.
• records of training, permits-to-work, inspection, testing and maintenance should be kept
throughout the working life of an electrical system. In addition, records of circuit
diagrams, cable runs, loading diagrams and other relevant information should be retained
and kept up to date.
7.3.2 instruction, training and supervision

The installation, operation, maintenance and testing of electrical systems and equipment
should be carried out only by persons who are competent for the particular class of work.
Where employees’ knowledge or experience is not sufficient, adequate supervision must be

provided. The responsibilities of supervisors should be clearly detailed by relevant duty
holders.
7.3.3 first aid

Notices should be posted which give advice on treatment in the event of an electric shock
and there should be adequate provision for calling the emergency services. (see pt 2
section 10) – Safety Signage.
Speed is essential in dealing with any electrical accident and all electricians should be
familiar with action to be taken in an emergency.
7.3.4 testing and commissioning
All completed electrical installations must be inspected, tested and commissioned before
being made available for use. The inspection and tests necessary are listed in IEE Wiring
Regulations, but the construction site user should satisfy himself that the tests have been
carried out.
Written certificates should be completed for these tests.

PART TWO
7.4 PLUGS, SOCKET-OUTLETS AND COUPLERS

For distribution of electrical energy cable Plugs, socket-outlets and couplers for AC and DC
supplies are readily available to BS 4343 specifications
The BS specification covers single and three-phase components, a safeguard being

incorporated so that electrical apparatus operating at one voltage cannot be plugged into the
wrong supply. This is achieved by setting the earth point of plugs and socket-outlets at a
different “hour” position for each voltage and having a key (plug) and key-way (socket-outlet)
at a standard 6 o’clock position, so that they can only fit one way.
Plugs and sockets are available in a variety of designs providing varying degrees of
protection against damage and weather. The two types most commonly used on construc-
tion sites are the “splashproof” and the better “waterproof” designs. (see Figs. 2,3,4 & 5)
220/240V
110/130V
Fig.3 - Free plugs – straight incorporating

Fig.2 - Plugs with splash proof spring external cable grommet which allows
return covers: water to run off the back of the plug.
Fig.4 - Plugs fitted with central Fig.5 - Angled panel sockets which allow for
water tight cable gland and easier insertion and extraction when
strain relief clamp for used on vertical surfaces.
mechanical support
Note: Distribution of electrical energy to moveable equipment shall only be

permitted where such plugs and sockets are used.

PART TWO
7.5 EQUIPMENT EARTHING (PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS) ELCB

There is always the risk of shock, fire, or burns if electrical insulation deteriorates or is
damaged and there is leakage of current. It is therefore usual practice to earth all metalwork
which could be made live by such leakage.
On all building sites where temporary electricity supplies are required voltage operated earth
leakage circuit breakers shall be installed and shall be arranged to have the operating coil
connected between the consumers earthing terminal and the main earth electrode with
insulated connecting leads.
Additional residual current earth leakage circuit breakers should be fitted on the advice of
the duty holder. In particular, BS 7671 requires the fitting of residual current device
protection for socket outlets used to supply portable equipment outdoors. However, it is
emphasised that such devices, in themselves, do not provide complete protection against
shock.
All extraneous metalwork and exposed conductive parts should be bonded together and
connected to the system’s main earth terminal. Circuit protective conductors must be
installed to provide the return path from each outlet of an installation to the main earthing
terminal.
protective conductors comprise

• conduit, trunking, ductng or parts of
• part of a cable or flexible cord,
enclosures designed for the purpose.
• the armour, or metal sheath of a cable,
Reduced voltage provides increased protection against shock, but its effectiveness depends
upon the transformer being correctly earthed and this must not be overlooked.
Figs. 6,7,& 8 showing typical examples of RCD protected sockets and adaptors:
Fig.6 - RCD protected outlet Fig.7 - Metal Clad RCD Fig.8 - 13 amp RCD Adaptors
plug. Sockets.

PART TWO
7.6 SYSTEM VOLTAGE

Ideally, the most acceptable reduced voltage compromise for site work (including portable
tools and lighting) is 110 V, single-or three phase, so that no part of the installation is at
more than 55 V or 65 V respectively to earth, but appreciating that , especially for the smaller
Contractors, this may not be practicable due to availability and cost, the use of 240v is
acceptable providing the requirements of section 9.5 Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers
(ELCB), and section 9.8 Plant & Tools are fully adhered to.
recommended distribution voltages

Fixed and moveable plant
above 3.75 kW 415 V: 3 phase
Fixed floodlights 240 V: 1 phase
Small mobile plant up to 3.75 kW 110 V: 3 phase or 240v with ELCB Protection
Portable handlamps (general use) 110 V: 1 phase or 240v with ELCB Protection
Portable hand-held tools 110 V: 1 phase or 240v with ELCB Protection
Local lighting up to 2 kW 110 V: 1 phase or 240v with ELCB Protection
obtaining reduced voltages

Where it is practicable to use 110v, the following is the correct method to be used for
achieving this:-
110 V 3-phase
• using a double-wound transformer with the neutral point of its star-connected secondary
winding earthed so that the nominal voltage to earth is approximately 65 V.
110V 1-phase
• using a double-wound transformer with the centre tap of the secondary winding earthed
so that the nominal voltage to earth is 55 V.
110 V 3-phase
• using portable generator set properly or 1-phase earthed in accordance with BS 7375.
7.6.1 identification colours

The use of the following colour coded cables should be adopted for distribution:
operating voltage AC colour

25 Violet
50 White Where
Applicable
110 Yellow
220/240 Blue
380/415 Red
500/650 Black

PART TWO
7.7 CABLES
For all site offices, workshops, huts, drying rooms and similar premises which are regarded
as permanent type installations, BS 7671 must be adhered to. For general site work
additional precautions are necessary.
Other than supplies for welding purposes, cables carrying a voltage to earth in excess of
65V should have continuous metal armour or sheath which has been effectively earthed.
Where. trailing cables are concerned, this earthing should be in addition to the normal cable
protective conductor.
In view of the rough conditions on site, all cables should be sheathed overall.
7.7.1 main types of cable sheaths

TRS (tough rubber sheath)
good mechanical properties; resistant to wear and abrasion; unable to withstand solvents or
oil.
PVC (polyvinyl chloride)

unsuitable for outside work where low temperatures are to be expected, but permissible for
site offices and similar permanent work.
PCP (polychloroprene)
combines the advantages of TRS and PVC, i.e. resists wear and abrasion; withstands
solvents, oil, etc.
Cables buried directly in the ground shall be of a type incorporating an armour or metal
sheath or both or be of the PVC insulated concentric type. Such cables shall be marked by
cable covers or a suitable marking tape and be buried at a sufficient depth to avoid their
being damaged by any disturbance of the ground. Cable routes should be marked on the
plans kept in the site electrical register.
Low and medium voltage cables often have to be suspended and some type of bold marking
or “goal post” arrangement of non-conductive material should be erected to indicate their
presence. Where these cables need to cross open areas, or where spans of 3m or more are
involved, a catenary wire on poles or other supports will provide a convenient means of
suspension. Minimum height should be 6m above ground.
It is sometimes necessary, because of the nature or circumstances of a particular job, for

cables to lie on the ground, if only for a short time. In such cases, additional protection
should be provided by means of a conduit and special provisions made if vehicles have to
cross (e.g. ramps). The line should be clearly marked.
Joints in cables should be avoided wherever possible. Where unavoidable, they should be
enclosed in purpose-built housings.

PART TWO
7.8 PLANTS AND TOOLS

7.8.1 plants
A large proportion of plant in use on site is electrically driven. Particular attention should be
paid to its positioning and to its supply leads.
fixed plant
(415 V: 3-phase), e.g. tower cranes, large hoists, continuous batch mixers, etc. Siting should
be carefully planned so that they can remain in one position throughout the job and so that
supply cables, of sufficient capacity, can be routed clear of construction work and be
protected against traffic movement.
movable plant
With load in excess of the 110 V: 3-phase system capacity, e.g. compressors (415 V: 3-
phase). The earth conductor in the heavy trailing supply cable must remain unimpaired if the
plant is to be used safely. If it is broken, current cannot flow to earth if a fault occurs, and it is
therefore strongly recommended that earth monitoring and/or a residual current operated
circuit breaker is provided.
7.8.2 light movable plant and portable tools

(110 V: 1- or 3-phase) or, 240v. supply panel fitted with a 30mA ELCB - e.g. drills, sanders,
polishers, grinders, vibrators, paint sprayers, soldering irons, etc.
supply leads
to these tools are likely to be lengthy; every effort should be made to protect them from
damage. Tools should be disconnected before any adjustments are made or attachments
changed.
portable tools
for use on high frequencies (in excess of 50 Hz) need a supply from a special generator and
manufacturer’s instructions should be consulted before any connections are made.
certified (kite-marked)
double-insulated or all-insulated tools may be used without earthing (i.e. with two core
cables), but they should still be used only if power supply unit is either protected by Earth
Leakage Breakers, or the portable tool itself is fitted with a 13amp. RCD plug.
Where tools have to be used away from the supply plant, an OU (outlet unit) or EOU
(extension outlet unit) should be used.
7.8.3 maintenance of plant and tools

In view of the risks from damaged or faulty electrical equipment, an appropriate maintenance
system should be set up. It is also important that equipment is regularly serviced in
accordance with manufacturers’ instructions.

PART TWO
Visual checks should be carried out daily by users and formal inspections should be carried
out by competent persons at regular intervals.
These checks and inspections should ensure that:-
• bare wires are not visible, • the cable covering is gripped where it enters
the plug or equipment,
• the cable covering is not damaged,
• the outer casing of the equipment is not
• the plug is in good condition,
damaged or loose
• there are no taped or other non-
• there are no signs of overheating on the plug,
standard joints in the cable,
Residual Current Devices (RCD’s) should be checked to ensure they are working correctly
(the test button should be pressed daily).
Testing, by a competent person can detect faults such as loss of earth continuity,
deterioration of the insulation and internal or external contamination by dust, water, etc.
Note: The practice of connecting portable tools or any other type of electrical apparatus by
inserting bare wires into a distribution board or socket, is strictly forbidden.
7.9 LIGHTING
As well as supplementing poor daylight and enabling work to continue after dark, site lighting
is always necessary if in those areas are devoid of natural light, e.g. shafts and enclosed
stairways. Apart from permitting men to see what they are doing, adequate lighting helps to
minimise physical hazards; it facilitates the delivery and movement of material after dark; it is
an effective deterrent to intruders, pilferers and vandals. In short it safeguards men,
equipment and materials and makes for efficient, economic production.
Site lighting must be sufficient, well planned, of the right type and in the right place for it to
be properly effective. Lighting ought not to introduce the risk of electric shock.
7.9.1 measuring illumination level

Illumination levels on any part of a site can easily be checked with a pocket lightmeter,
calibrated in lux. These meters should be checked periodically and be kept covered when
not in use.
7.9.2 level of illumination

The unit of measurement for levels of illumination is the lux. One lux equals one lumen of
light falling on one square metre (lm/m2).
The level of illumination required to provide conditions in which work can be carried out
without undue risk or fatigue should not be less than the figures shown below. The figures
quoted take into account the effect of dust and dirt, depreciation, low contrast areas, etc.

PART TWO
Recommended minimum levels of illumination:
Interior movement only 5 lux

General movement 5 lux
Handling materials, unloading 10 lux
Exterior general 10 lux
Clearing sites, general rough work 15 lux
Interior working places 15 lux
Interior reinforcing and concreting 50 lux
Bricklaying (except facings), 100 lux
Bench work, facing brickwork and plastering 200 lux
Interior workshops 400 Iux
Drawing boards 600 lux
The term interior lighting covers those parts of structures which may not have cladding
during erection, but which will become interiors when the work is finished.
7.9.3 area lighting

The object of area lighting should be to produce an overall level of illumination sufficient for
men and vehicles to move about in safety. Every part of the area should receive light from at
least two directions to avoid dangerous, dense shadows.
Luminaires of the area lighting type should be mounted on poles, towers, or static crane
towers. Moving supports, e.g travelling cranes, are quite unsuitable since they cause lamps
to cast dangerously deceptive moving shadows.
If luminaires are spaced too widely, illumination becomes patchy, confusing and ineffective.
Luminaires of the non-symmetrical type should be spaced at not more than three times the
mounting height. Other area luminaires should be spaced at not more than 1.5 times the
mounting height.
7.9.4 beam flood lighting

Beam floodlights are used to throw concentrated light over an area from a relatively great
distance. The beam may be conical or fan-shaped and a ribbed spreader glass is sometimes
fitted to widen the beam in one plane.
Floodlight beams are usually classified according to their spread - wide, medium or narrow -
and it should be noted that performance changes radically with size and type of lamp. A
flood that gives a medium spread with a GLS lamp can give a wide spread with an MBF
lamp.
Narrow beam floodlights are only used on sites with large open group areas and they are
usually mounted in clusters on temporary towers at least 30m high.

PART TWO
With narrow beam luminaires there is always a hazard from glare because the beams are
intense. To minimise glare, they should be mounted as high as possible and the beams
should be directed downwards on the work.
significant points:
• the area illuminated decreases and the level of illumination increases as the floodlight is
brought closer to the work on the basis of the “inverse square rule”;
• to increase or decrease the level of illumination, floodlights should be moved closer to, or
further from the work — or their power should be changed;
• beam floodlights are often used to raise the light level at the point of work. (Sufficient light
should reach the workpoint from at least two directions to avoid creating shadow
hazards).
Figs. 9 & 10 show typical examples of Beam Flood Lighting lamps available.
Fig.9 - High Pressure Sodium Lamps. Fig.10 - Metal Halide -

Environmentally protected
7.9.5 dispersive lighting
Dispersive luminaires are similar to

industrial indoor types, but are
weatherproof and protected against
corrosion. They are used wherever
they can be suspended over the area
to be illuminated.
Luminaires should be spaced to

provide an even spread of light; the
ratio of spacing to mounting height is
usually 1.5:1 There are also
Fig.11 - Portable Site lighting attached to mobile Generators recommended minimum heights,
according to the lamp which must be
observed. (see Fig.11)

PART TWO
7.9.6 walkway lighting

• includes stairs, ladderways, corridors, scaffold access routes and the localised
illumination of what would otherwise be small shadow areas, which could in themselves
be dangerous.
• luminaires are of the well glass or bulkhead type: when fitted with red lamps or red or
orange glasses, these types are widely used to delineate danger areas -hales,
excavations, obstructions, etc.
• If practicable, 11OV supply should be used for regular site work, e.g. on scaffolding and
other temporary structures, because both fittings and cables are prone to damage. A
230V supply should only be used where luminaires and cables are properly fixed, well
protected and supply protected with Earth Leakage Breakers.
• mounting should be as high as possible to avoid glare.
• spacing should be such that the light is evenly spread.
• sufficient light for access purposes on a scaffold platform 1 -1 .5 m wide can be obtained
from walkway luminaires using 60 watt Filament amps or two B waif fluorescent tubes,
set 2.5m - 3m above the walkway and not more than 6 m apart.
• mounting centrally above the walkway is to be preferred.
7.9.7 local lighting

This group covers the most widely used forms of lighting on sites, and since these fittings
are generally accessible to operatives, it is most important that they are either connected to
a 110v supply, or if 230v used, and supply protected with Earth Leakage Breakers.
Tungsten Filament lamps provide the most convenient forms of local lighting, but these
lamps, being relatively small sources of light, tend to produce hard shadows. Therefore, they
should be used with diffusers, or strung in a row so that each bulb in turn softens the
shadows created by the bulb on either side of it.
All lamps required for this type of work should be in waterproof lampholders and be
protected by guards or shades. Local lighting at the work point should supplement the
general Lighting scheme.
Luminaires should always be placed so that no person is required to work in their own
shadow and so that the local light for one person is not a source of glare for the next.
Great care should be taken that local light reaches the work from the same general direction
as light will come from window or permanent fitment when the job is finished. By doing so,
blemishes that would show up badly in the final lighting can be avoided.
Pendant luminaires should be supported so that the supply cable is not required to bear any
weight. Festoon lighting is an exception but, in this connection, only the type which uses
moulded-on lampholders is to be recommended.

SAFETY CHECKLIST -
MANUAL HANDLING & LIFTING
Preparation
what is being lifted?
where to and how far?
how many people are needed?
are they trained in kinetic lifting and handling?
what methods and equipment are required?
is equipment required available?
would mechanical means be more practicable?
is the lifting and handling area clear of hazards?
is the operation part of a routine. If so, could it be more effectively planned and executed?
Lifting and handling
protective clothing in use?
proper (kinetic) method being employed?
co-ordination satisfactory in dual and team lifting?
necessary equipment in use or to hand?
are excessively heavy weights being lifted?
are loads being deposited/stacked safely and securely?
adequate supervision employed where necessary?
After lifting and handling
any incidents/accidents should be reported and recorded?
where injuries sustained, has medical attention been sought?
damage or loss of equipment etc., recorded?
Document No. Rev Date Title Checklist
ADM/H&S/CL/2.08/1 01 March 2005 SAFETY CHECKLIST - MANUAL HANDLING & LIFTING 1 of 1

SAFETY CHECKLIST -
MANUAL HANDLING & LIFTING
Preparation
what is being lifted?
where to and how far?
how many people are needed?
are they trained in kinetic lifting and handling?
what methods and equipment are required?
is equipment required available?
would mechanical means be more practicable?
is the lifting and handling area clear of hazards?
is the operation part of a routine. If so, could it be more effectively planned and executed?
Lifting and handling
protective clothing in use?
proper (kinetic) method being employed?
co-ordination satisfactory in dual and team lifting?
necessary equipment in use or to hand?
are excessively heavy weights being lifted?
are loads being deposited/stacked safely and securely?
adequate supervision employed where necessary?
After lifting and handling
any incidents/accidents should be reported and recorded?
where injuries sustained, has medical attention been sought?
damage or loss of equipment etc., recorded?
ADM/H&S/CL/2.08/1 01 March 2005 SAFETY CHECKLIST - MANUAL HANDLING & LIFTING 1 of 1

SECTION 9
HIGHLY FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS &

LIQUEFIED PETROLEUM GASES
INTRODUCTION 1
DEFINITION
MAIN APPLICABLE U.A.E LEGISLATION
9.1 HIGHLY FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS 2

9.1.1 storage 2
9.1.2 fire 3
9.1.3 handling of highly flammable liquids 3
9.1.4 empty containers and tanks 4
9.1.5 use of highly flammable liquids 4
9.1.6 spraying of highly flammable liquids 5
9.1.7 petroleum based adhesives 5
9.2 LIQUEFIED PETROLEUM GAS 6
9.2.1 characteristics and hazards 6
9.2.2 refillable cylinders 6
9.2.3 transportation 7
9.2.4 use of LPG in cylinders 7
9.2.5 general precautions 7
HIGHLY FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS & LIQUEFIED PETROLEUM GASES

SAFETY CHECKLIST
(ADM/H&S/CL/2.9/1)
SECTION 9
PART TWO
SECTION 9
HIGHLY FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS &

LIQUEFIED PETROLEUM GASES
INTRODUCTION
Both highly flammable liquids (HFL) and liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) are widely used in building site
processes and operations. The principle hazard associated with both is fire, and it is essential that
precautions are taken to limit the risk involved.
Broadly speaking in dealing with both substances safety may be divided into three aspects:
• Storage
• Handling/transport
• Use
DEFINITION
Highly Flammable Liquid means any liquid, liquid solution, emulsion or suspension which when tested:
(a) gives off a flammable vapour at a temperature of less than 32°c.
(b) supports combustion.
Liquefied Petroleum Gas means commercial butane, commercial propane or any mixture thereof.

Ministerial Order No. (32) Year 1982 - Article (9)

ADM/H&S/Pt 2 01 March 2005 HIGHLY FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS & LIQUEFIED PRETROLEM GASES 1 of 10
PART TWO
9.1 HIGHLY FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS (HFL)
9.1.1 storage
On building sites, highly flammable liquids are not normally stored in fixed tanks. The following
details relate to the facilities necessary for safe storage of adhesives, paint, solvents etc. in
drums and cylinders up to 225 litres (50 gals’) capacity.
in open air
• the store should be formed on a concrete paving or

other impervious surface. A low sill ramp greater
than 150mm, should surround the paving at a height
sufficient to contain the maximum contents of the
largest drum stored. The paving should be bounded
by wire mesh fencing with access to the storage
area by way of a ramp over the sill. (see Fig.1)
• containers should be protected from direct sunlight
by a roof of light fire resistant material. The distance
between the store and any adjacent building,
workplace or boundary fence should not be less
than 4m.
• drums should be stored so that their contents can be

identified and where, in the event of leakage, they are Fig.1 - Open air Storage cage
accessible for removal. with fire resistant roof,
lockable doors,
segregated storage area
• gangways should be of sufficient width to allow easy
for empty and full
handling. cylinders.
• the store should be marked ‘Highly Flammable’ or specify

flammability, e.g. ‘Flashpoint below 32°C, in clear bold
letters. (see Fig.2). Where this is impracticable, display
‘Highly Flammable Liquids’ sign as near to store as possible.
• naked flames, smoking or means of ignition should be

prohibited in the area of the store. Lighting should be of the
approved flameproof type.
• portable fire extinguishers of the dry powder or vaporising

liquids (BCF) type should be sited at strategic positions in, or
adjacent to the store as necessary.
Fig.2 – Approved Sign for an

LPG Store.

PART TWO
inside buildings
• a separate building should normally be provided and used solely for the storage of highly
flammable liquids where security and protection from weather is required. Such a building
need not be constructed of a fire resisting material.
• It should be located in a safe position, i.e. the distance between the outside wall of the store
and any adjacent buildings or boundary fence should not be less than 4m. Should space be
insufficient to isolate the store in this way, wall/partitioning must constructed with a fire
resisting material.
• rooms in finished buildings are generally unsuitable for use as storerooms.
additional points
• adequate ventilation of the store should be achieved by louvers or grilles. Care should be
taken not to obstruct these vents by stacked drums.
• a sill,no greater than 150mm should be provided at each door opening to prevent the outflow
of spilled flammable liquid.
• store should be marked ‘Highly Flammable’, or flammability specified, e.g. ‘Flash point below
32oC’, in clear bold letters.
• naked flames, smoking or means of ignition should be prohibited in the area. Lighting
should be of the approved flameproof type.
• portable fire extinguishers of the dry powder or vaporising liquids (BCF) type should be sited
at strategic positions adjacent to the store as necessary.
• where the quantity of highly flammable liquid to be stored is not more than 50 litres (10 gals)
it may be stored in the workplace, in a suitable cupboard or bin of fire resisting structure.
9.1.2 fire
For small fires involving highly flammable liquids Foam (AFFF) portable fire extinguishers are
preferable. Dry powder should only be used in the absence of Foam - especially if the liquid is
flowing; when the liquid is contained (as in a drip tray) CO2 extinguishers also suitable, but is
best used in covered areas preferably by trained personnel.
You should note that the efficiency of the external use of CO2 is severely restricted because it
gets quickly dispersed with the wind.
Note: Water must never be used to extinguish fire involving flammable liquids.
9.1.3 handling of highly flammable liquids

• bulk delivery of HFL should be made directly into the store and not off-loaded and left till
removed to the store.

PART TWO
• decanting of HFL should be carried out either in the open air or in a separate room of fire
resisting construction. Containers should be checked for leaks, sealed or contents
transferred as necessary. Small ready-to-use containers should be marked ‘Highly
Flammable’ and capped. A number of companies supply special drums, containers, taps
and drip trays, especially designed for HFL, incorporating spring loaded caps and spouts
etc. (see Fig.3) funnels should be used to minimise spillage and trays to contain any
unavoidable spillage.
• filling of small containers from larger drums should
not be carried out in the store but in a well-
ventilated place, preferably in the open air. Small
containers should be marked ‘Highly Flammable’
and fitted with an effective cap. Where applicable,
cans should be fitted with pouring nozzle with
spring-loaded closure cap.
• spillage should be soaked up with non-combustible

absorbents or sand, which should be disposed of
safely. Fig.3 - Type of Drip tray
used for de-canting
flammable liquids.
9.1.4 empty containers and tanks
• heat must not be applied to, nor any attempt be made to cut or section empty containers.
They may explode.
• special care is necessary when the demolition or dismantling of tanks is undertaken as

disturbing or heating solid residues remaining in them may cause hazardous concentrations
of flammable vapours. Entry into tanks requires a certificate written and signed by a
responsible technical specialist.
9.1.5 use of highly flammable liquids

• heavy concentrations of vapour arising from the use of HFL should be avoided if possible,
and dispersed using natural or mechanical ventilation. If it is necessary to employ a
mechanical extraction system, a flameproof electrical motor should be used to avoid risk of
explosion.
• in general, where work involves the use of HFL inside a room or confined space, the power
supply should be cut off. Any space-heating appliance provided must either be sited remote
from any flammable vapour source or be incapable of causing ignition.
• naked flames, welding, heating torches, cigarettes, etc. should be prohibited in an area
when HFL vapour is present.
• metal bins with lids should be provided for off cuts, waste material and cleaning rags
contaminated with HFL, and should be emptied frequently.

PART TWO
• HFL or toxic solvents should never be used to wash hands, floors or surfaces. Use
detergent degreaser cleaner.
• if brushes and scrapers require soaking, use suitable container with lid.
9.1.6 spraying of highly flammable liquids

Care should be exercised in:
• identifying the material in use and observing the manufacturer’s recommendations for use
and safety.
• selecting the correct type of spraying equipment. Spray booths with both appropriate and
approved exhaust ventilation should be used.
• providing personnel with protective clothing, respiratory equipment, hygiene and cleansing
facilities.
• avoiding the introduction of sources of ignition into working areas, i.e. non-flameproof
electrical equipment, combustion engines, hand tools, heating equipment, cigarettes, or
anything which might cause sparks.
• providing warning notices at entrances and physical barriers where necessary.
• controlling, storing and decanting material.
• providing fire-fighting equipment.
9.1.7 petroleum based adhesives

With the development of plaster and similar type boards used as coverings to walls and ceilings
and tiles for floors and other areas, the use of petroleum based adhesives in fixing is becoming
widespread.
Dangers arise from these materials, particularly when used in poorly ventilated areas where
concentrations of vapours are allowed to accumulate. Ignition of the vapours by a spark, e.g.
the simple action of switching on a light, may result in an explosion or fire, therefore the
following precautions should be observed:
• identify adhesive, its flash point and manufacturers recommendations for use and safety.
• open doors and windows; provide mechanical exhaust ventilation where necessary.
• when fixing floor coverings with highly flammable adhesives, treat only small areas at a time
and work towards door from further point.
• provide protective clothing and respiratory equipment as necessary.
• provide fire-fighting equipment.
• avoid introducing sources of ignition into work areas, e.g. cigarettes, hand tools, combustion
engines, heating equipment producing naked flames. Electrical equipment and fittings
should be of suitable flameproof design, or be isolated by removal of fuses.

PART TWO
• provide warning notices at entrances to the area and, where necessary, barriers to prevent
unauthorised access.
Note: Where petroleum-based adhesives are in use and doubts exist as to the concentration
of flammable or explosive vapours, sampling equipment should be employed.
9.2 LIQUEFIED PETROLEUM GAS (LPG)

On building sites, LPG has numerous uses ranging from heating bitumen cauldrons and boilers,
site offices and huts, to use as a fuel to power hand tools and oxy-propane cutting equipment.
Properly used, LPG is a convenient and valuable source of energy. Carelessly used, it is
extremely dangerous.
9.2.1 characteristics and hazards

• LPG is colourless; its vapour is heavier than air, and if it leaks will sink and flow into drains,
excavations etc.
• leakage, especially of liquid, may release large volumes of highly flammable gases. One
cubic metre of liquid propane equals roughly 250 cubic metres of propane gas.
• a small, proportions of gas in air (for propane, between 2% and 10%) can give rise to an
explosive mixture. If present in a confined space and ignited, it will cause an explosion.
• because LPG vapour will sink and flow, any vapour/air mixture arising from leakage may be
ignited some distance from the point of leakage and the resulting flame travel back to the
point of leakage.
• LPG is normally odorised before distribution so as to enable detection by smell.
• leakage may be noticed by smell or the cooling effect on the air at the point of leakage
causing condensation. Leaks should not be traced using a lighted match or naked flame.
Use soapy water.
• in contact with skin, the liquid will cause severe frost burns.
• though non-toxic, it is an asphyxiate and an anaesthetic.
9.2.2 refillable cylinders

• a store for refillable cylinders should be located away from site boundaries, enclosed
buildings, fixed sources of ignition and electrical equipment, in accordance with the following
table of weights/distances.
KGs Distance in
metres
50-300 1

PART TWO
300-1000 2
1000-4000 4
• a base should be compacted or paved, and enclosed by a fence minimum of 2m high.
• cylinders should be protected from direct sunlight by a roof of light, fire resistant material.
• two exits should be formed (not adjacent to each other) with doors opening outwards and
not self locking.
• signs should be displayed indicating the presence of LPG and prohibiting smoking and
naked flames.
• the storage area should be kept free of weeds and grass. Sodium chlorate should not be
used for this purpose. Access/egress must be kept clear.
• cylinders should be stored with valves uppermost.
• LPG cylinders may be stored with other cylinders of flammable gases but should be
separated from oxygen, toxic or corrosive gases by a distance of 3m.
• stocks should be grouped by the 1000kg and groups separated by 1.5m gangways.
• LPG cylinders should not be stored within 3m of flammable liquids or combustible materials.
• cylinders must not be dropped during handling or brought into violent contact with other
cylinders, or adjacent objects.
• valves should be in the closed position, and valve caps fitted.
• where lighting is necessary, it should be mounted at least 4m above ground level and at
least 2m above the topmost cylinder of the stack.
9.2.3 transportation
When loaded on vehicles for transportation, cylinders, (whether full or empty), must be stood
upright and secured. Vehicles should have fire extinguishers (CO2 - dry powder) readily
available, should carry first aid packs, and display appropriate warning notices.
9.2.4 use of LPG in cylinders

All personnel responsible for the storage of LPG should understand the characteristics of the
product. They should be familiar with the fundamentals of fire fighting and control and aware of
the procedures in force for dealing with such emergencies.
It is difficult to cover all aspects of the use and application of LPG; following list of points should
not be regarded as exhaustive.
9.2.5 general precautions

PART TWO
• before and after use, valve protection caps and plastic thread caps/plugs should be fitted to
minimise damage.
• cylinders should be kept upright and care should be taken during handling.
• full and empty cylinders should remain separated. Valves should be left in closed position
when not in use.
• never place cylinders below ground level, since any leakage of gas will not disperse.
• regulators should be handled with care and the hose

and connections should be examined before fitting.
All LPG containers are fitted with left hand thread
connections. Union nuts and couples have grooves
on the outside corners of the nut confirming left-
hand thread. Use correct size spanner. (see Fig.4)
• flexible hoses should be in good condition and

be protected, or steel braided if likely to be Fig.4 - Typical type of Regulator fitted
subjected to damage by abrasion. (see Fig.5) to most LPG Containers used
on Building Sites.
• over tightening connections will damage threads
and may cause leaks. Checks should be carried
out by smell-or use soapy water.
• weekly inspections should be carried out on LPG

appliances and equipment. Checklist should cover
testing for leaks, cleaning, adjusting, checking
hoses, hose clips and ferrules. (see checklist at
the end of this section). Fig.5 - Flexible High Pressure steel
braided hose with non return
valve connection.
bitumen boiler and cauldrons
• the gas cylinder should always be positioned at least 3m away from the boiler or cauldron.
• full cylinders, not connected, should be kept at least 6m away from appliance. Full cylinders
awaiting use should be kept out of direct sunlight.
• supply hoses should be checked for crushing, damage to metal braiding and impregnation
by bitumen. Unserviceable hoses should be replaced.
• if frost forms on outside of cylinder, flow rate is excessive. Avoid by using two or more
cylinders and a manifold or, if possible, a smaller burner.
blow torches, roofing irons
• lash cylinder to prevent it falling on its side when pulled.

PART TWO
• a suitable high-pressure hose should be used and inspected frequently for wear.
• manufacturer’s recommended operating pressure should be observed.

PART TWO
site huttage
• cylinders and regulators should be fixed outside the building and the supply taken in at low
pressure via rigid pipe (copper or iron), with a flexible connection to the appliance.
• flexible tubing should be limited to a maximum length of 2.438m.
• pipework should be exposed and easily accessible for checking.
• appliances designed for use outside and requiring high ventilation should not be used within
huts.
• ventilation for convector heaters and cookers should be both permanent and adequate.
• weekly inspections should be carried out if soot forms or smell occurs, the reasons should
be determined.
fire
Instructions for dealing with LPG in the event of fire may vary with given situations. However, in
an emergency, it is of paramount importance to avoid endangering human life.
the following action should be taken by persons discovering a fire:
• summon the Fire Services (civil defence department). Acquaint Fire Officer with location of
all cylinders.
• if it can be done safely, turn off all valves to cut fuel supply and remove cylinders from the
danger area. Where this is not practicable, cool by copious spraying of water.
• if cylinders are equipped with automatic relief valves and fire exposure is severe, it must be
remembered ignited gas jets from these valves can extend a considerable distance.
• if cylinders are exposed to severe fire conditions and engulfed in flame, no attempt should
be made to fight fire. In such conditions summon Civil Defence and evacuate the area.
• where flame from a leaking gas bottle is extinguished, but gas or vapour continues to
escape, there is danger of an explosive re-ignition.
• instructions concerning emergency procedures should be provided and displayed as

necessary. Employees should be trained in the use of fire fighting equipment.
fire extinguishers
• sufficient numbers of adequate size dry powder fire extinguishers should be available.
Foam extinguishers are only suitable for small internal LPG fires.
• extinguishers should be provided for all operations and locations involving LPG, ranging
from the use of hand tools to site huttage and bulk storage.

PART TWO
Note: As a guide to the requirements for the latter,

a minimum of 4.5kg (10lb) dry powder is
necessary for up to a total of 450kg (1000lb)
weight of LPG. For larger storage areas
consultation with the Civil Defence is
advised. (see Fig.6)
Fig.6 - Showing example of 4.5 kg Dry

Powder Extinguisher suitable
for fires involving LPG.

SAFETY CHECKLIST - H.F.L. & L.P.G.
HIGHLY FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS (HFL)

General storage requirement
a) stores
mark ‘Highly Flammable’ - indicate flash point
access clear
fire extinguishers provided
b) storage in open air

concrete base
mesh fence
roof cover
sill and ramp
separation distance 4m
c) storage in building
used exclusively for HFL
sill at doorway
well ventilated
Workplace
50 litres (10 gals) or less in fire resistant, marked bin/cupboard
Decanting
in open air or fire resistant building
into small marked containers with effective closure
funnels/trays used
spillage mopped up/sanded
absorbents disposed of safely
Use of Highly Flammable Liquids

good ventilation or mechanical extraction with flame proof motor
no naked flame or ignition sources
waste bins provided, with lids
warning notices displayed
ADM/H&S/CL/2.09/1 01 March 2005 SAFETY CHECKLIST - HFL & LPG 1 of 4

HIGHLY FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS (HFL) continued…
containers with lids, for cleaning brushes etc.
Spraying
identify materials: observe precautions in use and storage
use correct equipment
protective equipment/clothing
avoid ignition risks
warning notices, barriers in use
Flammable adhesives
identify type of adhesive and check precautions for safe usage
use exhaust ventilation as necessary – spark free motors
use respiratory/protective clothing
no ignition sources; avoid sparks and naked flames
electrical installations – isolate fuses
provide warning notices: erect barriers
solvent not used to clean hands, surfaces etc.
empty containers not to be heated or cut.
tanks - precautions taken against risk of explosion
entry into tanks, authorising permit obtained first.
Fire Emergency Procedures

emergency procedures - provide and display instructions.
procedures practised
summon Civil Defence
fight fire, but do not endanger life

LIQUEFIED PETROLEUM GAS (LPG)
Storage
fixed/movable tanks - obtain specialist advice
compacted/paved base
mesh fence
fire resistant roofing
two exits - outward opening
warning signs displayed
weed free area - no sodium chlorate
access clear
cylinders stored upright
3m from oxygen, corrosive or toxic gases
avoid violent contacts, dropping of cylinders
grouped by 1000kg - 1.5m gangways
lighting - 4m above ground, 2m clear of top most cylinder
Transportation
cylinders upright and secured
vehicle equipped with:

fire extinguishers
first aid
warning notices
Use of LPG Cylinders and Appliances

before and after use: valve in off position; fit valve caps/plugs
handle regulators carefully
avoid cross-threading/use correct spanner
inspect equipment weekly, hoses, clips etc. Test for leaks - use soapy water.

LIQUEFIED PETROLEUM GAS (LPG) continued…
Bitumen Boilers
cylinder - 3m from boiler (not in use - 6m)
protect from direct sunlight
inspect hose frequently
Hand tools
lash cylinders upright
check hose for wear
operate at recommended pressure
Huttage
cylinders outside building
rigid pipe in use and accessible for inspection.
maximum length of flexible tubing to appliance 2.438m
high-ventilation appliances; do not site in huttage
carry out weekly inspections
Fire Emergency Procedures

fire/emergency procedures: provide and display written instructions
do not endanger life
summon Civil Defence
fight fire with dry powder. Cool cylinders with water
turn off gas supply if safe to do so
if flames engulfing cylinders, do not fight fire
beware ignited gas jets from automatic relief valves

SECTION 10
SAFETY SIGNAGE
INTRODUCTION 1
10.1 PROHIBITION 2
10.2 MANDATORY 3
10.3 WARNING 4
10.4 SAFE CONDITION 5
10.5 FIRE EQUIPMENT 6
10.7 DETERMINING SIGN SIZES 8
10.8 STANCHION SIGNS 8
10.9 SAFETY NOTICE BOARDS 9
SECTION 10
PART TWO
SECTION 10
SAFETY SIGNAGE
INTRODUCTION
Safety Signs should be used to inform, advise, instruct, warn of danger and improve safety in the
workplace. Signs incorporate certain colours which have specific meanings as follows:
PROHIBITION MANDATORY WARNING SAFE CONDITION FIRE EQUIPMENT
- You Must Not - -You Must Do - - Caution - - The Safe Way - - To indicate -
- Do Not Do - - Carry out the - - Risk of Danger - Where to go in Fire Equipment

action given by an emergency
- Stop - the sign - Hazard Ahead -
Outline Circle with Solid Circle Outline Triangle Square or Square or

Crossbar Rectangle Rectangle
RED BLUE YELLOW GREEN RED

means means means means means
RISK OF FIRE
STOP OBEY GO
DANGER EQUIPMENT

Ministerial Order No. 32 (year 1982) Article 14
BS 5378: Part 1:1980

ADM/HSE/Pt 2 00 January 2005 SAFETY SIGNAGE 1 of 9
PART TWO
10.1 PROHIBITION
• background colour should be white
• circular band and crossbar shall be red
• the symbol shall be black and placed centrally on the background and shall not obliterate
the crossbar
• red shall cover at least 35% of the area of the safety sign
10.1.1 example of prohibition safety signs

PART TWO
10.2 MANDATORY
• background colour shall be blue
• the symbol or text shall be white and placed centrally on the background
• blue shall cover at least 50% of the area of the safety sign
10.2.1 example of mandatory safety signs

PART TWO
10.3 WARNING
• background colour shall be yellow
• triangular band shall be black
• the symbol or text shall be black and placed centrally on the background
• yellow shall cover at least 50% of the area of the safety sign
10.3.1 example of warning safety signs

PART TWO
10.4 SAFE CONDITION

• background colour shall be green
• the symbol or text shall be white
• the shape of the sign shall be oblong or square as necessary to accommodate the
symbol or text
• green shall cover at least 50% of the safety sign
10.4.1 example safe condition safety signs

PART TWO
10.5 FIRE EQUIPMENT

• background colour shall be red
• the shape of the sign shall be oblong or square as necessary to accommodate the text or
symbol
• the symbol or text shall be white
10.5.1 example of fire equipment safety signs

PART TWO

hazard
requirement
symbol signs
Used to identify hazards and mark areas to protect employees
10.6.1 example of hazardous substance control safety signs

PART TWO
10.7 DETERMINING SIGN SIZES

The size of sign required should be assessed depending on the sign viewing distance.
10.7.1 determine the size of signs required as follows
450
400
200
100
100 150 300 600
Viewing distance Viewing distance Viewing distance Viewing distance

up to 4.5m (15ft) up to 7.7m (25ft) up to 15.5m (50ft) up to 23m (75ft)
10.8 STANCHION SIGNS

Used for displaying signs on a temporary basis for both indoor and outdoor use, they are
simple to assemble and can be quickly positioned near to a potential danger.
Clips are supplied for retaining signs into the frame, this allows interchangeable messages
to suit the necessary requirements
Single sided Double sided

PART TWO
10.9 SAFETY NOTICE BOARDS

Contractors shall set up and maintain throughout the course of the contract, Safety Notice
boards for the use of his labour force.
Safety Notice boards should:
• be set up in prominent locations on the site that are clearly visible to the Contractors
employees and anyone entering the works
• contain all relevant emergency and contact numbers required for the contract
• be fully illustrated with relevant safety signage showing precautions required
• be safely supported and suitably placed to withstand bad weather conditions e.g. strong
winds
The Contractor’s staff and labour force shall be made fully aware of the safety signs and the
emergency contact information, prior to commencing duties on site.

PERMIT FORM - HOT & COLD WORK
Permit Issued to - Section/Contractor:

To do the Following:
Exact Location:
Validity Period: Date: Duration: (Max.24hrs.) From: To:
A Actions/Conditions Yes No N/A B Safety Eq. & Protective Clothing Yes No N/A
Depressurised/ Drained Reqd.
Goggles/Face Visors/Hard Hats
Steamed/Water Flushed PVC Gloves/Safety Boots
Ventilated Properly Respirators
Isolated Mech. & Tagged Escape Sets/Full BA Sets
Isolated Electrically & Tagged Safety Belts/Safety Harnesses & Safety
Combustible Mats Cleared Lines
Three in One Gas Monitor
Lighting is Sufficient Man Riding Winch
Continuous Monitoring Reqd Portable Fire Appliances
Area clean & Safe Overalls - Chemical/Ordinary
C Other Safety/Protective Equipment or Actions Required:
I Certify That I have Inspected the Site, and Subject to all the Safety Requirements detailed in this Permit being fully
implemented, I Confirm that it is Safe for Hot/Cold Work to Start.
Name: Position: Signature: Date:
D Toxic/Hazardous Mats. To Safe Limit Test N/A Time Date Name Signature
be tested Result
Combustibles/Methane Gas L.E.L. 5%
Oxygen Above 19%
Hydrogen Sulphide 10 PPM.
Chlorine 1 PPM.
Carbon Monoxide 50 PPM.
Special Instructions:
E Acceptance by the Person in Charge of the Operation:

I Confirm That I Fully Understand and Will Implement All The Safety Requirements Detailed in This Permit, and
That All Those Under My Control Will Be Fully Informed and Instructed in it’s Implementation.
Name: Position: Company/Section: Signature: Date:

F Completion: Hot/Cold Work is Stopped/Completed At …….............…Hrs. and this Permit may be Cancelled.
Performer/
Person in Charge Signature: ………….....…… Originators Signature: ………..…….…….Date: …………Time …..………
Note: A new Permit Must be Issued For Any Change In Conditions: IMPORTANT: This Permit Does Not Allow
“SMOKING” At Any Time
Document No. Rev Date Title Form
ADM/H&S/FM/2.11/1 01 March 2005 HOT & COLD WORK PERMIT 1 of 1

PERMIT FORM - CONFINED SPACE ENTRY
Contractors Name: Contract:

Location of Confined Space:
Work to be done in Confined Space:
P This Permit is VALID ONLY from: (hrs) to (hrs) Date

A
R THIS PERMIT COVERS ENTRY ONLY INTO A CONFINED SPACE
T All work entailed in effecting entry and after entry shall be covered by the appropriate
WORK PERMIT –See Part 3A below.
1
CONDITION OF PLANT Yes/No N/A Signature

1. The plant/equipment *IS isolated from all sources of danger
2. The main valves ARE closed and locked.
P 3. The equipment HAS been drained/vented*.
A
R 4. Dangerous sludge and other deposits HAVE been removed
T 5. Mechanical drives HAVE been disconnected.
6. Electrical circuits HAVE bee locked off.
2 7. The atmosphere HAS been tested and IS free from toxic and flammable
substances.
8. There IS an adequate supply of fresh air to the work location.
SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS TO BE TAKEN

A. Additional permit for hot work/cold work release* is required.
P
A B. Protective clothing SHALL be worn, (specify type).......................................
R C. Safety belt and lifeline shall be worn.
T D. Forced ventilation SHALL be provided.
E. Fresh air/self contained *breathing apparatus SHALL be worn.
3
F. Flameproof/intrinsically safe * lighting SHALL be used.
*delete as applicable
AUTHORISATION:
Signature of issuing authorised person Time: Date
RECEIPT:
P I have read this form and understand the special precautions to be taken prior to and during entry.
A Signed: (person in charge of the work) Time: Date:
R
T
CLEARANCE:
4 Work in the above enclosed space has been completed (or stopped) and all the men under my charge withdrawn.
Signed: (person in charge of the work) Time: Date:
CANCELLATION:
All copies of this permit are hereby cancelled.
Signed: (person in charge of the work) Time: Date:
ADM/H&S/FM/2.11/2 01 March 2005 CONFINED SPACE ENTRY PERMIT 1 of 1

PERMIT FORM - ELECTRICAL WORK
Project:
Authorisation is given to the Contractor/Person as indicated below , to carry out the following task/s and shall adhere
to the precautions as listed to ensure the work is carried out safely.
Signature: .................................................. (Electrical Engineer) Date: .................... Time: ....................
Location or area of work:
Description of work:
Plant/Equipment/System:
Precautions necessary:
1.
2.
3.
Location of:-
Isolation: …………………………………………….. Locks: ……………………………….……….......
Notices: …………………………………….. …… Earthing (if applicable) ……………..……..…...
Other Precautions: …………………………………………………………………………………………….…...
I acknowledge receipt of this permit and I am satisfied that the precautions taken are adequate and I accept
responsibility for undertaking the work specified above in a safe manner. I declare that neither myself nor those
persons within my control will attempt any task other than as specified above.
Signature: ……………………………………… (Task Supervisor) Date: …………….. Time: ………………
I certify that the work specified above has been completed/stopped*, and that the safety measures have/have not*
been removed.
Signature: ……………………………………… (Task Supervisor) Date: …………….. Time: ………………
I certify that the above safety measures have been removed and the plant/equipment* is safe to operate and is hereby
returned to normal service. This permit is hereby cancelled and his completed form is filed for record purposes.
Signature: ………………………………… (Electrical Engineer)) Date: …………….. Time: ………………

* Delete as appropriate
ADM/H&S/FM/2.11/3 01 March 2005 ELECTRICAL PERMIT 1 of 1

PERMIT FORM – EXCAVATION WORK/ROAD CLOSURE
Permit Issued To: Section/Contractor: ………………………….………………………………………………….......……….
Details of Excavation Work Required: ……………………………………………………………………………….......……..
Exact Location: …………………………………… Validity Period: From: ………….…......…. To: …………....………
“A” - ELECTRICAL CHECKS
Underground Electrical Cables Yes No - Overhead Electrical Cables Yes No
If present – specify exact location and precautions: …………................…………………………………………………………
MECHANICAL/CIVIL CHECK
Underground Pipelines/Drains etc. Yes No If present – specify exact location and Precautions
………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………....…………..
Name Position Signature Date
“B” - TELECOMMUNICATION CHECKS
Underground Running Telephone Cables etc.: Yes No - If present – specify exact location and Precautions
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………........
“C” - SAFETY DEPARTMENT CHECKS
Road Closure: Yes No If yes - Give full details: ………………………………………………………...
Safety Eequipment: (tick box) Road Signs Barriers Flashing Lights Traffic Lights
Other Instructions: …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
I have personally checked the site and conditions and permission is granted for work to commence under all the above
mentioned precautions.
“D” - ACCEPTANCE BY THE PERSON IN CHARGE OF THE OPERATION
I confirm that I fully understand and will implement all the safety requirements detailed in this permit, and that all
those under my control will be fully informed and instructed in its implementation.
“E” - COMPLETION: Work is stopped/completed. Site Inspected and made safe. Work permit cancelled.
PERSON IN CHARGE PERMIT ORIGINATOR DATE TIME

Name Signature Name Signature
ADM/H&S/FM/2.11/4 01 March 2005 EXCAVATION / ROAD CLOSURE PERMIT 1 of 1

SECTION 11
PERMIT TO WORK
INTRODUCTION
11.1 FORMULATING THE PERMIT TO WORK SYSTEM

11.2 PERMIT TO WORK GUIDANCE
11.2.1 CONTROL
11.2.2 ASSESMENTS OF RISK
11.2.3 OBJECTIVES
11.2.4 UNDERSTANDING
11.2.5 LINE MANAGEMENT
11.2.6 INDIVIDUAL RESPONSIBILITIES
11.2.7 CIRCUMSTANCES IN WHICH PERMITS MUST BE USED
11.3 ATTACHMENTS
HSE/FM/2.11/1 - HOT & COLD WORK PERMIT
HSE/FM/2.11/2 - CONFINED SPACE ENTRY PERMIT
HSE/FM/2.11/3 - ELECTRICAL PERMIT TO WORK FORM
HSE/FM/2.11/4 - EXCAVATION / ROAD CLOSURE PERMIT
SECTION 11
PART TWO
PERMIT TO WORK
INTRODUCTION
For work involved in areas defined as confined spaces or when isolation of either Electrical,
Mechanical or High Pressure Systems etc. is required, the most satisfactory way of ensuring a safe
system of work is by observing a permit to work system.
The permit to work is an operational document prepared by a responsible person who is familiar with
the work procedures, the hazards and all necessary precautions and who has carried out a thorough
assessment of the situation.
The permit gives a written authority that the area concerned is safe to enter and the work to start, and
lays down the time when it must stop. It sets out the correct sequence of work, the precise way in
which the work is to be done, the responsibilities of all persons involved, and the safety checks made
and all the precautions taken. The permit to work is not issued until the responsible person has put his
signature to this record, signifying that every step in the sequence of safety checks has been taken.
Ministerial Order No. 32 (year 1982) Article 7 & 9

ADM/H&S/Pt 2 01 March 2005 PERMIT TO WORK 1 of 4
PART TWO
11.1 FORMULATING THE PERMIT TO WORK SYSTEM

A typical permit to work system should lay down:
• location/description of work to be done
• types and details of hazard/risks involved
• certificate of isolation where appropriate
• safety/protective equipment required
• limitation of time
• authorisation for work to commence
• acceptance by person(s) carrying out the work
• clearance of isolation
• completion of work or renewing certificate
• cancellation of permit
11.2 PERMIT TO WORK GUIDANCE

11.2.1 control
A permit to work procedure is a formal written system used to control certain types of work
which are potentially hazardous.
The term Permit to Work refers to the pro-forma or certificate which forms a part of an overall
safe working system.
The essential features of Permits to Work are:-
• clear definition of who may authorise particular work.
• clear identification of who is responsible for specifying the necessary precautions to be

taken.
• effective instructions and training to all personnel in the issue and use of permits.
• performance monitoring in order to ensure that the safe system is implemented as

intended.
The permit is therefore a written document that gives authorisation to certain people to carry
out specific work within certain time constraints and which sets out the main precautions
needed to complete the work safely and without risk to health and safety of all those who are
involved.
Note: The mere issue of a Permit to Work does not simply give permission to carry out
dangerous work or, In itself, make a job safe.
11.2.2 assessment of risk

PART TWO
The purpose of a Permit to Work system is to ensure that proper consideration is given to
the risk of particular work and that these are assessed and controlled before work starts.
11.2.3 objectives
The primary objectives of the procedure are to ensure proper authorisation of designated
work which may be of certain types and type within certain designated areas (other than
normal production).
11.2.4 understanding
Management and Supervision must ensure that persons involved in such work fully
understand the exact:-
• identity, nature and extend of the job
• the hazards involved
• precautions to be taken
• limitations as to the extend of the work and time during which the work may be carried
out
11.2.5 line management

It is important to ensure that the line manager in direct charge of an area, location, unit,
plant, installation or equipment is fully aware of all the work being done
A system of control must be provided and provisions made for a record showing that the
nature of the work and the necessary precautions have been checked by the appropriate
persons.
Line management should also provide a formal hand - back procedure to ensure that the
part of the plant, installation or equipment affected by the work is in a safe condition before
normal work is resumed.
11.2.6 Individual responsibilities

Clear information, instruction, training and guidance should be given to all who have
responsibilities under Permit to Work procedure including:-
• management, and where appropriate, occupiers and owners
• contractors and sub contractors
• supervisors, foremen and charge hands
• other employees or non management and supervisory staff

PART TWO
11.2.7 circumtances in which permits must be used

These include potentially hazardous non – production work for which Permits to Work are
normally required e.g.
• maintenance • working in confined spaces
• repairs • electrical installations
• inspection • dismantling
• testing • hot/cold work
• alteration • modification
• construction • cleaning
• re-construction • excavation work
11.3 Attachments
Attachments A, B, C & D are samples of typical formats that can be used when a Permit to
Work is required.

SECTION 12
PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT

(PPE)
INTRODUCTION 1
12.1 DUTIES 2
12.2 SUITABILITY 2
12.3 HEAD PROTECTION 3
12.4 EYE PROTECTION 5
12.5 HEARING PROTECTION 7
12.6 FOOT PROTECTION 9
12.7 HAND PROTECTION 10
12.8 BODY PROTECTION 11
12.9 RESPIRATORY PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (RPE) 12
12.10 SAFETY HARNESSES AND BELTS 16
12.11 ENERGY ABSORBING DEVICES 17
SECTION 12
PART TWO
SECTION 12
PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT

(PPE)
INTRODUCTION
Where a risk cannot be controlled adequately by other means, employers have a duty to provide
suitable PPE.
The use of personal protection in the form of clothing or equipment should be considered as a last
resort in the minimisation of accidents. All too often there is insufficient effort to reduce or eliminate a
hazard, and too much reliance on personal protection to prevent the hazard giving rise to personal
injury.
When engineering control measures are not possible to be provided for total elimination of hazards,
the use of personal protective equipment is required.
There is considerable requirement within the Construction Industry for the use of personal protection,
even as a last resort, in view of the fact that, even on the safest of sites, hazards are not totally
eliminated.
In this section, required safety standards and advice is given on the following items:
Head Protection
Eye Protection
Hearing Protection
Foot Protection
Hand Protection
Body Protection
Respiratory Protective Equipment (RPE)
Safety Harness and Belts
Energy Absorbing Devices

British Standards referred to in applicable sections
Ministerial Order No. (32) Year 1982 – Article (1), (6), (9), (15), (22)
Part V–Industrial Safety Preventative Measures, Health & Social Care for Workers – Article (91)

ADM/H&S/Pt 2 01 March 2005 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT 1 of 19
PART TWO
12.1 DUTIES
12.1.1 employers
• assess hazards and risks prior to work to ensure proper selection and adequate provision
of personal protective equipment.
• ensure arrangements for employees to report loss or defects to enable replacement or

repair, before the employee concerned is allowed to re-start work.
• equip all visitors with a minimum of hard hats and safety boots.
• erect signage to inform of PPE requirements when entering a site area and near site
hazards (see signage section)
• provide suitable storage arrangements for when PPE is not in use.
• ensure the user is trained in :
- the hazards of the activity that PPE is required for,
- how the PPE is used,
- limitations of the PPE,
- maintenance, storage and inspection requirements.
12.1.2 employees
• be trained before using any PPE
• make full and proper use of PPE.
• care for PPE and follow any maintenance requirements.
• report any defects or loss, and where appropriate, return PPE to storage after use.
12.2 SUITABILITY
12.2.1 recognised marking
• All PPE shall either have a BS kite mark or CE mark (both being recognised marks
for PPE tested and approved to International Standards).
12.2.2 inspection and maintenance

• properly trained persons should examine PPE in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations prior to issuing.
• the wearer should also inspect it before use to ensure that it is clean and not defective.

PART TWO
12.2.3 checks
To be suitable, PPE must:
• be assessed as appropriate both to the risk and the work condition.
• be selected to take account of factors such as length of time it needs to be worn and the
need to see and hear.
• be capable of fitting the wearer correctly.
• be compatible with other PPE which may need to be worn (e.g. safety helmets and
hearing protection).
• carry a CE mark, BS Kite mark or other mark to internationally recognised standard.
• be comfortable and convenient to the wearer.
• allow wearer to be selective and have a degree of choice, where appropriate, before final
selection is made.
12.3 HEAD PROTECTION

In the vast majority of construction operations, there is a foreseeable risk of persons
incurring an injury to the head, either due to falling material, or due to the head striking
against another object.
12.3.1 required safety standards

• a safety helmet is required to be Examples below are situations where
used on construction sites, head protection may not be required,
excavation work, overhead crane but will still have to be worn to cross the
operation, low structures / pipes / site:
beams or wherever there is risk of
∗ maintenance or decorative work
head injury.
on completed buildings where
• All contracts shall be classed as there is sufficient headroom
“Hard Hat Areas” and notices shall and no multi layers of working
be displayed. levels
• anyone having control over other ∗ inside site offices, temporary

persons at work has a duty to ensure accommodation etc.
that head protection is worn. This
∗ inside the cabs of vehicles and
applies to main contractors, sub
plant, if provided with falling
contractors and also to individuals
object protection
such as site managers, foremen,
engineers and surveyors. ∗ when work is at ground level,
e.g. roadworks such as kerb
laying or resurfacing

PART TWO
12.3.2 main types of head protection
industrial safety helmets/hard hats
should conform to BS EN 397 Industrial hard hats - heavy

duty, or an equivalent standard. Photo shows safety helmet
shell and section through to the harness.
industrial scalp protectors/bump caps
should conform to BS EN 812 Industrial hard hats – light

duty, used as protection against abrasion or bruising in
confined spaces, such as ducts etc. They are intended only
to protect against minor risks and must not be used where
industrial safety helmets are required.
12.3.3 use and maintenance of head protection

• for the harness to be properly • not to paint, mark or label a helmet,
adjusted, but not too tight, and for as this can affect its protective
the helmet not to be worn at an properties.
angle.
• to minimise exposure to sunlight,
• to keep the clearance between extreme heat or cold, chemicals etc.
helmet and harness; i.e. nothing
• to remove all dirt and moisture after
must be carried in the helmet.
use with warm soapy water.
• to handle the helmet with care.
• to provide places to store correctly,
• for regular inspection of the helmet when not in use.
shell for cracks and signs of wear
• to request a replacement, if the
and of the harness for loose or
helmet is lost or the harness is
broken straps, worn stitching etc.
damaged.

PART TWO
12.3.4 accessories
When determining the type of helmet to be supplied, consideration should be given to other
protective equipment which may be needed to be worn. Equipment, which can be mounted
on safety helmets, includes:
chin straps
used for work that might cause the helmet to fall off e.g. steel
fixing, where much of the work is done whilst bending over.
ear defenders
built in brackets for the attachment of hearing protectors when

working in a noisy environment.
face shields
may be fitted to certain helmets by a swivel mount fitting. These may

be needed on operations where there is a danger of flying particles,
chemicals etc.
lamp brackets
these allow lights to be fitted to safety helmets for work in dark

areas.
12.4 EYE PROTECTION

• should be to BS EN 166 which covers general industrial eye protectors including
spectacles, goggles and face shields.
• suitable face and eye protection must be worn by employees to protect face/eyes against
any flying particles / splash of chemical / hot solutions.
• impact resistant safety glasses with side shields / safety goggles/full face shield suitable
for grinding, buffing, chipping operations shall be provided and used.
• welding masks with appropriate filter glasses must be used when performing welding
operations and be to BS 1542.
• in addition, eye wash fountain shall be readily available at the site. In remote locations,
eye wash bottles may be substituted.

PART TWO
12.4.2 types of eye protectors

safety spectacles
these include those with robust Acetate frames with

toughened glass lenses and Lightweight Nylon frames.
Side shields are fitted for lateral protection. Safety
spectacles are available in both Grade 1 and Grade 2
standards.
safety goggles (box goggles)
wide vision goggles, usually with lenses giving General

Purpose Grade 2 or Grade 1 impact protection. The
ventilation styles offered cover most industrial hazards,
e.g. dust, chemical and gas hazards. “Antimist” and
“Molten Metal Splash” approved goggles are also
available. This type of eye protection can be worn over
ordinary prescription goggles.
welding goggles and shields
fibreglass polyester welding shields are available either as

hand shields, or, as with face shields, fitted to the safety
helmet lens holder. Welding filters are supplied depending on
the wearer and job requirements.
welding spectacles welding goggles welding shield
face shields
lightweight face shields in acetate, polycarbonate, etc. are

manufactured for total eye and face protection and can be
worn secured to the front of the safety helmet. Styles vary
(brow guards, flare etc.) as does length of visor. Models are
available for antiglare and gas welding. Light mesh type face
shields are available for use with chain saws etc. when cutting
timber.

PART TWO
12.4.3 eye protectors are marked as follows
Type/Hazard Marking
General purpose industrial eye BS EN 166 S

protection
Impact Grade 2 BS EN 166 F
Impact Grade 1 BS EN 166 B
Molten Metal goggles BS EN 166 - 9
Chemical goggles BS EN 166 - 3
Dust goggles BS EN 166 - 4
Gastight goggles BS EN 166 - 5
Lens filters (for welding) BS 679
Face and hand shields : helmets for BS 1542
protecting during welding
Note: Glass lens supplied for use in impact and/or molten metal eye protectors in
combination with plastic lenses, must be additionally marked with the word “outer”.
12.5 HEARING PROTECTION

Ear defenders are used to prevent loss of hearing when persons would otherwise be
exposed to levels of noise which are considered to be hazardous.
The maximum levels to which persons may be exposed are expressed as a function of
intensity and time, e.g. 90 decibels [db (A)] for a period of 8 hours, or its equivalent This
value is quoted as the ‘equivalent continuos sound level’ or 90dB(A) Leq (8hr). The noise
levels in any particular working environment should be determined by measurement with
meters but, as a rough guide, if it is necessary to shout over a distance of 1 metre or less in
order to he heard, then the noise level may be excessive.
• persons working in areas with excessive noise above 90 dB(A), shall wear ear muffs/ear
plugs.
• hearing protection should conform to BS EN 352 Hearing Protectors: Safety

Requirements and Testing.
• high noise level areas should be identified and appropriate warning notices should be
exhibited to warn employees.

PART TWO
12.5.2 types of hearing protection

In order to combat noise, which cannot reasonably practicably be, reduced sufficiently at
source, ear protection, which may range from the simplest forms of ear plugs to extremely
efficient ear muffs and noise helmets, must be used.
ear plugs
These are effective in relatively low noise level areas and many different types are now
available e.g:
• disposable types of wax impregnated cotton wool, glass

down or similar materials with are shaped and inserted in
the ear canal.
• permanent moulded pre shaped plugs of fiber or plastic for

insertion into the ear canal.
• foam ear plugs which are compressed in order to fit into the
ear and expand to maximise protection.
Notes: - plain cotton plugs do not give adequate protection.

- some ear plugs are supplied in different sizes and it is important that the
correct size is used..
ear muffs
• these consist of two rigid cups or shells which cover

the ears and are fitted with absorbent material. They
fit to the head by means of soft sealing rings known
as ear seals. The ear cups are connected to suitable
headbands so designed to maintain cups firmly
against the ear. Seals are either fluid or foam filled.
Note: - Fluid seals may not be sufficiently robust to
withstand the rigours of the construction
environment.
12.5.3 communication systems

These are available incorporating receivers in the ear cups and are operated, generally on a
loop transmitting system, to enable the wearer to receive messages.
An alternative is a two way wired communication system, incorporating noise cancelling
boom microphones and amplifiers in the ear cups that can be connected together allowing
two way communications in noisy areas. This could have particular application where noisy
work has to he carried out in confined spaces, such as sewers, where effective
communication is essential.

PART TWO
12.5.4 selection of hearing protection

level of protection
The level of protection (amount of noise reduction) offered by hearing protectors, known as
the attenuation, will be dependent on the frequency of the sound source. Each manufacturer
of ear protection will have available an attenuation chart or graph showing the level of
attenuation at a range of different frequencies. Also quoted will be a standard deviation and
this figure should he deducted from the attenuation value to determine the assumed
protection. This is only if the equipment is properly fitted and adequately maintained.
compatibility with other PPE
Hearing protection, particularly ear muffs, should be selected so that it is compatible with
other items of protective clothing which may have to be worn.
12.6 FOOT PROTECTION

• safety footwear should conform to: BS EN 345, BS EN 346 & BS EN 347 or equivalent.
• standard safety boots with metal toe caps must be worn by all personnel on site and in
places where foot injury could occur.
• in specific operations, rubber boots with steel toe should be used.
12.6.2 protective footwear is used to

• provide protection to the toes in the event of material falling on the foot by the use of a
steel toecap built into the boot or on the outside surface.
• prevent injury by the penetration of nails and similar sharp objects. Steel midsoles are
standard only on some boots and shoes and is preferred for building construction sites.
• provide protection against the ingress of water.

Rubber/wellington boots are used when persons are required to
work with their feet in wet substances, such as concrete or mud
and for work in places such as sewers.
• provide a good grip on surfaces which are potentially

slippery.
• provide protection during certain specific operations, e.g

special electrical safety shoes should be used by those
involved in electrical trades.

PART TWO
12.6.3 selection
The selection of foot protection will depend primarily on the assessed risk. In general, safety
boots rather than shoes are recommended for site work as they provide support for the
ankle on uneven or soft ground. Where there is a risk of injury from penetration or crushing,
protective steel toecaps and midsoles will be required.
comfort
• comfort is an important factor to be considered particularly in the selection of

rubber/wellington boots which are obviously required to be 100% waterproof. Rubber and
PVC boots are inexpensive, but they are not permeable; moisture is kept out, but
perspiration is kept in. With such boots the wearing of socks is recommended, but it is
important that these are regularly washed.
• the weight factor particularly with boots having safety features such as steel toe caps and
midsoles can he important with respect to foot comfort.
• steel toe caps, designed to protect toes from falling objects may bruise and chafe the
toes across the foot joint after prolonged wear. It is important to choose the correct size
of footwear allowing for the type of socks to be worn.
12.7 HAND PROTECTION

• hand gloves must be used in jobs likely to
cause injury to hands.
• gloves must be used near moving machinery

parts.
• PVC/rubber gloves must be used when

handling chemicals.
• electricians using tested rubber gloves must

check them for defects prior to start of work.
• select and use the gloves suitable for the job.
12.7.2 selection
The first consideration in the selection of industrial protective gloves must be to identify the
hazard to be overcome and the handling requirements.
The handling of small components will require that the glove must be highly flexible and give
good dexterity to the worker.

PART TWO
12.7.3 considerations when selecting

abrasion
gloves which are used to protect against abrasion will usually be of
leather, or those having leather palms. Where gloves are to be worn in
the wet, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) will give a high standard of water, oil
and chemical resistant, in addition to preventing abrasion.
grip
where grip is important, gloves made of a base material such as knitted
nylon or cloth with a latex coating, are suitable
chemical resistance
air-impermeable (plastic or rubber) gloves will be necessary for

operations such as degreasing, paint spraying and pesticide handling.
heat resistance
this will be required by welders, burners and other such as those working
on live heating systems. Leather gauntlets will be appropriate for these
trades
water resistance
resistance to water and other fluids is rarely a quality which is

required on its own and PVC gloves resistant to abrasion would
normally be suitable.
12.8 BODY PROTECTION

• wear proper protective clothing/coverall.( Loose or baggy clothing is not permitted in work
areas).
• a PVC apron must be worn against splash from any chemical or corrosive substances,
• a leather apron is required to be worn by welders and others where there is potential
hazard of hot metal/sparks.
• full PVC suit to cover full body is required for persons entering tanks/vessels/sumps/pits
to protect against any chemical/corrosive substance.

PART TWO
12.8.2 types of body protection

wet weather clothing
usually In the form of PVC either one or two piece suits, and often in company livery. PVC
clothing is particularly prone to condensation on the inside and the incorporation of vents will
help alleviate the problem. Clothing manufactured from a breathable fabric (Gortex) is
available, but is quite expensive.
high visibility clothing
normally in the form of waistcoats or jackets for use when workers

are working adjacent to moving traffic, either on public highways,
or on such operations as earth moving. These garments will
incorporate retro reflective strips front and rear.
overalls
these will normally be made of poly cotton and arrangements must

he made for regular cleaning- Specialist trades such as asbestos
strippers and lead burners will have lightweight overalls suited to
the operation; such overalls may be of the disposable type.
leather aprons
used by welders and burners to provide protection against sparks and molten metal which
might otherwise ignite their clothing
trousers
incorporating ballistic nylon or similar material, are available to give round leg protection to
chain saw operators.
12.9 RESPIRATORY PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (RPE)

Whether toxic materials, which are liable to produce, dust, gases or vapours are being used,
or are present in the working environment, there is always a respiratory hazard. Ideally, the
contaminant should be controlled at source to minimise the hazard, but this is often not
possible. If it is necessary to provide RPE the first step is to determine whether the
environment is deficient in oxygen, in which case, air supplied equipment (breathing
apparatus) must be used; if sufficient oxygen is present, but the air is contaminated air,
purifying equipment (respirators) can be used.
The overall choice of equipment is wide. As the wrong choice could seriously affect the
health of the wearer, or lead to asphyxiation, expert advice is essential combined with
training and information being given to the wearer. In addition, cleaning and maintenance
facilities for the equipment must be provided to ensure continued effective protection.

PART TWO

• dust mask respirators must be worn to protect against dust particles.
• chemical cartridge respiration must be worn when painting/spraying solvent or chemicals.
• when there is potential for the presence of toxic gas/vapor or oxygen deficient
atmosphere, the self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) should be used.
• only authorized /qualified personnel can issue Respiratory Protective Equipment.
• persons trained /certified on the usage of self contained breathing apparatus shall be
engaged and the work should be done under direct supervision. The basic tests to
ensure proper fitting of face masks must be done before each operation.
• proper selection and use of RPE should be ensured by taking into consideration
hazardous operation, contaminant, time, protection from the particular equipment,
limitations, state of health of individual.
• when working with asbestos, staff shall be provided with respiratory equipment approved
for use with asbestos which does not allow penetration by, or retain dust and which
should be a close fit with head cover.
• when engaged in grit blasting, the use of air supplied hood is essential If blasting in direct
contact with the dust / grit.
12.9.2 types
Inhaled air is drawn through a medium that is designed to remove most of the contaminant.
It is imperative that the correct medium is used for the particular contaminant and, where
dust and fibres are concerned the actual size range of the particles is an important
consideration. Filters are used to collect dust and fibres whereas, for gases and vapours, a
chemical absorbent is used usually contained within a replaceable cartridge.
disposable respirators
manufactured from filtering material and are usually termed
filtering facepeices or facemask. The facepiece is at a
negative pressure.
half mask respirator

made from rubber or flexible plastic and designed to cover nose
and mouth. They are fitted with a single or two side-by-side
replaceable cartridges, different ones being available to protect
against a range of dust. gases and vapours. The facepeice is at
a negative pressure.

PART TWO
full-facepeice respirator
are made from rubber or flexible plastic, but designed to cover the nose, mouth and eyes.
The filter median is contained in a cartridge or canister directly coupled to the facepiece or
connected via a flexible tube with the appropriate filter fitted, it is suitable for either dust
gas or vapour and the facepiece is at a negative pressure.
positive pressure powered respirators

have filtered air supplied to the breathing zone, via a flexible tube from a battery powered
blower. The filter fan and battery are usually fixed around the wearers waist. Alternatively
positive pressure to the breathing zone may be provided by a blower and filter mounted in
the respirator, with only the battery fixed to the wearers waist, as shown opposite.
12.9.3 breathing apparatus

Used primarily where the atmosphere is deficient in oxygen as may occur in confined
spaces. However it is sometimes used in other circumstances where the atmosphere is
contaminated, e.g. in the removal of asbestos insulation and coating. The equipment
consists of a facepiece by which the wearer can breathe uncontaminated air, either drawn
from fresh air or supplied by compressed air.
fresh air breathing apparatus
consists of a full facepiece, with insulation and exhalation valves connected by a non
kinking hose to fresh air. The hose is normally less than 25mm in diameter and should not
exceed 9m in length unless breathing air is assisted by means of a hand or mechanical
power to maintain a positive pressure in the facepiece.
compressed air-line
breathing apparatus, in which an is supplied to the

facepiece through an air line from a compressor. These
devices depend on a good face fit. They may supply air
on demand (by suction demand or positive pressure
demand), or they may provide air continuously to the
facepeice.
self contained breathing apparatus
in which the air supply is provided to a full face piece

from cylinders carried on the back. Air may be supplied
to the wearer on demand, or the exhalation and
demand valve may be so designed that a positive
pressure is maintained inside the facepiece.

PART TWO
12.9.4 selection
RPE should be selected so that the wearer does not breathe level of contaminants above
the relevant occupational exposure limits. A wide range of equipment is available, which
have various limitations in respect of efficiency and wearability. Proper selection is essential
if wearers are to receive adequate protection.
Heat stress call also be a factor when working in hot and humid atmospheres, or when
clothing is sealed as in asbestos stripping. The cooling effect of the supplied air in power-
assisted equipment and the low breathing resistance, make it more acceptable than non-
powered equipment.
Freedom of movement must also be considered. With compressed air line, breathing
apparatus movement is restricted by the air line, which must not become entangled or
kinked. Self-contained breathing apparatus does not have this limitation, but is bulky and
heavy; power assisted respirators are lighter.
12.9.5 use of RPE

Where a face piece is incorporated, a good seal is essential. Where it is possible to close
the inlet of the equipment, e.g. by a card over the filter, the wearer should carry out the
following “negative pressure test” each time the respirator is worn:-
• after the harness straps have been properly tensioned and adjusted, the inlet should be
lightly closed and the wearer should inhale gently. The face piece should collapse
slightly. Excessive leakage is indicated if the face piece does not collapse, in which case
the equipment should be readjusted and the test repeated. If excessive leakage is still
indicated, it is unlikely that the equipment will be suitable to the wearer. Alternative
equipment should then be made available for test.
In the case of power assisted respirators fitted with face masks, loss of air flow will be
indicated by increased breathing resistance.
12.9.6 inspection and storage

All equipment, with the exception of disposable types, require cleaning, disinfecting and
inspection after use and before wearing by another person, and properly stored when not in
use.
12.9.7 training
Training in the use and application of RPE is essential for all types of equipment. Only
persons who are thoroughly familiar with the equipment and know the procedure to adopt in
an emergency should wear RPE.

PART TWO
12.10 SAFETY HARNESSES AND BELTS

The main reason for the use of safety harnesses is to limit the distance of any fall and
thereby minimising the risk of injury. They will also be used to facilitate the rescue or persons
working in confined spaces, such as manholes etc. Safety belts are not suitable for arresting
a fall, but only as a restraint to prevent access to a danger area.

• safety belts with life lines must be worn when hazards of falling from height exist or when
working on elevated platforms or baskets. Select the proper safety belt and use it.
• safety belts shall be examined periodically. Defective and worn out safety belts must
never be used.
• rescue safety belts with harness / life line must be worn when an employee is working in
a confined space.
• when using ladders, a fall arrest device connected to body harness must be used.
12.10.2types of harnesses and belts

full body harness
this comprises straps, fittings, buckles etc. suitably

arranged to support the whole body of a person and to
restrain the wearer during a fall and after the arrest of a
fall. The harness should be fitted with a lanyard which will
limit the fall to maximum of 2m. The use of an energy
absorber to further minimise risk of injury during arrest, is
strongly recommended.
general purpose belts and chest harnesses
are used in situations where short duration work is necessary in areas where provision or
fall prevention measures would be impracticable. Belts and harnesses should be fitted with
a line of the appropriate length to prevent access to the danger area.
rescue harness
a rescue harness is used for protecting or rescuing workmen entering dangerous enclosed
places It must be capable of reasonable adjustment, be easy to fit in an emergency, and
be used in such a way that the fall is limited to 600mm.

PART TWO
12.10.3 use of harnesses and belts

It is of the utmost importance that, whenever a safety belt or harness is provided, there is
also an effective means of fixing it to the structure at all times while the protection is
required. All too often, a belt or harness is provided in the hope that the wearer may find
somewhere to attach it. It is also vital that that the fixing point for a harness is strong enough
to withstand the snatch load of a fall. The use of two lanyards will sometimes be necessary
to ensure constant attachment whilst moving.
The distance of fall should be as small as is possible, and to that end, the harness lanyard
should be fixed to the structure, or fixing point, as high as practicable above the working
position.
12.11 ENERGY ABSORBING DEVICES

An energy absorber should be part of a fall arrest system whenever possible. In order to
reduce the possibility of injury to the body in the event of a fall, energy absorbers have been
developed. These devises installed between harness and the anchorage point, allow the fall
to be slowed down, thus absorbing energy and reducing the final load on the body.
12.11.1 types of energy absorbing devices available
A pack containing a strip of 350 lbs nylon tear web,

parallel with a main load-bearing web, together linking
the nylon lanyard to the safety harness. In the event of a
fall, the tear web absorbs the shock as it tears apart.
A corrugated curved stay of metal designed to reduce

the shock by straightening out under a shock load.
A simple rubber labrinth through which the anchorage

rope is threaded.

PART TWO
12.11.2 selection
The selection of energy absorbing devices is as important as the proper selection of your
body belt or full-body harness.
• one of the most important aspects of selecting energy absorbing devices is fully
planning the operation before it is put into use. Probably the most overlooked
component is planning for suitable anchorage points.
• lanyards should be kept as short as possible to reduce the possibility of serious injury
and should not exceed 2 metres.
• ensure that forces incurred during a fall would be less than 1,800 lbs.
• ensure the anchorage point and device will take the dynamic loads generated in a fall.
• energy - absorbing device selected should match the particular work situation, and any
possible free fall distance should be kept to a minimum.
• consideration should be given to the particular work environment and conditions. For
example, the presence of acids, dirt, moisture, oil, grease, etc., and their
effect on the device, should be evaluated. Hot or cold environments may
also have an adverse effect on the system. Wire rope should not be used
where an electrical hazard is anticipated.
12.11.3 use
• choose the correct type of anchorage point or restraint system.
• choose the correct type of equipment.
• assess the possible free fall distance.
• check for dangerous obstacles which a person could hit or swing into.
12.11.4 inspection
• check the equipment prior to use for damage (If in doubt seek expert advice
or replace it)
Note: If a harness and lanyard has been subjected to a fall, they should be disposed of and
replaced. The human eye cannot evaluate the stresses that have been put on the
equipment and next time they may not work. A suitably qualified person should
inspect energy absorbing devices, anchorages and systems annually or following a
fall.
12.11.5.1 training
• ensure you have received comprehensive instructions from the supplier as to
the devices proper use and application.

PART TWO
• train personnel in the correct use of equipment and the procedures that
should be followed.
• put in place emergency procedures and have means available to promptly rescue an
employee should a fall occur, since the suspended employee may not
be able to reach a work level independently.

SECTION 13
SITE TRANSPORT
INTRODUCTION 1
13.1 TRAINING 2
13.2 VEHICLE SAFETY CHECKS 2
13.3 SELECTION OF DRIVERS/OPERATORS 2
13.4 GENERAL SAFETY RULES 3
SECTION 13
H&S Codes of Practice Manual
PART TWO
SECTION 13
SITE TRANSPORT
INTRODUCTION
Transport accidents continue to contribute to the overall toll of injury and consequent personal misery.
About one quarter of all fatal industrial accidents involving transport occur in construction. Common
sense therefore suggests the need for clear rules and systems of work to ensure the safe use of
vehicles in the construction environment.

In compliance with Abu Dhabi Police Traffic Regulations

ADM/H&S/Pt 2 01 March 2005 SITE TRANSPORT 1 of 3
PART TWO
13.1 TRAINING
The provision of adequate training and instruction is a legal requirement as well as being
essential to good general safety management. This is particularly so in regard to the safe
use of mechanically propelled vehicles.
13.2 VEHICLE SAFETY CHECKS

• at the commencement of each day/shift the driver should check the following items as
appropriate :
∗ fuel
∗ water
∗ oil
∗ tyre pressure and soundness
∗ wheel nuts (in place and properly tightened)
∗ efficiency of brakes and steering mechanism
∗ efficiency of lights, horn, reversing light/klaxon, direction indicators, flashing beacon,

windscreen wipers/ washers, etc.
∗ batteries – for secure placing, cleanness, corrosion, and correct electrolyte level
before use and charging.
• any defects, damage or other condition considered by the driver as being likely to make
the operation of the vehicle unsafe should be reported immediately.
13.3 SELECTION OF DRIVERS/OPERATORS
Persons selected to drive site vehicles should be physically fit with normal eyesight and
hearing. They should be mature, reliable and have the capacity to carry out the work in a
responsible manner.

PART TWO
13.4 GENERAL SAFETY RULES

• the authorised driver is at all times responsible for the safe operation of his vehicle. He
must ensure that all movements are made smoothly and at a safe speed. Site speed
limits must not be exceeded. Unauthorised persons must not be permitted to operate the
vehicle.
• the driver must ensure that the vehicle is not overloaded and that the load is secure.
• the vehicle should be kept tidy and free from tools, rubbish or other materials which could
obstruct the controls.
• passengers must only be carried on vehicles, trucks, etc. designed for the purpose and
fitting with fixed seating. Vehicles which do not meet this standard should display a notice
stating “NO PASSENGERS”.
• vehicles must not be manoeuvred too close to excavations so that they run the risk of
causing the sides to collapse. There is also the danger that a laden vehicle may fail to
stop at the edge.
• the driver should not leave his vehicle unattended with the engine running. When parked
on an incline, in addition to applying the parking brake, the engine should be left in gear
and wheel chocks used to prevent movement.
• before reversing the vehicle, the driver must ensure that there is no obstruction in his
path and should obtain the assistance of a banksman or signalman to accompany him
and direct the operation. Where appropriate, audible/visual warning devices should be
fitted to indicate that a vehicle is reversing.
• no vehicle may be used on the public highway unless:
∗ the driver is in possession of a valid current driving licence issued under the
authority of the Road Traffic Acts:
∗ the vehicle is licensed for use on the public highway and complies with Department
of Transport inspection and test requirements.
• when an emergency or rescue towing operation is necessary, the connection between
the towing vehicle and the casualty should, wherever possible, be by means of a solid
bar and purpose-made towing apparatus. Lifting gear should not be used unless this is
unavoidable, in which case it should not be used again in a lifting operation until it has
been re-tested/examined, as appropriate, by a competent person.
• no person must remain on any vehicle, truck or wagon whilst it is being loaded by
mechanical means if he is endangered by doing so. Where a falling objects protective
structure is fitted to a vehicle, it is normally acceptable for a driver to remain in his cab.

SECTION 14
MOBILE PLANT & EQUIPMENT
INTRODUCTION 1
14.1 GENERAL PLANT AND EQUIPMENT 2

14.1.1 drivers, operators and banksmen 2
14.1.2 maintenance 2
14.1.3 general precautions 3
14.1.4 tyre changing 3
14.2 SPECIFIC TYPES OF PLANT AND EQUIPMENT 4
14.2.1 earthmoving plant 4
14.2.2 fork lifts and telescopic materials handlers
14.3 PRECAUTIONS WITH SOME MISCELLANEOUS MOBILE PLANT 14
SECTION 14
PART TWO
SECTION 14
MOBILE PLANT & EQUIPMENT
INTRODUCTION
Mechanical plant and equipment in use in the Construction Industry are available in a wide and ever
increasing variety. The categorisation of such plant and equipment can be produced as follows:
∗ earthmoving Plant
∗ miscellaneous Mobile Plant
This section covers hazards common to the above categories in addition to those hazards specifically
associated with the safe control of individual items of mobile plant and equipment.

Ministerial Order No 32 (year 1982 Articles 11 - 14
In compliance with Abu Dhabi Police Traffic Section Regulations

ADM/H&S/Pt 2 01 March 2005 MOBILE PLANT & EQUIPMENT 1 of 14
PART TWO
14.1 GENERAL PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
14.1.1 drivers, operators and banksmen

The minimum required, but not limited to, qualifications of all drivers, operators and
banksmen of mechanical plant and equipment, are as follows:
• competence in performance of their duties.
• attainment of the legal age (as per Applicable UAE Legislation Section above) and to be
eligible of driving and operating such equipment.
• achievement of training on the correct operation of the specific plant or equipment, the
limitations of its use, and the hazards which exist if, it is not used properly.
• full awareness of usage instructions for the plant and equipment that will be operated by
them.
• ability to maintain stability of the mobile type plant they use and its load at all times.
• awareness that mobile plants should be parked on firm, level ground, with the engine
turned-off, brakes on, and any load lowered to the ground.
employers responsibilities
• ensuring that their drivers, operators and banksmen have the minimum of the
qualifications and achievements mentioned above.
• establishing a procedure to ensure that only drivers and operators, holding Certificates of
Authorization issued by the appropriate authority, use their equipment.
14.1.2 maintenance
It is only after proper maintenance that mechanical plant or equipment will remain safe to
operate. In this regard, the measures to be undertaken by the person, or department
assigned by the user to do the maintenance of the plants or equipment, are as follows:
• establishing a programme whereby every plant and mechanical equipment is regularly

and systematically inspected, serviced, maintained and repaired as necessary.
• maintaining during repair and maintenance activities a safe system of work whereby
permit to work system, like lock-off systems, are established to ensure that no part of the
equipment can accidentally go into motion while work on it is in process.
• ensuring that measures like the propping of raised attachments (e.g. bodies, cabs, etc.)
are applied to prevent the occurrence of accidents as a result of accidental lowering.

PART TWO
14.1.3 general precautions
General precaution measures, as listed below, are to be seriously implemented by all

involved persons. These measures can be summarized as follows:
• minimum clearance distances are to be preserved whenever operating plant and

equipment are used in the vicinity of overhead, buried electrical cables and underground
gas mains.
• clear visibility of mobile plant drivers should be secured at all times. The following
measures must be secured:
∗ restricting speed limits, applying one-way traffic system within the site, in addition to
the spraying of water can help prevent dust from impairing visibility.
∗ keeping all persons not performing any activity related to the work under execution,
well outside the work boundary of working plant and equipment.
• driver of mobile plant should be provided with well-trained banksmen as necessary.
• drivers should never remain on a vehicle being loaded unless falling objects protective
structures/ cabins are used.
• drivers should always use the safe means of access to the cab (like ladders, steps, stairs
etc.) that should always be provided.
• noise produced by powerful plants should be reduced at source to a minimum. Persons

performing work around noisy plant must wear hearing protection, and, where applicable,
protective clothing. (refer to section 1)
• all mobile plant should be properly equipped with lights, side and rear view mirrors.
14.1.4 tyre changing

Failure to follow proper tyre changing procedures can lead to serious accidents, injuries or
death. The general guidelines for tyre changing are the following:
• only trained persons having the proper tools are to mount or dismount, inflate or deflate
tyres which should be carried out following the manufacturers’ recommended
procedures, especially if the tyre is ballasted.
• maximum inflation pressures specified by the manufacturer should be posted on the

equipment using a clear label as close as possible to the tyres location.
• persons should be trained to distinguish between the different required precautions with
the different designs and sizes of tyres.
• the jack should never be relied upon on its own to support a machine during the changing
of a tyre; sound and substantial timber must be used as a support for the jack.

PART TWO
• before removal, tyres must be

deflated and the pressure in the
stem should be decreased by
depressing the valve core stem.
• during the inflating of a tyre, either

a safety cage or extension to the
air hose should be used to prevent
any accident or occurrence to
Fig. 1 - Example of a tyre cage mounted on a fixed
persons standing over or in front of column which will effectively protect the
the tyre. (see Fig.1) operator should the tyre explode.
14.2 SPECIFIC TYPES OF PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
14.2.1 earthmoving plant

general
• when earthmoving plant are driven on the highway, tooth guards should always be fitted
to excavator bucket teeth.
• when loading/unloading earthmoving plant on to a transporter vehicle, measures to be

taken are: (see Fig.2)
∗ the plant operator should supervise the loading/unloading of the plant under the
directions of the transporter driver to ensure that such activities are done at low
speed and safely.
∗ the vehicle should be designed to carry loads exceeding the anticipated maximum
floor load to be carried.
∗ the carried plant should be securely fixed so that there is no possibility of potential
moving, toppling, or falling off the vehicle during transport. Brakes are to be also
engaged.
∗ best arrangements of the plant on the transporter vehicle should be made so as to

eliminate the possibility of the load blocking the driver’s visibility, especially to the
rear.
∗ the carried plant should also be loaded in such a way as to keep its center of gravity
as low as possible, and as close as possible to the centerline of the vehicle in order
to increase its stability.
∗ the availability of sufficient area to prevent the striking of the machine with
obstructions, is to be checked.

PART TWO
∗ the transporter on which the plant is loaded should be parked on a firm and level
ground and never on a ramp with an unsafe angle.
Lashings from rear

towing point prevent
forward movement and
movement of dipper arm
Lashings from front towing point through idler

sprockets prevent rearward movement. Note
tracks butted against stowed loading ramps
Fig.2 – Diagram showing how to safely load an excavator onto a transporter.
Type Brief about machine

crawler tractors All-purpose powerful
(dozers) machines for pushing and
pulling. Usually noisy and
with restricted vision.
Measures and Precautions to be Undertaken
• Require supervision of the machine and nearby site activities.
• Special care to be made in soft fill areas since there is possibility of sinking of the lower track deeper than
the upper one.

PART TWO

scrapers Motorised scrapers are
fast movers of soils.
• Require well maintained haul roads for safety
• Minimum clearance to be kept between closely operating scrapers is 25m
• To be in low gear during downhill travel
• During travel, the bowl should be kept high enough to prevent any collision with low objects and ground, and
low enough to prevent any instability occurrence on turns.

360º Excavators Obviously, used for
excavating and are
available in two types:
Mounted on tracks and
Mounted on wheels
• A minimum clearance of 60 cm is to be kept in order to allow for tail swing.
• No person should be present in the work area of the excavator. When necessary, the person may access
this zone only after informing the operator by signs or radio.
• Size of the bucket as recommended by the manufacturer should never be exceeded.
• The machine should be positioned so that the wheels or tracks are at 90ºto the workface to allow for rapid
withdrawal when necessary.
• The bucket should not be extended too far in the downhill direction so as to prevent unstable conditions.
• It is advisable to use stabilizing devices when wheels-mounted excavators are in operation.

PART TWO

180º backhoe Serving in excavating
loaders and/or loading excavated
materials.
In addition to those applicable to excavator (item c above), the following is applicable to backhoe:-
• Backhoe attachment must be set in the travel position when the front shovel is used.
• The shovel should be lowered to ground whenever the backhoe is operated in poor soils conditions which
could cause stabilisers to sink.

trenchers Equipment used to make
trenches
• Correctness of Trenching depths is to be verified immediately before start, especially when working in multi-
service areas.
• Operator should not rely on the clutch slip mechanism which could stop the operation when a boulder is
encountered. He should manually disengage the digging mechanism before attempt of removal of boulders.

PART TWO

loading shovels Equipment mounted on
tracks or wheels and
used to excavate loose
soils and other materials,
transport them for short
distances and to load
transporter vehicles.
• Bucket should be carried low during travel.
• Operators must check the rear before and during reversing the machine as for the majority of the time, this
equipment is operated in reverse direction.

graders Essentially used as a
shaping and finishing
machine.
High-speed equipment
designed to work on
slopes.
• When working on slopes, special precautions are to be made in presence of wet soil conditions.
• Flags are to be fixed to the blade in addition to lights whenever the grader machine is working on a road
used by other equipment.

PART TWO
14.2.2 fork lifts and telescopic materials handlers

introduction
The following guidance applies, in general terms, to the use of both Rough Terrain Fork Lifts
and Telescopic Materials Handlers. The expression "Fork Lifts" will be used in this chapter to
cover both types of machine.
operators and banksmen
The efficiency and safety in use of fork lifts depends mainly on the competence of those who
control, maintain and operate the equipment.
Operators must.
• Before anyone is permitted to operate a machine for the first time, he must be given off-
the-job basic training by a competent instructor and, at the end of the training, pass a test
on the skills and knowledge required for safe operation in all aspects of fork lift operation.
• A record must be kept which includes the details of basic training given and the nature of
the test. The employee will need a copy of the record, as evidence of training, on change
of employment.
• Employers should not allow personnel to operate fork lifts without written authorisation,
relating to specified types of fork lift.
• Banksmen should be 18 years of age or over and medically fit, with good eyesight,
hearing and reflexes. They should be familiar with any communication systems or signals
used in association with the machine's operation and have been sufficiently trained in the
workings of the fork lift to be able to direct the driver as necessary.
machine stability and safe load handling
Safety in fork lift operation demands that machine stability is maintained at all times. Fork
lifts should, therefore, be carefully selected for the work they are required to do. For
construction sites, only those types designed for site work should be used.
The rated capacity of a machine will be quoted by the manufacturer; but careful checks
should be made to ensure that the capacity is appropriate for the work to be done. For
example, safe loads will be lower if the mast is tilted forward or the boom of a telescopic
materials handler is extended. Stated capacities apply in a static condition and may be far in
excess of those which are safe when the machine is moving. Limits of safe operation will
depend on site conditions and, as far as possible, machines should be operated only on
designated routes.
Even with the right machine for the job and satisfactory site conditions, the safe operation of
fork lifts on site still depends on the machine being properly operated. The establishment of
safe systems of work (in written form where appropriate) and incorporated in operator
training programmes is all important.
When stabilisers are fitted to a machine, they should be used in accordance with

PART TWO
manufacturers' instructions.
When operating fork lifts, drivers must be aware of the effect on the machine's stability of
induced forces. These are the forces which act upon a machine or on its load due to a
change in speed or direction; for instance, when starting, stopping, turning or rolling. The
greater the speed of the machine, the greater these induced forces. Accelerating,
decelerating and braking must be done progressively and smoothly, never hard or jerkily.
Turning must be done carefully, giving due consideration to the weight and placing of the
load and the condition of the ground.
Accident experience has indicated certain points which need particular attention:
• Load stability is crucial and should be checked before travelling.

• Wide loads have tilted and caused fatal accidents. Ensure that loads cannot tip sideways.
• Accessways must be checked to see that they are wider than any load which may be
carried along them. Loads should normally be carried close to the ground but, if they
have to be raised to clear obstructions, they must be lowered when the way is clear. The
operator should be assisted by a banksman.
• The weight of timber and other porous material should be re-estimated if it is wet.
• If the machine has a mast, loads should be lifted with the mast vertical or slightly tilted
back.
• Travelling on slopes, or in poor ground conditions, may be critical and the machine
manufacturer's recommendations should be followed. The danger of skidding and
overturning is particularly serious on two wheel drive machines where braking can cause
weight transfer away from the brake axle when negotiating a slope.
• There are reversing hazards with fork lifts, as with other transport. Audible warning
alarms are a useful aid, but their effectiveness can be limited by general background
noise and by operators relying on them, instead of carrying out a visual check before
reversing. The need for a banksman should always be considered.
Whenever the load impairs the operator's vision, a banksman should be used to guide the
operator.
With articulated fork lifts, a lift should not be made unless the front and back wheels are in
the same straight line.
Unit loads should not be broken down unless the overall weight would overload the machine.
stacking of materials
Stacking areas should be clearly designated and built on firm level ground with good
drainage. There should be adequate clearance between the stack and any wall, because
walls have been known to collapse as a result of the horizontal pressure exerted by the
weight of stacked material.

PART TWO
The stability of a stack depends on:
• Relation of its height to the narrowest base dimension (height should not exceed three
times the narrowest base width).
• Interlocking of the material to prevent movement.

• Compactness and the security of wedging, where applicable, to avoid sideways
movement.
• Proper understanding of the weight to be carried by the components at the bottom of

the stack (this is particularly important where fragile materials are concerned).
• The avoidance of any projecting items which, if accidentally struck, could cause
the collapse of the stack.
• Adequate measures to ensure security in high winds.

Most accidents involving collapse occur during the destacking process, when material is
removed in an uncontrolled order to suit the operator's convenience, thereby leaving
portions standing at a height which cannot be supported by the remaining base. De-stacking
should be in the reverse order of the original stacking process.
safe systems of work - safety of site personnel
On sites operating fork lifts, all personnel must be fully instructed in the safe systems of work
laid down for their protection, and must observe them at all times. Some of the points which
should be covered by safe systems of work are:
• Everyone not directly involved in fork lift operations should keep well clear of the
machine.
• The carrying of passengers on fork lifts should be forbidden.

• Persons acting as banksmen, or guiding the driver in removing his forks from the pallet,
should:
1. keep a safe distance from the machine and its load
2. never stand under the elevated load of a fork lift
3. never stand between the load and any exposed floor edge, or between the load and
a fixed object
4. wear conspicuous clothing; reflective jackets should be worn during poor visibility

PART TWO
attachments
Attachments are designed to increase the

scope of fork lifts. In each case it must be
remembered that the use of an attachment
can radically alter the fork lift's stability
characteristics and hence its safety (see
Fig. 1).
Preferably, any attachment should be made

by the manufacturer of the fork lift, and its
incorporation on the fork lift done in
OUTSIDE LOAD CENTRE - UNSTABLE
consultation with them; otherwise it is
essential that the attachment is designed by
a competent person and that adequate
testing is carried out before the equipment is
allowed into general use.
The use of attachments may involve

additional training for operators to ensure
overloading does not occur.
When using a jib/hook attachment, similar

operating procedures to those for mobile
WITHIN LOAD CENTRE - STABLE
cranes should be employed.
Fig. 1 – effect of fork extensions
safety devices
Each rough terrain fork lift should have a device incorporated in its hydraulic system which
will not allow the machine to lift weights greater than its rated load. The machine should also
have a device which will prevent a specified load being lifted beyond a given height.
The provision of a simple levelling indicator is strongly recommended, with the danger
zones, where it is not permitted to raise the load, clearly marked. Such indicators, if not
fitted as original equipment, can be fitted by the user; but only after consultation with the
manufacturer of the fork lift.
Every telescopic materials handler should be fitted with an Automatic Safe Load Indicator
which gives a continuous read out of forward stability and sounds an audible alarm when
the load exceeds 95% of the Safe Working Load. Other safety devices which should be
fitted to these machines are:
• a levelling indicator
• check valves which will hold the load in the event of hydraulic pressure loss
• an indicator lamp which will show when stabilisers are on firm ground

PART TWO
working platforms
Due to height limitations and the necessity to have an absolutely level surface, the use of
working platforms on fork lifts will be very rare on site.
Where it is intended to use a working platform on a telescopic materials handler; it is

essential that the fork tilt control is isolated to prevent inadvertant operation.
maintenance
Fork lifts should be maintained in efficient state, efficient working order and in good repair.
Details of necessary maintenance will be given in manufacturers' manuals. It will be

necessary to arrange for this maintenance to be carried out, usually involving a fitter to do
the less frequent but more complex work and the driver to do the simple but vital checks.
The driver should:
• check that any defects previously reported to the supervisor have received
attention
• check battery levels, topping up where necessary
• check tyres for wear, damage and pressure
• check fork locating or retaining pins
• check water and oil levels
• check brakes
• check any rollover or falling-object protective structures (ROPS or FOPS), where

fitted
• check that steering is positive
• check the stability of the seat
• check the mirrors and test the horn (it is recommended that these items are fitted)
• check that lights are working correctly
• check working of lift mechanism; check chains for lubrication and for foreign
material caught in links
• check hydraulic hoses for chafing and leakage.
Any defects revealed by these checks should be reported by the driver to his supervisor.
Machines should not be used until defects which affect their safety have been rectified.

PART TWO
14.3 Precautions with some Miscellaneous Mobile Plant
Type Brief about Equipment

Hydraulic Mechanical
Used to break and penetrate
Breakers
rock or concrete into pieces.
• Ensure that before the start of work that the excavator is in proper working order and capable
of carrying the load of the attachments.
• Only involved persons are to remain close of the breaker and these persons should wear
safety helmets and eye protection.
• The danger of rock/concrete material splintering should always be considered.
Type Brief about Equipment

Telescopic
Used to pump concrete from
Boom Concrete
ground to various floors on
Pump
buildings under construction.
• Driver/operator must be fully trained in all operational and safety aspects of the plant.
• Outriggers must always be used prior to pumping.
• Communication to be maintained by use of a banksman or radio when discharge hose is out

of sight of the Pump operator.

SECTION 15
STATIC PLANT & EQUIPMENT
INTRODUCTION 1
15.1 DUTIES 2
15.2 SELECTION 2
15.3 SITING 3
15.4 USE 3
15.5 MAINTENANCE 3
15.6 SAFETY STANDARDS FOR SPECIFIC TYPE OF
PLANT & EQUIPMENT 4
15.6.1 compressors/air receivers & pneumatic tools 4
15.6.2 cement and concrete mixers 5
15.6.3 bar bending and cropping machines 6
15.6.4 burning and welding equipment 6
15.6.5 brick/block saws 6
15.6.6 woodworking machinery 7
15.6.7 winches 7
15.6.8 tirfors 8
15.6.9 hoists 9
15.6.10 drilling rigs 9
15.6.11 piling equipment 10
15.6.12 cement silos 10
15.6.13 batching plants/transmixers 11
SECTION 15
PART TWO
SECTION 15
STATIC PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
INTRODUCTION
This section identifies the general principles of selecting, siting, maintaining and using static plant and equipment
commonly found on Building Sites in Abu Dhabi.
The general risks of specific items are also described.
Ministerial Order No. (32) Year 1982 – Article (1), (6), (7) (9), (10) (15),

ADM/H&S/Pt 2 01 March 2005 STATIC PLANT & EQUIPMENT 1 of 11
PART TWO
15.1 DUTIES
15.1.1 employers
Have a legal duty to ensure the proper selection and maintenance of mechanical plant and
equipment, and to provide the required information, instruction and training to their operators
in their safe use
15.1.2 operators
should have been trained not only in the correct operation of the plant and equipment, but
also in the limitations of its use, and the hazards which exist if it is not used properly. It is
recommended that all plant operators hold relevant Certificates of Training Achievement
15.1.3 manufacturers
Have a duty to provide information on any hazards associated with their products and advice
on their safe use. Users should ensure they are in possession of this information, and make
certain that the operators are instructed accordingly.
15.2 SELECTION
The proper selection of static plant and equipment is of paramount importance to reducing
risks in the workplace. The exact requirements for each specific item of plant or equipment
should be determined by risk assessment.
Above anything it should be safe and ‘fit for purpose’.
The following are the main points to consider:-
• location of use and any limitations, eg noise, weight, vibration, fumes, fire risk, etc. that
exist, or will exist.
• space required to safely operate the plant or equipment.
• method in which the plant or equipment will be safely transported to site, safely offloaded
and positioned.
• performance of the plant or equipment to ensure it is capable of performing the task

without being overloaded.
• availability of suitably trained, experienced and competent personnel to operate the

specific plant or equipment.
• any special requirements for guarding.
• if appropriate, whether electric or combustion engine options are more suitable for the
workplace?
• what type of ground conditions are required to support the plant or equipment?

PART TWO
• if appropriate, whether solid tyres are a safer option than pneumatic tyres, or vice-versa?
• if appropriate, what heights are required to be reached?
• is the plant or equipment new. If not, are maintenance details available?
• what maintenance of the specific item is required and how frequently?
• whether the item of plant or equipment can be safely removed from its location after
construction works have progressed?
• will any lifting operations be required to position the plant or equipment? If so, are lifting
eyes available?
15.3 SITING
As previously mentioned, specific items of plant and equipment should be selected with
exact siting (location and suitability) requirements in mind.
In some cases, the area where the plant or equipment is to be sited will need to be
prepared. For instance, ground compaction, level firm surfaces, extract systems, exclusion
zones, sound barriers, etc, may be needed. A risk assessment should be used to determine
the safe method of siting the plant or equipment, taking into account all the hazards from
when it enters the site gate to its final position(s).
15.4 USE
Before any item of plant or equipment is put into operation, it should be assessed to ensure
that it is in accordance with the selection specification, and safe for use.
• all operatives should be trained and/or experienced and competent to safely operate the
plant or equipment.
• no plant or equipment should be used if it is not in a safe working condition.
• all specific safety control measures determined by risk assessment should be in place
before the plant or equipment is used.
15.5 MAINTENANCE
Any item of plant or equipment will remain safe to operate only if it is properly maintained in
good condition. A programme of regular preventative maintenance should be established to
ensure that all plant and equipment is systematically inspected, serviced, maintained and
repaired as necessary. Responsibility for taking this action should be clearly identified.

PART TWO
Personnel undertaking maintenance work should be suitably trained, experienced and

competent to undertake their works safely. Those who are not fully competent, eg trainees,
should be provided with additional supervision.
A safe system of work must be maintained during all maintenance and repair operations
and, where necessary, a permit to work system (e.g. a lock-off system) should be
established to ensure that no part of the machinery is accidentally set into motion whilst
work on it is being carried out. (see Pt 2 section 11) - Permit to Work.
While personnel are carrying out inspections, maintenance or repair tasks, machinery
should be isolated and inspection covers, etc should be securely propped to ensure the
safety of the inspector.
The appropriate manufacturer’s repair and servicing instructions should be made available
to all persons responsible for carrying out the work.
15.6 SAFETY STANDARDS FOR SPECIFIC TYPE OF PLANT & EQUIPMENT
15.6.1 compressors, air receivers and pneumatic tools

The following points should be checked: (see Fig.1)
• V-belt and pulley drive is adequately

guarded.
• air receiver is:-
clearly marked with its safe working

pressure and distinguishing number.
is fitted with a safety valve, a pressure

gauge, a drain cock and a manhole.
has been examined as required by an

approved inspector.
• if an airline is used for blowing out, the

activity is strictly controlled and that the Fig. 1 - Type of Compressor used in Workshops, can
person using the airline, and other persons be either fixed or used as a mobile unit.
in the vicinity, are adequately protected (e.g.
by eye protection).
• joints in air lines are made with purpose-made connections.
• air supply to all tools is switched off when tools are left unattended or changed.
Under no circumstances should horseplay with air lines be permitted.

PART TWO
15.6.2 cement mixers

The following precautions should be taken when
using cement and concrete mixers: (see Fig.2)
• operatives should be experienced and competent

to operate the mixer. Where the operative is not
experienced, a higher level of supervision will be
required.
• should be sited on a firm level hard standing to

ensure its stability during all modes of operation. A
paved surface, eg concrete, will contribute to the
ease in which the workplace can be maintained in
Fig.2 - Type of te Mixer commonly used
a safe manner. on Building Sites
• sufficient room will be required around the mixer for easy/local access for materials.
• provision should be made to facilitate the delivery of materials to the mixer workplace
without the need to move the mixer, equipment, or materials.
• workplace should be maintained to provide a safe work environment for the attendant
and those people delivering materials and collecting cement or concrete.
• should be positioned to allow sufficient ventilation for diesel/petrol fumes to exhaust away
from the operation. If area is not sufficiently ventilated, a change of location should be
considered, but if this is not reasonably practicable, an exhaust extract system will be
required.
• all pulley wheels, belts and gears must be guarded as per the manufactures’ standards.
• on diesel/petrol engine mixers, the exhaust should be suitably shielded to prevent burns.
• unless otherwise stated by the manufacturer, the cover lid over the engine/motor should
be closed whilst the mixer is operational.
• fuel tanks should not be filled whilst the engine is running.
• should never be stopped when materials remain inside. Restarting the mixer when it is
loaded poses increased risks to safety.
• should not be loaded beyond its designed limits. If it will not do what is required of it with
reasonable ease, then it is probably not the correct machine for the job.
• oil levels must be regularly checked to prevent overheating.
• care should be taken when operating the wheel. A tight grip is required when unloading
the mixer to prevent the wheel spinning, which can result in arm and hand injuries.
• mixer and workplace should be inspected daily to ensure continued safe working. Any
faults or damage should be repaired.

PART TWO
• many diesel engine mixers generate potentially harmful noise levels, especially for mixer
attendants working in the noise for many hours at a time. Risk assessment will determine
what ear defenders are required (if any) and who is required to wear them.
• proper procedure for starting diesel engines with a starting handle should be followed to
prevent thumb/hand injuries.
• attendants should wear suitable gloves whilst handling the mixer (but not for starting it).
gloves used should also be suitable for handling cement, lime and sand.
15.6.3 bar-bending and cropping machines

Hand and power operated bar benders and croppers should be: (see Fig.3)
• used only by authorised persons,
• used only as recommended by the

manufacturer; no attempt must be made to
exceed stated maximum capabilities,
• firmly mounted on a substantial base

ensuring stability in operation,
• fixed at a suitable height to ensure ease of

operation, and reduce the risk of strain or
injury to the operator; Fig.3- Example of a Bar Bending Machine
commonly used in Workshops on Building
• maintained in a fully serviceable condition, Site
e.g. pivot pins, ratchets or cutting edges are
not worn,
• located at a safe distance from other site personnel and activities,
• kept clean and lightly lubricated,
• stored, and adequately protected from the weather when not in use.
15.6.4 burning and welding equipment

(see Pt 2 Section 27) - Welding.
15.6.5 bricks/block saws

The brick saw has been used on construction sites for a number of years. It has a number of
advantages over other methods, namely:
• a neat, straight, flat and accurate cut is achieved.
• whilst cutting, the operative stands upright.
• are fitted with a dust suppression system (water), which effectively prevents dust
contamination.

PART TWO
• fitted with a diamond tipped, steel blade to achieve a constant depth of cut throughout its
long life.
Because of the inherent dangers in using this type of saw, it is paramount that the
following precautions are taken:-
• saw should always be positioned on a firm, level and flat surface to ensure stability.
• cutting operations should be within a barriered off safety zone to prevent others being at
risk from the saw, and provide the operative (who cannot hear other work operations),
with protection from others.
• operative should be suitably trained and competent.
• area surrounding the saw should be kept in a tidy condition to prevent trip hazards whilst
carrying bricks and blocks.
• maintenance of the dust suppression system is of paramount importance to minimise the

risks of the dust created and prolong the life of the diamond tip blade.
• ear defenders should be worn, especially with diesel/ petrol driven saws.
• safety footwear and eye protection is a must.
• hands should be kept a safe distance away from the revolving blade during the cutting
operation.
15.6.6 woodworking machines

(see Pt 2 section 18) - Woodworking machinery.
15.6.7 winches
Checks should be carried out on all winches to ensure that:
• the winch is securely bolted down,
• the lead angle of the rope is as nearly at

right angles to the drum as possible,
• the rope is strong enough and long enough,

with at least two turns remaining on the
drum,
• the driving pinion engages properly and can

Fig. 4 - Helical/parallel gearing type Floor
be locked in position, Mounted Winch with enclosed gearing
and flange style roller bearing. Up to
• water and oil are kept out of break linings, 26000lb capacity.
• brakes are adequate,
• a guard is fitted over the driving cogs,
• persons are kept clear when the winch is operating,

PART TWO
• the pawl and ratchet are in good condition.
• hand winches should be registered, inspected frequently, be thoroughly examined,

cleaned and lubricated at regular intervals. (see Fig.4)
15.6.8 tirfors
The following precautions are necessary in the use of a tirfor machine:
• It should never be released whilst under load.
• forward and reverse levers should not be operated

at the same time.
• secure anchorage must be ensured to hold the

applied load.
• only the operating handle supplied with the

machine should be used. Attempt must not be
made to increase leverage, e.g. by placing a tube
over the lever as an extension.
• only the appropriate manufacturer’s shear pins

Fig.5 - Example of a typical Lightweight
must be used. type of Tirfor having 800kg. Lift –
1250kg. pull and a 20 metre rope,
• when using multi-sheave blocks, it must be commonly used on Building Sites.
ensured that they are suited to the load applied.
• only the specially designed wire rope supplied by the manufacturer should be used.
• it should be remembered that, when using a tirfor machine for pulling purposes, the
necessary pulling effort is not equal to the load being moved. If the operation of the tirfor
is too much for one man, then the work should be stopped and the number of blocks
increased (within the rated capacity of the machine). (see Fig.5)

PART TWO
15.6.9 hoists
(see Pt 2 section 19) – Cranes and Hoists.
15.6.10 drilling rigs

Surface drilling rigs, including augers, are
used in the work of site investigation,
sample recovery and testing, well drilling,
and other geotechnical processes such as
ground stabilisation and anchorage. (see
Fig.6)
As all drilling work requires a high degree of

skill and competence, without the overall
supervision normally expected on
construction sites, it is recommended that Fig.6 - Example of a Mobile Surface Type Drilling Rig
formal training of operatives is carried out commonly used on Building Sites and
Explorative work in Abu Dhabi.
followed by on the-job instruction under the
guidance of experienced drillers. This
method provides operatives who are both
knowledgeable and safe.
The proposed site should be investigated prior to any drilling operations, and particular
attention given to such hazards as overhead power lines, underground services, toxic fills,
mine cavities, cellars, derelict buildings etc., which could affect the safe installation and
operation of the drilling rig, and the safety of personnel. (see Pt 2 section 6) – Overhead
and Underground Services.
Permission must be sought from, and notification given to, the various interested bodies and
organisations, such as ADWEA, A.D.N.O.C, S.P.D. before site access or drilling operations
commence.
The working area immediately around the drilling rig should be kept tidy at all times, and any
working platforms, (e.g. on the vehicle-mounted rig) should be uncluttered and free of
grease and oil spillage. Rods, casings etc., should be stored in a safe manner; i.e., pegged
to prevent collapse and spreading
In particular:
• hand tools should be kept in a clean and serviceable condition.
• process of connecting and disconnecting rods and casings should be carried out in a
manner which avoids the possibility of injury to personnel.
• manual lifting of heavy equipment, rods and casings, should be carried out in the
recommended manner.
• loose attire such as scarves, ties and sleeves, and the wearing of wrist watches and

PART TWO
jewellery such as finger rings can lead to serious injury, and should not be allowed.
• wearing of suitable gloves is essential in the handling of drilling equipment, in particular

steel wire rope. In the possible presence of toxic material, the use of protective barrier
cream is recommended.
• safety helmets should be worn at all times.
• when rotary percussive drilling is taking place, ear defenders should be worn.
• in the presence of rock dust, or similar hazards, suitable protection should be taken
against inhalation, ingestion, or damage to the eyes.
• wearing of safety footwear at all times is strongly recommended. (see Pt 2 section 12)
PPE
15.6.11 piling equipment

(see Pt 2 section 23) - Excavation & (see Pt 2 section 26) - Piling.
15.6.12 cement silos

Adequate lifting points must be fitted to facilitate
handling and positioning. Proper ladder access, with
safety hoops where appropriate, must be provided.
Where access to the top of the silo is needed, a safe
working platform must be provided.
A safe system of work must be established to allow

blockages of material to be cleared without the
operative having to enter the silo. When, for any
reason, it is necessary for a person to enter the silo
to carry out work, the Confined Space Requirements
apply. At least two competent people, fully trained in
rescue procedures, including the use of breathing
apparatus, must always be in attendance. Any
person entering a silo must always wear a safety
harness and line and adequate means of rescue
(sheer legs, winch or other means of leverage) must
Fig.7 - Type of Cement Silo complete
be provided. (see Pt 2 section 21) -Confined Space. with pneumatic fill pipe,
baghouse for dust control, a full
There must be adequate lighting during the hours of perimeter safety cage and
darkness or when natural light is inadequate. (see ladder, manhole and pressure
relief valve.
Fig.7)

PART TWO
15.6.13 batching plant/transmixer

Static concrete batching plants are
now a common feature of large
building sites, and although they
are fairly safe when properly
operated and maintained, there
are inherent dangers such as
concrete dust, moving parts of
machinery etc. (see Fig.8)
The following are the main safety

features to consider: Fig.8 - Sowing a typical example of a static Batching Plant
commonly used on large Building Sites.
• only trained and authorised
persons should be allowed to
operate batching plants.
• cement dust from silo to be effectively controlled.
• entry into silo should be under a permit to work system as this is classed as a confined
space. (see Pt 2 section 11) – Permit to Work.
• all moving parts of any machinery should be effectively guarded.
• storage bins storing dry cement stored should be covered by a tarpaulin.

SECTION 16
PORTABLE TOOLS
INTRODUCTION 1
16.1 ELECTRIC TOOLS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 2
16.2 PORTABLE ELECTRIC SAWS 3
16.3 PORTABLE ELECTRIC DRILLS 3
16.4 PORTABLE ELECTRIC GRINDERS & CUTTING BLADES 3
16.5 CARTRIDGE OPERATED TOOLS 4
16.6 COMPRESSED - AIR TOOLS 5
16.7 HAND TOOLS - GENERAL PRECAUTIONS 7
SECTION 16
PART TWO
SECTION 16
PORTABLE TOOLS
INTRODUCTION
The majority of power driven hand tool accidents are caused by improper handling and poor
maintenance of the equipment, both of these can be overcome by good supervision and proper
training of the tool operators.
This section will introduce the legal requirements, and applicable standards that should be adopted
when using ‘Power Tools’ on the Departments Building/Construction sites.
MAIN APPLICABLE U.A.E.LEGISLATION

Ministerial Decision No. 32 of 1982 Articles; (10) – (14)
OSHA 2207, Part 1926, Subpart I, section 1926.300 – 1926.305
British Standard BS 4343, BS 1362, BS 2769
British Standard BS 2092, BS 4481, BS 4078

ADM/H&S/Pt 2 01 March 2005 PORTABLE TOOLS 1 of 7
PART TWO
16.1 ELECTRIC TOOLS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
condition of tools
All power tools and similar equipment, whether furnished by the employer or employee, shall
be maintained in a safe condition.
guarding
When power tools are designed to accommodate guards, they shall be equipped with such
guards when in use.
power source
Portable electric tools, when used in normal industrial conditions working off 220/240v power
source, should be in good condition, properly maintained and power supply to the tool fitted
with an approved earth leakage detector. (refer to site electrical requirements section in this
manual section 9) Electricity at Work.
personal protective equipment
Employees using power tools and are exposed to the hazard of falling, flying, abrasive, and
splashing objects, or exposed to harmful dusts, fumes, mists, vapours, or gases shall be
provided with the particular personal protective equipment necessary to protect them from
the hazard. (see Pt 2 section 12) PPE.
housekeeping
Good housekeeping is essential for good workmanship and safety. All tools shall be neatly
and correctly stowed when not in use. Work areas must be maintained in a clean and orderly
fashion.
maintenance
All tools shall be cleaned and inspected regularly, and those which are worn or damaged,
should be replaced or repaired immediately.
operators
Only authorised and competent persons shall be permitted to operate power tools.

PART TWO
16.2 PORTABLE ELECTRIC SAWS
• all portable saws are equipped with a fixed guard over the upper half of the blade and a
moveable guard which automatically covers the lower half of the blade. Both these guards
must be kept in place; blocking of the lower guard to prevent closure is prohibited.
(see Fig.1)
• saw blades shall be regularly checked, kept in good condition and stored suitably.
• blades used must be those recommended for the material being cut.
• if a portable saw is adaptable for bench top use it

must be securely clamped before use to the support
designed for this purpose.
• operators exposed to harmful dust, as when cutting

concrete, tile, lead or stone, should wear approved
type respirators.
• operators should be trained in the use of the electric

saw and be familiar with the hazards associated with
the tool. Fig.1 - Portable Electric saw fitted
with a spring loaded
• appropriate personal protective equipment must be retractable guard.
supplied by the employer and worn by the employee.
16.3 PORTABLE ELECTRIC DRILLS
• electric drills shall either be of the approved double-insulated type or grounded in

accordance with site electrical requirements section in this manual.
• operators shall be trained in the use of the tool; selection of the bit for the material to be
drilled, use of ‘starter’ marks, clamping of work piece and elimination of loose clothing on
the operator.
• appropriate personal protective equipment for the task and material being drilled.
16.4 PORTABLE ELECTRIC GRINDERS & CUTTING BLADES

(see also Pt 2 section 17) Abrasive Wheels.
• no person shall operate an abrasive wheel grinder unless he is trained and found to be
competent to mount and operate an abrasive wheel or cutting blade and perform the task
safely.

PART TWO
• grinding wheels maximum permissible speed should be higher or the same as the grinder
motor.
• the wheel must be inspected and dressed regularly. Appropriate eye shields and
respirators must be worn during the dressing operation.
• cracked stones shall be discarded immediately.
• tool rests shall be used and adjusted properly. The rest should not be adjusted when the
grinder is in motion.
• cutting-off wheels should only be used on machines designed specially for their use –
never use an un-reinforced cutting-off wheel on a portable grinder machine.
• all guards designed for use with a grinder must be used and never removed.
• so far as it is practicable, the work area shall be maintained in good and even condition,
shall be kept clear of loose material and prevented from becoming slippery.
• approved cautionary notices displaying the hazards associated with grinding wheels shall
be posted at the work area where grinding or cutting is being carried out.
• the side of the wheel shall not be used to perform work under any circumstances.
• appropriate approved personal protective equipment shall be used by the operator and
helpers.
• grinding or cutting operations shall be isolated from other activities and personnel by the
use screens or any other approved means.
16.5 CARTRIDGE OPERATED TOOLS
• no person shall operate a cartridge-operated tool or powder-actuated tool unless, he is

trained on the specific tools and found to be; competent in the use of the tool, understand
all risks and hazards associated with the device; and perform the task safely. (see Fig.2)
• additional training must be conducted for other makes and models.
• the operator must undergo a specific test to check for colour blindness.
• all guards designed for use with a cartridge operated shall be used at all times – there
are no exceptions.
• tools and cartridges must always remain in the possession of the person to whom they
are issued. When not in use, they must be locked up in a safe and controlled place. They
must never be left unattended at any location for even the shortest of times.
• used and spare cartridges must be returned to the stores as soon as possible, and must
tally with cartridges signed out.

PART TWO
• the tool shall be examined when taken from the store, before use, and upon return to the
store for defects (by persons competent to carry out those examinations).
• any problems with the tool or cartridges shall be reported to the store keeper immediately
and a record kept for the life of the project.
• the tool must be dismantled and examined for defects (by a competent person duly
appointed and authorised to undertake this duty) every seven days and taken out of
service if any defects are found.
• the tool must always be operated from a firm and stable position. A scaffold is preferable,
but if use of a ladder is unavoidable, the operator must use effective fall-arrest equipment.
Mobile scaffolds must be securely tied to a stable structure.
• full face screen, safety helmet, ear protectors and suitable gloves shall be worn by the
tool operator and by any other worker who might be endangered by flying pins, particles
of materials, sparks, or the noise of firing.
Patent Head to
• cartridges must always be kept in the prevent over
penetration.
makers package and never be carried
loose or in a pocket.
• cartridge tools must never be used in any

area where flammable gases, vapour’s or
explosive dusts are present.
• cartridge operated tools will be controlled Fig.2 - Cordless Cartridge Gun fitted
by a storekeeper, registers and method with automatic nail feed and
statements and will be audited by the
patent head to prevent nail
Contractors safety department and the
Client on a regular basis. penetrating even thin sheets.
16.6 COMPRESSED-AIR TOOLS

Hose End Tool End
• pneumatic tools shall be secured to
the hose or whip by some positive
means to prevent the tool from
becoming accidentally disconnected.
Safety clips or retainers shall be
securely installed and maintained on
pneumatic impact tools to prevent Fig. 3 - Showing a “Whip Check” strong steel
attachments from being accidentally cable which, when attached to both the
hose and tool end, prevents hose whip in
expelled. see Fig.3 case of accidental seperation of
coupling or clamp device.

PART TWO
• all pneumatically driven nailers, staplers and other

similar equipment provided with automatic fastener
feed, which operate at more than 100p.s.i.
pressure at the tool, shall have a safety device on
the muzzle to prevent the tool from ejecting
fasteners, unless the tool is in contact with the
work surface. (see Fig.4)
• compressed air shall not be used for cleaning

purposes except where reduced to less than 30
p.s.i., and then only with chip guarding and
personal protective equipment.
• the manufacturers safe operating pressure for Fig.4 - Showing a pneumatically driven
hoses and appurtenances shall not be exceeded. Nailer/Stapler fitted with safety
device at the muzzle to prevent
• the use of hoses for hoisting or lowering tools shall tool from ejecting Nails/ Staples.
not be permitted.
• all hoses exceeding ½ “ inside diameter shall have

a safety device at the source of supply or branch
line to reduce pressure in case of hose failure.(see
Fig.5)
• proper fire precautions will be taken with regards to

compressor operations.
• air supply lines shall be protected from damage by

vehicles, materials, etc and should be carried across roads Fig.5 - Showing types of Safety
and walkways by means of an overhead carriage or device Valves which can be fitted
either at source of supply or
designed for the specific purpose, or in protected channel branch line in order to reduce
ways. pressure in case of hose
failure.

PART TWO
16.7 HAND TOOLS - GENERAL PRECAUTIONS
• defective tools shall not be issued or used to perform a task.
• all tools will be stored in storage racks or bins and will be cleaned and oiled to prevent
corrosion.
• cutting edges will be protected during storage, and transporting to work area.
• all damaged or worn tools will be promptly and soundly repaired to original condition. If
tools cannot be repaired on the job, they will be replaced and the damaged tool taken
from site and repaired or destroyed.
• replacement of hammer handles by anything other than original parts is forbidden.

Welded metal handles shall not be permitted.
• mushroomed chisels and cracked or broken chisel handles shall be repaired or replaced.
• appropriate personal protective equipment shall be used when performing work with tools.

SAFETY CHECKLIST - FORMWORK
Since errors in formwork erection are not always remediable, checking for the correctness of formwork
erection should be scheduled far enough ahead of erection time for the permanent structure. Items to
be checked for the correctness of formwork erection are the following:
General
adequate anchorage, levelling and correct positioning of sole plates and grillages are achieved.
base plates and grillages should be located to the centre of underlying sole plates.
vertical supports checked.
vertical alignment should be plumbed within deviation in accordance with specified tolerance.
spacing for these members is to be executed in conformance with drawings and standard
details.
all members, couplers, fittings, wedges of the formwork and others are installed properly,
secured, tightened and at correct positions. If these precautions are not taken into account,
loose and non-nailed wedges may fall-out in presence of any vibration arising from activities
such as concrete placing and consolidation.
At points of Load Transfer

correct details applied as per fig.3.
base and head jacks are not over extended unless detailed with adequate special bracing (see
figs. 4 & 5)
that steel section web stiffeners are provided as detailed.
there is positional accuracy of all members.
there are no eccentricities in excess of allowances specified.
Lacings and Bracings

all specified members are in place.
all bracings and lacings are coupled as close to node points and never more than 150mm away.
all bracings and lacings are connected to correct members e.g. diagonals to lacings to allow
right angle structural couplers to be used.
ADM/H&S/CL/2.16/1 01 March 2005 SAFETY CHECKLIST - FORMWORK & STEELFIXING 1 of 3

SAFETY CHECKLIST - FORMWORK
required precautions during erection and use of formwork

during the construction of large items, suspended slabs with proper guarded edges and suitable
access ladders shall be used.
no storage should be placed on formwork since it is not designed to carry additional heavy
loads for other purposes.
formwork should be designed to allow safe lifting and handling from points designed for this
purpose.
persons not involved in the construction process, dismantling or inspection of formwork should
be denied access.
loose materials and plant should be fixed against any movement including lateral movement
induced by high winds.
whenever it is possible that workers can fall from slab formwork by more than 2metres, suitable
edge guards shall be installed.
whenever workers are erecting formwork elements higher than 2 metres over previously erected
slabs, guarded work platforms with access ways should be provided. These access ways
should be also guarded and wide enough to allow for workers to carry materials (see section 2 -
Scaffolding & Working Platforms)
proprietary formwork systems should be erected and used in accordance with manufacturers’
instructions.
required precautions during dismantling of formwork

it must be determined ahead whether back-propping before complete release of the formwork or
re-propping after release of the formwork is the method to be employed.
for the safety and convenience of workers carrying out the dismantling activity, proper
temporary platforms must be provided.
proper tarpaulins or nets should be placed to decrease the danger of any falling material.
all dismantled and removed materials shall be immediately stored and properly handled to allow
for its use in the future.
dismantling steps should be carried out in the following sequence:

removal of loose fittings and materials
removal of projecting nails and sticking elements (in the case of concrete) as work proceeds.
before removal of safety guardrails making part of the formwork, replacement safety guardrails
are to be installed and connected to the edges of concrete.
after removal, formwork should be supported safely during repair, oiling and other maintenance
works needed before reuse.

SAFETY CHECKLIST - STEELFIXING
Precautionary measures to be taken with steel fixing include the following:

steel bundles should never be carried or lifted by the binding wire. Proper slings should be
used.
steel fixers should work at safe places or shops provided on site. Persons not involved in steel
shop work should be denied access.
during the cutting of reinforcement, protective gloves and eye protection must be worn by
persons performing work.
only recommended types of blades should be fitted to disc cutters to prevent any accident
arising from the breaking of a blade.
only trained workers are to be authorized to use the disc cutters.
torches shall not be used in cutting steel of types adversely affected by heat.
the short end of the cut bar should not be left to fly off and endanger life of persons.
projecting steel bars should be capped to reduce their risk potential.
proper walkways should be installed over the fixed steel cages to secure the safety of persons
crossing over to access their destination.

SECTION 17
ABRASIVE WHEELS
INTRODUCTION 1
DEFINITION
17.1 DUTIES OF OPERATORS 2
17.2 TRAINING AND APPOINTMENT OF PERSONS TO MOUNT WHEELS 2
17.3 SELECTION OF WHEELS 2
17.4 ABRASIVE WHEEL CHARACTERISTICS AND MARKINGS 2
17.5 MOUNTING OF WHEELS 4
17.6 CUTTING OFF WHEELS 5
17.7 PEDESTAL/BENCH MOUNTED GRINDERS 5
17.8 GUARDS 5
17.9 CONTROLS 6
17.10 GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS 6
17.11 SUMMARY OF MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS 7
SECTION 17
PART TWO
SECTION 17
ABRASIVE WHEELS
INTRODUCTION
Abrasive wheels are commonly used in the workshop environment, and are potentially dangerous
because of their high speed of rotation, with the resultant possibility of break – up under centrifugal
stress.
For these reasons it is paramount that all personnel who use Abrasive Wheels follow the rules set out
in this section, in especially the wearing of suitable and approved eye protection.
Abrasive Wheels are defined as:-

• a wheel, cylinder, disk or cone which, whether or not any other material is comprised therein,
consists of abrasive particles held together by mineral, metallic or organic bonds whether natural or
artificial.
• a mounted wheel or point and a wheel or disc having in either case separate segments of abrasive
material.
• a wheel, or disc made in either case of metal, wood, cloth, felt, rubber or paper and having any
surface consisting wholly or partly of abrasive material.
• a wheel, disc or saw to any surface any of which is attached a rim or segments consisting in either
case of diamond abrasive particles, which is, or is intended to be, power driven and is for use in
any grinding or cutting operations;
Ministerial Order No. (32) Year 1982 – Article (7), (10), (11) & (12)

ADM/H&S/Pt 2 01 March 2005 ABRASIVE WHEELS 1 of 7
PART TWO
17.1 DUTIES OF OPERATORS
• no employed person using an abrasive wheel shall wilfully misuse or remove any guard,
or wilfully misuse any protection flanges , other appliance provided, or any rest for a work
piece.
• every employee shall make full and proper use of guards, protection flanges and any
other safety devices fitted, and if he discovers any defect in the same, shall report such
defect to the manager, or other appropriate person.
17.2 TRAINING AND APPOINTMENT OF PERSONS TO MOUNT WHEELS

• no persons shall mount an abrasive wheel unless he has been trained, is competent, and
has been duly appointed in writing.
• all entries must specify the class or description of the abrasive wheels which the
appointed person may mount, and the person appointed must be provided with a copy of
the entry or certificate.
• the employer may revoke an appointment at any time by a signed and dated entry in a
Register.
17.3 SELECTION OF WHEELS

When selecting a wheel, due account shall be taken of the factors which affect safety.
Selecting the correct wheel for the job is equally important for efficient production and for
safety. As a rough and ready rule, soft wheels are more suitable for hard material and hard
wheels for soft material.
The best policy in selecting grinding plant is to consult manufacturers of machines and
abrasive wheels, and not to experiment without competent advice.
17.4 ABRASIVE WHEEL CHARACTERISTICS AND MARKING

The following are the variable elements in abrasive wheel manufacture and the
standard symbols that are used to designate them:
• abrasive means the abrasive used in the wheel construction. Aluminium Oxide is
expressed as A, Silicon Carbide as C.
• grain size means the size of abrasive grains used as cutting particles. The grains are
classified according to the sieve through which they have passed. The range is
expressed by numbers (coarse 8 to very fine 600).

PART TWO
• wheel grade is generally considered as the tenacity with which the bonding materials
hold the abrasive grains in a wheel. Wheels are graded as ‘soft’ or ‘hard’ according to
this degree of tenacity. The Grade scale is expressed in letters from A (soft) to Z (hard).
• structure means the relationship of abrasive grain to bonding material, and the
relationship of both to the spaces or voids that separate them. The void or spaces in the
structure assist in rapidly removing ‘chips’ from the wheel face, thus eliminating or
choking of the abrasive surface.
• bond type means the bonding material used in the wheel construction, and is
described by letters V (vitrified) B (resinoid) etc.
17.4.1 british standard marking system for grinding wheels
SEQUENCE Prefix ABRASIVE GRAIN SIZE GRADE Structure BOND TYPE Suffix
W A 46 K 5 V 17
Manufacturer’s
Abrasive Type Symbol DENSE TO OPEN Manufacturer’s
(Use Optional) 1 9 Wheel Type
2 10 Symbol
3 11 (Use Optional)
4 12
5 13
Aluminium Oxide - A 6 14
Silicon Carbide - C 7 15
8 ETC
(Use Optional) V - VITRIFIED

B - RESINOID
R - RUBBER
E - SHELLAC
S - SILICATE
VERY
Examples of marks
COARSE MEDIUM FINE FINE
8 30 80
1. cutting-off wheel
220 intended for cutting
10 36 100 240
12 46 120 metal might be A 30 T B.
280
14 54 150 320 2. cutting-off wheel
16 60 180 400 intended for cutting
20 500
24
brick might be C 30 T B.
600
3. a general purpose wheel
for use on metal and
mounted on a portable
GRADE SOFT MEDIUM HARD
grinding machine might
SCALE ABCDEFGH IJKLMNOPQRST UVWXYZ be A 163 R 5 B.

PART TWO
17.5 MOUNTING OF WHEELS

wheel speed
• before mounting the wheel, check that the speed of the spindle does not exceed the
maximum permissible speed marked on the wheel.
• it must be remembered that centrifugal force (the ultimate cause of wheel bursts)
increase, not directly with speed, but as the square of the speed. The speed at which the
grinding wheel revolves is, therefore, extremely important.
• It cannot be too strongly impressed that doubling the number of revolutions per
minute of a wheel, increases four fold its tendency to burst. The peripheral speed
is generally used for describing permissible wheel.
flanges
• every abrasive wheel must be mounted between suitable flanges, which should be not
less than one third the diameter of the wheel. The flanges should be recessed on the side
next to the wheel, to ensure that clamping pressure is not exerted near the hole.
• flanges should be of mild steel or other material of equal or greater strength and rigidity.
Ordinary cast iron is not suitable.
washers
Washers or blotters, as they are sometimes called, should be made of compressible material
not more than 1/16th of an inch thick. They should be used between the wheel and the
flanges whenever the clamping surfaces are flat, but not otherwise, as in the instance of
taper sided or dovetailed abrasive wheels.
starting new wheels
• before running the wheel make sure the guard is in proper adjustment.
• if the machine is fitted with a work rest, adjust this as close as possible to the surface of
the wheel, rotate the wheel by hand to make sure it is clear all the way round.
unacceptable practices
The following unacceptable practices increase the liability of the wheel to fracture because
they result in excessive stress concentrated near the hole:
• paper washers not used between the wheel and the flanges.
• flanges not recessed.
• flanges unmatched in outside diameter and diameter of recess.
• one flange omitted and the nut tightened directly against the wheel.
• the use of an ordinary steel washer as a substitute for a properly recessed flange.

PART TWO
17.6 CUTTING-OFF WHEELS

• only be mounted on machines designed specially for their use.
• wheel must be of the reinforced type.

Tapered Surface
• flanges should be as large as practicable
and never less than one third of the wheel
diameter. It is most important that the
flanges should be equal diameter.
Fig. 1 - Flange Assembly for a Depressed Centre
Wheel.
• use of unequal flanges is liable to cause distortion and breakage of a cutting-off wheel.
(see Fig.1)
17.7 PEDESTAL/BENCH MOUNTED GRINDERS

• manufacturers safe operating and mounting
procedure must be followed.
• check the rated speed of the machine and peripheral
speed of the wheel labelled by the manufacturer.
• check for any crack or defect in the wheel.
Fig.2 - Showing open perspex type
• tool rest must be provided and the gap between tool guard for pedestal/bench
rest and wheel shall not exceed 1/8th of an inch. mounted grinders.
• apply only regulated pressure on wheel. Never take
too heavy a cut.
• allow wheel to run for a minute before starting
grinding.
• grinding must not be done at sides of wheel.
• screen of toughened glass should be provided to Figs.3 - showing framed type guard for
pedestal/bench mounted
protect operators eyes. (see Figs.2&3)
grinders.
17.8 GUARDS
• guards shall be securely attached to the body of the machine.
• for straight-sided wheels, the maximum angular

exposure of the abrasive periphery and sides shall not
exceed 180°. (see Fig.4)
• guards for straight grinding machines shall be Fig. 4 - Front enclosed Guard for
Straight Sided Wheels
provided with a front curtain, which shall be securely
fastened to the body of the machine.

PART TWO
• for cup wheels, the back face and periphery shall be enclosed, and the guard shall be
adjusted to compensate for the wear of the wheel.
• for depressed centre grinding wheels, the wheel shall
have a maximum angular exposure of 180° and the
guard shall be located as to be between the operator
and the wheel during use. (see Fig.5)
• the clearance between the inside of the guard and the

periphery of the unused wheel, shall be not greater than
Fig.5 - Showing Correct Size
5% of the nominal wheel diameter.
Guard for Depressed
Centre and Cutting off
Wheels.
17.9 CONTROLS
• machines in which abrasive wheels are used must be provided with efficient devices for
starting and cutting off power, and the controls of such devices must be readily and
conveniently operated by the person using the machine.
• while the wheel is in motion, they must be properly secured and adjusted so as to be as
close as practicable to the exposed part of the abrasive wheel.
17.10 GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

17.10.1 floors
Floor surrounding every fixed machine or area where portable tools are being used, shall be
maintained in good and even condition. So as far as practicable it will be kept clear of loose
material and prevented from becoming slippery.
17.10.2 cautionary notice

An approved cautionary notice of the hazards arising from the use of abrasive wheels shall
be affixed in every room where grinding or cutting is carried out.
17.10.3 eye protection

Persons carrying out dry grinding operations, truing or dressing an abrasive wheel, must
wear suitable eye protection, or be protected by suitable transparent screens, (see Pt 2
section 12) for further information on PPE.

PART TWO
17.11 SUMMARY OF MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS

Given proper equipment, safety largely depends on the few simple rules previously
mentioned and summarised below: -
• before mounting, all wheels should again be closely inspected and ‘rung’ to make sure
that they have not been mishandled in transit or storage.
• wheel mounting should be carried out only by competent and authorised persons.
• the bush, if any, should not project beyond the side of the wheel.
• care should be taken to ensure that all wheels, washers and flanges are free from foreign
matter. Any burrs should be taken off flanges.
• washers of compressible materials not over 1/16th of an inch, should be fitted between
the wheel and its flanges where the surfaces are flat.
• wrinkles in washers should be avoided. Washers are not recommended for taper and
dovetail wheels.
• when tightening nuts, care should be taken to tighten them only just enough to hold the
wheel firmly. Excessive clamping pressure is liable to damage the wheel.
• the nuts should be tightened by hand pressure on a spanner and never by a hammer and
chisel or similar means.
• when the flanges are clamped by a series of bolts, care should be taken to screw up
each bolt uniformly. All the bolts should first be run up with the fingers and then tightened
in pattern formation afterwards.

SECTION 18
WOODWORKING MACHINERY
INTRODUCTION 1
18.1 GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS 2

18.2 CIRCULAR SAWS 3
18.3 HAND HELD CIRCULAR SAWS 6
18.4 CHAIN SAWS 6
18.5 TRAINING 7
WOODWORKING MACHINERY SAFETY CHECKLIST

(ADM/H&S/CL/2.18/1)
SECTION 18
PART TWO
SECTION 18
WOODWORKING MACHINERY
INTRODUCTION
Many accidents on different types of woodworking machinery are reported in the Building Industry.
Woodworking machine cutters can inflict very serious injuries and it is essential that all the precautions
for guarding them are strictly observed.
Neglect or ignorance of the safety rules governing the use of such machinery creates the conditions in
which accidents occur.
Everyone who operates woodworking machinery must understand and comply with the safety
requirements outlined in this section.

Ministerial Order No.(32) Year 1982 - Article (10) to (12)
Ministerial Order No.(32) Year 1982 - Article (14) to (17)

ADM/H&S/Pt 2 01 March 2005 WOODWORKING MACHINERY 1 of 7
PART TWO
18.1 GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

18.1.1 duties of employed persons
• employees using woodworking machines must use and keep properly adjusted all guards
and other safety devices, and use push-stick spikes, push blocks, jigs, holders,
backstops, and any other safety devices provided.
• they must report to responsible persons any defects in machinery, guards, devices or
appliances, and any damage or defects in the surface or ground around the machine.
18.1.2 working environment

• sufficient clear and unobstructed space to be provided around machine to allow work
without risk of injury.
• floors to be level, in good condition, free of loose material, (which includes chips, shaving
and saw dust) and not slippery.
• adequate natural or artificial lighting must be provided for the work being done on each
machine.
• where artificial light is provided it must be positioned, or shaded, to prevent glare

affecting the operator.
• where persons are likely to be exposed continuously for eight hours to a sound level of
90dB(A) or more, ear protectors must be made available and used, and all reasonable
measures taken to reduce noise levels. see section 24 – Noise at Work.
18.1.3 exhaust extraction

Extraction equipment should be provided for planers and other specified machines to convey
chips and particles from cutters into suitable receptacles.
18.1.4 maintenance
• saw blades must not be cleaned while in motion.
• all machines must be of good construction, sound

material, and properly maintained.
• unless hand-held, they must be level, and fixed

securely to a substantial structure which ensures
their stability.
18.1.5 controls
• every machine must be fitted with start and stop Fig.1 - Showing an emergency
controls which can be quickly and easily controlled stop fitted at knee height
to a fixed circular saw.
by the operator. (see Fig.1)

PART TWO
18.1.6 guarding cutters

Cutters can include saw blades, chain cutters, knives, boring tools, detachable cutters and
solid cutters, and the following are the main safety points to consider:-
• must be guarded to the greatest practicable extent, having due regard to the work being
done.
• guards to be of substantial construction, properly secured and adjusted, and constantly in

position while cutters are in motion.
• no adjustment may be made to any guard while cutters are in motion, unless safe means
(i.e. mechanical adjusters) are provided.
• allowance can be made for the development of alternative safeguards for cutters
providing these are effective.
• all moving parts, other than cutters, must be guarded.
18.2 CIRCULAR SAW

(see Fig.2 - an overview of all the safety requirements for a floor mounted circular
saw)
Exhaust outlet
Extension
Table
Riving Knife Table

Rip fence
Saw
Guard
Exaust
Outlet Emergency
Stop
Cross – Cut
Fence
Push Stick
Fig.2 - Example of a Floor Mounted Circular saw Fitted

with all the Safety requirements.

PART TWO
riving knife (splitter or spreader)

(see Fig.3)
• securely fixed below machine table level, behind and

in line with saw blade.
• must be strong, rigid, smooth and easily adjustable.
• radius of knife not to exceed radius of largest saw

blade for which machine is designed.
• adjusted as close as practicable to saw blade; gap

between knife and blade not to exceed 12 mm at table
level.
• in the case of a parallel plate saw blade, the knife must Fig.3 - Showing position of
Riving Knife
be thicker (usually about 10%) than the plate of the saw
blade.
• where the diameter of the saw blade is less than 600mm, the top of the knife should not
be more than 25mm below the top of the blade. knife must extend at least 225mm above
the table.
top guard (crown guard) (see Fig. 4)

• guard to be strong and easily adjustable.
• adjusted to extend from top of riving knife

to a point as close as practicable to the
surface of the material being cut, or, to a
point not more than 12mm above the
material being cut where squared stock
is being hand fed.
• the guard should have flanges on either

side of the blade and be adjusted so that
these extend beyond the roots of saw
Fig.4 - Showing an example of an
teeth. Where the guard has an adjustable adjustable Guard fitted on a
front extension piece, it must be flanged Circular Saw together with a
dust extraction unit.
on the side remote from the fence, and
adjusted to extend beyond the roots of
saw blade teeth.

PART TWO
size of saw blade

• saw benches with a one-speed spindle must not use a saw blade less than 60% of the
diameter of the largest saw blade the bench is designed to use.
• in the case of saw benches with more than one spindle speed, the blade must not be less
than 60% of the diameter of the largest blade the machine is designed to use at fastest
spindle speed.
• a notice must be displayed on the machine specifying the smallest diameter saw blade to
be used in compliance with the above provisions.
limitations on use
• no circular saw may be used for cutting any rebate, tenon, moulding or groove unless the
cutter above the table is effectively guarded.
• the saw blade teeth must project right through the upper surface of the timber at all times
in any ripping operation.
• circular saw must not be used for cross-cutting logs unless the material is firmly held by a
gripping device secured to a travelling table.
push sticks
be available for use on every hand-fed circular saw, and used to:
• feed material throughout any cut of 300mm

or less.
• feed material during the last 300mm of any

cut more than 300mm in length.
• remove cut material from between the saw

blade and the fence. (see Fig.5)
removal of material Fig.5 - Example of a Push Stick
• assistants employed to ‘take-off’ cut material may only stand at the delivery end of
machine.
• where this operation must be performed, the delivery end of the machine table must
extend (over its whole width) at least 1200mm from the up-running part of saw blade.
Not applicable to machines which have a roller table or a travelling table, or to

portable machines with a maximum blade diameter of less than 450mm.

PART TWO
18.3 HAND HELD POWER CIRCULAR SAWS (see Fig.6)

Modern machines are fitted with guards that completely enclose the saw blade, The depth of
cut is adjusted by altering the position of a moveable shoe or plate in relation to the saw.
For bevel cutting, the shoe may be set at an angle to the plane of the saw.
before using the saw, ensure that :
• correct type of blade is used for the material to be cut.
• blade is in good condition, not cracked or damaged
• blade will rotate in the correct direction
• depth of cut is adjusted so that the saw blade only just

projects through the underside of the material being
cut.
• guard which covers the saw blade shoe is designed to

retract as the blade enters the material.
• It must never be tied back or rendered inoperative Fig.6 - Example of a Hand Held Electrically
during sawing. operated Circular saw complete
with spring return guard.
• guard operates freely before using the machine.
• on/off switch is in good working order.
• sheet material is properly supported before cutting.
18. 4 CHAIN SAWS (see Fig.7)

All workers who use a chain saw should be
competent to do so. The operator should have
received appropriate training and obtained
relevant certificates of competence
It is recommended that all chain saw operators

have regular refresher/updates training every
2-3 years.
preparing to use a chainsaw

Fig. 7 Example of a type of
operators should check:- Chain Saw
commonly used on
• all nuts and screws etc. are tight. Building Sites.
• saw chain is correctly tensioned
• throttle cannot be squeezed unless throttle lock – out is pressed
• operators are wearing the correct PPE.

PART TWO
when starting a chainsaw
operators should:-
• place the saw on level ground
• secure saw firmly, e.g. put a foot on the rear handle base plate and a hand on the front
handle.
• set the controls as recommended by the manufacturer.
• pull the starter cord firmly.
18.5 TRAINING
No person should be employed on a woodworking machine, unless he has been trained and
instructed in its operation. Training should include:
• instruction on all machines the person is likely to operate and the types of work to be
undertaken on completion of training.
• instruction on the provisions in the law on Woodworking machines and the methods of
using guards, devices and appliances required by the law must be included.
• emphasise the dangers connected with the use of such machines.

SAFETY CHECKLIST - WOODWORKING MACHINERY
General
Operatives
keep a list of authorised operatives.
only trained operatives may work without supervision.
operatives fully aware of requirements of woodworking machinery law and procedures for
testing new employees.
adequate training given on types of machine used and kinds of work done.
provided with all necessary equipment – including goggles, ear protectors, face masks and
other protective equipment where required.
Machines and surrounding area

stop/start controls easily reached and operated.
cutters guarded to greatest extent practicable.
machine level and securely fixed to ensure stability.
Machine of sound construction and properly maintained.
sufficient space around machine for safe working.
floors to be level, in good repair, free of loose material and not slippery.
adequate natural or artificial light without glare.
noise levels reduced as far as practicable – ear protection available where required.
extraction equipment provided for chips and particles.
extraction of fumes where necessary.
fire extinguishers of correct type immediately available, and personnel trained in use.
Circular Saw
Riving knife
secure, sound condition, easily adjustable.
radius correct and in line.
gap between knife and blade correct.
knife of correct thickness.
height correct for saw blade fitted.
ADM/H&S/CL/2.18/1 01 March 2005 SAFETY CHECKLIST - WOODWORKING MACHINERY 1 of 3

Fence
correctly adjusted and secured.
Top guard
sound; easily adjustable.
adjusted correctly for work being done.
flanges either side of blade extend below roots of saw teeth.
Feeding work
gripping device in use for cross-cutting logs.
push sticks or push blocks available and in use.
Saw blade
in good condition – sharp, no cracks; not less than smallest diameter permitted.
notice fixed to machines specifying smallest diameter permitted.
projects through upper surface of timber when ripping.
above table effectively guarded when rebating, tenoning, moulding or grooving.
Front extension guard

adjusted to give maximum protection and cover teeth.
Bottom guard
blade guarded below table (open frame machines).
Taking off
delivery table to extend 1200mm from up- running part of saw blade.
assistant correctly positioned.

Hand Held Circular Saw

Operative
trained in correct use.
no loose clothing, tie. etc.
aware of legal requirements
Prior to use
machine and plug compatible with supply.
leads, plug and switch undamaged.
correct type blade for work.
blade in good condition, sharp and not cracked.
effectively guarded, above and below shoe plate.
check condition and function of spring loaded bottom guard.
blade securely fitted to rotate in the correct direction (teeth upwards at front end of saw towards
shoe plate).
adjust fence (if used) to correct dimension.
saw adjusted to correct depth and angle before use, with teeth projecting just through underside
of the material.
During use
material being cut adequately supported.
use fence or straight edge as a guide; ensure clamps do not impede movements of saw.
sufficient free cable on saw.
correct stance – behind and in line with saw.
work area clear and free of obstructions.
protective equipment in use.
operator not to be distracted.

SECTION 19
CRANES & HOISTS
INTRODUCTION
MAIN APPLICABLE U.A.E. LEGISLATION 1
19.1 KEY PERSONNEL AND DUTIES 2

19.2 PREPARATION AND PLANNING 3
19.3 CRANE SELECTION 4
19.4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS BEFORE ERECTION 11
19.5 LOAD RADIUS INDICATORS 15
19.6 GENERAL OPERATING PROCEDURE 16
19.7 INSPECTION, EXAMINATION & TESTING 17
19.8 HOISTS 18
19.9 APPROVED CRANE SIGNALLING SYSTEM 24
MOBILE & TOWER CRANE SAFETY CHECKLIST

(ADM/H&S/CL/2.19/1)
SECTION19
PART TWO
SECTION 19
CRANES & HOISTS
INTRODUCTION
Cranes and Hoists are used extensively on most building site, and although they each have their
different role, they are both primarily used to lift/transport men and material safely from ground level to
various levels and areas on a building site.
This section of the manual gives not only the safety standards required to select, erect, operate and
maintain this type of equipment, but also gives advice and guidance on how to achieve this, it is
therefore imperative that all contractors follow the standards and guidance outlines in this section
result of which will ensure the safe lifting of both men and materials at all times.

In compliance with Municipality Traffic Section Regulation

ADM/H&S/ Pt 2 01 March 2005 CRANES & HOISTS 1 of 24
PART TWO
19.1 KEY PERSONNEL REQUIRED & DUTIES

19.1.1 appointed person
A person should be appointed by management to be responsible for the organisation and
control of lifting operations.
The person so appointed should be given adequate training and possess the relevant
experience to carry out the following duties:
• make an assessment of the lifting operation
• plan such operations and select the most suitable lifting appliances, gear and equipment.
• consult with other responsible persons and coordinate lifting operations,
• ensure that adequate inspection and maintenance procedures are in effect for the
selected plant and equipment
• ensure that procedures exist for incident and defect reporting.
19.1.2 crane driver

It is the responsibility of management to ensure that the appointed crane driver has been
properly trained, is competent and fully conversant with all aspects of safe crane operation.
In particular, he must be familiar with the controls and capabilities of the machine that he is
to drive. It is recommended that all crane drivers hold valid Certificates of Training
Achievement issued by a recognised training organisation.
crane drivers should meet the following requirements:-
• must be at least 18 years of age and should be sufficiently mature to undertake the duties
involved.
• possess a valid U.A.E. driving license.
• be medically fit for the purpose, with particular emphasis on eyesight, hearing and re-
flexes, and have a head for heights. (Periodic medical examinations are advised).
• have an aptitude for judging distance, height, speed and perspective.
• be physically capable of operating the controls efficiently without undue fatigue.
• trained in the general principles of crane operation and specifically in the type of machine
he is required to operate.
• trained sufficiently in the mechanics of his machine to be able to carry out routine
maintenance if required by his employer and to identify and report defects.
• trained in the hand-signalling system (approved signalling system is shown at the end
of this section)
• be familiar with the fire appliances fitted to the crane.

PART TWO
19.1.3 signaller / slinger

A signaller/slinger should be appointed by management to ensure clear and precise
commands are given to the crane driver so that no doubt can exist as to who is controlling
the lifting sequences.
Signallers should be readily identifiable to all concerned in lifting operations, (e.g. by wearing
a helmet in a distinguishing colour, or a high visibility jacket).
signallers/slingers should meet the following requirements:
• must be at least 18 years of age.
• be medically fit for the purpose with particular emphasis on eyesight, hearing, and
reflexes.
• have an aptitude for judging distance, height and clearance.
• be agile and strong enough to handle lifting gear.
• be trained in the general techniques of slinging.
• be capable of selecting lifting gear suitable for the loads to be lifted, and to identify
defects.
• have a sensible knowledge of the safe working loads at the various radii of the crane.
• be capable of directing the safe movement of the crane and its load to maintain the safety
of all personnel.
• be thoroughly trained in a hand-signalling system, and be capable, where necessary, of

giving clear and distinct instructions over radio or similar signalling systems. (approved
signalling system is shown at the end of this section)
19.2 PREPARATION AND PLANNING

All lifting operations should be carefully planned and a safe system of work developed. The
safe system should be suitably communicated to all those who are involved with the
operation in any way.
Planning should consider a wide range of factors including the selection of lifting appliances
and gear.

PART TWO
this will be determined by:

• the load to be lifted, including the slings, shackles, blocks and other lifting gear.
• the radius of operation and height of the lift.

• the presence of any restrictions in the form of overhead cables or lifts inside buildings,
etc.
• visibility of the load throughout its travel
• method of attaching the slings.
• appointment of trained supervisors and operatives.
• positioning of the crane, taking account of ground conditions and proximity hazards.
• any necessary erection and dismantling of the crane.
• method of signalling to be used.
• maintenance of lifting appliances and gear.
19.3 CRANE SELECTION

It is important to select the most suitable crane type for the work in hand. Selection of the
wrong crane can produce not only difficulties on site, but also circumstances which may
tempt site personnel to resort to malpractice in order to expedite the work.
Initially the appointed person will have to select the type of crane most suited for the work in
hand. Each type of crane has certain features which usually dictate the most suitable for a
particular application.
19.3.1 mobile cranes

There are three types of mobile cranes:-
• Self propelled, (wheeled type)
• Truck mounted
• Crawler mounted
Mobile cranes are most suitable where the job duration is short and good mobility is required
around the site or between sites. Very few mobile cranes have pick and carry duties;
therefore they normally must be set up on their outrigger base at each lifting location.

PART TWO
self propelled wheeled mobile crane:
Wheeled mobile cranes normally have the

capability to travel with a load, but again they
require firm level ground for lifting operations.
Where maximum mobility is required between

lifting operations, and for use on hard surfaces
such as a stock yard or stores area, they are
ideal. (see Fig.1)
truck mounted crane

Fig.1 - Self propelled wheeled
Telescopic boom truck – mounted cranes offers mobile crane.
great advantages in their comparative ease of
rigging. They enable lifts to be carried out quickly
and efficiently where the job duration is short and
mobility around site is necessary. In most cases,
these machines are designed for use on metalled
or made up roads and are not for use on soft
ground. (see Fig.2)
Most truck mounted cranes have severely limited

free-on wheels duties, and in many cases, are not
suited for work which requires lifting and carrying.
The majority of work will be carried out on

outriggers, and it is of utmost importance that
these are extended to their correct position. Most
cranes now have lines or arrows marked on the
outriggers beams, to clearly indicate when they are Fig.2 - Truck Mounted Crane
in the correct position, and should not be used

other than on those settings. (see Fig.3)
Fig.3 - Showing Outriggers extended to their correct

length - and
Spreader plate provided to distribute load
evenly.

PART TWO
crawler cranes
Are best in off road positions where ground

conditions are not suitable for wheeled
cranes. They do however, require a firm
hard level standing where they are to
carry out lifting duties. Transportation
and rigging times are normally longer
with crawler cranes than mobile, and
therefore work duration is another factor
to be considered. (see Fig.4)
Fig.4 - Crawler type Crane
19.3.2 tower cranes

Any tower crane selected for use on site should he
chosen with full knowledge of maximum load, and
load at maximum radius requirements with a working
margin in reserve in respect of load, radius and
maximum hook height. (see Fig.5)
siting the crane:
Once a building or structure is finished, a tower crane

has to be dismantled, this factor should always be
taken into account when deciding its initial position.
gradients:
Bases for tower cranes (static or rail mounted) must be

properly designed and well drained. Manufacturer’s
recommendations on the maximum permitted gradient
Fig.5 - Typical type of Tower Crane
should be strictly observed. used on Building Sites in Abu
Dhabi
proximity hazards:
Sufficient clear space for the length of the jib involved should always be provided as with
other cranes nearby, overlapping of jibs can create a special problem. Jibs and counter jibs
might touch and it is essential, therefore, to have a height differential.
Consideration should also be given to the proximity of other structures, buildings, houses,
(including the possible violation of their air space), Public access areas like highways should
always be checked with the owners or appropriate local Utility.
Note: There is now a new Ministry of Labour directive that in future, Tower Cranes will be
required to be sited so that neither the boom nor the jib part of the crane will overhang
onto main streets or any other buildings.

PART TWO
erection precautions:
The erection of a tower crane requires personnel with a good head for heights, specially
trained, and experienced in the particular type to be assembled working under the control of
a trained and competent supervisor.
Insistence must be placed upon the use of safety harness and the wearing of safety helmets
should be enforced where appropriate.
checks before erection commences,
• company carrying out the erection is approved and licensed by the Municipality.
• that foundations for a static crane, the track for a travelling crane, or the supports for a
climbing crane, meet the detailed requirements of the manufacturer, or engineer.
• crane selection in erecting a tower crane should be adequate for any lift involved,
therefore the weight of each component (and its centre of gravity) determined, and
sufficient margin allowed for error.
• suitability of all lifting gear should be carefully considered, particularly in terms of

clearance height, its weight, together with any attachments, should be included in the
load.
• local weather and wind speed forecasts should be obtained from the Meteorological
Office and erection should only take place if the wind speed is within the limit quoted in
the manufacturer’s instructions for erection.
• erection areas should be kept

clear of non-essential
materials, equipment and
men. Before transferring any
large crane section from one-
plane to another (e.g. from
horizontal to vertical) a check
should be made that no loose
items (tools, bolts, etc.) have
been left — falling objects
are dangerous. Fig.6 - Tower cranes should be tied back to the main
structure at the recommended intervals.
• where cranes are being 1. Ties (struts)
2. Braces as per maker’s instruction.
erected beyond free standing
3. Tie frame.
heights, consideration must 4. Crane Tower.
be given to the design and 5. Wedges as per makers instruction.
6. Ladder with safety back hoops.
fitting of the frames, and
anchorage points to nearby
buildings or solid structures.

PART TWO
• concrete structures used for anchorage should be allowed to harden long enough to
acquire sufficient strength to take the loads imposed on the ties of climbing cranes. (see
Fig.6)
• rail mounted cranes should be operated in a fixed position or tied in. Secure stops
should be fitted to the rails in close contact with the bogies to eliminate all longitudinal
movement.
• at each stage of erection, the correct amount of ballast and counter-weight must be
properly positioned. On many cranes, the counter-weight is set in place on the counter-jib
before the main jib is erected.
• weight for ballast and counter-weight, as supplied by the manufacturer, should be marked
with their weight and secured in position to prevent accidental displacement and damage.
• ballast charts, showing the amount, distribution and unit weights of ballast used, must be
fitted to the crane base. Charts must be sited on the crane where they can readily be
seen at all stages of construction work.
• safe means of access must be provided to the cab and throughout the structure for the
purpose of inspection and maintenance. Access to the cab will be achieved using a
permanent steel ladder fitted with safety hoops and provided with rest platforms at 9m
vertical intervals.
• jib inspection may be afforded by the provision of an expanded metal walkway inside the
jib with life lines fitted to permit the fixing of safety harnesses, or by the use of an
inspection cage suspended from the jib or fitted to the saddle.
• wind speed indicators, visible in, or from the driver’s cabin, and at the base of the crane
should be fitted, and If the wind velocity registered is near the manufacturer’s safe
working limit, the crane should be placed out of service.
• automatic audible alarm must be fitted to sound when rail mounted cranes travel.
• warning lights should always be fitted where the top of the crane exceeds 150m above
local ground level and may be required where the obstruction exceeds 90m.
rail tracks - special notes:
base
• should be calculated from the maker’s given loading figure on any one bogie under the
worst conditions and the known bearing capacity of the ground.
track
• must be laid to an accuracy of 6mm in gauge and the maximum slope either along or
across the track should not exceed 1 in 200 metres, unless recommended by the
manufacturer. Curved track can be used for most crane rails, but special precautions are
required to prevent distortion - steel tie rods must be fitted to stop tendency to spread;

PART TWO
curved fish plates should be used. A watch should be kept for any tendency of wheel
flanges to climb the rails
• where laid on a concrete base, the concrete should be level and strong enough to
stand the loading. Thin hardwood, grout or dry pack should be used between rails and
concrete to prevent the holding bolts from becoming loose as the rails bed down.
• when laid on timbers, it is preferable for these to be of rectangular section, set

longitudinally so that the rail itself does not have to act as a bridge between adjacent
sleepers. (Crane tracks have very different loadings from railway tracks.) If longitudinal
timbers need further support or load spread, timber sleepers should be set under - and
in direct contact with them. For levelling purposes, softwood packing is totally unsuitable.
• should be straight or true to curve, slightly but not excessively worn, and be free from
holes burnt in the web, and holes in rails should always be drilled (burning makes the
rails too brittle). Rails should preferably be bolted to timbers and bolts kept tight. (Dogs
or spikes are not recommended.)
• must be perfectly level on curves, radii of curves will be specified by the crane
manufacturer and track layouts should be set and thoroughly checked by competent
engineers.
• area between must be kept clear of all materials and other obstructions, effective steel
wheel stops should be clamped at the end of the rail tracks with sand boxes, or
alternative method of retardation fitted in front.
• earthing must be effective and provide electrical continuity between individual rails. Fish
plates are not enough to give electrical continuity. The resistance between rail and earth
should never exceed 1 ohm.
• deflection of rail track under full load should never exceed 3mm.
• Where practical, outriggers can be extended and the feet kept just clear of the ground for
added safety, but care must be taken to ensure that the outriggers do not foul the ground
or any obstacle.
19.3.3 excavators used as cranes

Any excavator which is to be used as a crane and has a safe working load (SWL) greater
than one ton, must have check valves fitted to the boom and outward reach side of the
stick/dipper.
main safety requirements
• lifting must be done with the stick/dipper in the outward reach mode only.
• if to be used as a crane without any restriction and with a variable SWL greater than one
ton, be fitted with an automatic safe load indicator and be subject an annual test and
thorough examination, or,

PART TWO
• if to be used solely for work immediately connected

with an excavation and with a fixed SWL greater than
one ton have on site, a “Certificate of Exemption.”
• must have the SWL marked on the machine or
displayed in the cab.
• point of attachment for lifting slings, etc. must be
considered with great care.
• slings, for example, must not be hooked on to a

bucket tooth, but must be properly secured to a
correctly designed and manufactured lifting point.
(see Fig.7)
Fig. 7 – Showing Lifting hook welded underside of bucket, fitted with a safety
catch eliminating the need to use bucket teeth as lifting points
19.3.4 lorry mounted cranes

It should be borne in mind that lorry loaders are primarily an
accessory to a payload carrying vehicle and are designed as
such: nevertheless they are classed as cranes.
As with other jib cranes, lorry loader cranes with a maximum
safe working load (SWL) of one tonne or less are exempt
from the requirement for automatic safe load indicators
(ASLIs) to be fitted. Additionally, no lorry loader crane
requires an ASLI provided that it is used solely for the
Fig.8 - Showing a Hiab 250 Type
purpose of delivery or collection of goods to or from a site. Lorry Mounted Crane
(see Fig.8) having a maximum jib
length of 76ft.
• siting of lorry loader should take account of the ground conditions which should be firm
and level.
• there should be space for extension of outriggers.
• consider proximity of overhead cables and underground services.
• safe working load of the equipment in relation to any loads being lifted.
• any effects of local weather eg. strong winds
• loads should always be lifted smoothly to prevent them from swinging.
19.3.5 hired cranes

Notwithstanding any advice the crane owner may have offered concerning the selection of a
particular crane or any other relevant matter, the responsibility for ensuring that a hired
crane (or a crane on loan) is of suitable type, size and capacity for the task being
undertaken, and for planning the operation, remains with the user of the crane.

PART TWO
19.3.6 scaffold cranes
These small cranes, commonly known as

scaffold hoists, must comply with as
much of the general requirements of
cranes as are applicable, and be secured
to the scaffold in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instruction. (see Fig.9)

Fig.9 - Typical type of small scaffold crane
• mounted either on tubular supports which securely fixed with double couplers
to scaffolding structure.
clip to scaffold over them.
• standards to which they are fitted should be

additionally braced to take extra strain.
• loads carried on scaffold cranes should be such that they cannot protrude into the
scaffold structure and become dislodged and, to that end, any protruding scaffold
member in the line of operation should be cut off.
Note: The safe working load specified by the manufacturer may not be achieved due to the
unsuitability of many scaffolds to which these cranes are attached. In order to positively
determine their capacity in any given situation, it is strongly recommended that they are
tested in situ so that any deficiency in the scaffold may be rectified. Alternatively, the crane
may be derated.
19.4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS BEFORE ERECTION

19.4.1 crane siting and foundation
The positioning of a crane often requires
to be very precise. It is a requirement that
there is a minimum clearance of 600mm
between slewing parts of the crane and
any fixed installations to prevent men
600
from being trapped. If this is not mm
practicable, access at these points must
be blocked off. (see Fig.10)
Fig.10 - showing the requirement to have a 600 mm

clearance required between slewing part of crane
and fixed installation

PART TWO
The Correct preparation of the crane foundation

is vital. The ground over which a crane has to
travel or operate should be carefully chosen or
prepared. There is often failure to realise that
ground conditions may not be capable of
supporting the required total load. Underground
hazards arise from cellars and basements (filled
or not), recently filled excavations, tidal or
floodwater areas where the ground water table is
high, buried pipes and mains etc.
It is imperative that the loading on any outrigger

jack is ascertained from the manufacturer or
supplier, therefore, the weight bearing
characteristics of the ground should be
thoroughly
examined and, if necessary, a good supply of Fig.11 - Showing Timber mats positioned
suitable timber or other material must he used to due to soft ground
spread the outrigger load.
On soft ground it will be necessary to pack solid material (timber, digger mats, hard core)
beneath crawlers and/or outriggers to allow for settling under load. Bearing plates or grillage
may be necessary to distribute the loads. (see Fig11)
For lorry mounted and mobile cranes, if there is any doubt about the suitability of the ground,
the following procedure must he adopted:
• test by lifting the load approximately 150mm off the ground and holding for a period over
one outrigger at maximum possible safe radius to see if the outrigger sinks.
• if an outrigger sinks, lower the load, increase the area of packing under the outrigger and
re-test as above.
19.4.2 work area control

Access to the working area during the lifting and moving operation should be restricted to
those involved in the work at hand.
The work area should be delineated and, where appropriate, process plant etc. which may
create risk should be isolated, also road closure may be necessary.
Care should he taken to ensure that, prior to erection of any large crane, air traffic control
authorities, both civil and military are consulted

PART TWO
19.4.3 erection and dismantling

Insistence must be placed on the use of safety harness, and the wearing of safety helmets
should he enforced. It is essential that all personnel involved are totally familiar with, and
conform to the correct procedures specified by the crane manufacturer.
There must be available all the necessary parts and equipment to enable work to be carried
out safely. Substitution of parts with those of inferior quality or even incorrect components,
can lead to structural failure, often with disastrous consequences.
erection staff should:
• be supervised by a competent person,
• be familiar with crane erection and dismantling techniques.
• have access to the manufacturer’s instruction book appropriate to the particular crane.
Special care should be taken when unfolding swing-around fly jibs or lattice extensions.
Always ensure pins are in position before releasing the latch mechanisms. Careful control
during the swing around operation is important. Manufacturer’s instructions should be
followed, particular note being taken of the use of control ropes.
19.4.4 fly jibs

This is an additional jib which may be fitted to the end of the main boom of many cranes.
Care must be taken to ensure that the load/radius indicators and automatic safe load
indicators are compatible with this extension. It should be noted that the weight of the main
hook block should be deducted from the safe working load of the crane when using the fly
jib. The hooks on the main and fly jib must not he used simultaneously.
19.4.5 ropes
It is essential that the correct number
of hoist-rope falls are reeved for a
given duty in accordance with the
crane.
The ends of hoist and other ropes should be
properly secured. Where pear wedges are
fitted, they must be of the correct size and Fig.12 - Tail rope folded back on itself and
the tail of the rope should extend sufficiently secured with a bulldog grip.
Note: “U” part of bulldog clip should
through the wedge for it to be folded back on always be attached to the dead end of
itself and secured with a bulldog grip. (see rope.
Fig.12)

PART TWO
Where the rope cannot be looped

back on itself because of the rope
diameter, then a small length of the
rope can be attached to the dead end.
(see Fig.13)
The following points should also be Fig.13 - Small length of rope attached to dead
end and secured by a Bulldog Clip.
observed:
• when transferring wire rope from reel to drum, every precaution should be taken to avoid
twists and kinks.
• when reeving hook blocks on cranes capable of height extension, special care should he
taken to provide sufficient length of hoist rope to accommodate the height in use at the
time, and still leave the statutory two full turns on the drum when the hook is in its lowest
working position. In addition, the rope must be secured to the drum.
• ropes should lay correctly on all winding drums. Uneven winding causes gaps in the
layers, which produce undue wear and tear.
• wherever ropes need to be renewed or replaced, the replacement must be of correct size
and construction.
19.4.6 power supply

It is essential that the electrical power supply is of the correct voltage and phase and
adequate for the requirements of the crane. Electrical services necessary during erection
procedures should be connected by a qualified electrician.
Earthing electrodes, capable of dealing with all contingencies, including electric storms,
should be provided for tower and derrick cranes; where cranes are rail mounted, it will be
sufficient to earth the track.
Operational controls on the crane not required for use during the actual erection procedure,
should be isolated where possible.
19.4.7 overhead electric lines & cables

It is the responsibility of site management to ensure that all personnel on site are familiar
with the location of overhead and underground cables. For specific precautions see section
22. –Overhead and Underground Services
Should a crane contact overhead power cables, the operator should:
• remain inside his cab.
• warn all other personnel to keep away from the crane and not to touch any part of it or
the load.
• try, unaided to travel the machine to a safe position.

PART TWO
• if the machine is not mobile, remain in the cab until ADWEA Officials can make the area
safe.
• if, due to fire, or any other reasons the crane must be vacated by the operator, he should
jump clear as far from the crane structure as he is able, avoiding touching both crane and
ground simultaneously.
19.5 LOAD RADIUS INDICATORS

There is a specific requirement
that all cranes should have a load
radius indicator, clearly visible to Fig. 9
the driver, which will show the
operating radius and the
corresponding safe working load.
Load radius indicators may be

incorporated into safe load
indicators of the type which display
the safe working load. Fig.14 - Showing Safe Load Indicator fixed to side of
Telescopic Mobile Crane.
Note:
On truck mounted cranes controlled from the truck cab, there will be an indicator on both
sides of the jib. (see Fig.14)
On derricking lattice jib cranes; an indicator comprising a pivoted weight to which a

pointer is fixed is secured to the side of the jib, and a load/radius scale moves relative to the
pointer as the elevation of the jib is altered.
On Tower Cranes; the indicator may be sited in the form of a scale which is activated by a
rope fixed to the jib or to the saddle of a fixed jib crane.
automatic safe load indicators
Where the term SWL is used in the following paragraphs, this refers to the maximum safe
working load of the crane as sited. The automatic safe load indicator (ASLI) is a safety
device provided to warn when the crane is being overloaded and at risk of overturning.
All cranes over one ton capacity are required to have such a device fitted and in proper
working order. They must be inspected each week and a record kept. The indicators are
required to give visual warning to the crane driver of an approach to SWL, and an audible
warning to those in the vicinity of the crane of an overload state. The percentage of SWL or
overload at which these devices operate will vary according to setting and requirements but,
correctly set, the driver receives his visual warning at between 90% and 97.5% SWL and the
site receives audible warning at 102.5% to 110% SWL., therefore, when the bell or hooter is
heard, the crane is overloaded and at risk.
Some types of ASLI incorporate a cut-out which prevents further movement of the load to
danger, after the audible warning has been given.

PART TWO
19.6 GENERAL OPERATING PRECAUTIONS
19.6.1 considerations prior to lifting

Before commencing work at the start of a shift, or when using a crane for the first time, the
crane driver should be satisfied that the test and thorough examination certificates are
current, and that the weekly inspection register is up to date. He must further ensure that the
cab’s uncluttered with material, visibility is not impaired by dirty windows and that all
controls, safe load indicators and load radius indicators function correctly.
Any defects must be reported in accordance with the company procedures. For a lift that
may require a long period of time to complete, continuous working may be essential and
therefore relief supervisors, crane operators and key personnel should be available and the
following strictly observed.
• no one involved in lifting operations should have taken alcohol.
• written procedure should be available to all involved in a major or special lift.
• the method and procedures for slinging should be to recognised standards.
• any signalling or communication system should be well practiced. (If radios are used,
they should have been previously checked and back up sets should be available).
• manufacturers’ “out of service conditions” must be known and adhered to.
19.6.2 load handling

Loads should only be moved when the
signaller can see both the load and
Fig.7
Fig. 7
communicate with the driver. An additional
signaller must be provided if the load goes
out of sight.
Loads should not be lifted until directed by

the signaller/slinger to avoid fingers being
trapped between the load and the sling. The
load should then be lifted a short way to Fig.15 - showing:-
enable an assessment to be made that the • Load slung correctly with angle of slings at
load is properly slung. When satisfied that 900.
• Tail ropes used to stabalise load
this is the case, shutters, etc. should, where
• All personnel wearing the appropriate PPE,
necessary, be provided with tail ropes in and banksman wearing high visibility jacket.
windy conditions. (see Fig.15)
• crane must not be operated in winds of a speed greater than those specified.
• loads must be carefully handled to avoid snatching, and slewed and travelled so as to
remain suspended vertically. They must not be pulled or dragged and must not be carried
over any person’s head.

PART TWO
• care should be taken to allow for the increase in radius when the load is first raised. This
can arise from flexing of the jib, stretching of ropes and compression of hydraulics. It is
particularly important that persons do not stand between the load and any fixed object.
• cranes must never be overloaded and drivers must react immediately to the warnings of
the safe load indicator by either lowering the load, or by reducing the radius of operation.
Loads must never be left suspended from the crane hook when the crane is
unattended.
19.7 INSPECTION, EXAMINATION & TESTING
19.7.1 daily inspection

The manufacturer’s manual supplied with the crane normally provides details of the regular
inspection requirements and must be strictly followed. A visual inspection of the entire
machine and any tracks, etc., should be made before the crane is put to work.
The crane should be put through all motions by the driver and any defects reported
immediately. All brakes and clutches should be checked for correct operation.
19.7.2 weekly inspection

A competent person must be appointed to carry out a weekly inspection which should be
recorded on the company's format. This inspection should include the crane structure, and
mechanical components together with any structural ties, track etc. and the correct
functioning of the safe load indicator.
19.7.3 twelve monthly thorough examination

In accordance with Ministerial Order No. (32) Article (20), a thorough examination of the
machine must be carried by a qualified technician approved by the Ministry of Labour, and a
Test Certicate issued indicating full results of the thorough inspection.
19.7.4 maintenance inspections

Apart from the statutory requirements of inspection, testing and thorough examination, a
regular system of maintenance inspection and repair should be instituted in accordance with
the manufacturer’s instructions.
Before any repairs. adjustments or inspections are carried out, a proper system of granting
permission to work, including isolation of the machine should be properly implemented.
In addition to normal mechanical maintenance, the following points are worth regular
attention:
• an independent inspection should be carried out to ensure that no slowly developing fault
has become accepted, and that no-unauthorised modifications have been carried out and
that safety devices have not been tampered with by an operator for his own convenience.

PART TWO
• contractors name boards and similar wind resisting items should not be fitted without
reference to the manufacturer’s instructions.
• bolted joints should he inspected for tightness; suspect parts should he replaced to guard
against failure.
• where only part of the working rope is in regular use, the unused length should be run off
the drum at regular intervals to see that it remains undamaged.
• rail tracks, particularly curved sections, should be checked for level, soundness of
construction and maintenance of correct gauge.
• always ensure that the rope is the correct length for the crane as rigged. A minimum of
two full turns must be remaining on any winch, as the rope termination is not designed to
take line pull directly as reverse winding could occur.
• all ropes should be regularly lubricated according to manufacturers’ instructions.
• where ropes are running over plastic sheaves, it is possible that fatigue fractures of
internal wires may be present even though external wear is slight. Additional tests, other
than visual examination of the outer wires, may be necessary on these ropes.
Note: When a crane has been erected in a corrosive atmosphere e.g. sea air, near chemical
works etc., rope anchorages should receive special attention and may need to be cut
off and re-made periodically, to guard against the effects of hidden corrosion.
19.8 HOISTS
Hoists can be categorised as follows:
Goods hoists — used for lifting goods only and must not be used for transporting
passengers.
Passenger hoists — suitable for lifting persons and goods.
19.8.1 erection
• passenger and/or goods hoists should, as a minimum, be provided on any building
project which has four or more storeys and be extended, as the building progresses, to
the topmost floor.
• hoists should only be operated by fully trained and qualified personnel, be thoroughly
examined by a competent person after erection and before being put into service to
ensure that they have been properly erected and are safe to operate.
• the erection, extension and dismantling of hoists is a specialised job and should only be
carried out by competent erectors under the charge of a competent supervisor who will
have planned the work in detail, examined the site and assessed the correct method of
tying-in before work commences. If scaffolders carry out this work they must be suitably
trained and experienced.

PART TWO
19.8.2 base
A good base is essential. The hoist winch and other devices must be correctly positioned
and anchored to the base to ensure stability and to enable the load on the tower to be
carried. The base units of some passenger carrying hoists weigh several tonnes and
adequate lifting facilities should be available for installation purposes.
19.8.3 ties
It is essential that the freestanding height of the hoist mast is never exceeded, and that it is
tied to the building strictly in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
It is essential that, when tied to a building or scaffold (which itself must be adequately tied to
the structure), the mast is maintained vertical, so that no undue stress becomes imposed on
the tower; with consequent misalignment and interference with the platform.
19.8.4 enclosures and gates

• enclosures and gates must have a minimum height of 2m except when, by virtue of their
position, a lesser height is adequate to secure safety of all personnel. In no case may
the height of gates or fencing be less than 910mm.
• gates must be fitted at all levels where access is required. All gates must be closed
except for loading and unloading. It is good practice to display a notice “Keep Gates
Closed”. It is recommended that gates are interlocked; this is a requirement for
passenger hoists.
• landing gates generally protect only the entrance itself, often leaving access around the
gates where a person may reach in for some purpose and be struck by the cage or
platform. It is necessary to provide fencing to prevent this.
• open platform hoists that do not have a protective fence or cage around the platform
must have the hoistway completely enclosed with suitable steel or wire mesh throughout
their height so that, should any part of the load become accidentally dislodged from the
hoist platform, it is contained with the enclosed tower.
19.8.5 platforms
• hoist platforms should be sound and maintained in good condition. Broken or missing
boards can easily cause a load to tip, or a man to fall when loading.
• gaps between the platform or cage and the landing, and between an open platform and
the hoistway, must be sufficiently small to prevent persons falling down the hoistway
when loading or unloading.
• platform must carry a notice stating the safe working load. On a goods hoist a notice
prohibiting passengers must also be displayed.

PART TWO
19.8.6 goods hoist

safety devices (see Fig.16)
No’s. Denote:-
1. Over run device
1 2. 2m high landing
4 gate
3. Hoist enclosure
2
4. Hoist mast tied
into building.
5. Hoist arrestor
4
device.
8 6. Hoist operated
2 from one
position only
giving operator
5 unobstructed
4 view.
7. Dead man
handle.
6 3
7 8. S.W.L. marked
2
on hoist
platform.
Fig. 16. - Showing sketch of a cantilever Goods Hoist .
(Wire mesh surround to the hoistway has been ommitted allowing detail
to be shown).
• an over-run device must be fitted just above the highest platform position required, or
near the top of the mast.
• on all types of hoist, the top over-run device must be correctly set in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions, to ensure that there is no danger of headgear being struck by
platform or cage.
• bottom over-run devices must also, where fitted, be properly set. In the case of rack and
pinion hoists, there may be a danger of the platform or cage climbing off the top of the
mast, particularly during erection and dismantling.
• hoists must be fitted with an arrestor device to support the platform or cage, fully loaded,
in the event of failure of the hoist rope or driving gear.

PART TWO
19.8.7 passenger hoists

safety devices (see Fig.17)
All passenger hoists may be used to carry goods up to the rated SWL. The usual procedure
is for the driver to travel with the goods, and his weight, calculated as a fraction of the
permitted number of persons, should be deducted from the payload (e.g. SWL 1 tonne or 12
men; therefore 1 man = 1/12 tonne; therefore payload = 11/1 2 tonne). When passengers
are carried, the driver is included in the permitted number of passengers.
Enclosures must be at least 2m high at the base and at landing stages, and should be of a
mesh size as laid down in BS 4465.
The gates must be fitted with mechanical or electrical locking devices, so that the gates
cannot be opened except when the cage is at the landing stage and so that the hoist cannot
be operated unless that gate is closed and the lock is in the shut position. ( Where this is
not practicable, it is allowable for the gate to be locked from inside the landing platform
provided the hoist operator is the only one issued with the key).
Cage gates must be mechanically and/or electrically interlocked. Access and egress gates
at working platform level must also be interlocked.
No’s Denote:-
1. Over run
1 device
4 2. 2m high
landing gate
9
3. Hoist
2 enclosure
4. Hoist mast tied
into building.
8 4
5. Hoist arrestor
device.
6 9 6. Hoist
operated from
7 9 one position.
7. Dead man
10 handle.
4
5 8. Cage interlock
on Gates.
9 9. Landing gates
interlock.
2 1
10.S.W.L. on
hoist.
3
Fig. 17 Showing sketch of a Passenger Hoist with
all the safety devices fitted.

PART TWO
Hoists may only be operated from one position. This normally is from inside the cage. If, for
any reason, the cage stops between landing stages, it should be isolated electrically from
outside to prevent any possibilily of further movement. There is a mechanical device that
keeps the gates locked in such circumstances.
Passengers should remain in the cage until a competent person instructs them on the
correct method of egress, which may be through a roof trapdoor which is kept locked, except
when properly needed. A notice bearing instruction to this effect, or with any variations
peculiar to that specific model of hoist, should be prominently displayed in the cage
The SWL figure and the permitted number of passengers must be marked on the cage.
Drivers have particular responsibility to see that the hoist does not become overloaded.
The distance from the underside of the cage, when at its lowest position, to the ground, is
carefully calculated by the makers to prevent damage to the cage and its occupants if the
cage over-runs the bottom landing level. It is essential that the ground space beneath the
cage is kept completely clear in case such emergency arises, despite any trip mechanisms
incorporated by the manufacturer.
The operation of mechanical safety gear from inside the cage should be expressly forbidden
except in an emergency. For checking purposes, the safety gear should occasionally be
fired with the manual lever, if fitted, to ensure that it is working properly.
19.8.8 beam hoists

Hoists must be erected in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and, if secured to
scaffolding or other temporary support, the structure must be designed accordingly. Normal
safety procedures apply in the operation of beam hoists, but the following are particularly
relevant: (see Fig.18)
• barriers must be erected and maintained at the loading area to prevent unauthorised
access.
• the load should be in full view of the driver throughout its travel.
• care must be taken to ensure that the

load does not snag or become dislodged
during lifting.
• regular checks should be made on the

security of the winch and its frame.
• the safety and security of the electrical
supply and controls must be checked,
and manufacturer’s maintenance
instructions must be followed.
Fig.18 - Showing type of Beam Hoist

PART TWO
19.8.9 control systems

• with passenger hoists, the controls are inside the cage. In the case of goods hoists, the
controls are outside the cage or platform and it is essential that the driver is positioned so
that he can see the hoist over its entire run. Where this is not possible, a suitable
signaling system must be introduced.
• marking of the hoist rope in different colours for each landing can also be of assistance.
• hoist operating rope, lever or other controls should be so situated that the hoist can be
operated from only one position.
19.8.10 operation (general)

• operatives should have a clear view and be trained to place barrow handles facing the
offloading exit when loading on the ground, so that any walking on the raised platform at
delivery point is reduced to a minimum, and should also be instructed to close all gates
after use.
• all loads on the platform must be secure and there should be no projections.
• on passenger hoists such loads should be contained within the cage and not leaned
against the cage gates or doors. No attempt should be made to use a passenger
hoist with the cage roof trapdoor left open to permit the protrusion of long loads
(the trapdoor should in any case be interlocked).
• manufacturers may be able to supply a vertical extension to the cage to accommodate
longer loads. The SWL of a hoist is based upon an evenly distributed load. Where
vertical loads are carried there may be a need to derate the SWL of the hoist due to
imposed loads.
19.8.11 wind speeds

On all exposed sites and at heights, hoists can be subjected to wind forces much more
severe than at ground level. Most manufacturers quote wind speed limits at which their
machines will operate safely. These limits ought never to be exceeded.
In wind conditions in excess of the recommended limit, the hoist platform should be lowered
to the ground and the mains supply isolated.
19.8.12 maintenance
Systematic maintenance should be carried out at the manufacturer’s recommended intervals
by persons competent for the purpose.
Regular maintenance of both electrical and mechanical systems, should be carried out by
competent electricians and mechanics, to keep hoists in goad working order.
Hoist electrical work should only be carried out by an electrician trained in the control
systems involved. Drivers should not be permitted to attempt electrical maintenance, but
they can help to avoid breakdowns by observing chafing in the supply cables, or unusual
noise or performance.
rack and pinion hoists
The lubrication of the rack is a job normally carried out by the driver during maintenance but,
in order to have safe access, he must have assistance with the operation of the hoist. The
manufacturer’s recommendations should be followed regarding correct lubricant and

PART TWO
method.

PART TWO
swivel hoists
There are additional dangers with the operation of this type of hoist, because the cage must
be swung towards the landing levels for loading/unloading. Either:
• someone may try to open the gate(s) and lean into the hoistway to swing the cage into
position; or
• the cage may swing away from the landing level if it has not been locked into position.
These problems can be overcame by fitting hoist gates split into upper and lower gates and
by checking to make sure that the cage is locked into position at that level, before opening
the lower gate.
A single gate at least 910mm high may be fitted instead of the larger split gate, providing that
no-one can be struck by any moving part of the hoist or falling materials should they lean
into the hoistway.
winch operated hoists
All ties should be kept clear of the hoist rope and power cables and, as far as possible, out
of the way of all building operations, so that there is no temptation for anyone to remove
them. Proper planning can remove the risk of occurrences such as this, and other forms of
dangerous interference. Such planning must be backed by adequate site discipline and
enforcement of all instructions so that alterations may be made only by authorised
personnel.
19.9 APPROVED CRANE SIGNALLING SYSTEM
Clench and
Unclench
Fingers to
Operation Start Stop Emergency signal winch Lower Slew In Direction
Hoist Lower Slowly Indicated
(Follow my Instructions) Stop the load
Jib Up
Jib
Down
Derricking Jib Extend Retract Jib Travel to Me Travel in Direction Indicated OPERATION CEASE
Travel From (Or cease to follow my instructions)
Signal with one Hand -Other on Head Jib Me
NOTE: Signaller should stand in a secure position where he can see the load and can be clearly seen by
the Crane Driver. If at all possible he should face the driver. Each Signal should be precise.

SAFETY CHECKLIST - MOBILE & TOWER CRANES
MOBILE CRANE OPERATIONS

SAFETY CHECKLIST FOR PRODUCING METHOD STATEMENTS
Method statements for mobile crane operations should normally include the following so far as
is relevant in the circumstances
Name and address of the site to which the method statement relates.
Indication of whether the operation will be undertaken as a “contract lift” or as a “crane hire”.
Name and address of the contract lift/crane hire company.
Name and address of the company arranging for the contract lift/hiring the crane.
Date and duration of operation.
Time of crane arrival on site and of first lift.
Details of the crane(s) concerned and copies of relevant certification.
Name of the person appointed to have overall control of the lifting operation.
Name of the appointed safety adviser and arrangements for monitoring the work.
Confirmation of training standards for crane driver and slinger/signaller and methods of
communication.
TOWER CRANE ERECTION/DISMANTLING

SAFETY CHECKLIST FOR PRODUCING METHOD STATEMENTS
Method statements for tower crane erection/dismantling operations should normally include
the following so far as is relevant in the circumstances
Name and address of the company carrying out erection/dismantling.
Names of the supervisor / foreman and appointed safety adviser and arrangements for
monitoring the work.
Details of the tower crane.
Date and time of commencement of the operations.
Details of the mobile crane to be used (see mobile crane method statement checklist) including
copies of relevant certification.
The sequence of erection / dismantling.
Details of limiting wind speed and method of checking wind speed.
Details of where the crane is to be sited.
ADM/H&S/CL/2.19/1 01 March 2005 SAFETY CHECKLIST - MOBILE & TOWER CRANES 1 of 2

SAFETY CHECKLIST - MOBILE & TOWER CRANES
Details of the items to be lifted including weights and dimensions.
Height(s) of lift(s).
Details of lifting gear to be used.
Adequacy of outriggers load spreading pads.
Means of checking wind speed.
Provision of warning notices, barriers, cones etc.
Arrangements for notification to police and highways authority where necessary e.g. for
temporary road closure.
Provision of parking area for lorries unloading.
Provision of temporary lighting if required.
Note
This checklist is intended to aid the production and approval of method statements. It is not an
exhaustive list of every possible issue that may need to be addressed for any given task.
The safety precautions to be followed during erection/dismantling including :-
— Confirmation that members of the erection/dismantling team will wear full safety harness at all
times whilst aloft.
— Confirmation that harnesses will be secured as necessary e.g. when bolting up, sledging,
slinging, etc.
— Details of proximity hazards and appropriate precautions.
— Details of road closures, police notifications, etc.
— Details of how the crane testing will be carried out. (in accordance with BS71 21: Part 2 1991)
ADM/H&S/CL/2.19/1 01 March 2005 SAFETY CHECKLIST - MOBILE & TOWER CRANES 2 of 2

SECTION 20
LIFTING GEAR
INTRODUCTION 1
DEFINITION
20.1 QUALITY OF LIFTING GEAR 2

20.2 SLINGING CONFIGURATION 2
20.3 SLING ATTACHMENTS 3
20.4 STRESSES ON SLINGS AT VARYING ANGLES 3
20.5 TYPES OF LIFTING GEAR 4
20.6 SLING SELECTION 8
20.7 BASIC PRECAUTIONS 8
SECTION 20
PART TWO
SECTION 20
LIFTING GEAR
INTRODUCTION
Lifting must, by its very nature, be regarded as a hazardous operation. The severe usage to which
lifting gear is often subjected, together with the serious consequences to life and property which may
result from any failure, make it important that maximum attention is paid to the correct use and
maintenance of such gear. This can best be achieved by :-
• good design and workmanship.
• careful testing and inspection after manufacture and repair.
• detailed planning and correct and careful use of the gear.
• regular, careful inspection and maintenance during the life of the gear.
It is unfortunate that, whereas considerable importance is generally attached to the selection and
training of crane drivers, comparatively little attention is paid to banks men / slingers who are an
equally important part of any lifting operation. Management should accept that the duty of banks men /
slingers is not one that can be undertaken by untrained persons.
DEFINITION
Any loose equipment used for lifting with a lifting appliance, e.g. rope or chain slings, webbing slings,
hooks, eyes, shackles, eyebolts etc. (does not apply to ropes used for haulage on the level or
lashings).
MAIN APPLICABLE LEGISLATION


ADM/H&S/Pt 2 01 March 2005 LIFTING GEAR 1 of 9
PART TWO
20.1 QUALITY OF LIFTING GEAR

It is of the utmost importance to ensure that any lifting gear put to use is of the correct
quality. To that end the equipment must be manufactured in accordance with relevant British
or internationally recognised standards, and where applicable, have current records of test
and examination.
20.2 SLING CONFIGURATIONS

Sling configurations shown in Fig. 1 below are some of the most common sling
configurations in use in the construction Industry:
(1) (2) (3) (4)
Fig.1
1 Single Leg Sling - normally used on loads with a single point of attachment with the sling in a vertical plane.
2 Two Legged Sling - Used when two lifting points are required. The angle between the legs of the sling should not exceed 90o
3 Three Legged Sling - This type of sling not to be used when the angle between any leg and a line vertically below centre
master ring exceeds 450
4 Four Legged Sling - Angle between legs on a four legged sling is measured between diagonally opposite legs and
should not exceed 45o

PART TWO
20.3 SLING ATTACHMENTS

Attachments of a sling to a load will normally fall into four categories as shown in Fig. 2
below:
(1) 2
Fig. (2) (3) (4)
1. Two single leg slings used in a Basket Hitch. NOTE: Total load that may be lifted – provided that no
included angle exceeds 900 – is 2.1x that marked on the sling.
2. Choke Hitch Double Wrapped. NOTE: Total load that may be lifted is that marked on the sling.
3. Basket Hitch.
NOTE 1: Total load that may be lifted when the included angle does nor exceed 900 is 1.4 x that marked
on the sling.
NOTE 2: A Basket Hitch should only be used when the sling is passed through part of the load – and
the load is balanced on the sling.
4. Simple Choke Hitch. NOTE: Total load that may be lifted is that marked on the sling.
20.4 STRESSES ON SLINGS AT VARYING ANGLES

Chart No.1 –
Chart No. 1
Shows the
different stresses
that are imposed
on slings, chains,
ropes etc. when
included angles
are increased. e.g.
at an included
angle of 1200
stresses on sling
lifting 1 Ton is
exactly 1 Ton.
0
At 171 – stresses
on a sling lifting a
1 Ton Load is
nearly 6 Tons.

PART TWO
20.5 TYPES OF LIFTING GEAR

20.5.1 alloy steel chains
• welded alloy steel chain slings shall have permanently affixed identification stating size,
grade, rated capacity end sling manufacturer.
• hooks, rings, welded or mechanical coupling links and other attachments when used
with alloy steel chains shall have a rated capacity at least equal to that of chain.
• job or shop hooks and links or make shift fasteners, formed from bolts, rods etc. or other
such attachments, shall not be used.
• rated capacity (working load limit) for alloy steel chain slings (single/multileg) shall not
exceed the values given by the manufacturer.
• whenever wear at any point of any chain link exceeds 10 per cent reduction in diameter,
the chain shall not be used,
20.5.2 wire rope slings
• the safe working load recommended by the manufacturer for
various sizes and classifications of wire ropes shall be
followed.
• wire ropes shall not be secured by knots.
Fig. 9
• each wire rope used in hoisting, lowering or in pulling loads
shall consist of one continuous piece without knot or splice.
Fig. 3 - showing broken strands in wire

rope
• wire rope shall not be used if in any length of ten diameters, the total number of visible
broken wires exceeds 5 per cent of total number of wires, or if the rope shows other signs
of excessive wear, corrosion or defect. (see Fig. 3)
“soft eyes” type
Formed in this manner, are often used for convenience,

but in use they become flattened around the eye and suffer
considerable wear through friction. They should therefore
be frequently inspected and, at the first sign of damage,
removed.
By far the better method is for the eye to be formed by
bending the rope around a thimble which takes the rub
whilst the sling is in use and which prevents the rope itself
being damaged.
Fig.4 - Showing Ferrule Eyes
Having formed the eye, fixing back the free end is achieved
by using a ferrule or socket.
(see Fig.4)

PART TWO
20.5.3 natural rope and synthetic fibre

• all splices in rope slings shall be made in accordance with manufacturer’s recommen-
dation,
• spliced fibre rope slings shall not be used unless they have been spliced as per the
manufacturer’s recommendation,
• knots shall not be used in lieu of splices.
• natural and synthetic fibre rope slings shall be immediately removed from service if any of
the following conditions are present:-
distortion of hardware in the sling. broken or cut fibres.
abnornal wear. variations in the size or roundness of
strands.
powdered fibre between strands.
discolouration or rotting.
20.5.4 synthetic webbing slings

Synthetic webbing shall be of uniform thickness and width. Fitting shall be of a minimum
breaking strength equal to that of the sling; and free of all sharp edges that could in any way
damage the webbing.
types of webbing Slings: (see Fig.5)
2. Cargo Type webbing Sling

3. Round Type Webbing
1. Endless Type Webbing Sling Sling
Fig.5 - Showing various types of webbing slings

PART TWO
attachment of end fittings to webbing and formation of eyes
Stitching shall be the only method used to attach end fittings to webbing and to form eyes.
The thread shall be in an eyes pattern and contain a sufficient number of stitches to develop
the full breaking strength of the sling.
environmental conditions
When synthetic web slings are used the following precautions shall be taken:
• nylon web slings shall not be used where fumes, vapours, sprays, mists or liquid of
acids or phenolics are present.
• polyester and polypropylene web slings shall not be used where fumes, vapours, sprays,
mists or liquids of caustics are present.
removal from service
synthetic web slings shall be immediately removed from service if any of the following
conditions are present:-
• acid or caustic burns
• broken or worn stitches
• melting or charring of any part of the sling surfaces
• distortion of fittings.
snags, punctures, ~ tears or cuts
Table 1. above shows the working load limit when using 1 webbing sling - Double ply at varying angles and sling
configuration.

PART TWO
20.5.5 hooks
Every hook used for raising or lowering or as
means of suspension shall either:
• be of such shape as to reduce, as far as
possible. the risk of such displacement.
(see Fig.6) for types of hooks normally
used on building construction work.
or;
• be provided with an efficient device to
prevent the displacement of the sling or Fig. 6 - “C” Type Hook – Fig. 7 -
load from the hook (see Fig 7) sometimes referred Eye Hook with
to as the “Liverpool Safety Catch
“C” Hook
20.5.6 spreader beams

Spreader beams are used to support long or wide
loads during lifts and may be used when headroom
is limited.
They eliminate the hazard of load tipping and those
arising from the use of wide sling angles.
Alternatively they are used when the load will not
sustain the comprehensive force applied by slings
used at angles in excess of 1200. (see Fig.8) Fig. 8 -Showing Selection of Spreader Beams
20.5.7 eyebolts
Eyebolts are made to screw into or

through a load and when installed,
the following are the main points to
consider: (see Fig.9)
• collar must be at right angles to
the hole
(1) (2) (3)
• have full contact with the surface
and properly tightened
Fig. 9
• where hooks will not freely locate
1. Dynamo Eye Bolt. Designed for vertical lifting only
into the eye or link of the eyebolt,
2. Collar Eyebolt. Has a small eye with a large collar. Can be
shackle must be used
used for angular loads in the plane of the eye, but this will
• ensure that metric threads reduce the SWL.
threaded eyebolts are not 3. Collar Eye Bolt with Link. This type takes a higher angular
inserted into imperial thread loading than all the others and allows the pull to be taken in
any direction.
holes.

PART TWO
20.6 SLING SELECTION

The different types of slings used in the construction industry can be put to use in many
different ways. It is therefore imperative that that slings of the correct type, SWL and length
are selected for use in any particular lifting operation. Each lift should be assessed with due
consideration of the following:-
20.6.1 weight of load to be lifted
The weight of routine pipes, timber, steel etc. can often be established from the
manufacturer or supplier, from delivery tickets or by calculations. Where weights of loads
cannot be determined e.g. pile extraction, they must be estimated by a person of experience
in such matters.
20.6.2 load dimension

The size and shape of the load must be considered together with any lifting points which
may be available. An assessment of the centre of gravity must also be made to ensure the
crane hook is placed above that point.
20.6.3 positioning of the load

Many loads may have to be placed at an angle or have one face resting directly on a surface
which would prohibit removal of the slings if the more traditional “wrap around” method was
used.
20.6.4 headroom
If lifts are to take place in areas of restricted headroom, then spreader beams may be more
appropriate than other types of slinging methods.
20.6.5 method of detachment

It is not uncommon in building and civil engineering, particularly when slinging structural
steel members, that access to the load when it has been lifted into position is extremely
hazardous. Consideration therefore should be given to the use of quick release shackles etc.
20.7 BASIC PRECAUTIONS

20.7.1 lifting gear
• has been tested and examined by a competent person and obtained a certificate signed
by the person specifying the safe working load.
• is of good construction, sound material, adequate strength, suitable quality and free from
patent defects.
• is inspected prior to use on each shift and as necessary during its use to ensure that it is
safe. Defective equipment shall be removed from service.

PART TWO
• it is clearly marked with its safe working load and identification number.
• all unused legs of the sling are hooked back to the eye to prevent the hook swinging
where it may strike personnel or get caught up.
• It is free from makeshift devices. i.e. must not be shortened with knots or bolts.
20.7.2 hooks
• are of sufficient size to permit the load to be taken on the bed and not the tip.
• is placed over the centre of gravity of the load to avoid the load swinging.
20.7.3 landing space

• suitability of the landing is established together with the quality of any chocks, battens
etc. on to which it is to be placed.
20.7.4 slinger
• ensures that the slings do not pass directly over sharp edges such that they may be
damaged.
• always wear a safety helmet, safety boots and gloves, and wear high visibility clothing so
that they are easily identifiable.
• give clear signals to the crane driver
20.7.5 load
• is checked to ensure that it is “free” and not trapped in any way and lifted slightly then
checked for stability and angle.
• is never directed over any persons head.
• Is within recommended safe working load of the equipment.
• securely attached to the appliance.
• adequate steps have been taken through the use of suitable packing or otherwise to
prevent the edges of the load from coming into contact with the lifting gear where it is
likely to result in damage.
• hands and fingers not be placed between the sling and its load while the sling is being
tightened around the load.
20.7.6 after use

It is removed from the immediate work area so as not to present a hazard to employees.
Note: Only Competent persons approved by Ministry of Labour and Social Affairs to test
lifting appliances are authorised to test and certify all types of lifting gear.

SECTION 21
CONFINED SPACES
INTRODUCTION 1
21.1 PLANNING 2
21.2 SAFE SYSTEMS OF WORK 2
21.3 PERSONNEL SELECTION 2
21.4 TRAINING 3
21.5 TOXIC AND FLAMMABLE ATMOSPHERES 5
21.6 ATMOSPHERE MONITORING 5
21.7 PERMIT TO WORK 7
21.8 WORKING PRECAUTIONS 7
21.9 RESCUE 8
21.10 BREATHING APPARATUS 9
21.11 PERSONNEL 11
21.12 SEWERS 12
21.13 BACTERIAL INFECTION & HYGIENE 12
21.14 DETERIORATING ATMOSPHERE 13
21.15 SUBSTANCES WHICH MAY BE ENCOUNTERED 13
IN A CONFINED SPACE
SECTION 21
PART TWO
SECTION 21
CONFINED SPACES
INTRODUCTION
For the purpose of safety the term ‘confined spaces” covers a great variety of workplaces which have
limited access and inadequate ventilation. They are therefore potentially dangerous places in which to
work because they may trap hazardous concentrations of toxic or flammable gases or vapours.
Confined spaces are also liable to become deficient in oxygen due to the build-up of a gas or vapour
which is not itself toxic but which displaces the breathable air.
Very often, the dangerous atmosphere is a result of the work being done for instance welding,
painting, flame cutting and the use of adhesives and solvents.
At some time or another almost any place on a construction site may become a confined space. Some
are quite obviously confined spaces e.g. tanks, ducts, bore-holes, silos, manholes, furnaces,
pipelines, sewers and underground chambers. But serious accidents have occurred in the past in
such places as rooms which were ultimately to become occupied rooms and which were therefore not
regarded as confined spaces when construction work was going on in them.
Everyday operations of the construction industry often involve work in excavations, holes and so on
which may not be recognised as confined spaces, but which nevertheless may present a danger of
toxic, flammable or oxygen-deficient atmospheres.
If there is any doubt whether or not a particular workplace presents the problems of a confined space,
atmospheric testing must be carried out to determine what are the hazards, if any.
If atmospheric problems are found to exist, first considerations should be:
• whether it is practicable to substitute safer materials than those which are producing the dangerous
atmosphere
• whether alternative methods of work could be adopted which would not give rise to hazards.

Ministerial Order No. (32) Year 1982 – Article. (5), (6), (9) & (13)

ADM/H&S/Pt 2 01 March 2005 CONFINED SPACES 1 of 15
PART TWO
21.1 PLANNING
The special conditions of confined space working make it vital that the work should be
planned in detail and risk assessments made in order to determine appropriate health and
safety measures and emergency arrangements. (see Pt 2 section 19)- Risk Assessments -
Part One Manual
These measures should be incorporated in a safe system of work and included in the health
and safety plan which the principal contractor will have developed.
21.2 SAFE SYSTEMS OF WORK

definition
An agreed, set sequence of operations, using
guards, safety devices and protective equipment, Fig.1
so as to complete a job safely and without danger
to health. They can be classified broadly into three
areas: (see Fig.1)
• simple systems covering safety equipment.
• formaI procedures for carrying out work

processes (e.g. entry into confined spaces).
• special applications (lock-off systems).
The following measures are priorities: Fig.1 - Photo showing entry into a sewer
manhole using winch, tripod, safety
• test atmosphere prior to entry. harness etc. and following the
correct safe system of work
• continuous monitoring at the workplace.
• maintain contact between operative and attendant in free air who is trained to carry out
emergency procedures.
21.3 PERSONNEL SELECTION

Persons who will be expected to work in confined spaces must be physically and mentally
suitable. It is no job for the claustrophobic or the foolhardy. It is recommended that
employees taken on for such work are over 18 years and preferably under 55 years of age.
Heavy manual tasks, with the necessity for rescue training and the possible added burden of
working in breathing apparatus may make the job too demanding for older men. Men of 55

PART TWO
and over who are already employed on work in confined spaces should be medically
examined annually and additionally after any illness.
no one with any of the following disabilities should work in confined spaces:
• a history of fits, blackouts or fainting • asthma, bronchitis or shortness of

attacks. breath on exertion.
• a history of heart disease or heart • deafness.

disorders.
• meniêre’s disease or any illness causing
• high blood pressure giddiness or loss of balance.
• claustrophobia or other nervous or • chronic skin disease.

mental disorder.
• serious defect in eyesight.
• back pain or joint trouble that would limit
• lack of sense of smell.
mobility in a cramped space.
• deformity or disease of the lower limbs

limiting movement.
21.4 TRAINING
Work in confined spaces must only be undertaken by employees who have been properly
trained for the job.
It is the employer’s duty to provide such information, instruction, training and supervision as
is necessary to ensure, so far as is reasonably practicable, the health and safety at work of
his employees.
Training must be planned specifically for:
• supervision • persons who will act as attendants
• persons who will be expected to enter • persons appointed to form a rescue team.
confined spaces to work in them
The precise form of the training and instruction must depend on the individual operations,
but in addition to any specialised training for particular tasks, general training for work in
confined spaces should include:
• observance of the safe system of work (permit-to-work).
• restrictions on size imposed by existing manholes or access shafts should be taken into
account when developing safe systems of work.
• training in the procedures for rescue, including the correct use and maintenance of
rescue equipment and resuscitation equipment.

PART TWO
instruction :-
• on the suitable types of breathing • practice in the correct use of fire

apparatus and practice in their use, care fighting equipment.
and maintenance.
• (where applicable) observance of
• in first aid, treatment of shock, resuscita- personal hygiene rules to avoid health
tion. risks.
• practice in the correct procedures in • (where available and applicable) the

emergencies, especially evacuation. use of mobile radio.
• in the use of atmospheric testing

equipment.
Note: Instruction in the use and maintenance of equipment can often be given by the
Manufacturer.
21.4.1 practice drills

Practice drills are an essential part of
training; theoretical knowledge is not enough
to ensure that the right action will be taken in Fig.2
a real emergency. The use of breathing
apparatus especially should be practised
regularly, also the procedures for
emergency evacuation.
The drill should ensure that employees

acquire a sound working knowledge of the
signal communicating system to be used Fig.2 - Showing a Confined Space Team having a
practice drill entering a 8m deep sludge
between persons working in the confined collecting chamber.
space and those in attendance outside.
They must also learn the correct procedure for summoning medical aid or the emergency
services and the use and maintenance of any recovery winches and/or other methods of
recovery.
It is important that employees should learn to recognise situations requiring the use of
respiratory protective equipment and be able identify the appropriate atmosphere testing
equipment.
Refresher courses should be given as necessary on a regular basis. It is important that a full
and up to date record should be kept of the type of training given to each individual. (see
Fig.2)

PART TWO
21.5 TOXIC AND FLAMMABLE ATMOSPHERES

In the context of confined space work the term nontoxic can be dangerously misleading. In a
small unventilated space any of the whole range of gases and vapours found in industry in
sufficiently high concentration could create an atmosphere that is not safe to breathe.
Contaminants can arise from:-
• the space itself (e.g. leaded petrol tanks).
• earlier process (e.g. degreasing, in which case a residue of trichlorethylene solvent in the
tank could emit fumes when the sludge is cleaned off).
• previous contents where confined spaces such as tanks have previously contained
flammable, explosive or toxic materials and where the work being done could create
vapour from the remains of the previous contents.
21.5.1 adjoining plant

Gas or vapour may enter the confined space from adjoining plant if it has not been
effectively isolated. To prevent exhaust fumes from entering a confined space and causing a
hazard, vehicles should not he sited near the entrance.
21.5.2 nearby undertakings

Where any deep narrow excavation (e.g. bore-hole) is adjacent to spoil heaps, sewage
works, gas works, old drainage systems, chemical works or refineries there is a danger of
seepage into the confined space. Air testing must be carried out before entry, and thereafter
at intervals for oxygen deficiency and toxic or flammable gases.
An atmosphere which is not fit to breathe may exist at the bottom of a hole from stagnant
water or from the subsoil itself e.g. the passage of water through chalk for instance, can
release carbon dioxide.
21.6 ATMOSPHERE MONITORING

Wherever work is carried out in confined spaces,
adequate ventilation must be provided if there is any 3
risk of the air becoming deficient in oxygen or
contaminated with dangerous or injurious dust, fumes
or gases. It is also requirement that atmospheric
testing must be carried out if the air in any confined
space is suspected of being poisonous or
asphyxiating. (see Figs. 3 & 4 )
No person must be allowed to enter until a

competent person is satisfied that entry is safe.

PART TWO
An atmosphere which is safe on entry may become Fig.4

unsafe through any of the reasons given above, and
4
continuous monitoring is therefore necessary while
persons are working inside.
The odour of gases is useful in giving an early

indication of possible danger, but it must not be relied
on without the back-up of atmosphere testing
instruments. Figs. 3 & 4
showing two types of
The sense of smell varies greatly from person to portable gas monitors, both
person and is poor in the older age groups. Some capable of detecting up to 4
different gasses e.g.
dangerous gases have no smell (for instance
Low Oxygen
carbon monoxide and methane) and others
Hydrogen Sulphide
paralyse the sense of smell (for example hydrogen Methane Gas
sulphide). Carbon Monoxide
21.6.1 oxygen deficiency

Without any poisonous gas being present the atmosphere may become lethal through
depletion of oxygen. Normal air contains about 21% oxygen, 79% nitrogen. Below 17%
oxygen, a flame will not burn and the atmosphere is not fit to breathe.
The person working in an oxygen-deficient atmosphere may not be aware that he is in

danger. Consequently symptoms such as breathlessness, faintness, lack of physical co-
ordination, should lead to immediate evacuation, since unconsciousness can follow rapidly
and unexpectedly.
Several different situations can lead to an oxygen-deficient atmosphere:
21.6.2 rusting process

Where a steel vessel has been closed for some considerable time, the oxygen in the air may
have become absorbed onto the inner surface of the vessel through the rusting process. The
presence of moisture inside a steel vessel increases the likelihood of this occurring.
21.6.3 contaminated soil

Oxygen deficiency and concentrations of carbon dioxide may be encountered in tunnels or
deep excavations on land contaminated with coal waste or decaying organic matter, Slow
oxidation of buried coal waste and microbiological decay of organic matter takes up the
oxygen of the air in the surrounding soil leaving a nitrogen gas mixture deficient in oxygen
and rich in carbon dioxide. Falling atmospheric pressure would allow this gaseous mixture to
seep into tunnels or deep excavations in the contaminated ground.
21.6.4 decay of organic matter

Oxygen deficiency can result (for example in sewers or excavations in contaminated soil)
from the absorption or biochemical depletion of the available oxygen by organic matter.

PART TWO
21.6.5 oxygen enrichment

The opposite condition, an oxygen-enriched atmosphere, can be equally dangerous. With an
excess of oxygen in the air some substances containing organic matter become liable to
spontaneous combustion. Grease and oil, for instance, may self-ignite, and also paint,
plastics, textiles, paper and wood.
Oxygen in more than its normal proportions in the air also greatly increases the
combustibility of all other materials. A fire in an oxygen-enriched atmosphere develops with
great speed and ferocity and may be particularly difficult to extinguish.
The atmosphere can accidentally become too rich in oxygen as a result of work which
releases extra oxygen into the air, for instance oxy-propane cutting.
Note: It is dangerous to purge with oxygen instead of air, and in no circumstances should
oxygen be introduced into a confined space to “sweeten” the air or to provide
ventilation. A leak of liquid oxygen or oxygen gas must be treated as a serious matter.
21.7 PERMIT TO WORK (see Pt 2 section 11) – Permit to Work.
21.8 WORKING PRECAUTIONS

Carrying out a job in a confined space often
entails working in cramped conditions, so work
shifts should be broken at intervals by rest
periods which the worker should spend in fresh
air. He must in any case leave the confined
space at the expiry of the time limit on the
permit-to-work.
“No smoking and no naked lights’’ must be

the rule in and near all confined space
operations. Only non-sparking tools must be
Fig.5 - Showing Forced ventilation equipment
used, and no nylon lines or nylon clothing used to provide clean air for workers
allowed because of the danger of generating a cleaning an old sludge holding tank.
spark from static electricity.
All electrical tools and lighting must be of the flameproof or intrinsically safe type. The
British/American Approvals Service for Electrical Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres
defines ‘intrinsically safe’’ as ‘‘Systems comprising apparatus and interconnecting wiring in
which any spark or thermal effect in any part of the system for use in the hazardous area, is
incapable, under prescribed conditions, of causing ignition of a given gas or vapour.

PART TWO
(BASEEFA Certification Standard SEA 3012). Intrinsically safe is also defined in BS 1259.
Cylinders containing compressed gases, or any lines or equipment connected to cylinders

outside the confined space, should be removed at meal breaks, shift changes or whenever
that space is left unattended.
21.9 RESCUE
The procedure for rescue in an emergency should be set out clearly in the permit-to-work,
with specific jobs allocated to specific persons.
Training should ensure that if a rescue becomes necessary, all persons concerned are
thoroughly familiar with the routine procedures through frequent practice drills.
The communication system must not rely on any method (for instance, blowing whistles)
which becomes impossible when breathing apparatus is being worn. Signals by means of
rope can also be unreliable since if the rope snags communication is lost.
At the same time, a danger alert must not rely on a signal given by the worker inside the
confined space, since if he is overcome suddenly he will be in no condition to give the alarm
and he may be working alone.
If space allows, a minimum of two men should enter a confined space when working out of
sight of the external observer. Communication must be of a fail-safe type. That is to say, if
the worker inside the confined space does NOT take the right action, the alarm is given. For
instance, if a periodic pre-arranged signal is NOT received at the end of the normal interval,
it could result in serious injury, or even death.
The essentials for rescuing someone from a confined space are that:
• the outside observer must have means of knowing immediately that a man is gassed or
has met with an accident.
• the rescue team, alerted by the observer, must get the casualty out into free air speedily.
• the casualty must be given first aid quickly, either at the work location or immediately he
is brought out into free air and the appropriate medical attention as soon thereafter as
possible.
rescue equipment
Rescue equipment should include breathing apparatus, resuscitation apparatus and oxygen.
It should also include:
• full body safety harnesses with • fire fighting apparatus.

adequate length of rope taking account
• emergency escape breathing pack.
of the workplace location.
• audible alarm for summoning help.
• man winch.

PART TWO
• at least one set of suitable breathing • means of communication with the

apparatus and emergency breathing surface observer.
pack.
• intrinsically safe hand torches or cap
• first aid equipment. lamps.
entry for rescue

Where the casualty has had an accident and is injured in an atmosphere certified on entry
as safe, rescuers can enter without breathing apparatus provided there are no indications
that the atmosphere has become unsafe.
Where, however, the casualty has collapsed and the cause is not known, then rescuers
must wear breathing apparatus.
This applies even if, when the person entered the confined space, it was certified as safe to
enter. The reason for the collapse could be an overall deterioration in the atmosphere since
entry was made, or a deterioration in the particular area where the casualty has been
overcome.
Apart from the paramount necessity of rescuing a worker who has been overcome, if gas is
suspected the emergency procedure must provide for the immediate evacuation of any other
person who may be within the confined space. A system of "audible" evacuate alarms
operated by the observer outside should always be installed if persons have to work out of
the sight of the observer at some distance from the openings.
If fire has broken out, or flammable gas is suspected, a pre-arranged procedure must
provide for the immediate summoning of the Civil Defense.
Emergency plans should be discussed with the local emergency services including fire,
police and ambulance so that the best use can be made of their expertise and facilities. If it
is practicable, there is great advantage in having an emergency practice with all the services
participating.
21.10 BREATHING APPARATUS

Breathing apparatus is used for work in confined spaces when the atmosphere is not safe to
breathe. The equipment consists of a properly fitted helmet or face piece, by means of which
the wearer can breathe uncontaminated air, either drawn from fresh air or supplied by
compressed air. All breathing apparatus supplied alter 30 June 1995 must carry the CE
mark.

PART TWO
The following are relevant types:
air line breathing apparatus

Supplied with compressed air by air line from a compressor or cylinders, in either case an
attendant must always be on duty at the supply end to monitor the uninterrupted supply of Fig. 6
compressed air. (see Fig.6)
If the air is supplied by a compressor, care

must be taken to see that the compressed
air delivered to the breathing apparatus
wearer is pure and uncontaminated by oil,
exhaust gases or any other pollutants.
Again the advantage is the unlimited supply

of air, the disadvantage is the presence of
the air line.
Fig. 6 – Showing Air Line type Breathing Equipment.
Where access to a confined space is too small for a man to enter wearing self-contained
breathing apparatus with cylinders. or where it is not possible to site a compressor unit
nearby, a mobile breathing apparatus unit (hose reel and trolley set) is useful.
self-contained breathing apparatus

Supplied by compressed air from cylinders
carried on the user’s back. This type is free
from the disadvantage of a trailing air line, and
it allows the man to he supplied with
compressed air or whatever mixture of gases is
suitable in the circumstances, and to move
freely The disadvantages are obvious, e.g.
• entry through a small man hole is not

possible wearing a cylinder pack: working in
a cramped space is impossible.
• the weight of the pack, (13 .18kg), imposes

a considerable extra work cad on the wearer
• the limited duration of the air in the cylinder,

which decreases in heavy work. (see Fig.7)
Fig.7 - Showing Self Contained Breathing
Apparatus.

PART TWO
escape breathing apparatus

Self-contained breathing apparatus with small
cylinder. Its purpose is simply to provide enough
respirable air in an irrespirable atmosphere to give
the wearer time to escape. (see Fig.8)
The breathing apparatus should be well fitting and

properly worn as accidents have occurred due to the
displacement of a face- or mouth-piece. It is better
When using an air line type of breathing apparatus,

to take filtered air from a supply at such a rate that a Fig.8 - Showing a 15 minute constant
flow type escape set.
positive pressure is maintained inside the face-piece.
All breathing apparatus must be thoroughly examined at least once every month by a
competent person authorised by certificate to carry out such examinations, and inspected,
tested and certified at intervals not exceeding six months.
Where practicable, the types of breathing apparatus used in an organisation should be

standardised. This reduces maintenance and spares problems, and simplifies operator
training.
21.11 PERSONNEL
People who will or may have to use breathing apparatus must be fit and not suffering from
any chronic or acute respiratory ailment. And they must he properly trained in the use of the
equipment.
Training, given by qualified person, should include:
instruction on :-
• the equipment, its mode of operation • how to deal with malfunctions and
and its limitations. failures of equipment during use.
• the care and cleaning of apparatus. • the use of breathing apparatus in
• how to don the equipment, adjust the emergency situations.
face-piece and supply valves where • the functions and limitations of escape
necessary, and to test for leaks around breathing apparatus.
the face-piece (beards and facial hair • the hazards which necessitate the use
may prevent an air tight seal). of breathing apparatus.
Maintenance and servicing of breathing apparatus should be in accordance with the

manufacturers instructions.

PART TWO
21.12 SEWERS
Additional to the precautions for confined spaces,
work in sewers necessitates safeguards against:
drowning and/or being swept away, 200mm of
water in a fast flowing sewer is difficult to stand
against and 600mm of water is a danger.
Conditions in a sewer can change very quickly,
and workers should be able to recognise
indications of danger such as: (see Fig.9)
• movement of air through the sewer.
• increase in depth or velocity of the stream.
• noise of approaching water.
In any of these conditions, immediate evacuation Fig.9 - Sewerage Operator entering a

must he carried out. 9m deep sewer access
manhole in Abu Dhabi. Note
using life line and Full
Breathing Apparatus.
21.12.1 preliminary precautions during the planning of the work

should include:
• a system whereby a forecast of local weather conditions is obtained periodically.
• establishment of local control procedures in collaboration with sources of large amounts

of industrial effluents.
• collaboration with emergency services so that contingency plans can he established to

enable those in control of sewer operations to be alerted to the possible danger if, for
instance, harmful or flammable substances are released into the drains as a result of a
road accident or other emergency.
• Chains or bars should be fixed downstream of the working place before work starts.
• Wherever necessary for safety, running lines should be fixed for men to clip on to them.
21.13 BACTERIAL INFECTION & HYGIENE

21.13.1 leptospirosis (Weil’s Disease)
Infection can arise (mainly in foul sewers) from rats’ urine (Weil’s disease) from putrefying
solids or in discharges from hospitals and on occasion general discharges during epidemics
of contagious disease.

PART TWO
A kind of infective jaundice, Weil’s disease or Leptospirosis is usually a mild illness if treated
in the early stages, but it can be a serious illness if it remains unrecognised and therefore
the patient is not given the appropriate treatment. It starts with flu-like symptoms, and to
safeguard against a wrong diagnosis, men who will be working in sewers should be provided
with a card to present to their doctor which informs him of the mans occupation.
The disease is not conveyed from person to person, so that a man’s family is not at risk, and
an attack confers a certain amount of immunity.
It is strongly recommended that anyone whose job brings him into possible contact with
sewage, should be inoculated against tetanus, poliomyelitis and hepatitis "A & B" and to
have the immunity maintained the whole time he is at work. Other precautions against all
these infections consist of good personal hygiene.
All workers should wear appropriate protective clothing (which is thoroughly cleaned after
each work period) and avoid exposing the skin, as infection can enter through abrasions.
Lanolin - based barrier cream should be used before work, and after work the hands, face
and forearms washed with hot water and soap. The nails should be scrubbed, but not the
skin, as this can roughen the skin surface and increase the risk of infection, and even the
smallest scratch should be washed and covered with antiseptic dressing, and every
accident, however trivial, reported to the person in charge of the work.
Eating, drinking and smoking must not be allowed until the personal hygiene rules have
been observed. Routine hygiene is easier to observe if mobile vans contain toilets, proper
hot water washing facilities and first aid on the site.
21.14 DETERIORATING ATMOSPHERE

The gases most commonly found in sewers are hydrogen sulphide (H2S), (flammable and
toxic) and methane (flammable and explosive in air). Both are generated during the
decomposition of organic matter and can be released into the air as workers wade through
the sewer so that a sewer certified as safe to enter may become unsafe as soon as men set
foot in it. Workers should be instructed to walk slowly and cause as little disturbance of
bottom sludge as possible.
The characteristic smell of rotten eggs indicates low concentrations of H2S, but at
concentrations high enough to be dangerous the gas paralyses the sense of smell, so the
absence of detectable smell is no guarantee of safety. H2S is an acute irritant to the eyes
and the respiratory passages massive inhalations can produce death by asphyxia.
Symptoms of exposure can be eye irritation, sickness, dizziness, choking and lack of
muscular control.
Note: Any time that workers experience symptoms such as eye irritation or any feeling of
illness, it should be taken to indicate a potentially dangerous situation and
precautionary measures instituted immediately.

PART TWO
21.15 SUBSTANCES WHICH MAY BE ENCOUNTERED IN A CONFINED SPACE
HAZARDOUS HAZARD OCCUPATIONAL LOWER PREVENTION IN CASE OF

SUBSTANCES EXPOSURE EXPLOSIVE FIRE
LIMIT(PPM) LIMIT %
(SEE NOTE 1)
Asphyxiant and
Acetylene narcotic. Highly ____ 2.5 Ventilation Dry Powder
Flammable and Control
Explosive Cylinder Care
Asphyxiant and
Butane narcotic LT (OES) 600 1.6 Ventilation Dry Powder
Highly flammable ST (OES) 750 Control
and explosive Cylinder Care
Carbon Dioxide Asphyxiant LT (OES) 5,000 ___ Ventilation ___

ST (OES)15,000 Control
Carbon Toxic, flammable LT (OES) 50 12.5 Ventilation Dry Powder

Monoxide and explosive ST (OES) 4000 Control
Highly toxic and Ventilation

Chlorine corrosive. LT (OES) 0.5 ___ Control. Dry Powder
Flammable by ST (OES) 3.0 Complete AFFF
reaction with protective
other materials suits.
Hydrogen Highly Toxic LT (OES) 10

Sulphide Flammable ST (OES) 15 4.3 Ventilation Dry Powder
Control
Asphyxiant. ___
Methane Highly 4.1 Ventilation Dry Powder
Flammable and Control
Explosive
Nitrogen Highly toxic and LT (OES) 3-25 ___ Ventilation ___

Oxides corrosive ST (OES) 5.35 Control
Petrol Toxic and highly ___ 1.3 Ventilation Dry Powder

flammable Control AFFF

PART TWO
HAZARDOUS HAZARD OCCUPATIONAL LOWER PREVENTION IN CASE OF

SUBSTANCES EXPOSURE EXPLOSIVE FIRE
LIMIT(PPM) LIMIT %
(SEE NOTE 1)
Propane Asphyxiant. ___ 2.3 Ventilation Dry Powder

Highly Control
Flammable and Cylinder Care
Explosive
Toulene Toxic and LT (OES) 100 1.2 Ventilation Dry Powder

narcotic ST (OES) 150 Control
Highly Impermeable
flammable gloves
Trichlor- Narcotic, may LT (MEL) 100 ___ Ventilation Dry Powder

ethylene emit highly toxic ST (MEL) 150 Control
fumes in Impermeable
presence of hot gloves
work
Welding fumes Depending on LT (OES) 5 ___ Ventilation ___

metal and rods generally control
used. Mixture of (other exposure Filter face
gases,metal and limits may apply) masks
oxide fumes Heat resistant
may contain gloves and
zinc, cadium or overalls
lead Eye protection
White spirit Flammable LT (OES) 100 1.1 Ventilation Dry Powder

ST (OES) 125 Control
Note: LT(MEL) Long - term maximum exposure limit (8 hour TWA)

ST(MEL) Short - term maximum exposure limit (15 minutes TWA)
LT(OES) Recommended long-term occupational exposure standard (8 hour TWA)
ST(OES) Recommended short-term occupational exposure standard (8 hours TWA)
P.P.M. Parts per million
TWA Time Waited Average calculated over 8 hours

SECTION 22
ROAD WORKS & BRIDGES
INTRODUCTION 1
22.1 PLANNING 2
22.2 PERSONS AT RISK 3
22.3 RISKS AND HAZARDS 4
22.4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 6
22.5 TRAFFIC DIVERSIONS 10
22.6 TABLE 1 - positioning of signs and cones 15
22.7 FIGURE 1 - traffic diversion diagram 16
22.8 BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION 16
ROADWORKS SAFETY CHECKLIST

(ADM/H&S/CL/2.22/1)
SECTION 22
PART TWO
SECTION 22
ROAD WORKS & BRIDGES
INTRODUCTION
This section is intended to cover safety aspects on all roadworks, as applied to both new highway
construction works and the reconstruction or resurfacing of existing highways
The term "Roadworks" includes the use of road surfacing materials containing cement, such as concrete and
mortars, and those containing bitumen, pitch or tar, such as hot rolled asphalt, cold asphalt, bituminous-
macadam and tar macadam, etc., and also the use of bitumens and tars in cold or hot liquid and spray
form. Various ancillary works and materials are also covered, including the use of waterbound macadam
and epoxy resins, the burning off and planning of existing bituminous road surfaces, the use of fuels such
as diesel oil, petrol and liquefied petroleum gas, as well as the many other maintenance activities such as
patching, surface dressing, drainage works and trench reinstatements, etc., carried out on our highways
every day.
The term "Bituminous Material" used in this section refers to any material containing bitumen, tar or pitch
as a binder and can also be considered to apply to bitumen or tar used in liquid form.

Abu Dhabi Traffic Police Department Regulations
ADM Roads Directorate Traffic Control Devices Manual, Section 7, Roadworks Traffic Control
ADM Roads Directorate - Bridge Design Manual

ADM/H&S/Pt 2 01 March 2005 ROADWORKS & BRIDGES 1 of 19
PART TWO
22.1 PLANNING
Road works can be a hazardous operation, both to contractors and to users of the public
highway. It is therefore essential to assess the various risks and to establish systems of
work which are both safe to contractors and the public.
22.1.1 generally
• it is essential to ensure road works wherever applicable are included in the pre tender
health and safety plan.
• associated safe systems of work and site rules should be included in the construction
health and safety plan which the main contractor must ensure is sufficiently developed
before the work is carried out.
• consider that pedestrian access and properties requiring vehicular access should at all
times be maintained.
• where work is planned which involves breaking up or opening any street or any
sewer drain or tunnel under it, this should be specified on the Notice of Intent and
approval must be given by all relevant authorities before commencing works.
• any part of the street to be obstructed by plant or materials must be adequately

signed and guarded, paying particular regard to the needs of the disabled.
• works must be supervised by a supervisor having prescribed qualifications and there

must be on site at all times at least one trained operative having prescribed
qualifications.
• it is important that the workforce is given appropriate induction training before

beginning work on site.
• visitors must be given sufficient instruction on relevant hazards before entering the
works area and be accompanied at all times by a trained person.
22.1.2 major roadworks sites

• on major roadworks sites, such as on motorways, designers should ensure that at
least one safe method of construction is identified, covering the workforce, others
involved in the project and members of the public.
• thorough planning is essential to ensure that adequate space and sufficient time is
available to enable the work to be carried out safely and efficiently.
• difficult space limitations should be avoided wherever possible. Sufficient space is

required for lateral and longitudinal safety zones, for the working area, for buffer
zones and for efficient traffic management systems. Although barriers for buffer and
safety zones should normally be of safe type, in certain circumstances, where there is
a high risk to operatives from motorway traffic, the use of concrete barriers may be
required. It is important, however, that these are used only with the agreement of the
police as damage to vehicles is inevitable if a collision occurs.

PART TWO
Sufficient space must also be provided for:
access for site transport
• where possible, well signed lead-in and lead-out coned off lanes should be provided
for site transport.
access for emergency services
• where possible, a clear traffic lane should be provided between the limits of the
"working space" and the live traffic, for use by the emergency services.
• where a clear lane cannot be provided, the site access lane will need to be used by
emergency services and, in the event of an accident blocking the running lanes, the
police may require the site access lane to be used by general traffic.
• where a site access lane cannot be provided, it will be necessary for an access
through the works area to be available for use in an emergency.
access across traffic lanes
• works personnel may need to get from one side of a traffic lane to the other.
• traffic lanes must never be crossed on foot and safe procedures must be introduced, such
as the provision of temporary bridges, or an approved route for authorised vehicles.
22.2 PERSONS AT RISK

In all safety matters pertaining to highway works, consideration must always be given to
operatives working on the highway and to the general public using the highway.
22.2.1 operatives working on the highway

• all construction workers engaged on highway works could be at risk. In addition, however, if
the highway works are on a road which is open to traffic, the risk is increased.
22.2.2 users of the public highway

• pedestrians and vehicle occupants passing in the vicinity of highway works could be at risk, as
could persons living or working nearby

PART TWO
22.3 RISKS AND HAZARDS

The risks to operatives and to members of the public can result in injuries caused by the following
hazards:
22.3.1 burns and fire risks

• many bituminous materials are supplied and used in hot form. Bearing in mind that hot rolled
asphalt is supplied at a temperature in the region of 135°C and liquid bitumen for surface
dressing at 150°C, burns can easily occur. There is also danger of burns from machinery and
hand tools used to lay hot bituminous materials or to heat existing road surfaces.
• the overheating of bitumen or tar, the misuse of fuels or the use of fuels in defective plant, can
create a serious fire risk. Heaters or burners used for heating existing road surfaces can,
if not properly operated and controlled, damage or set fire to adjacent property.
• skin contact with LPG can give cold burns, and cement, when wet, in the form of
concrete or mortar can cause serious burns.
22.3.2 carcinogenic nature of pitch, tar and mineral oils

• operatives who use pitch, tar or mineral oils, especially over a long period of time can
develop a skin cancer in the form of cancerous warts. The danger arises where any of these
materials is in frequent contact with the skin. When it occurs it is usually on the face, neck,
hands, arms or scrotum and may be cured by early treatment. Petroleum bitumens are not
considered to be a hazard in this respect.
• a further possible hazard from prolonged and constant contact with these same materials is
the contraction of dermatitis.
22.3.3 vehicle and plant accidents

• whenever vehicles or plant are moving or working alongside pedestrians or pedestrian
operatives on any roadworks site, there is a high accident potential.
Hazards under this heading fall into two general categories:
• the traffic accident type where a pedestrian operative is run over by plant or a vehicle.
Provision of a banksman should help to combat this type of hazard.
• the machinery/operative type of accident where injury is caused by the operation of the
plant or vehicle or the machinery in the plant or vehicle. For example, where an operative is
injured by unguarded machinery in a paving machine.
22.3.4 accidents to the public

• roadworks present an additional hazard to highway users over and above the ever present
traffic accident risk. However well roadworks are signed, the sudden appearance of
roadmen and plant in the road in front of moving traffic can be unexpected.
• the provision of a complete system of advance warning signs is absolutely essential,

together with a suitable traffic control system as detailed in this section.

PART TWO
22.3.5 eye hazards

• on works where hard surfaces or materials such as concrete, stone, rock or asphalt etc. are
being broken out by hand or machine or being formed with a hand tool such as a cold
chisel or a power driven tool, small chips or pieces of the material can be projected through
the air at high speed. If one or more of these pieces enters the eye, serious injury can result.
• a further danger can be caused by the inadvertent entry into the eye of other foreign
matter such as bitumen, oil, cement or other dusts.
• the use of epoxy resins adds a further hazard. If the curing agent gets into the eye,
permanent damage is likely.
22.3.6 falls
• operatives falling over any object or falling into excavations etc. account for many
accidents on roadworks sites. Falls from moving vehicles or plant are a further hazard.
22.3.7 hearing hazards

• where excessively noisy plant or other equipment is used permanent damage to hearing can
occur. Lower noise-levels, while not perhaps causing damage to hearing can be very
uncomfortable for operatives, causing tiredness, which in itself is another hazard.
• the reduction of noise at source and the provision and use of hearing protection can
remove this hazard. However, it must be appreciated that, if hearing protection is worn
when working close to fast moving traffic, the risk of a traffic accident is increased.
22.3.8 hazards from overhead and underground cables etc.

• the presence of underground electricity cables and other services can be a serious
hazard, particularly on existing highways.
• the location and identification of all underground and overhead mains and cables
must be established before works on site commence. (see Pt 2 Section 6)
22.3.9 back injuries

• back injuries can occur in working with bituminous materials and with concrete, especially
in lifting, raking and tamping.
• the use of correct lifting techniques and assuming correct postures will assist in
eliminating this most common of all hazards. (see Pt 2 section 8).
22.3.10 hazards from dusts, fumes and smoke

• the presence of various dusts is quite common on roadwork sites, the degree of
danger depending on the type of dust and the length of the time of inhalation. Dust
containing pitch can be carcinogenic, whilst cement dust can cause lung scarring, burns
and dermatitis. Silica dust can cause silicosis.

PART TWO
• fumes and smoke from hot bituminous materials are always present when these
materials are being used and they can cause discomfort and nausea to some operatives.
Careful assessment and monitoring of any dust, fume or smoke conditions is essential.
22.4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

The foregoing accident hazards can largely be prevented by careful planning and
exercising simple precautions.
22.4.1 personal hygiene

• transportable washing and toilet facilities should be provided on all sites to enable
operatives to wash off bituminous materials, cement or oils from the skin, especially
before eating or using toilet facilities and even smoking.
• personal hygiene is an absolutely essential step in combating the risk of dermatitis and
cancer.
• provision of adequate welfare facilities can be particularly difficult where work is of

short duration and should be catered for accordingly
• clean overalls are of little use if worn over clothing which is itself impregnated with
cement, oil or tar etc. Therefore, operatives' clothing should be kept reasonably clean
and free from cement, bituminous materials and dirt (see below)
22.4.2 protective clothing and equipment (also see Pt 2 section 12)

All operatives handling bituminous materials or concrete, and all others working on roadworks
sites should at all times wear:
safety helmets
• conspicuously coloured to make the wearer more visible to vehicle and plant operators.
All site personnel must wear a safety helmet at all times.
safety boots with steel toecaps
• with stout heat resisting soles

high visibility clothing
• essential to ensure that operatives are easily visible to all vehicle and plant drivers and
to passing traffic. Must be worn on dual carriageways with a speed limit of 80km/h or
above.
general covering/clothing
• cover exposed parts of the body in order to prevent contamination of the skin with
bituminous materials or concrete or cement.

PART TWO
• if clothing becomes impregnated with any bituminous material or concrete or cement, it

ceases to protect and may even cause the effects which it is intended to prevent as
oils, bituminous materials and cement work their way through clothing on to the skin.
• therefore, it is essential that all overalls, gloves etc. are regularly cleaned to remove
any contamination. Dry cleaning is probably the only effective method. In bad cases
of saturation with bituminous material or cement, the only remedy is disposal and
replacement.
gloves
• able to protect the wearer against heat, oil, tars, bitumens and concrete etc.
eye protection
• for such operations as cutting out, grinding, spraying bitumens or tar.

hearing protection
• noise from various sources can often be reduced by the provision of baffles or screens.
Noise from internal combustion engines can be reduced by the provision of silencers
or replacement of defective ones.
dust masks and breathing apparatus
• normally with roadworks the site is of an open nature and problems of fumes, smoke
and dusts are the exception rather than the rule.
• the problem may arise especially in confined sites such as a narrow road between tall
buildings or in tunnels or underpasses.
• dusts can generally be controlled by damping down but it may be necessary to provide
forced ventilation, e.g. air movers, and masks or breathing apparatus of a suitable type
for operatives.
• if breathing apparatus is required, proper selection and training is necessary. It is also

very restrictive on heavy manual work. Care must be exercised to ensure that the
protection provided is suitable for the particular problem experienced, be it dust, gas,
fumes or smoke.
22.4.3 overhead and underground services (also see Pt 2 section 6)

• the location of all mains and services must be established before carrying out any works
involving breaking out or excavating etc.
• Particular attention must be paid to electricity cables, both underground and overhead
and also to gas mains. In addition, it is advisable to verify the location of any given main
before commencing other excavation works in the locality.

PART TWO
22.4.4 plant (also see Pt 2 section 15)

• all plant manufacturers must provide safety recommendations and procedures in
respect of their product.
• it is essential that all users obtain such information and are familiar with and follow the
recommendations. A copy should always be kept with the particular machine.
• plant manufacturers must provide all necessary guards and safety devices for their
plant and if not, the plant must not be operated until a suitable protective guard has
been fitted.
• it is strongly recommended that all mobile plant and vehicles be painted a conspicuous
colour (e.g. bright golden yellow) and be equipped with rotating amber flashing
beacons.
• the operators of all plant and machinery must be properly trained and competent in the
use of the particular machine which they operate.
• it is the duty of all plant owners and operators to ensure that all safety devices such
as guards, brakes, hand-rails, warning lights and flashers etc. are always operating
satisfactorily or are reported immediately they become defective. The continued
use of plant or machines with defective safety devices must be prohibited.
• the misuse, overloading or the unauthorised riding on any plant or vehicle is forbidden
22.4.5 tools (also see Pt 2 Section 16)

• all tools used must be kept in good order and operators must be competent in their
use. Where necessary, training must be given.
22.4.6 fuels
• the fuels generally used on roadworks sites are diesel oil or gas oil, liquefied petroleum
gas and, more rarely, petrol.
• a "No Smoking" rule must be enforced where appropriate.

• any leakage from plant, or spillages, must be quickly remedied.
• a reasonable quantity of oil-absorbent chemical should be kept at all roadworks sites
for use on any spillage.
22.4.7 fire extinguishers

• fire extinguishers must be provided on all sites.
• generally dry powder, foam or CO2 extinguishers only should be used on oil, bitumen
or petrol fires; dry powder extinguishers should be used on LPG fires.
• water extinguishers should never be used on these types of fire.

PART TWO
22.4.8 pedestrian & warning barriers

• precautions must be taken to prevent persons
or plant from falling into any excavation.
(see Pt 2 section 23)
• particular precautions are required where the

public are involved, which will mean the fixing of
continuous rigid barriers to mark any temporary
footway and to protect pedestrians from traffic,
excavations and plant.
• guard rails should be at least 910mm above ground level and there should be toe boards
or another rail, approximately 150mm above the ground.
The following are examples of temporary barriers used to both protect the public and warn
vehicles.
22.4.9 general safety matters

The following additional general recommendations could all help to avert accidents:
• all vehicles and plant drivers and other occupants should vacate their vehicle by
the kerb side.
• all vehicles and plant should be equipped with two high intensity rear fog lamps that
are automatically switched on when reversing, plus an automatic audible reversing
alarm to warn operatives of the danger from a reversing vehicle. In addition, it is
highly desirable to have all reversing manoeuvres directed by a banksman located
towards the rear of the vehicle but within sight of the driver.
• in order to enable works to proceed smoothly on heavily used roads, consideration

should be given, where possible, to:
working during light traffic flows only
working at night
working at weekends

PART TWO
• works carried out at night should always be floodlit, taking care not to dazzle or
blind oncoming traffic.
• when works are being carried out on a highway open to traffic, two-way working
of traffic flows should be maintained whenever possible. The minimum widths
recommended are 2.75m for one-way working and 5.5m for two-way working.
• steps should be taken to maintain both site safety and security outside working
hours in order to reduce the risk of accidents to the public, particularly to
inquisitive children. All vehicles and plant should be immobilised when not in use.
22.5 TRAFFIC DIVERSIONS

22.5.1 general requirements
Traffic Diversions must comply with any special requirements of the Police; the advice of
which should be sought where appropriate. In particular:
• it is essential and mandatory for the protection of operatives and the general public that
adequate signs are displayed giving highway users advance warning of road works.
• the sizes and positioning of signs and cones are dependant on the type of the road and
the relevant speed limits. For example, high speed roads require more and larger signs
displayed further in advance of the works, than minor or slower speed roads.
• if it is necessary to hold down signs, cones etc. because of wind problems, only
sandbags should be used. Hard heavy objects should not be used as, if hit by a moving
vehicle, they could become lethal missiles to the danger of persons or other vehicles
nearby.
• warning signs should be set so that their lower edge is at least 300mm clear of the
ground. This prevents any wording at the bottom of the sign from becoming too
dirty, or obscured.
• signs must be clearly visible to approaching drivers by both day and night, and in all
weather conditions.
• if there is not adequate lighting available to sufficiently illuminate the sign at night, then
reflective signs must be used.
22.5.2 works area

• the works area is the excavation, chamber opening, etc at which work will be carried
out.

PART TWO
22.5.3 working space

• the working space is the space around the works area where tools, excavated
material, equipment and plant, etc will need to be stored. It is also the space needed
to move around in to do the job.
• there must be sufficient working space to ensure that the movement and operation of
plant (e.g. swinging of jibs and excavator arms) is clear of passing traffic and is not
encroaching into the safety zone, or adjacent footway.
22.5.4 safety zones

• on any roadwork site, a space must be provided around the works for the storage of
spoil, tools, plant and equipment and to allow the safe movement and operation of plant.
• a safety zone, delineated by cones and lamps should be provided to protect operatives
from the traffic and to protect traffic from the road works.
• plant must not be allowed to encroach on to the safety zone, nor must operatives be
allowed to enter it other than to maintain the cones or safety signs.
a safety zone comprises:
a lead-in taper of cones (T), which will vary with the speed limit and width of the
works. (see Table 1)
a sideways clearance between the working space and moving traffic, which
must be at least 0.5 metres on roads with speeds up to 80 km/h and at least 1.2
metres on roads with speeds of 80 km/h and over.
an exit taper which is always at 45 o to the kerbside or road edge, and
a traffic barrier, facing oncoming traffic, positioned within the coned-off area
to show the width of the works site. (This barrier may not be necessary if a
conspicuous vehicle is present).
N.B For roads with a speed limit of 80 km/h or more, an additional traffic barrier is required at
the end of the lead-in taper.

PART TWO
22.5.5 buffer zones

• on heavily used high-speed roads such as motorways and other principal roads, a
practice has been developed to provide buffer zones, to segregate opposing traffic
flows.
• the width of such buffer zones is preferably a full lane width of 3.65 metres, but should
be at least 1 metre. A full lane width has the added advantage of providing a separate
unused lane for access and emergency vehicles if breakdown or accident occurs.
• barriers should be used to delineate buffer zones. The ideal types in this case are
traffic cones, cats eye bollards or simple red and white coloured plastic pendant
markers, all of which are relatively harmless if hit by a vehicle.
traffic barriers
• traffic barriers should be constructed and should be continuous concrete traffic barriers,
used to indicate the road works and segregate the traffic from the works.
• their design should not cause a further hazard, if hit by a moving vehicle and they
should be of a conspicuous colour (e.g red or yellow stripes) and kept clean.

PART TWO
22.5.6 signage
advance signs
• Road Works Ahead’ signs shall be placed in advance of the road works and shall be the
first signs to be seen by the driver, as indicated in Table 1 (D).
Signs shown below are typical example of advance signs
ahead signs
• ‘Road Narrows Ahead’ signs shall be placed midway between the ‘Road Works Ahead'
signs and the beginning of the taper of traffic cones.
• ‘Keep Right’ or ‘Keep Left’ signs shall be placed at the beginning and end of the lead in
taper of cones.
• On roads with speed limits of 80km/h or more, all “ahead” signs should have the distance
to the works in meters printed on them as shown in Figure 1.
Signs shown below are typical example of ahead signs:

PART TWO
22.5.7 cones
• A line of traffic cones shall be positioned at a taper and should guide traffic past the
works, at a distance ahead of the works as indicated in Table 1 & Figure 1 (T).
• The maximum spacing distance of cones in longitudinal lengths of coning shall be no
more than 9 meters, but no less than 2 cones shall be used in any length between
tapers.
• Generally lead in tapers used with traffic control, and all exit tapers, shall be about 45° to
the kerb line with cones spaced 1.2 m apart and more specifically as below:
recommended cone spacing guide
Lead in taper: 1 in 10 or less Centre to centre cone spacing : 2 metres
1 in 20 4 metres
1 in 30 6 metres
Localised minor work area 1-2 metres
22.5.8 lamps
• road danger lamps must be provided for use at night, in poor daytime visibility and in bad
weather
• road danger lamps must not be higher than 1.2 metres above the road
flashing lamps (120 to 150 flashes per minute)

Only to be used if all of the following are satisfied:
• the road speed limit must be under 60 km per hour
• the road danger lamp must be within 50 metres of a street lamp
• the street must be illuminated
steady lamps
can be used on any road with or without street lighting.
22.5.9 pedestrians
• works on footways must leave at least 1.5m unobstructed width for temporary pedestrian
ways and should never be less than 1 m wide. Where this is not obtainable, an
alternative safe route for pedestrians must be provided.
• rigid barriers must be used to mark any temporary footway and to protect
pedestrians from traffic, excavations, plant and materials. Road danger lamps must
be placed at the ends of the barriers at night. Hand rails should be between 1.0
and 1.2m above ground level.

PART TWO
• if the temporary footway is in the carriageway, signing will be necessary for both
pedestrians and drivers. The provision of kerb ramps or raised footways may also be
necessary to help blind, elderly or disabled persons, or for those with prams or
wheelchairs.
22.6 TABLE 1 - positioning of signs and cones

details of signs and cones shall be as follows:
Minimum Minimum Minimum Minimum
siting clear size height
distance visibility of of
to first signs cones Details of lead-in cone tapers
(D)
of first sign (mm) (mm)
sign (metres)
Type of road in
advance
of works
(metres) Width of hazard (metres)
(Note 1) (Note 2)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Length of taper (T) in metres 13 26 39 52 65 78 91

Single carriageway 20
road, restricted to to 60 600 450 Min. No. of cones 4 4 6 7 9 10 12
45
40km/h or less
Min. No. of lamps at night 3 3 5 6 8 9 11
Single carriageway Length of taper (T) in metres 20 40 60 80 100 120 140

45
road, restricted of
to 60 750 450 Min. No. of cones 4 6 8 10 13 15 17
speeds 41km/h to 110
60km/h inclusive Min. No. of lamps at night 3 5 7 9 12 14 16
All-purpose dual Length of taper (T) in metres 25 50 75 100 125 150 175
110
carriageway to 60 750 450 Min. No. of cones 4 7 10 13 15 18 21
road, restricted to 275
40km/h or less Min. No. of lamps at night 3 6 9 12 14 17 20
Length of taper (T) in metres 25 50 75 100 125 150 175

Single carriageway 275
road, with speed limit to 75 750 450 Min. No. of cones 4 7 10 13 15 18 21
450
80km/h or more
Min. No. of lamps at night 3 6 9 12 14 17 20
All-purpose dual Length of taper (T) in metres 32 64 96 128 160 192 224
725
carriageway 105 1200 750
to Min. No. of cones 5 9 12 16 19 23 26
road, with speed limit 1600
80km/h or more Min. No. of lamps at night 4 8 11 15 18 22 25
Note 1: Minimum and normal maximum distance of the first sign (D) is given to allow a
range wherein the sign can be placed in a convenient position, bearing in mind
available space and visibility for drivers.
Note 2 : It may be appropriate to use the next larger size of cone in lead-in tapers (i.e.
750mm cones) in tapers where 450mm cones are indicated and 1 meter high
cones where 750mm cones are shown.

PART TWO
22.7 FIGURE 1 – example traffic diversion diagram
works on an 80km/h dual carriageway road – left hand lane closed :
22.8 BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

22.8.1 general
• bridge construction activities, have significant health and safety implications. These
can arise from the nature of the processes, materials and chemicals used in
construction.
• this section raises relevant detailing issues and, in particular, those related to access
during bridge construction, operation and maintenance.
• the choice of a particular form of construction should be made with an appreciation of

the construction process and the need for maintenance. Where maintenance will be

PART TWO
carried out in high-risk areas, such as adjacent to high-speed traffic, the requirement
for such activity should be minimised.
• when working close to high-speed traffic, all relevant safety standards Roadworks as
explained in this chapter should be adhered to and in particular there should be a
safety zone for protection of the workforce in addition to the necessary working space.
• for motorways, this safety zone is a minimum of 12 m wide, so for bridge structures
with narrow verges the nearside lane will need to be closed when maintenance activity
takes place within the verge.
• other published guidance on health and safety issues in Bridge Construction should
be consulted as necessary. Further information can be obtained from:
ADM Road Directorate - Bridge Design Manual
ADM “HSE Codes of Practice Manual - Part Two Section 25 Falsework
CIRIA Report 166, CDM Regulations - work sector guidance for designers which
has sections on bridge construction and bridge maintenance.
22.8.2 construction operations

• hazardous situations can be created where insufficient space is available to
undertake the work safely, eg where rectangular voids with restricted headroom have
been detailed in a deck and the soffit formwork has to be stripped out through a
narrow gap. In such cases, the use of permanent formwork or void formers should be
considered.
• badly detailed and congested reinforcement can also create construction difficulties.
• where ground conditions are unsuitable to support necessary falsework, consideration
should be given to supporting the falsework off the permanent works foundations.
• permanent formwork offers the advantage of protecting the areas beneath the bridge
deck against falling items, and avoids the need to send operatives below the deck to
remove temporary works.
22.8.3 access
general
• design/detailing considerations regarding general access to bridges may be affected

by:
nature of the crossing (road, railway, river etc)

adjacent landscaping (steep embankment slopes, large trees etc)
location of buried services
height of parapets and pilasters
verge or pavement widths and surfacing

PART TWO
street furniture including lighting columns.

• it is no longer normal practice to provide access manholes in road surfaces, chiefly for
safety reasons. Closing traffic lanes on busy highways creates risks for both drivers
and operatives. Traffic congestion resulting from lane closures creates additional
risks.
• access into box girders should be arranged from the abutments or, where the boxes
are discontinuous, through the soffit. Care must be taken to provide safe access to
locations in the soffit. Size of openings, ease of entry and rescue requirements
including anchor points also need to be considered. Heavy skews may create
particular difficulties, and special measures are needed for arch, cable-stayed and
suspension bridges.
internal access
• the size of openings at entry and between the cells of a structure should be decided
as part of the designer's consideration of hazards and risks.
• any minimum required by any applicable authority should be taken into account. It is
recommended that absolute minima of 460 mm x 410 mm or, if circular, 460 mm
diameter, should be provided unless there are other adequate means of egress.
• access size should allow necessary equipment (eg ventilation or stressing equipment
and/or a loaded stretcher) to be handled safely.
• the spacing of the access points influences this assessment. Platforms should be
provided at access and egress points along with appropriate lifting points.
• designers should avoid details that present hazards or create access problems. Box
girder structures present particular difficulties, as internal inspection is required. The
interior of a box girder must be recognised as a confined space. Associated
requirements include:
trained personnel
risk assessments
emergency procedures
controlled entry
approved methods of working
air monitoring.
• the designer/detailer should therefore consider:
the means and ease of access

spacing of manholes
spacing of ventilation openings

PART TWO
frequency of inspections
methods of internal protection
frequency of subsequent maintenance.
22.8.4 lighting and walkways
• The frequency of inspections and maintenance visits makes installation of permanent
lighting essential in large box girder bridges.
• they improve both safety and efficiency, thereby justifying the investment. The
infrequency of visits to the interiors of small bridges makes a permanent lighting
installation unnecessary, although the provision of intrinsically safe power-points
protected from misuse is appropriate.
• incorporation of permanent walkways and materials-handling routes can be

considered, but these in turn need to be maintained and require handrails if there is
likely to be a fall greater than 2 m (eg tops of piers).
22.8.5 seepage of water

• water may enter structures through faulty weatherproof seals, leaking road drainage
pipes or condensation.
• as part of their risk assessment, designers should minimise the hazards of slipping
on wet surfaces and of infection from the build-up of fungi in box girders by making
allowance for water to be dispersed.
• water ingress into smaller hollow sections should be considered even when no entry
is envisaged. Problems from deadweight effects have been known to occur.
22.8.6 security
• improved access to all parts of bridges makes security more difficult. The security
risks at each location of a new bridge should be assessed and appropriate measures
taken.
• secure doors/gates to the access routes may be necessary in some locations and
surveillance systems may need to be installed for full security.
• public access to girders over roads and railways etc should be prevented. For
example, permanent access ladders should stop out of reach from the ground, or
locked fold-down ladders should be provided.

SAFETY CHECKLIST - ROAD WORKS
for operatives
Have you planned how you will sign and guard the works?
Have all the appropriate authorities been notified?

Is everyone on the site wearing high-visibility clothing?
first warning sign?
What other signs are needed approaching the works?
What signs are needed at the works?

What length of coned taper is required?
How many lamps and cones will be needed?
What width of carriageway can be kept open and will it be enough for two-way traffic?
What width of footway can be kept open and will it be enough?

What form of traffic control needed?
Have any misleading permanent signs been covered?
when work is in progress

If circumstances change, have you altered the signs, cones and lamps to suit?
Are signs, cones and lamps being regularly cleaned, maintained or replaced?
Has authorisation been obtained to accommodate any changed circumstances?
When traffic control changes are made at night or weekends, have the warning signs been
changed?
Are traffic control arrangements reviewed and changed to reduce delays as works change?
Are the works adequately signed, guarded and lit for the overnight period?
Have you cleared away any spoil, etc. which may have spread onto the surrounding road or
footway?
when work is complete and before you leave

Have all signs, cones and lamps been removed?
Have all permanent signs been restored?
Have appropriate authorities been notified that work is complete?
Document No. Rev Date Section title Checklist
ADM/H&S/CL/2.22/1 01 March 2005 SAFETY CHECKLIST - ROADWORKS 1 of 1

SECTION 23
EXCAVATIONS
INTRODUCTION 1
23.1 HAZARDS 2
23.2 GROUND CONDITIONS 3
23.3 CHOICE OF SUPPORT METHODS 5
23.4 SUPPORT SYSTEMS 6
23.5 MAIN SAFETY REQUIREMENTS 10
23.6 MAINTENANCE 13
23.7 INSPECTION AND EXAMINATION 14
23.8 COFFERDAMS & CAISSONS 14
23.9 COFFERDAMS & CAISSONS - SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 17
SAFETY CHECKLIST FOR EXCAVATION WORKS

(ADM/H&S/CL/2.23/1)
SECTION 23
PART TWO
SECTION 23
EXCAVATIONS
INTRODUCTION
Almost all construction work involves some form of excavation for foundations, drains, sewers, etc.
These can be very deep and very dangerous. Every year, many people are killed, some actually
buried alive, in collapsed tunnels and trenches; many others are injured and there are several
reportable accidents during excavation and tunnelling operations. A relatively small collapse might
involve a cubic meter of soil, but a cubic meter of soil weighs over a ton. A man at the bottom of a
trench buried under this volume of material would be unable to breathe due to the pressure on his
chest and would quickly suffocate and die.
Deep excavations look dangerous - so precautions are usually taken. But most deaths occur in
excavations less than 2.5 meters deep. In fact, most accidents occur in ground conditions with no
visible defects; the trench sides seem clean and self-supporting. Despite appearances however, the
removal of material causes pressure relief - and introduces the conditions which lead to failure.
Rainwater or hot dry weather increase the chances of such failure.
Neither the shallowness of an excavation or the appearance of the ground should be automatically
taken as indications of safety. The evidence suggests that far too often they are.
It is impossible to forecast the behaviour of earth as its condition can change in a very short period of
time, and for this reason several factors, e.g. nature of soil, weather condition, size & method of
excavation and proximity of other structure, etc. need to be considered in the design and planning of
excavation work.
Considering all the above factors, Contractors should adopt the most appropriate method of
stabilising the sides of an excavation, example, battering, poling, sheeting, etc. for the safety of their
personnel.

Ministerial Order No.32 Year 1982 - Article (15).

ADM/H&S/Pt 2 01 March 2005 EXCAVATIONS 1 of 20
PART TWO
23.1 HAZARDS
Excavation can result in serious injury, fatality or property damage due to the following
causes:
• collapse of earthwork due to lack • persons not being provided with, or not using
of, inadequate, or weak shoring. proper tools for the job.
• persons falling into excavations • vehicles or plant too close to the edge, causing
due to lack of barriers or the edge to collapse.
inadequate fencing.
• workers in the excavation being struck by soil
• asphyxiation from exhaust gases or materials falling into the excavation.
that have collected in the bottom of
the excavation. • falls through unsafe means of access into, or
out of the excavation.
• soil from excavations not being
thrown clear of the sides that then • workers being struck by excavating machinery,
become overloaded and collapse. e.g. excavator bucket.
• failure to maintain shoring, • vehicles being driven into the excavation due
particularly after rain and sand to driving errors, inadequate barriers, or the
storm. absence of stop blocks.
• water seepage.
• persons working too close together.
• the striking of services, e.g. electricity/communication cables and oil/gas pipes.
Note: No soil whatever its structure, can be relied upon to support its own weight, and if a
trench or excavation cannot be made safe by slopping or battering the sides, some
form of support will be required.

PART TWO
23.2 GROUND CONDITIONS

23.2.1 general
Before commencing any excavation, it is important to identify the type of ground in which the
excavation is to be carried out. Detailed information may be available with the contract
documentation, or in the form of bore hole or trial pit logs carried out as part of the site
investigation.
When examining bore holes or trial pit information, particular importance should be paid to
the location of any water table. If the water table is going to be exposed by the excavation,
careful consideration will need to be given as to how it may affect the stability of the
excavation sides. Ground water can greatly affect the stability of any soil and, in particular,
non-cohesive materials. Water can also enter an excavation as surface run-off.
23.2.2 ground water

The presence of ground water is more difficult to deal with than surface water. It may affect
the sides of the excavation to the extent that, even if supported, wash out of material will
occur between the sheeting. In certain soil conditions, the bottom of the excavation can
become unstable and ‘boil’ with the inevitable total collapse of the trench.
If the ground is suitable, one of several ground dewatering techniques may be used. Such
methods involve either shallow well pumping or well-pointing. In either case, the pumping out
of water has the effect of lowering the ground water table to a level below that to which the
excavation is to be taken. (see Fig.1)
Where a water bearing strata overlays an impervious one and the depth of this impervious
strata is not too great, the use of sheet piling may be more effective and economical. The
piling, being substantially watertight, cuts off the water from the excavated area, thus
enabling the excavation to proceed in the dry. (see Fig.2)
(Fig 3) shows sump pumps being used to de-water an excavation.
Header main: Original ground level
1
excavation
2 2
2
Fig. 2
3
Well point New de-Watering
Original water 1. Permable strata. 2. Water. 3 Impermeable strata
Table
table
Fig.1 - Shallow well pointing Fig.2 - Use of sheet piles to “cut off” excavation from
water-logged ground.
.

PART TWO
Fig.3 - Excavation dewatering using sump pumps.
23.2.3 temporary safe slopes

Battered sides or benches will generally be temporary stable if the slopes are as given in
table 1 below:-
Table 1
Safe temporary slopes
Ground Conditions
(degrees from the horizontal)
Dry Site Wet Site
BOULDERS
35/45 30/40
COBBLES
35/40 30/35
GRAVEL
30/40 10/30
SAND
30/35 10/30
SILT
20/40 5/20
SOFT CLAY
20/30 10/20
FIRM CLAY
30/40 20/25
STIFF CLAY 40/45 25/35

PART TWO
23.3 CHOICE OF SUPPORT METHOD

Factors such as availability of plant, site conditions and skill (or lack there of) of operatives
will probably determine the support method selected.
The choice lies mainly between:
• sheeting. waling and strutting (‘traditional’),.
• sheeting. waling and strutting (hydraulic struts),
• proprietary support systems,
• soldier pile support
In some soils the vertical excavation sides may stand unsupported for a short period. With
experienced and competent operatives this time may be used to erect the support system.
Excavation is dug to level over a short length and the support system installed without delay,
preferably from outside the trench. If the operatives need to enter the excavation during the
erection of the full support system, a protective cage or other interim support must be used.
The interim support must be quick and easy to erect to minimise risk
Choice of interim support could include:
• skeletal system of struts and walings giving immediate protection and forming part of the
final system of support.
• pinchers or protective cages.
The interim support is only intended to allow safe access for installation of the full support
system which should follow without delay. All other activities e.g. boning in, bottoming up etc.
should be done after the full support system is installed.
The exposed face of the excavation does not necessarily reflect the total ground condition.
An adjacent service trench or old well may contain weak saturated fill which could initiate a
failure. Where there are buried services adjacent to, or crossing the excavation, sides should
not usually be left unsupported, even for a short period.
In unstable ground the sheeting can be pre driven and the waling frames installed as
excavation progresses, or the sheeting can be driven progressively as excavation continues.
Both trench sheeting and proprietary boxes and slide rail systems can be adapted to this
method.
Beware that the excavated face at the end of the excavation does not collapse
inwards particularly under the action of the trenching machine straddling the trench.
The ‘free-standing’ time may be only a few minutes, if so. it is essential to install support as
the excavation progresses.
Where it is necessary to form a ‘stop- end’ to an excavation (e.g. where a trench is

constructed in two halves across a road) the operatives must be given guidance on the
bracing required for proper support to the stop-end sheeting.

PART TWO
23.4 SUPPORT SYSTEMS

Adequate support depends on the type of excavation, the nature of the ground, and ground
water conditions, generally speaking, timbering or shoring is not required for trenches or
excavations less than 1.2 m deep where there is no danger of any material falling or
collapsing.
For larger excavations, a survey of the soil prior to excavation by a trained and experienced
person will usually provide sufficient information for suitable methods of excavation and
support to be determined, and decided by a specialist engineer.
Adequate supplies of support materials should be available before the excavation

commences and must be sound, free from defects, of adequate strength, good construction ,
properly maintained and:-
• fixed securely to prevent displacement. • temporary framework on supports, or a

protective box or cage may be needed to
• only be erected/altered/dismantled
protect workers while they put in permanent
by competent workmen under
timbering.
supervision.
• a box or cage can be moved forward as
• conventional timber shuttering or
timbering progresses.
steel trench sheets and adjustable
props should be used. • care must be taken to see that excavation
work does not jeopardise the stability of any
• props may be mechanical (jacks or
adjacent structure.
acrow’s) or hydraulic.
• precautions to protect workers and others
• precautions to protect workers and
must be taken before and during any
others taken before and during any
excavation work.
excavation work.
23.4.1 types of support systems

There are many ways by which excavations can be made safe to work in, avoid settlement
to adjacent land and buildings and allow work to proceed with minimum hindrance. There
are, however, only the following four fundamental principles involved:-
battered sides
This is definitely the safest method as accidents from the collapse of properly designed and
executed battered systems are rare. (see Fig. 4)
Almost all soils can be excavated to a safe batter, provided that sufficient space is available
and a safe angle of repose known and adhered to. (See Table 1 on page 4)

PART TWO
Slope Beware:
Surface water can affect stability of
slopes and benches, endangering
the trench.
Intercept surface water to prevent it
entering trench. For some soils it
will be necessary to protect slopes
and horizontal surfaces adjacent to
trench.
Fig.4 - Battered trench
double sided support
With this method of support, the

force exerted by the earth are
transmitted from one side of the
excavation to the other by walings
and horizontal struts, i.e. the forces
imposed by the earth on the
supporting materials are resisted
by the earth on the opposite side
of the excavation. Hence, if the
support is adequately designed, a
state of equilibrium is maintained
between the two sides.
Fig.5 - Double Sided Support – All forces horizontal
(see Fig. 5)
Out of methods using a form of structural support,

this is the most satisfactory as only horizontal
forces are involved.
The method lends itself to the use of pre-designed

solutions and proprietory systems which are
installed in accordance with manufacturers
instructions. (see Fig.6)
Fig.6 – Example of Double Sided Support

PART TWO
The following types of proprietary ground support equipment are available:
(a) Hydraulic waling frames (see Fig.7)
comprise two steel or aluminium beams

braced apart by struts containing
integral hydraulic rams. They can be
used for close or open sheeting
applications in trenches and for
supporting close sheeting in deep
excavations for which frames at various
levels may be required.
Fig.7 – Hydraulic Waling Frame
(b) Manhole shores (see Fig.8)
Are four-sided adjustable frames with

integral hydraulic rams and are intended for
supporting excavations for manholes,
foundations, small tanks and pits and similar
structures. Waling frames and manhole
shores should be supplied complete with
chains or other means by which they can be
hung from the sheeting or from other
frames.
Fig.8 – Manhole Shore
(c) Trench boxes (see Fig.9)
These consist of modular side panels

strutted apart by adjustable struts to suit
the width of trench. Their height can be
increased by the addition of extension
panels. The location of the struts is
variable within limits, depending on the
ground clearance required. The lower
edges of the side panels are tapered to
form a cutting edge. Boxes should be
progressively dug in as the excavation
work proceeds, or they can be lowered
Fig.9 – Trench Box
by an excavator or crane into a pre-dug

PART TWO
trench. Where more than one box is required due to the depth, the boxesshould either
remain connected if lowered into a pre-dug trench or be connected/disconnected at
ground level by progressive excavation/backfilling. Install sufficient boxes so that the
full depth of the excavation is supported before people enter the excavation. If the
excavation is overdug, backfill needs to be placed between the excavation side and
the box to prevent both the risk of people falling into the gap and of rotation of the box
following ground movement. If required, trench sheets should be positioned at the
open ends to prevent material falling inwards. Some configurations of box may be
unstable when standing upright on the surface and should be either laid flat or 'dug in.
(d) Drag boxes (see Fig.10)
These comprise two flat-bottomed

side panels with tapered cutting
edges to their leading ends. They
are braced apart by tubular struts,
the leading strut being specially
strengthened to allow for the
dragging of the box by the
excavator. As the box is dragged
forwards the excavation behind it is
left open.
Fig.10 – Drag Box
single sided with raking support
Only one face of the excavation is involved. Earth pressure from the excavated face is
resisted by transferring the load through the support material via wailings to either raking
shores or ground anchors. In the raking shore approach, an adequate foundation is needed
to transfer the loads involved to the excavated ground. (see Figs. 11 & 12)
Vertical uplift force

Earth pressure
Single sided cantilever support:
Compressive Diagonal tensile
force force in anchor Downward
in struts force
Whatever variation of this principle is
Earth pressure Fig.12 - Use of ground anchors

Fig.11 - Raking support

PART TWO
single sided cantilever support
Whatever variations of this principle is adopted, it should always be designed by suitably

qualified persons. The method can be used only:-
• in ground conditions which are sufficiently stable to provide the necessary resistance to
balance the overturning forces, or
• where the effect of superimposed loads and their stability is not critical.
All cantilevers will deflect to a degree. Such deflection will create risk to adjoining installations
and structures, roads etc. and their use in these circumstances should be avoided.
(see Figs. 13 & 14)
Earth
Resisting
Overturning pressure
Earth pressure movement
movement
Anchor
block
Penetration to provide
end fixing
Fig.13 - Free cantilever support
Fig.14 - Propped cantilever
support
23.5 MAIN SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

23.5.1 access
• safe means of getting into and climbing out of an excavation must be provided.
• ladders must be securely fixed and properly maintained, and should permit quick and
easy escape in case of flooding or falls of materials.
Note: Using the walings and struts for access and egress purposes must be prohibited.

PART TWO
23.5.2 barriers around excavations

• a safe means to enter and exit an excavation should be provided. Serious injuries have
occurred when workers have fallen from props that form part of the ground support when
these have been used to climb in and out of the excavation. This practice also carries risk
of disturbance to, and weakening of, the support.
• ladders should be positioned within the excavation at a height:base ratio not flatter than
4:1 and secured by tying at the upper end to prevent slipping. The upper end of the
ladder should project at least 1 m above ground level to ensure sufficient hand hold.
Ladders should be positioned where they will not be damaged by plant or from materials-
handling operations.
• where a person Guard rail
may fall more than

2m, suitable Tied ladder
barriers must be
erected, but it is
sensible to erect
barriers even for
quite shallow
excavations where
anyone falling may
come to harm.
(see Fig.15)
• barriers should
Poling boards
also serve to keep extended to act as
materials, plant toe-boards
and equipment
Exposed services supported
away from the
edges of an
excavation.
• barriers may be removed to permit

access of men, plant and equipment, Fig.15 –
etc., but should be replaced as soon This excavation is supported by timbering and props.
as possible. Poling boards extend above the edge of the
excavation to act as toe boards,and guard rails are
• during darkness, the edges of an
provided to prevent falls into the excavation.
excavation should be marked with
Safe access is provided by a tied ladder.
hazard warning lights, especially
Exposed services are supported.
where they are close to public
thoroughfares.

PART TWO
• where excavation work is carried out on the roads, Traffic Police approval are necessary
and appropriate barricades and warning notices shall be erected.
recommended fencing and barrier arrangement around excavations in public area:
23.5.3 stop blocks

• where vehicles are used for tipping
materials into an excavation,
safety measures such as well
anchored stop blocks should be
used to prevent the vehicle
overrunning the edge. (see
Fig.16)
• these must be placed at a

sufficient distance from the edge to
avoid the danger of it breaking
away under the weight of vehicles.
Fig.16 - Stop Blocks to prevent vehicles being reversed
into an excavation while tipping.

PART TWO
23.5.4 site lighting

The workplace must be adequately lit, in particular at access points and openings, and
whenever lifting operations take place.
23.5.5 ventilation
• excavations must be kept clear of suffocating, toxic or explosive gases.
• there may be natural gases like hydrogen sulphide, methane and methane and sulphur
dioxide, or exhaust gases from nearby plant, or leaks from nearby pipes or installations.
• these can seep through the soil and can accumulate at the bottom of an excavation,
below ground level.
• leakage of propane and butane from LPG cylinders is potentially very dangerous; the
gases will sink to the lowest point and form an explosive concentration.
• the most common method of ventilation is to blow clean air into the excavation in
sufficient volume to dissipate any gas accumulation.
23.6 MAINTENANCE
All excavation work requires careful watching, especially when they are first opened and
sides are unsupported , even when support work has been installed, constant vigilance is
essential.
Small movements of earth, resulting in movements in the timbering of no more than 6-12
mm are usually the only sign of the progressive weakening in cohesive soils which can
cause collapse. Such small movements can easily pass unnoticed but they are signs that
something is wrong.
Movements can be detected from slight distortion in timbering, bowing of poling boards and
walings, or signs of local crushing.
Main points to consider are:-

• during bad weather soil heaps tend to
• all timber must be regularly checked, for if it
slump, and loose boulders or masonry
remains in position for any length of time, it
may fall into the excavation.
may dry out, shrink or rot.
• heavy vehicles should not be allowed
• the only positive method of checking the
near the edge of excavations unless
state of timber is to drill small holes with an
the support work has been specially
auger.
designed to permit it.
• ground, too, may dry out and shrink - which • when loads are being moved into or
loosens the timbering. out of the excavation by skip or
bucket, care should be taken to avoid
• the soil face; wedges or telescopic struts
damage to struts or walings.
holding them must always be kept tight.

PART TWO
• raking or angle, struts should all be regularly examined for signs of having been
dislodged.
• safety helmets and safety boots should be worn at all ties since earth and other material
can slide down or fall.
23.7 INSPECTION AND EXAMINATION

• excavations must be inspected by an experienced and competent person, before work
starts, at least once a day, and before each shift.
• excavations must be thoroughly examined weekly (every seven days) and after
substantial collapse or damage.
23.8 COFFERDAMS AND CAISSONS

23.8.1 introduction
Their function is to provide a space down to foundation level from which water is excluded
sufficiently to permit the descent of workmen, plant, etc. the removal of spoil and the
execution of the permanent work.
23.8.2 choice between cofferdams and caissons

The main difference between a cofferdam and a caisson is that although they are both
enclosures for the purpose of excluding water and soil from a work during construction, a
cofferdam may be generally a temporary structure, part or all of which is removed after
construction, whereas a caisson is primarily a permanent structure or one which is
subsequently incorporated in the permanent work.
The chief factors influencing the type of construction used are ground conditions and the
depth to which the work is to be carried.
Where the work can be safely carried out in free air, cofferdams or open caissons may be
used.
For deep cofferdams it may be preferable not to lower the water below a certain level, the
last stages of excavation, concreting and if necessary strutting being carried out through
water.
23.8.3 cofferdams
introduction
The purpose of a cofferdam is to exclude soil and water from an area in which it is required
to carry out construction to a depth below the surface. Total exclusion of water is often not

PART TWO
necessary and in some instances is not possible, but the effects of water ingress must be
taken into account.
There are two principal approaches to cofferdam design. Single skin structures are most
common, but for very large or deep excavations and marine works, double wall or cellular
cofferdams may be preferred.
The design of a cofferdam is carried out in the same manner as a retaining wall and
consequently, the same rules apply.
23.8.3 selection of cofferdam

In the selection of a suitable cofferdam type for a given duty the following factors should be
taken into account:
• whether a land cofferdam or water cofferdam is required

• nature of the structure to be built within the cofferdam
• plan dimensions of the working area required inside the cofferdam
• total depth of soil and/or water to be retained
• soil conditions below and above foundation level
• groundwater levels and their fluctuation, and for water cofferdams the tidal, seasonal and
flood levels
• for water cofferdams, the strength of the current, wave action and scour before, during
and after construction
• possible effects of the cofferdam construction on existing buildings or other structures

close to it
• availability of materials
• methods of constructing and dismantling the cofferdam
• time available for construction of the cofferdam
• noise, vibration, fumes and fire risk
• accessibility especially for cofferdams in water
Certain of the types are suitable for both land and water cofferdams, while others are
applicable to one or the other only. The extent of the working area will further limit the
choice. When the depth is great, the soil and water level conditions will be particularly
significant.
Possibilities that can be considered are:
a) combinations of cofferdam types
b) final excavation carried out underwater
c) special dewatering methods

PART TWO
For extreme depths, depending on the soil conditions, it may be necessary to resort to
monolith or caisson construction.
cofferdam support frames

timber framing steel framing
23.8.4 selection of caissons

Each deep foundation is a special case and no fixed rules can be laid down for guidance in
the choice of the type of structure to be used. Frequently, the factors of time and cost will
govern the choice of type as much as conditions of ground and water.
A caisson in free air or an open caisson may be employed where it is necessary to establish
the foundation at a considerable depth below surface water or ground level, e.g. to depths
which may in exceptional cases exceed 45 m. Excavation will usually be done by grabbing.
Caissons are not commonly employed if the ground contains a large proportion of very stiff
clay, owing to the great weight of the structure required to overcome skin friction in such
ground, but skin friction may be reduced by lubrication with water or clay grouts. Open
caissons are difficult to pass through rock or ground containing large boulders.
Caissons may be used for a wide variety of ground conditions. These include the following:

PART TWO
a) in water-bearing ground where it is required to inspect the soil at foundation level, and
where alternative means of dewatering are impracticable;
b) where the caisson is to be sunk through water-bearing strata containing rock either as
beds or as large boulders;
c) where the caisson is to be used as a shaft in which an opening is to be made in a

water-bearing zone, for the purpose of driving or receiving a tunnel; (see Pt 2 section
24)-Tunnelling
d) where it is necessary to avoid subsidence of adjacent ground or structures due to

inflow of soil into the caisson, as may happen with open caissons sunk by grabbing.
Reinforced concrete caissons (monoliths) may be preferable to steel caissons during sinking
because of their greater weight.
Steel caissons usually present fewer problems during their construction than reinforced
concrete caissons.
23.9 COFFERDAMS AND CAISSONS - SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

The following standards and recommendations for the safety of personnel are particularly
applicable to construction work in cofferdams and caissons.
23.9.1 general public

The contractor will need at all times to ensure that members of the public are protected from
any accident or injury arising from work operations.
23.9.2 site supervision

A competent person, properly qualified and experienced, should be appointed to supervise
the work operations. This person should be capable of recognising and assessing any
potential dangers as they arise,
e.g. unexpected ground conditions that may require a change in construction technique, or
unusual smells which may indicate the presence of noxious or dangerous gases.
23.9.3 PPE (also see Pt 2 section 12) -PPE

helmets
The need for protective helmets is particularly important for those in piling gangs and
persons engaged in working in excavations or in areas with confined headroom.
safety footwear
Should be reinforced by steel not only in the toes but also in the soles, to prevent injury by
sharp objects concealed under the spoil.

PART TWO
safety harnesses
Should be worn by men required to climb up frames or other equipment
ear defenders
Noise levels during certain operations can be injurious to hearing and so require the wearing
of ear protectors.
23.9.9 chemical grouts

Some chemicals used as additives in grouts are highly toxic although in practice they are
used in such small quantities that there is no risk from the grout itself. However, the additives
themselves are highly toxic and the manufacturer's safe-handling instructions should be
followed. In particular, water soluble acrylamide requires very stringent safety precautions to
avoid skin contact, breathing dust, mist or vapour. It requires clean work clothes every day
which should consist of long-sleeved overalls, head covering, rubber or plastics gloves and
rubber footwear. A respirator and goggles are also required when changing the grout or
cleaning up chemical spills. The manufacturer's instructions should be observed for the full
safety requirements.
23.9.4 ladders
Ladders should be of substantial construction and secured to prevent slipping. They should
not rise more than 9 m without intermediate platforms (see Pt 2 section 29)-Scaffolding
23.9.5 electricity
Supply of electric power for lighting and hand tools should be at a voltage not exceeding 65
V to earth.
Where higher voltages are required for supply to machinery, the supply cable should either
be armoured or enclosed in continuous metal conduit, (see Pt 2 section 7) for electrical
installations
23.9.6 fire
Particular attention should be paid to fire hazard on working platforms. Drip trays should be
provided for oildrums and under machinery; fire extinguishers have to be provided and kept
in working order.
23.9.7 air testing

In deep and confined excavations a continuous routine should be established for testing for
noxious gases and deficiency of oxygen.
23.9.8 excluding water from excavations (pump sumps)

Although a sheet pile wall can prevent the ingress of water into an excavation, it is not
possible to give any guarantee that a cofferdam will be watertight. In order to deal with any

PART TWO
water which enters the excavation it is often desirable to install a drainage system which can
channel water to a sump from which the water can be pumped away.
As the hydraulic gradient adjacent to the corner of a cofferdam is at its largest, it is advisable
to place any sumps at excavation level as far as possible from any corner and wall.
It should not be forgotten that pumps are able to remove soil as well as water and a suction
hose laid in the bottom of a cofferdam can disturb the base of the excavation with
subsequent movement of the wall if the hose is badly located. Consideration should be given
to forming a sump using a perforated drum into which the hose can be fixed to limit damage.
23.9.11 tide work, work over or adjacent to water (also see Pt 2 section 28.0)
• Taking into account the circumstances, in some cases, especially in flowing water,
lifebelts with lines attached should be provided and be readily available at positions
where they are likely to be needed.
• Buoyed lines will be desirable at a suitable distance from the work to give anyone who
falls in an adequate chance of securing a handhold while awaiting rescue
• Particular attention is drawn to the need for adequate floodlighting at night at least
within the limits of the buoyed lines.
• Adequate guard-rails should be provided to jetties or floating stages.
• In fast flowing waters or tidal waters a safety boat, boatmen and lifebelts at conspicuous
positions should be provided.
• All men working over water should be required to wear a buoyant life-jacket.
23.9.10 land cofferdams

If the sheeting to the cofferdams extends less than 1 m above ground level, guard-rails
should be provided to form a barrier at the edge; toe-boards should also be provided. When
a land cofferdam is located near to a watercourse, historical flood levels should be checked
to ensure that the cofferdam is adequate to withstand exceptional flooding.
23.9.12 concrete, steel and steel sheet piling (also see Pt 2 section 26) -Piling
The safety precautions necessary in handling steel piles and interlocking steel sheet piling
are also applicable to precast concrete piles.
The pile topman who guides the pile into the interlock of a pile should be provided with a
fenced platform which can often be built onto the temporary timber trestle used for pitching
the piles in panels or provided with a safety harness attached to permanent static line. If a
man-riding skip used for access is suspended from a crane, then the hoisting mechanism of
the crane has to be provided with automatic braking facilities.
Only skilled and experienced men with adequate and safe equipment should be required to
carry out the potentially hazardous operation of interlocking steel sheet piles.

PART TWO
The extraction of steel sheet piles should be carried out with an extractor of adequate size,
so that the performance is not mainly dependent on the pull of the crane and there is no
danger of overloading or overturning the crane.

SAFETY CHECKLIST - EXCAVATION WORK
SAFETY CHECKLIST FOR EXCAVATION WORKS
Final planning checks

excavator adequate for lifting requirements
spoil to be retained on site or disposed of
storage areas provided for spoil, trench supports materials, plant and permanent work
materials
materials ordered for trench support
imported backfill and materials ordered (compactors, compressors, generators, lighting, traffic
lights and signs etc.)
materials ordered for access to works and for guarding works
special plant ordered (dewatering equipment, pumps etc.) special plant ordered (dewatering
equipment, pumps etc.)
details of buried services received from appropriate authorities
surveys of adjacent structures complete
requirements of the Noise at Work section complied with
Final design checks

is there any new information? For example, on ground conditions
is designed based on latest specification?
Is the sketch for the foremen or ganger complete, clear and unambigous?
If there is a detailed drawing for the Temporary Works Co - Ordinator and does it show
everything?
have the temporary works quantities been taken off for the site engineer?
are the design assumptions shown on drawings and calculation sheets correct?
Is the designers name given on drawings and calculation sheets?
will the necessary plant be available?
have site variation been covered? For example, access roads?
does design allow sufficient working room?
ADM/H&S/CL/2.23/1 01 March 2005 SAFETY CHECKLIST - EXCAVATION WORK 1 of 2

SAFETY CHECKLIST - EXCAVATION WORK
Checks during construction (at least daily)

hard hats being worn competent operators
Wedges tight stop for dumber
tipping area clear of men struts square to wailing
experienced supervisors ground as assumed
crossing services supported signs and warning lights
wailings supported no excessive deflection
safe extraction of sheeting water table as assumed
exhaust clear of trench safe support during compaction
clear of spoil for 1.5m proper slinging arrangements
fences adequate foot bridge safe
trench sides clear of hazard visibility adequate
timber not damaged crossing services located and marked

ahead of excavator
stable spoil heaps wailings correctly sized and spaced
ground not deteriorating
ADM/H&S/CL/2.23/1 01 March 2005 SAFETY CHECKLIST - EXCAVATION WORK 2 of 2

SECTION 24
TUNNELLING & SHAFT SINKING
INTRODUCTION 1
24.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 2

24.2 WORK PROCEDURES 2
24.3 NOISE 6
24.4 VENTILATION 6
24.5 DUST 8
24.6 ILLUMINATION 9
24.7 ATMOSPHERIC CONDITIONS 11
24.8 LIFTING EQUIPMENT 12
24.9 SHAFTS 13
24.10 SMALL HEADINGS AND SMALL TUNNELS 16
24.11 GROUND SUPPORT 17
SECTION 24
PART TWO
SECTION 24
TUNNELLING & SHAFT SINKING
INTRODUCTION
This section makes recommendations for and gives guidance on Health & Safety practices in shaft
sinking and tunnelling.
The standards and guidelines also include health & safety recommendations that are particularly
relevant to the type of shaft sinking and tunnelling that is carried in the Emirate of Abu Dhabi.

None applicable specifically for Tunnel and Shaft Sinking Operations

ADM/H&S/Pt 2 01 March 2005 TUNNELLING 1 of 20
PART TWO
24.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
24.1.1 workers
All persons employed should have a high standard of physical fitness. It is desirable that
all persons working underground and all plant operators and banksmen be not less than
18 years old.
24.1.2 training
All employees involved in underground construction must be trained to recognise and
respond to hazards associated with this type of work. Training should be tailored to the
specific requirements of the jobsite and include any unique issues or requirements.
The following subjects should be part of employee induction training program :

• Likely hazards and risks
• Site rules and prohibited activities
• Devised safe methods of working
• Air monitoring and ventilation
• Illumination
• Communications
• Flood control
• Personal protective equipment
• Emergency procedures, including evacuation
• Check-in/check-out procedures
• Fire prevention and protection
• Mechanical equipment
24.1.3 personal protective equipment

In tunnelling construction works, the wearing of some personal protective equipment is
inevitable. After residual risks have been identified, PPE should be selected by
considering standards and requirements in (see Pt 2 section 12) - specific for persons
involved.
24.2 WORK PROCEDURES
24.2.1 communication
above ground person
• Any time an employee is working underground, the employer must maintain at least one
designated person on duty above ground.

PART TWO
• Designated person must maintain a check-in/check-out procedure for keeping an

accurate count of persons underground and to prevent unauthorized persons from
gaining access to the site.
• Designated person is responsible, calling for immediate assistance and summoning

emergency aid if needed.
audible signals
• Audible signals by bell, whistle, or other device can be used for routine operations
such as hoisting and lowering in a shaft. Signals should be distinctive and sufficiently
loud to avoid confusion with any incidental or accidental noises.
The recommended code is:
stop: one signal
lower: two signals
hoist: three signals
hoist personnel: four signals
emergency: continuous
• If natural unassisted voice communication is ineffective at any time, a power-assisted

means must be used to ensure communication between the work face, the bottom of
the shaft, and above ground.
visual signals
• signals to machine operators should normally be given only by banksmen.

• all persons involved in the operations should be made familiar with the code through
induction training and/or other means such as toolbox talks.
lone working
• an individual employee working underground, not able to be observed by other

employees, is only permissible if he is in range of voice communication. In this case the
employer must provide an effective means of obtaining assistance in the event of an
emergency.
24.2.2 reporting hazards and risks

Any hazardous conditions or occurrences that might affect workers safety must be recorded
and employer must notify all oncoming shifts of occurrences or conditions e.g equipment
failures, movement/collapse, flooding, fires, or release of gas, any abnormal ground levels,
tidal levels and rainfall.

PART TWO
24.2.3 control of access and egress

The employer must maintain safe access to and egress from all workstations at the
construction site to protect employees from potential hazards, such as being struck by
excavators or other moving equipment.
To help control access, all unused openings must be tightly covered, bulk headed,
barricaded, or fenced off, and posted with warning signs that read, "Keep Out" or similar.
24.2.4 heat stress and exhaustion

Mechanization, ventilation and job rotation should be arranged to reduce the risk of heat
stress and exhaustion. Adequate supplies of cold potable water should be made
available.
24.2.5 first aid (also see Pt 1 section 6)

first aider
It is essential that persons trained in first aid and capable of responding rapidly to any
incident be available on each shift during working hours.
emergency response
All personnel should be told that, in the event of serious injury, a casualty should be
moved only by a trained first-aider, unless there is the immediate risk of further injury.
first aid facilities
Sufficient first aid boxes should be provided, designed to protect the contents as far as
possible from damp and dirt. They should be clearly identified and be readily accessible
to working areas and should be in the charge of designated first-aiders on each shift.
stretchers
Stretchers (and blankets) suitable for the confined space of a tunnel should be provided
and maintained. They should be readily accessible for use in working areas in an
emergency, and should be protected against dirt and damp. In particular, where access
to a tunnel is by a shaft, stretchers should, where practicable, be stored at tunnel level.
Appropriate means of transporting an injured person to the surface should be provided.
Lifting arrangements in shafts should take this into account.
24.2.6 evacuation
Good communications are essential between the working areas and the surface. A clear
plan of action should be formulated for the rapid transfer of any injured persons from
working areas and to ensure that ambulances can reach shaft tops or other access
points quickly. Clear instructions should be given to all persons on the procedures to be
adopted for evacuating tunnels in an emergency.

PART TWO
standards
Every employer must ensure that all employees:
• working in the tunnel have a portable hand lamp or cap lamp unless natural light or an
emergency lighting system provides adequate illumination.
• be provided with an escape type breathing apparatus and approved gas monitor if the
area they are working in areas which may present a gas or smoke hazard.
• If 25 or more employees work underground at any one time, the employer must provide a
fully equipped and trained rescue team together with appropriate vehicle to transport an
injured person to the nearest hospital.
• If less than 25 employees work underground, there must be a direct means of

communication with the local emergency services.
• If a shaft is used as the means of egress, the employer must arrange for a readily
available lifting capability unless the regular lifting means will function in the event of a
power failure.
24.2.7 fire prevention and control

general
• Open flames and fires are prohibited in underground construction areas except as
permitted for welding, cutting, or other hot work operations.
• Smoking is prohibited at all times and notices to this effect should be prominently
displayed.
• Fire extinguishers or equivalent extinguishing means must be available at the head and
work areas.
• All underground structures and those within 30 m of an opening to the underground must
be constructed of materials with a fire resistance rating of at least one hour. Also, non
flammable or combustible material may not be stored above ground within 30 m of any
access point to an underground operation.
• Petrol may not be underground at any time for any purpose and internal combustion
engines (except diesel-powered engines on mobile equipment) are prohibited
underground.
• Oil, grease, and diesel fuel stored underground must be kept in tightly sealed containers
in fire-resistant areas away from passage ways.
hot works
• Acetylene and liquefied petroleum gas may be used underground for welding, cutting,
and other hot work if all requirements/standards pertaining to such activities are met.
(see Pt 2 section 27 )-welding

PART TWO
• Only enough fuel gas and oxygen cylinders for welding, cutting, or hot work during a 24-
hour period are allowed underground.
• Non combustible barriers must be installed below such activities if they are performed in
or over a shaft or rise.
use of diesel fuel
Specific requirements apply to the use of diesel fuel in underground construction

operations, as follows:
• A surface level tank holding diesel fuel to be pumped to an underground storage site
must have a maximum capacity no greater than the amount of fuel required to supply
underground equipment for 24 hours.
• A surface level tank must be connected to the underground fueling station by an

acceptable pipe or hose system controlled at the surface by a valve and at the bottom
by a hose nozzle.
• The transfer pipe must remain empty at all times except when transferring diesel fuel.
• All hoisting operations in the shaft must be suspended during refueling operations if
the supply piping in the shaft is not protected from potential damage.
24.3 NOISE
24.3.1 general
The effects of noise are intensified in tunnels because the confined space increases the
reverberant sound field that can be developed by noisy plant and equipment, tools or
processes. This is especially problematic if persons have to work close to, or use, noisy
tools, e.g. pneumatic picks producing a sound pressure level of 110dB(A) to 115dB(A).
• Since there is insufficient space to reduce the level of noise emission by confinement
and/or containment retrospectively, all machines and tools should be selected on the
basis of risk assessment to be designed to eliminate or reduce the noise at
source with minimum operator exposure.
• Thereafter a management system should be established to :

a) confirm the adequacy of the noise and vibration controls
b) continually identify significant residual noise sources; and
c)ensure regular maintenance checks and replacement or repair
Pt 2 section 3 gives guidance on how noise arising from worksites affects site personnel
and others. It contains information on noise emission from tools, plant and equipment

PART TWO
that could be useful at the planning stage in reducing noise and recommendations for the
control of noise.
24.4 VENTILATION
24.4.1 general
• polluted air must be removed from tunnel continually.
• if natural ventilation does not provide the necessary air quality through sufficient air
volume and air flow, the employer must provide mechanical ventilation to ensure that
each employee working underground has at least 200 cubic feet (5.7m3) of fresh air per
minute.
• the inlet to the ventilation system must be positioned away from petrol and diesel
engines, hazardous materials and dust fumes.
• the outlet from ventilation system should be positioned such that it would free to
disperse any harmful substances away from the work area.
24.4.2 cooling
• the volume of fresh air required for cooling purposes should be examined carefully
to ensure a sufficient flow of air to keep the working temperature within acceptable
limits.
24.4.3 selection
• The methods of ventilation adopted should be in accordance with the hazards
presented by each tunnelling situation. Factors that should be considered include:
the numbers of face workers
the work locations
the length, size and gradient of drive
the presence of water, dust or fumes
the presence of methane
whether drilling and firing will be taking place
the amount of waste heat generated by mechanised tunneling operations.
• In a tunnel advancing as a single face, fresh air supply to face workers is likely to be
the primary consideration; but where there are many areas of work the requirements
for the supply of fresh air and ventilation will vary.

PART TWO
• Conventional forcing, exhausting or overlap systems are employed in most tunnels,

and the particular machinery and environmental conditions should determine which is
the most suitable.
• Where dust is a major problem, the system should be designed to control dust and
should incorporate filters to clean the dusty air before readmission to the general body
of airflow.
• The effect of heat added to the air from installed machinery, and the increase in
humidity, can be reduced by using forcing systems having high local air velocities and
by carefully controlling the amount of water used for dust suppression.
24.4.4 ventilation systems

The ventilation system should be simple and designed to be moved forward or extended
with the progress of tunneling.
Ventilation systems can include one or more of the following:
a) a forced supply of fresh air, exhaust being through the tunnel and access ways
b) extraction of polluted air from the tunnels, fresh air being drawn into the tunnel due to
the reduction in pressure caused by the exhaust ventilation
c) alternation of forced supply and extraction.
d) air movers to assist locally and to eliminate stagnant pockets. If air movers are used
locally, care should be taken to ensure that these will not cause recirculation.
24.4.5 siting of fans

Air intake and exhaust fans on the surface should be sited well away from sources of
contamination
24.4.6 earthing
The movement of dust and gases through a ventilation system can cause a dangerous
build-up of static electricity. All ducts, fan bodies, casings and support structures should
be properly bonded to each other and to an adequate earth. Air movers and venturi
devices should also be earthed.
methane
Where an extraction ventilation system is in use and there is a risk of methane being
encountered, the design and construction of the system should take into account the
hazard of methane passing through fans and fan motors. The methane concentration in
the ducts should be continuously monitored.
• If methane is likely, the fans should be explosion-protected. It should be noted that

methane concentration in the tunnel is likely to increase when the ventilation system

PART TWO
is shut down. Explosion protection of the extraction system in many cases involves
the use of bifurcated fans with non-incendive impeller rings.
dust
• To prevent dust particles migrating back against the main body of airflow, the air
velocity in any section of tunnel should be not less than 0.5 m/s. Ventilation
calculations should use this as a minimum value. The efficiency of the ventilation
system should be tested periodically and any deterioration in performance should
be remedied.
Note:This guidance in should be followed where extraction ventilation is necessary to

control dust emissions and also applies where methane could be present.
24.5 DUST
24.5.1 general
Dust generated from tunneling works should be suppressed at source as far as is
practicable. Its spread should be controlled by methods such as water spraying, water
infusion and extraction ventilation.
24.5.2 effects of dust

One direct physical effect of dust is reduced visibility, which increases the risk of
accidents related to moving machinery and equipment.
The exposure of persons to various kinds of mineral dust can produce a variety of lung
conditions. Among the more serious conditions is pneumoconiosis.
24.5.3 control and removal of dust

High-pressure water jets at the source are the most effective and positive means of
dust suppression.
Respirable dust that has become airborne cannot be controlled by water sprays. However,
these can be used whilst handling spoil to suppress dust by preventing it from becoming
airborne.
In dusty conditions, extraction ventilation and possibly filtration is essential. Dusty air is
likely to be very erosive, and fans and ducts should be designed accordingly and be
properly maintained.
when drilling rock or concrete, dust control measures such as wet drilling, vacuum collectors,
and water mix spray systems must be used to maintain dust levels within limits set for gases,
vapors, fumes, dusts, and mists.

PART TWO
24.6 ILLUMINATION (also see Pt 2 section 7)

24.6.1 general
• General lighting levels should be such that any hazards can readily be seen. Higher lighting
levels should be provided locally, particularly near machinery and in working areas.
• A risk assessment should be carried out to help determine whether or not fixed electric
lighting is required and, in the exceptional case where it is not, hand lamps or cap lamps
should be provided.
• Where potentially explosive atmospheres could exist, all lighting should be

explosion-protected.
• The lighting scheme should be designed to minimize glare. Fluorescent and

incandescent luminaires produce less glare than floodlights.
• Where colour recognition is an important factor, the type of light source should be
carefully considered. For example, sodium lighting can present problems in colour
discrimination.
24.6.2 level of lighting

In a tunnel, the lighting level is subject to the dimensions of the tunnel, the light absorbency of the
surrounding surfaces and also tunnel atmospheric conditions. Light absorption is less in tunnels
that have light-coloured smooth walls than in similar tunnels having dark irregular surfaces.
Lighting levels can be measured with a lightmeter and should be as high as is practicable, taking
into account the work to be undertaken in the area. The table below sets out the recommended
mean lighting levels.
24.6.3 mean lighting levels
Area Lighting level
Walkways 10 lux at walkway level

General working areas 100 lux at working surfaces
Tunnel face
Excavation areas 100 lux illuminated from at least two widely
separated sources to avoid shadows
Crane lifting points
The presence of dust or mist in the atmosphere can also have a very significant effect on lighting
levels and should be a consideration to meet the values in the above table.
Regular maintenance, including cleaning, is essential and should therefore be as easily

accessible as possible.

PART TWO
24.6.4 type of lighting

• floodlights - should be located at a suitable height to light areas from above and
should not be directed horizontally. They should be arranged so that their fields
overlap and sited to minimize shadows cast on walkways or workplaces by
obstructions or plant etc.
• temporary fixed lighting - considered for longer-term works.

• portable lighting – used where no other form of lighting exists for pedestrian access
to worksites
• hand lamps or cap lamps – if used it is essential that management procedures be put
in place and facilities provided for their proper storage, charging, distribution, use, and
maintenance.
24.6.5 emergency lighting

• Because tunneling is wholly dependent on artificial light, lighting systems should be
made as secure as possible and should be provided with adequate emergency
resources and power supplies.
• Battery-powered emergency lighting can be used to provide standby lighting. The

capacity of the batteries should be sufficient to maintain the lights for enough time to
allow persons in the area to take appropriate action without danger.
• Emergency lighting should be installed along the tunnels intervals of not more than
50 m to allow safe egress from the tunnel, and should be installed at the following
locations:
fire and first aid points
escape routes
emergency exits
tunnel access points
control and communication points
locations where particular hazards exist
• Alternative mains supplies or standby generation can also be used to provide

emergency lighting. Where the emergency lighting is dependent on an alternative
supply or standby generator supply, the wiring should be adequately protected i.e.
resistance to fire (A), resistance to fire with water (W), and for resistance to fire with
mechanical shock (Z). It should also be protected against mechanical damage.

PART TWO
24.7 ATMOSPHERIC CONDITIONS (see Pt 2 section 21 for further information)

24.7.1 general
• monitor and control atmospheric conditions within pits and tunnels at all times by
qualified staff.
• approved atmospheric monitoring devices to be used whilst labour working in or around

pit tunnel area.
• staff to be trained in the use of atmospheric monitoring devices, device maintenance,

and understanding of gases and other atmospheric conditions that can alter air
conditions.
• quality of air shall be to the following standard :
∗ 21.00% Oxygen
∗ 79.00% Nitrogen (includes 0.94% argon)
∗ 0.03% carbon dioxide
∗ Other gas amount to less than 0.1%
∗ a minimum of 19% oxygen is acceptable for tunnelling
∗ pollutant levels should not exceed their occupational exposure limits and should
be reduced as low as reasonably practicable.
24.7.2 confined spaces

• workforce to be trained in confined space procedures
• emergency rescue B.A. sets to be on hand and personnel trained in use.

PART TWO
24.8 LIFTING EQUIPMENT

24.8.1 general
The cranes most commonly utilized for tunnel access shafts are crawlers,, mobile,
gantry and tower cranes. These are more suitable for shallow rather than for deep
shafts because of the progressive difficulty of control. Special hoists can be required in
deeper shafts (generally considered to be 50 m or deeper).
In the vicinity of any shaft, special precautions should be taken to prepare a suitable base
for siting a crane to minimize settlement and to spread crane loads as widely as possible,
and also to avoid excessive lateral thrust from the ground against the shaft lining. A
reinforced concrete raft, or beams, spanning any sensitive area should be designed
and provided if the ground resistance is locally inadequate.
With mobile cranes that are not restricted to predetermined locations, particular care
should be taken to check that loadings imposed upon the ground are kept within safe
limits, i.e. that they are no greater than the bearing capacity of the ground.
24.8.2 clearances
Where adequate personnel clearance around a crane (500 mm) cannot be provided,
access to areas of restricted clearance should be prohibited while the crane is
operating.
24.8.3 long or difficult loads

When long loads need to be slung vertically because of restricted space, the slinging
arrangements should be devised to prevent the load from slipping. This should be done
by providing properly designed lifting points. The load under suspension should be
balanced and the lifting speed controlled to prevent the load from swinging out of
control. If any difficult loads are to be lifted, the shaft should be cleared of persons other
than any essential to the hoisting operation while the lift is in progress and these
persons should be safely positioned.
24.8.4 special requirements for using hoists underground

Hoists used in underground construction must be equipped with a limit switch to prevent
over travel at the top and bottom of the hoist way.
The limit switch should only be used when operational controls malfunction. Hoist controls
must be arranged so the operator can reach all controls and the emergency power cutoff
without reaching beyond his normal operating position.
Other aspects of hoist safety that apply to underground construction include:
• Employees may not ride on top of any cage, skip, or bucket unless inspecting or
maintaining the system and wearing a safety belt or harness.

PART TWO
• Personnel and materials must be hoisted separately (except small tools and supplies
secured in a non hazardous manner).
See Pt 2 Section19 for more detailed information re safe use of hoists.
24.9 SHAFTS
24.9.1 shaft sinking
general
The shaft sinking operation is likely to have an impact on the general public, and can
affect adjacent structures. Particular care should be taken in designing and locating
shafts to minimize disturbance outside the site. Both safety and environmental factors
should be considered.
shafts under construction
• Where mechanical means of excavation are used, it is essential that measures be

taken to ensure the safety of personnel.
• If grabs are to be used, personnel should be either protected within the shaft, or
removed from the shaft before grabbing commences.
• The number of persons in the shaft bottom area should be kept to a minimum whilst
operations are in progress
• Procedures should be set up to avoid persons being underneath suspended loads

wherever possible.
• In small diameter shafts, particular care should be taken due to the limited scope
for refuge, and persons should be alerted to any loads being sent down.
• All skips used in shafts should have positive fixings so that they cannot tip while
being hoisted. Other potential hazards, such as material falling off the top due to
overfilling, or loose material becoming stuck to the bottom, should be assessed and
minimized.
• Larger shafts are often excavated by a 360° hydraulic excavator working within the
shaft. Measures should be taken to minimize the risk of persons being struck or
trapped by moving plant.
• When handling loads with a crane or hoist, precautions should be taken to ensure
that:
• the load or skip does not swing or twist causing it to strike the lining of the shaft or
other structure;

PART TWO
• the load or skip does not catch a ledge, either in lowering or in hoisting, causing it to
tip over and spill out its contents (whether persons or materials);
• the rope does not become slack when the load is resting on the bottom or on a stage
and catch in some part of the shaft structure, with resultant damage when
tightened.
• All plant regularly transferred down the shaft should be designed for hoisting and be
tested and certificated for such work.
• As a standard procedure in lifting, the load should be lifted a short distance then
stopped, steadied and inspected before hoisting continues.
24.9.2 disused shafts
permanently disused
When a shaft is to be decked over on completion of its use, the decking used should be
specifically designed for that purpose and should be installed for its intended use. If a
void is left, it should be ventilated. Traceable records should be kept of all disused shafts
or access tunnels giving details of the shaft or tunnel, and the method of capping or filling.
temporarily disused
When a shaft is temporarily disused following sinking, it should be securely covered to

prevent unauthorized access, e.g. by children. However, it can be advisable to maintain a
lockable opening in the cover, to enable escape or to allow access for inspection purposes.
The cover should be vented.
tunnel eye
A shaft through which any opening is to be formed should be designed to facilitate the
safe construction and use of that opening.
When a tunnel eye is to be provided near the shaft bottom through which the tunnel or
heading is to be formed, the shaft structure should be supported as for a tunnel
opening.
The actual operation of breaking out should be carried out with the utmost care
because the ground is inevitably disturbed by the sinking of the shaft, and it is probable
that water has followed down the side of the shaft however carefully grouting has been
done. Immediate close support of all ground is therefore often essential.
In bad ground, it can be advisable to fix the first setting of a heading, or build the first
ring of iron or concrete, within the shaft. Alternatively, a small heading can be driven out
of the shaft, from which a break-up for the full size access tunnel is constructed at a safe
distance in undisturbed ground, the heading or tunnel being subsequently enlarged back
to the shaft.

PART TWO
shaft top layout
The layout and detail at the top of the shaft should be designed to prevent the accidental
fall of persons, plant, spoil or material into the shaft.
The area immediately around each shaft should be level, clear of obstructions and
properly drained; it should generally provide a safe working area, and should be
adequately lit.
Stacking and storage of materials should be arranged at a distance from the shaft top
so that excessive ground pressures are not imposed on the shaft.
The shaft should be guarded using, for example, additional segmental rings or
substantial steelwork and/or solid bariers and mesh, which should reach a height of at
least 1.2 m above adjacent ground level.
Surface water should be excluded from the shaft by the provision of barriers and by
drainage and pumping if necessary. Special precautions should be taken against
inundation.
Mobile plant poses a particular hazard. Either it should be physically prevented from
working near a shaft, or barriers should be erected that are robust enough to prevent the
equipment from falling into the shaft.
personnel access
Personnel access in shafts should be by fixed access equipment such as a mast climbing
hoist or man-riding crane where it is reasonably practicable to provide such equipment
In all cases where the normal means of access is by mechanical means (hoist or crane),
there should be a secondary means of egress to cover plant breakdown.
Fixed access should be provided in every shaft as early as possible, and in any case on
completion, except where an alternative route provides safe pedestrian access to the
base of the shaft.
Fixed access includes stairways, ladderways or vertical ladders with protective hoops.
Stairways should be used whenever possible as the preferred option, as these allow
persons to carry hand tools and similar equipment.
Every ladder should be securely fixed at its base and at the upper landing. It should
extend at least 1.1m above the upper landing unless other adequate handhold is
provided.
Vertical ladders fixed to shaft walls should be made of steel (rather than light alloy or
timber). Vertical ladders should have protective hoops and straps fixed above a height of
2.5 m from a landing.

PART TWO
The foothold at every rung on all ladders should be unobstructed. Landings should be at
intervals not exceeding 9 m. They should be solidly constructed with hand rails, guard
rails and toe boards. Openings for ladders should be as small as is practicable and sited
clear of the foot of the upper ladder. Every landing should be adequately lit.
Stair bays and ladder bays in shafts should be protected by substantial barriers against
swinging loads being handled in the shaft.
All means of access including hoists should be inspected weekly, and maintenance
carried out where necessary.
24.10 SMALL HEADINGS AND SMALL TUNNELS

Because of the very confined space in small tunnels, some hazards are intensified. As
such, projects are often very limited in space, time and resources. It is therefore
essential that those working in such tunnels be made familiar with the hazards, and that
a risk assessment be made to establish appropriate methodology before work
commences.
general
• For tunnels under construction, the internal size for man-entry should be not less
than 1.2 m high by 0.9 m wide, in order to facilitate rescue. Tunnels smaller than
this should be constructed by methods that do not involve man-entry.
• The risk of collapse or excessive settlement is greater with small timbered headings
than with other forms of tunnel construction. Only the highest standards of
workmanship in initial timbering and subsequent back filling should be used.
• Any temporary support should be capable of lasting for as long as the heading
remains open and be capable of securing the surrounding ground against
settlement and collapse.
rescue and escape
• In small tunnels, persons cannot walk upright and can pass one another only with difficulty.
It is normal practice for a single person to excavate the face, although a second should
always be present.
• Arrangements should be defined for the rescue and escape of the face workers in the event
of accident, injury, illness, collapse of the tunnel face, immobilization of a locomotive,
derailment or fire etc.

PART TWO
ventilation
• Ventilation can be a particularly difficult problem. There will be little or no natural circulation, and
shallow tunnels through variable ground will frequently pass through or near ground with
organic content or with other contamination that could pollute the tunnel atmosphere. Where
contamination could occur, a forced ventilation system should be used to limit the ingress of
contaminants, and a supply of fresh air to the face is therefore essential. Low-volume, high-
pressure ventilation systems may be appropriate owing to the lack of space.
pipe jacking
• the high thrusts necessary to propel the pipe forward should be resisted by a properly
designed and constructed abutment or thrust wall at the working pit.
• hydraulic rams and any load-spreading rings, spacing blocks or packers should be carefully
secured, with all loaded surfaces precisely aligned perpendicular to the thrust.
• as far as possible, persons should be protected from and withdrawn from the vicinity of
highly stressed equipment during thrusting.
• hydraulic pipes and, in particular, flexible

hoses, should be properly protected from
crushing and impact damage.
• the use of lubricant injected through the

pipes on to the sliding surfaces can assist
in reducing thrusts. If lubricants are
injected at high pressures, eye protection
should be provided.
• when jacking pipes through loose or

water-bearing soils, a slurry machine or
an earth-pressure balance machine
should preferably be used to contain the
face safely
• if using an open shield, precautions

should be taken against a run of loose
material into the face of the shield, which
could lead to the collapse of the overlying Typical pipe jacking/tunnelling drive pit
ground.
• when jacking pipes into firm or stiff clays, the techniques adopted should take into account
any displacement of the soil caused by entry of the pipes, and possible heave of the ground
surface.

PART TWO
• jacking pipes are installed via a working shaft and joined using hydraulic jacks. It is essential
that all persons seek shelter or protection within the part-completed pipeline or elsewhere
whilst pipes are lowered.
24.11 GROUND SUPPORT

24.11.1 ground support of portal and subsidence areas
Portal openings and access areas must be guarded by shoring, fencing, head walls or
equivalent protection to ensure that employees and equipment have a safe means to
access these areas.
Subsidence areas must be similarly guarded by shoring, filling in, or placing barricades and
warning signs to prevent entry.
Adjacent areas must be scaled or secured to prevent loose soil, rock, or fractured
materials from endangering portal, subsidence, and access areas.
24.11.2 ground support of underground areas

A competent person must inspect the roof, face, and walls of the work areas at the
beginning of each shift and as often as necessary, the ground conditions along all access
ways to ensure safe passage, also any loose ground considered to be hazardous to
employees must be scaled, supported, or taken down.
A competent person must determine how often rock bolts need to be tested to ensure that
they meet the necessary torque, taking into consideration ground conditions, distance from
vibration sources, and the specific bolt system in use. Only torque wrenches should be
used when torsion-dependent bolts are used for ground support.
Employees involved in installing ground support systems must be adequately protected

from the hazards of loose ground.
The bottoms of any support sets installed must have sufficient anchorage to prevent
ground pressures from dislodging the support base.
Lateral bracing (including collar bracing, tie rods, or spreaders) must be provided between
immediately adjacent sets to increase stability.
Any dislodged or damaged ground supports that create a hazardous condition must be
promptly repaired or replaced. The new supports must be installed before removing the
damaged supports. Some type of support, such as a shield, must be used to maintain a
safe travel way for employees working in dead-end areas ahead of any support
replacement operations.
24.11.3 ground support of shafts

Shafts and wells more than 5 feet in depth (1.53 m) entered by employees must be
supported by steel casing, concrete pipe, timber, solid rock, or other suitable material. The
full depth of the shaft must be supported except where it penetrates into solid rock that will

PART TWO
not change as a result of exposure. Where the potential for shear exists, where the shaft
passes through earth into solid rock in either direction, or where the shaft ends in solid
rock, the casing or bracing must extend at least 5 feet (1.53 m) into the solid rock.'
The casing or bracing must also extend 42 (± 3) inches above ground level unless a
standard railing is installed, the adjacent ground slopes away from the shaft collar, and
barriers exist to prevent mobile equipment operating near the shaft from jumping over the
bracing. If these conditions are met, the casing or bracing may be reduced to 12 inches
above ground.

SECTION 25
FALSEWORK
DEFINITION 1
INTRODUCTION
25.1 MAIN RISKS 2

25.2 STANDARD SOLUTIONS 2
25.3 RESPONSIBILITIES AND PROCEDURES 2
25.4 DESIGN PHASE 4
25.5 ERECTION AND CONSTRUCTION 6
25.6 POINTS OF LOAD TRANSFER 9
25.7 LACING AND BRACING 10
25.8 SPECIAL PRECAUTIONARY MEASURES WITH
PERMANENT FALSEWORK 12
FALSEWORK SAFETY CHECKLIST

(ADM/H&S/CL/2.25/1)
SECTION 25
HSE Construction Codes of Practice
PART TWO
SECTION 25
FALSEWORK
INTRODUCTION
Since collapses of falsework cause loss of life and serious injuries, the objective of this section is to
ensure that all persons involved with are well informed of safe procedures and of proper application of
these in order to set the risk of failures to minimum.
The check list at the end of this section also includes guidance on related matters in concrete
construction: falsework, steel fixing and concrete operations.
DEFINITION
Falsework is defined as any temporary structure used to support a permanent structure during its
erection and until it becomes self – supporting.
This definition also applies not only to in-situ concrete construction, but also precast concrete
structures, structural steel, steel erection, and even such items as brick arches, etc. indeed, any
construction method where the permanent structure may have a period of instability, requiring support
is the erection process.
Ministerial Order No. (32) Year 1982 - Article 7, 19 & 20

ADM/H&S/Pt 2 01 March 2005 FALSEWORK 1 of 12
PART TWO
25.1 MAIN RISKS
• people falling during steel fixing and erection of • being struck by a concrete skip
falsework • silica dust from scrabbling
• collapse of falsework operations
• materials falling whilst striking falsework • arm and back strain for steel
• manual handling of shutters reinforcing bars etc fixers
• cement burns from wet concrete
25.2 STANDARD SOLUTIONS
Falsework covers a wide range of temporary support methods and BS 5975 recognises that,
in simpler and more commonplace situations, e.g. support of floors and beams involving light
loadings and low height support (within the range of standard props) etc., standard solutions
can most likely be used instead of individual design,
Standard solutions are given in section 8 of BS 5975. However, unless the job falls within the
limitations of the particular standard solution, further design will be required.
With standard solution designs, the set of information released would include the following:
• materials and equipment details to be used in falsework.
• drawings showing dimensional data and ranges of allowable tolerances.
• allowable loadings they can carry.
• necessary limitations such as possible types of foundations.
25.3 RESPONSIBILITIES AND PROCEDURES

In any safe procedure for erecting falsework, the responsibilities for the different phases
should be clearly identified.
These phases are as follows:
• design brief
• concept of the scheme
• design drawings and specifications
• checking of design, specification and control of the following in-situ activities:

∗ erection of falsework on site
∗ monitoring of falsework during permanent structure construction
∗ dismantling and maintenance of falsework

PART TWO
All the above phases and responsibilities have to be co-ordinated, distributed, and overall
checked by the Falsework Co-ordinator whose responsibilities and duties are defined
below:
Falsework Co-ordinator
• co-ordinate all falsework activities;
• ensure that the various responsibilities have been allocated and accepted;
• ensure that a design brief has been established with full consultation, is adequate,
and is in accordance with the actual situation on site;
• ensure that a satisfactory falsework design is carried out;
• ensure that the design is independently checked for:
a) concept
b) structural adequacy
c) compliance with the brief;
• where appropriate, ensure that the design is made available to other interested
parties, e.g. the structural designer;
• register or record the drawings, calculations and other documents relevant to the final
design;
• ensure that those responsible for on-site supervision receive full details of the
design, including any limitations associated with it;
• ensure that checks are made at appropriate stages covering the more critical
factors
• ensure that any proposed changes in materials or construction are checked

against the original design and appropriate action taken;
• ensure that any agreed changes, or corrections of faults, are correctly carried out on
site;
• ensure that, during use, all appropriate maintenance is carried out
• after final check, issue formal permission to load if this check proves satisfactory;
• when it has been confirmed that the permanent structure has attained adequate strength,
issue formal permission to dismantle the falsework.
Of particular note in the above list of duties is the concept of issuing a formal permit to
load before any concreting takes place - followed, at the appropriate time, by a permit
to dismantle.

PART TWO
Whilst contractors will need to make individual decisions as to how the

recommendations of BS 5975 are best implemented, the basic principle - someone
made responsible for ensuring that all parties are adequately informed and co-
ordinated and that all checks have been carried out - is to be unreservedly
recommended.
25.4 DESIGN PHASE

25.4.1 design brief
Whether the falsework design is provided by standard or by individual designs, the
parameters on which the design is to be based need to be clearly established, in this
respect. It must be recognised that the loads imposed on falsework do not only arise from
the permanent structure, many will occur as a result of method and plant decisions.
The design brief should be prepared in both cases of standard and individual solution
design and all design parameters should be precisely determined and stated clearly in the
design brief.
25.4.2 conceptual scheme

At this step, it is decided whether the selected design method for falsework will be of
standard solution type or of individual solution type, basic loading calculations are done and
the type of material to be used for falsework is decided upon.
The basic items to be considered at this stage, but not limited to, are the following:
25.4.2.1 estimation of loads to be supported by Falsework
Not only the weight of the permanent structure, but also other factors are to be included in
the calculation of loads to be applied to falsework
Factors to be accounted for are as follows:
• weight of permanent structure: (this should be based on actual unit weight of materials
used in permanent structure).
recommended values for common types are:
• unit weight of precast concrete units: 2,700 kg/m3.
• unit weight of in-situ concrete: 2,500 kg/m3.
• weights of masonry or brickwork to be obtained from the supplier or calculated by

weighing samples.
• unit weights of structural steel to be obtained for standard sections from the
manufacturer’s tables.
• weights for all the attachments and bolts should be included in weight calculation of
steelwork.

PART TWO
loading sequence
To prevent the build-up of stresses in individual members of the support structure, and to
eliminate the possibility of moment reversal and uplift on supports, designer of falsework
must be aware of:
• sequence of pouring
• method of pouring ( continuous or in bays placed on different days)
• type of applied vibration method (external or internal), magnitude of final

permanent deflections in relation to progressive construction above the first supported
member
• method and sequence of designed and specified post-tensioning
Additional loads arising from plant and method of erection are imposed on the
falsework, most common causes being:-
• weight of materials initially stored on falsework
• weight of labour performing work on falsework during erection
causes for arising dynamic loads
• dumping concrete on falsework from • vibration duration and method

skips
• moving loads like placing plant,
• shock loads resulting from steel or dumpers, and erection cranes
precast elements supported on falsework .
• surge loads reaching to falsework from • openings in falsework to allow for

concrete pump pipelines below passage of plant and traffic and
others
recommended unit loads values for in-situ concrete casting:
• falsework materials stored on falsework : 50kg/m2
• limited concrete heaps in addition to impact, weights of labour and plant involved in
spreading, compacting and levelling concrete : 150kg/m2
25.4.2.2 modification of loading programme
Any modification of the loading programme after designing falsework should only be carried
out after consultation with of falsework designer. It is the responsibility of the site team to
notify the designer of any changes.
25.4.3 design drawings and specifications

At this stage, final calculations, drawings and specifications, including those related to the
materials prepared and appropriately shown in detail on the drawings.

PART TWO
25.4.4 checking of design and specifications independently

At this stage the falsework co-ordinator ensures that design calculations, drawings and
specifications are checked by an independent designer.
25.5 ERECTION AND CONSTRUCTION

This phase includes all the steps related to the construction of falsework and checking its
proper performance. These steps shall include the following:
25.5.1 distribution of responsibilities and necessary information.

• all persons involved in site erection and supervision of falsework should be made aware
of their responsibilities in this respect.
• to ensure proper performance, all persons in charge for erecting, inspection and checking
activities should receive copies of the following:
∗ all design drawings and specifications
∗ required standard details
∗ check lists, to ensure that all stages are executed properly.
25.5.2 materials and equipment

general
There should be no start in the erection of falsework unless all necessary materials and
equipment are already made available on site, otherwise, assurances that materials and
equipment delivery to site are to be made whenever their incorporation in the structure is
required. Whether new, second hand or fabricated equipment and materials are to be
incorporated into the erection, they should be checked for their compliance with the design.
timber
any timber to be used should comply with the following:
• type, grade, and size in accordance with the drawings and specifications.
• no presence of (defects, shakes, splits, winds, loose or large knots, and crushed or
damaged areas) is allowed.
• no protruding nails or fixings from previous use are allowed.

PART TWO
structural steel scaffolding

the following items are to be checked: the following are main requirements:
• correct type of steel is used. • tube materials should be as specified
• fabricated sections are in compliance • straight and no dents

with dimensions and tolerances shown
• no excessive pitting
on drawings.
• ends square and free from splits
• specified web stiffeners are provided.
• fittings undamaged
• quality of materials to be used. If the
material is already used in previous • threads and nuts should be free from
projects, certified experts are to check obstructive materials including rust
the suitability of the materials for re-use • all threads should be undamaged
despite some aspects like holes, welds
and cut-outs that may show on it.
• that provided fixings and fittings are in

compliance with relevant specifications.
fabricated equipment
Fabricated equipment should be checked using a semi-visual check. Checking of fabricated

equipment should always be performed with the following applicable restrictions:
• no unofficial repair is to be undertaken before the inspection check is made.
• no substitution for critical items (like high tensile pins in props) is allowed. These items
should be provided as new.
25.5.3 foundations
It is of great importance that foundations of falsework be properly erected and thoroughly
checked.
Foundations are the basis on which the integrity of the structure as a whole depends,
therefore you should ensure that:-
• encountered soil in excavation is similar to that reported in soil report.
• no modifications were made to the latest loading programme followed in the final
falsework design.
• execution of the falsework is in conformance with pertaining drawings and standard

details.
• where serious decision has to be made, the designer is to be involved.

PART TWO
Equally, foundations require protection from the effects of weather so that the ground
conditions as excavated are not altered (see Figs.1 & 2). Failure in this respect may result
in collapse or, at best, settlement.
Ponded Water
Flowing water:
Water penetration or
Wash Out Zone Absorption
Fig.1 - INADEQUATE DRAINAGE: Fig.2 - INADEQUATE DRAINING: ( WATER PONDS):

Washout danger in storm conditions. Character of cohesive soils change
Answer: dramatically.
Provide cut off drains and Blind Answer:
surface Provide surface blinding.
cohesive soils
Provide surface blinding to prevent ponding of water which alters appreciably the
characteristics of cohesive soil.
cohesionless soils
• provide cut-off drains and surface blinding to prevent the wash-out of non-cohesive soils
due to flowing water, especially in storm conditions.
• when it is recommended by the designer that full bedding of the sole plates be
performed, execution should be undertaken as such:
∗ use lean concrete to fully anchor timbers to ground.
∗ use grout or dry pack to fully anchor steel members into foundations.

PART TWO
25.6 POINTS OF LOAD TRANSFERNCE

Defined as those areas in the
Permanent Structure
falsework structure where:
• loads from the permanent

structure are collected and
transferred to the main vertical
or inclined supports
• where loads from vertical or
Fig. 3 Load Transfer Areas
inclined supports are resisted
by foundations specially
provided or by parts of the
structure already completed.
(Fig. 3 ) illustrates the
definition.
Fig.3 - Showing Points of Load Transference Areas
These are critical points in the structure and both those who design falsework and those who
erect it, must be aware of good practice. (See Check List at end of section).
25.6.1 load transfer areas bearers

Local Crushing
Bearer must be fixed to prop

and joist. Vibration of concrete
will move bearer if unfixed. Loose wedges
fall out
Bearer should be secured Prop or support not plumb
centrally by nailed wedges.
Vibration loosens un-nailed Fig.5 - above showing what can happen when
wedges, bearer moves and wedges are not secured properly and prop or
eccentric loading results support is not plumb.
Fig.4 - above showing Load Transfer areas
Bearers correctly and securely
positioned.

PART TWO
25.6.2 load transfer areas – adjustable jacks
Diagonal as
close as
possible to
node
Fig.6 - showing examples of over extension

(exceeding 300mm) of adjustable fork
heads or base jacks without bracing which
can cause the supporting structure to
collapse.
Lateral movement creates eccentricity

and reduction of bearing area in timber.
Connecting tube on
25.7 LACING AND BRACING every row of
Secondary Timber
standards
Ensure that:
• all specified members are in place.

• all diagonal Bracing are connected to
the correct lacing by a right angle
structural coupler.
• coupling of bracing and lacing should
be made as close as possible to the
node points (connection of horizontal
and vertical members of falsework
structure).
• the distance between the coupling
points and the node points should not
exceed 15cm.
• couplers and connections are tightened
satisfactorily.
• base and head jacks extended more
than 30 cm every row of jacks is
stabilised at top with a bracing tube at
Tube brace
right angle to the main timber
will stabilise
falsework. (see Fig.7 ) up to 6 jacks.
• every 6 jacks of same row are
stabilised by a diagonal bracing tube. Fig.7 - above showing part elevation as viewed in
direction of arrow of jack head bracing.

PART TWO
the following items are to be checked for proper installation of end bearers
• full contact is achieved between end bearers and its underlying ground or plates.
• proper restraint is made to ensure the stability of end bearers in their position.
• spacing between centres of plates is to be conserved as shown on drawings.
25.7.1 jack head bracing
Main Timber
“a”
When dimension “a” exceed 300mm.

Every row of jacks is joined at top with
a tube at right angles to the main
timbers – and every 6th jack of every
Every 6th jack in row is diagonally braced in both
both directions. directions.
Fig.8 - above showing the correct method of using Jack Head Bracing

PART TWO
25.8 SPECIAL PRECAUTION MEASURES FOR PERMANENT FALSEWORK

Permanent falsework is employed to permanently support structural element like in-situ
slabs. It is designed to take the load of the supported structural element and its own weight
in addition to other loads arising from wind and normal casting operations.
25.8 1 with pre cast elements

• top and bottom surfaces must be marked properly for identification.
• the lifting system must be arranged in a way to avoid collision and consequential
breaking of pre cast elements.
• lateral supports should be provided before releasing pre cast elements from the sling,
especially in the case of beams with a width to depth ratio exceeding 1 - 3.
25.8.2 with steel panels

• steel panels should be properly positioned in accordance with drawings.
• hand-lines should be fixed to these panels to make handling more convenient and safer,
especially in presence of high wind.
• fixing of the panels is made by studs, bolts, or welding to prevent lateral movement,
excessive deflection and displacements arising from wind action.
25.8.3 with glass reinforced plastics (GRP) panels

• during the cutting and grinding of panels, dust masks, eye protection and suitable
protective clothing should be worn.
• panels can be affected by heat, therefore, heat generating sources should not be brought
close to these panels.
25.8.4 with glass reinforced cement (GRC) panels

• safe handling requires gloves to be worn by involved workers.
• during the cutting of panels, dust masks and eye protection should be worn.
• to ensure stability, panels should be stacked in an organized way.
• when lifting panels by crane, a spreader beam should be used.
Note: Anchoring of decking panels and use of clamps or weights whenever required is a must to
prevent uplift forces from moving the panels.

SAFETY CHECKLIST - FALSEWORK
Since errors in falsework erection are not always remediable, checking for the correctness of
falsework erection should be scheduled far enough ahead of erection time for the permanent
structure. Items to be checked for the correctness of falsework erection are the following:
General
adequate anchorage, levelling and correct positioning of sole plates and grillages are achieved.
base plates and grillages should be located to the centre of underlying sole plates.
vertical supports checked.
vertical alignment should be plumbed within deviation in accordance with specified tolerance.
spacing for these members is to be executed in conformance with drawings and standard
details.
all members, couplers, fittings, wedges of the falsework and others are installed properly,
secured, tightened and at correct positions. If these precautions are not taken into account,
loose and non-nailed wedges may fall-out in presence of any vibration arising from activities
such as concrete placing and consolidation.
At points of Load Transfer

correct details applied as per fig.3.
base and head jacks are not over extended unless detailed with adequate special bracing (see
figs. 4 & 5)
that steel section web stiffeners are provided as detailed.
there is positional accuracy of all members.
there are no eccentricities in excess of allowances specified.
Lacings and Bracings

all specified members are in place.
all bracings and lacings are coupled as close to node points and never more than 150mm away.
all bracings and lacings are connected to correct members e.g. diagonals to lacings to allow
right angle structural couplers to be used.
ADM/H&S/CL/2.25/1 01 March 2005 SAFETY CHECKLIST - FALSEWORK & STEELFIXING 1 of 3

SAFETY CHECKLIST - FALSEWORK
required precautions during erection and use of falsework

during the construction of large items, suspended slabs with proper guarded edges and suitable
access ladders shall be used.
no storage should be placed on falsework since it is not designed to carry additional heavy
loads for other purposes.
falsework should be designed to allow safe lifting and handling from points designed for this
purpose.
persons not involved in the construction process, dismantling or inspection of falsework should
be denied access.
loose materials and plant should be fixed against any movement including lateral movement
induced by high winds.
whenever it is possible that workers can fall from slab falsework by more than 2metres, suitable
edge guards shall be installed.
whenever workers are erecting falsework elements higher than 2 metres over previously
erected slabs, guarded work platforms with access ways should be provided. These access
ways should be also guarded and wide enough to allow for workers to carry materials (see Pt 2
section 29 - Scaffolding & Working Platforms)
proprietary falsework systems should be erected and used in accordance with manufacturers’
instructions.
required precautions during dismantling of falsework

it must be determined ahead whether back-propping before complete release of the falsework
or re-propping after release of the falsework is the method to be employed.
for the safety and convenience of workers carrying out the dismantling activity, proper
temporary platforms must be provided.
proper tarpaulins or nets should be placed to decrease the danger of any falling material.
all dismantled and removed materials shall be immediately stored and properly handled to allow
for its use in the future.
dismantling steps should be carried out in the following sequence:

removal of loose fittings and materials
removal of projecting nails and sticking elements (in the case of concrete) as work proceeds.
before removal of safety guardrails making part of the falsework, replacement safety guardrails
are to be installed and connected to the edges of concrete.
after removal, falsework should be supported safely during repair, oiling and other maintenance
works needed before reuse.

SAFETY CHECKLIST - STEELFIXING
Precautionary measures to be taken with steel fixing include the following:

steel bundles should never be carried or lifted by the binding wire. Proper slings should be
used.
steel fixers should work at safe places or shops provided on site. Persons not involved in steel
shop work should be denied access.
during the cutting of reinforcement, protective gloves and eye protection must be worn by
persons performing work.
only recommended types of blades should be fitted to disc cutters to prevent any accident
arising from the breaking of a blade.
only trained workers are to be authorized to use the disc cutters.
torches shall not be used in cutting steel of types adversely affected by heat.
the short end of the cut bar should not be left to fly off and endanger life of persons.
projecting steel bars should be capped to reduce their risk potential.
proper walkways should be installed over the fixed steel cages to secure the safety of persons
crossing over to access their destination.

PILING
INTRODUCTION 1

26.2 MATERIAL HANDLING 3
26.3 TYPES OF PILING OPERATIONS AND PRECAUTIONS 3
CHECKLIST FOR PILING METHOD STATEMENTS

(ADM/H&S/CL/2.26/1)
SECTION 26
PILING
INTRODUCTION.
Piling operations can give rise to different hazards dependent upon the type of piling being
undertaken. Certain hazards are, however, generally common on all types of piling, and this section
gives both the general precautions to be taken and the special precautions relating to the different
types of piling.


26.1.1 method statement
Piling contractors should be requested to provide an appropriate written method statement. A
general checklist for the production and checking of such method statements is provided at
the end of this section. It is essential that induction training and information specific to the
method statement is provided to piling operatives.
26.1.2 underground services

Prior to piling, all underground services in the area should be located and rendered safe. It is
important to consult the appropriate Utilities for the area on these matters. A check should
also be carried out to ensure that there are no cellars, underground watercourses or ground
conditions, etc., which could create hazards during the operation. (see Pt 2 section 6 for
further information on Underground/Overhead services)
26.1.3 cranes and lifting gear

• cranes must be selected and used in accordance with the requirements of Pt 2 section
19-Cranes and Hoists
• if a rig with a SWL of more than one ton is used for general lifting operations, such as the
loading and transport of materials on site, it must be fitted with an “automatic safe load
indicator” ASLI.
• a firm level base of adequate bearing value must be provided, or crane mats used.
• as there is a risk of the cores of

pendant/bridle ropes fracturing due to shock
loading, these ropes should be opened up
and the cores carefully examined at 3 monthly
intervals.
• any crane used for raising or lowering men

must be fitted with a dead man’s handle and
the descent effectively controlled; the latter is
currently achieved by power lowering.
• properly constructed man carrying cages,

which are unable to spin or tip, must be used.
The cages should be regularly and carefully
Fig.1 - Properly constructed and
inspected. (see Fig.1) tested man riding safety
cage
• records of thorough examination must be held for all lifting appliances and gear, which
must be adequate for the job, paying particular attention to the risk of damage to gear by
sharp edges.
• piling machine operators must be at least 18 years of age, trained, competent, medically
fit and authorised by site management to operate the machine.
• cranes which have been employed on piling duties should be subjected to a thorough
examination before being returned to general lifting operations
26.1.4 personal protective equipment (PPE)

• all persons working on piling operations must wear safety helmets (suitable helmets, with
chinstraps and smaller peaks are now available), Ear and eye protection must be
provided and worn where necessary. (see Pt 2 section 12)-PPE.
• when piling from a pontoon or adjacent to water, personnel should wear life lackets.
Rescue equipment (e.g. a safety boat and Iifebuoys with lifelines attached) must be kept
ready for immediate use and enough men must know how to use it. (see Pt 2 section 28)
-Working over or Adjacent to Water.
26.2 MATERIALS HANDLING

• when splitting bundles of sheet piles, chocks should be used. If large quantities of piles
are handled, the use of purpose-made strops and grips is advised.
• piles should not be stacked too high or in a cantilever position. Spacers and chocks
should be used where necessary. Tubular piles should not be stacked more than four
high and should be properly chocked.
• when lifting piles or piling hammers, hand lines should be used to control the load. It is
important that due consideration is given to wind speed during these operations.
26.3 TYPES OF PILING OPERATIONS AND PRECAUTIONS

26.3.1 driven sheet piling
The assessment of risk must consider the following simple factors in connection with the
sheet piling process:
• how the piles are held in position during driving,
• how the piles are to be threaded,
• how the first pile is secured whilst the second is threaded,
• the overall scheme to devise a system to prevent the falls of persons and materials.
Piles can either be held in position during driving using a special leader arrangement
attached to the crane or piling plant or, alternatively, a gate system may be used as
described below.
26.3.2 gate systems

A supporting system should be chosen which is appropriate for the operation, e.g. where
short runs of sheet piling are required and accuracy is not the main criteria, then a single
gate system may be used.
A single gate system is made up of a simple frame of either timber or steel gates supported
by blocks a suitable distance above ground level. A shallow guide trench is normally dug to
assist with the location of the sheet piles.
Sheet Piles pitched – not driven
Toeboard Guardrails Sheet piles pitched
and part driven
Walkway top
gates with Hanger Brackets
gap covered
Bottom Gate
Wooden Tirfor Tension

Wedges
Bolts
Anchor Block with lifting eye
Kelly Block cast into block
Fig.2 - TWO GATE SYSTEM – Showing piling, the use of hanger brackets and the provision of a safety walkway
“Gate support system” See Fig.2 shown above is a two gate system, made up from timber
H-frames, set in concrete Kelly Blocks. These H-frames are then spanned by RSJ’s (gates).
If the gates are over 2m high, or over any potentially dangerous area, they must not be used
as working platforms unless fitted with toe boards which rise at least 150mm, and main
guardrails at least 910mm above the walkway. Additionally, intermediate guardrails, or other
rigid barriers must be fitted so that there is not an unprotected gap of more than 470mm in
height in the means of protection against a fall (as in the illustrated in Fig.2).
Where such protection cannot be provided, access to slinging points must be gained by
ladder and NOT by means of the gates.
• permanent ladder access must be secure and extend above the gates sufficiently to
provide a safe handhold. (A distance of 1 .05m is recommended).
• when constructing Kelly Blocks, reinforcement should be placed in the concrete base.
Vertical RSJ’s should have a good “key”. Vertical timber should not be cast into the block
but should be wedged and bolted.
• where doubt exists over the stability of Kelly Blocks, guy lines should be used.
• lifting eyes should be cast into the blocks.
26.3.3 pitching piles

• if shackle holes have to be burned in the pile, sharp burrs should be removed to prevent
damage to shackle pins.
• remote release shackles (see Pt 2 section 30)- Erection of Structures , should be used
where possible and the sheet pile must not be lifted vertically without first checking that
the pin is properly engaged through the sheet. The length of the operating rope must be
less than the length of the pile, and the rope should be secured around the pile to prevent
snagging or being caught in the wind and becoming inaccessible.
• if piles are too heavy for a remote release shackle and work cannot safely be carried out
from a ladder, a lifting cage should be provided to gain access for unscrewing the
shackle. (see Fig.1)
• if a special lifting eye is to be welded to the pile for angled pitching, the weld should have
a factor of safety of at least 2.
• long sheet piles should be pitched with a pile threader following the manufacturer’s
guidance for use. Where this is not possible, a pile pitching cage should be used. The
cage should hang from an adjacent pile with the operatives wearing safety harnesses
hooked to the adjacent pile before the crane hook is removed from the cage.
• when sheet piles are being pitched, it is essential to take particular care to ensure the
stability of the first few piles, but especially the first pile. This may be achieved by fixing
the pile to the gate at two points so that it cannot move within the plane of the gate. This
action will also ensure that the pile is stable if an effective toe-in is not achieved due to
hard/stony ground conditions.
• when feeding sheet piles through top and bottom gates, use wood blocks or a bent bar.
Never use a straight pinch bar, as fingers can easily be trapped.
When working off ladders during pitching piles operation, the following additional precautions
is required:-
clutching
• ladder must be placed in the valley of a previously placed pile; the ladder must be footed
and, when at the top of the ladder and both hands are required For clutching, a safety
harness must be worn and secured to the pile using a girder grip. (see Pt 2 section 29) -
Scaffolding/Working Platforms.
wedging
• ladder must be placed against the RSJ and footed; wedges should be pre-positioned on
the RSJ a 41b lump hammer should be used as this can be swung with one hand. If two
hands are required, a safety harness must be worn, with the lanyard wrapped around the
RSJ or connected to a girder grip.
• work method must not be changed without the approval of the senior site representative
or the contractor responsible for the piling operation.
• if windy conditions make the handling of the sheet piles difficult, work must stop until the
responsible person has been consulted and a safe method of continuing the work has
been devised.
26.3.4 hammers
• hammers, and in particular all clamping bolts, should be inspected daily.
• use guide rope when positioning a hammer.
• stand clear when starting and operating.
• ALL personnel should be at ground level during piling operations.
• should the piston of a hammer jam, the trip-lever should be pulled to the open position
before removing the hammer from the pile.
• damaged high pressure airlines or high voltage cables, feeding the hammer, can present
a serious hazard to persons working in the vicinity of the operation. Therefore it is
important to keep supply lines/cables under constant observation to avoid damage by
trapping or from sharp objects.
double acting air hammers
• all hose couplings should be properly manufactured and matched. The joining of rubber
pipes to brass spigots should be by clamp and not hose clips.
• ensure that the oil bottle/filter lid is secure.

internal drop hammers
• always place a swivel between the hammer and hoist rope.
• attachment of a hoist rope should always be done using a properly matched anchor and
pear; the dead end of the rope should be secured using a bulldog clip or other approved
means.
• intermediate linking shackle pins should be secured.
• check hoist ropes daily during operations.
26.3.5 helmets and inserts

Pile helmets or crowns must be well constructed, strong enough and free from defect.
Should packing or spacers be needed, they should be drilled, tapped and screwed to secure
in place, and then welded.
Remember that any welds to a solid cast helmet will eventually crack.
26.3.6 pile extraction

• where pile extraction is necessary, due allowance should
be made for the frictional forces occurring between the
pile and ground, in order to determine the correct size of
crane and extractor. (see Fig.3)
• it is good practice to use a tag line between hook and

adjacent pile to prevent the extractor swinging out of
control should the pile snap.
• care should be taken when lowering extracted piles to

Fig.3 - Showing typical quick
ensure that the load on the crane hook is kept vertical. release type of pile
extractor
26.3.7 bored piling
• spoil from boreholes should be kept clear of access to the borehole which, after
completion, should be fitted with a cover or other suitable protection. As an alternative to
a cover, it is common practice to back fill or to leave the auger in the borehole.
• persons are not permitted to enter any borehole less than 750 mm in diameter.
• where it is necessary for any person to enter a borehole, special precautions must be
taken. It must be ensured that no toxic or flammable substance/gas is present in the
borehole and that the air is fit to breathe. Where necessary, a proper ventilation system or
suitable breathing apparatus must be provided. No person should remain in the hole for
more than one hour at a time.
accessing pile shaft
Descent by any person into any pile shaft, or bore hole, from here on referred to as a shaft,
should only be carried out in compliance with the following conditions:-
(see Fig.4)
• shaft must be lined with a steel sleeve from

ground level.
• top of the capsule used by the person to

descend the shaft must never descend lower
Steel Sleeve
than one metre above the bottom of the
shaft support sleeve.
• capsule must be totally enclosed, with

windows to enable the person carried in it to
see the unsupported section below the
support sleeve, or the excavated under
reamed section at the base of the shaft.
• under no circumstances should the

person leave the capsule whilst it is Minimum one metre
below the supported section of the shaft.
Clay Level
• capsule must have fresh air and
Communication line
telecommunication supplies from ground and nominal 20mm
level at all times whilst it is below ground. diameter steel air
supply pipe with
diffuser to reduce
• metal steps must be provided inside the noise
capsule from the bottom to the top.
Step irons for
• top of the capsule must have opening flaps emergency escape
to enable the person to be rescued in the
event of the capsule being trapped below
ground. Capsule doors with
windows
• crane used to raise and lower the capsule
must have powered lowering which is in
Floor doors opening
correct working order. upwards
• capsule must have low voltage lighting

inside it. Fig.4. - Showing Access to Shaft and
Boreholes and illustrating
• an appropriate gas monitor must be kept in some of the points listed
the capsule at all times whilst it is below above.
ground.
• all operatives having to descend a pile shaft in a capsule, must be given adequate
instruction and training on procedures to be followed, and the risks involved.
• it is preferable for mechanical means to be provided and used for inspection and
sampling the sides of the shafts, instead of having to send a person down to carry out the
work.
• banks man must be in attendance at all times when any person is lowered into a bore
hole. He should be in such a position that he can observe the man in the borehole, and If
necessary, should wear a safety harness and line.
• operatives engaged in this work should be trained and competent in rescue from deep
bore holes.
• emergency rescue drills supervised by a competent person should be carried out at the
start of operations and at regular intervals thereafter. A set of printed rescue drill
instructions should be issued and displayed at each site.
• all rescue equipment should be tested regularly to ensure that it is in good working order
and capable of reaching to the maximum depth of the borehole.
• supervisors should be trained in methods of gas detection, respiratory resuscitation, first

aid and the use and maintenance of breathing apparatus.
26.3.8 piling augers

• all machinery should be in good condition and no
lifting apparatus should be used unless there are in
existence current records of test and thorough
examination. (see Fig.5)
• all control levers on the piling rig should be clearly

marked to indicate their purpose and mode of
operation.
• persons must stand well clear of the auger both

when drilling and when discharging spoil.
• if the secondary rope is used as a crane (i.e. to lift Fig.5 - Type of Piling Auger
commonly used on
casings into place) then there must be an approved
Building/Construction Sites.
automatic safe load indicator fitted to the system.
• when ropes are subject to heavy wear, they must be frequently inspected and changed as
necessary.
26.3.9 tripods
(see Fig.6)
• no tripod should be used unless the rig is tested and the legs marked. The numbers on
the items must coincide with the numbers on the test and examination records
• ropes should be secured with suitable Fastenings, e.g. bulldog clips.
• where appropriate, properly constructed saddles or hard eyes should be used.
Note: knots must not be tied in any rope used for lifting.
• base plates should be adequate and secured to

prevent any accidental movement of the rig.
• tripod legs must not be overspread or overloaded.
• only the correct pins should be used in the

sheerlegs.
• the safe working load must be clearly marked on

the winch, and records kept of test and thorough
examination.
• all parts of the winch should be effectively guarded.

Fig.6 - Showing a typical type of
• constant attention must be paid to the condition of Tripod used for Bore
Piling.
rope, which should be changed as soon as it
becomes necessary.
• when a rope/chain block is being used to extract the casings, the capacity of the block
must not exceed the capacity of the rig.
• under no circumstances must there be less than 2 full turns of the rope on the winch
drum at any time
SAFETY CHECKLIST - PILING OPERATIONS
CHECKLIST FOR PILING METHOD STATEMENTS
Piling method statements should normally include the following so far as is relevant in the
circumstances:
Name and address of the piling contractor.
Names of the supervisor/foreman and appointed safety adviser and arrangements for
Descriptions of the work to be carried out including the number, type and size of piles and the
method of placing.
Duration of the work.
Hours of work.
Nature of the soil including details of any contamination present and the precautions to be
taken.
Details of the methods of locating and avoiding any existing underground services, whether or
not their presence if known.
Details of the personnel to be used and their training/ experience.
Assessment of any work at height and arrangements for the provision of a safe place of work
and safe access/ egress.
Details of plant and equipment to be used together with confirmation that all necessary records
will be provided on site.
Details of auger cleaning device used and auger or drill guarding provided.
Confirmation that man access will not be permitted to under reamed pile shafts.
Assessment of exposure of operatives to noise and the precautions to be taken.
Assessment of environmental noise and the steps to minimise disturbance.
Details of the PPE to be provided to personnel.
Arrangements for protecting openings.
Arrangements for the storage / stockpiling of materials.
Note
ADM/H&S/CL/2.26/1 01 March 2005 SAFETY CHECKLIST - PILING OPERATIONS 1 of 1

SAFETY CHECKLIST - PILING OPERATIONS
ADM/H&S/CL/2.26/1 01 March 2005 SAFETY CHECKLIST - PILING OPERATIONS 2 of 1

SECTION 27
WELDING
INTRODUCTION 1
27.1 GAS WELDING -GENERAL 2

27.2 STORAGE OF GAS CYLINDERS 2
27.3 CYLINDER HANDLING 3
27.4 CYLINDER ATTACHMENTS 4
27.6 OPERATIONAL FAULTS 6
27.7 ELECTRIC ARC WELDING 8
27.8 HAZARDS ASSOCIATED WITH WELDING 9
SECTION 27
PART TWO
SECTION 27
WELDING
INTRODUCTION
Welding has been defined as the fusion of two pieces of metal, rendered plastic or liquid by heat or
by pressure, or by both.
There are many different welding processes, but the two most commonly used in the construction
industry are gas welding and electric arc welding.
In gas welding metal fusion is achieved by the use of very high temperature flames, produced by a
mixture of gases at a torch or blowpipe. The gases involved are oxygen and a fuel gas, such as
acetylene or liquefied petroleum gas (LPG).
In electric arc welding, the arc is struck between an electrode and the workpieces. The temperature
attained by the welding arc is approximately 4000 degrees celcius. At this temperature, the work
pieces are melted and fused together.
Ministerial Order No. (32) Year 1982 - Articles (5)d & Articles 7 - 9

ADM/H&S/Pt 2 01 March 2005 WELDING 1 of 11
PART TWO
27.1 GAS WELDING -GENERAL

27.1.1 cylinder identification
Oxygen cylinders are painted black and the outlet valve threads are right-hand. The outlet
valve threads on fuel cylinders are left-hand. Acetylene cylinders are painted maroon and
propane, the most commonly used LPG is red.
Valve connections are not therefore interchangeable, and every effort should be made to
preserve the original colour to avoid confusion.
27.1.2 gas characteristics

Oxygen has no smell, is not itself flammable, but readily supports combustion. Too much
oxygen in the atmosphere (greater than 25 per cent) can be extremely dangerous. If the
gas impregnates materials. e.g. clothing, which normally will only burn slowly, they are
liable to burst into flames.
Acetylene is lighter than air, has a wide flammable range and will form an explosive
mixture with air or oxygen.
LPG is heavier than air and may therefore collect in low lying areas.
27.2 STORAGE OF GAS CYLINDERS

27.2.1 cylinders (general)
• vertically stacked cylinders, whether full or empty, should be secured against falling.
• full cylinders should be kept separate from empty ones.
• cylinders should be shielded from direct sunlight, or other heat, to avoid the build up of
excess internal pressure which might lead to gas leakage or, in extreme cases, bursting
of the cylinder.
27.2.2 oxygen cylinders

• should be stored at least 3m away from those containing acetylene or LPG, since any
mixture of oxygen with one of the fuel gases which might result from a leakage, could
be highly explosive.
• must not be kept in the same storeroom as LPG or acetylene cylinders.
• may be stacked horizontally, maximum four high, and wedged to prevent rolling.
• gas cylinders should preferably be kept on a hard standing in a safe place in the open
air. Where this is not reasonably practicable, flammable gases should be kept in a
storeroom, constructed of non-combustible material, and has adequate high and low
level ventilation.

PART TWO
27.2.3 acetylene and LPG cylinders

Whether full or empty, should always be stored and used in the upright position. If they are
allowed to lie horizontally, acetone or LPG liquid will be withdrawn from the cylinders where
the gas and safety devices such as bursting discs, temperature sensitive fusible plugs and
relief valves will be rendered ineffective
Cylinder Contents Pressure

Outlet Pressure Regulating Screw
27.3 CYLINDER HANDLING Gauge
Gauge
• hands and clothing should

Flash Back
be free from grit, grease
Arrestor
and oil when cylinders are Valve
Container for
handled to prevent them Valve Key
from slipping and to
prevent grit from getting
Hose Check
into the valve, or grease (Non Return Valve)
on to the nozzle or valve.
• every effort should be made to stop Fire

nozzles being used for handling Extinguisher
purposes. They are not designed to
take such weight or stress.
• cylinders in use should normally be
kept and moved in purpose built
trolleys. If it is necessary to move
cylinders which are not in a trolley,
regulators and hoses should be
detached and a check should be
made that valves are properly shut.
Under no circumstances should Fig.1 - Example of Purpose Built Trolley
(Note fitments for the torch, a dry
cylinders be rolled along the powder Extinguisher and a
ground. Cylinder Valve Key).
• if cylinders are to be lifted by crane, they should be secured in a special carrier. On no

account should they be lifted with chain or wire rope slings, which can easily
slip.
• gas cylinders must be treated with care and not subjected to shocks or falls.
• when they are transported in a vehicle around a site, they should be secured to prevent
injury in the event of any sudden vehicle movement, and when being unloaded from a
vehicle, they should not be dropped to the ground.

PART TWO
• acetylene cylinders must always he transported and used in the vertical position. If they
have been left in the horizontal position, they must be stood upright for approximately
10 minutes to settle out before use.(see Fig.1)
27.4 CYLINDER ATTACHMENTS

27.4.1 regulators
• regulators must always be fitted to the cylinders
to reduce the gas pressure from that in the
cylinder to the working pressure of the blowpipe.
• only regulators designed for the gas being used

and rated for the current full cylinder pressure,
should be fitted to the cylinders.
• regulators are fitted with filters, but too much dust

can easily clog them. To prevent this from
happening, the cylinder valve should be "cracked
open" before the regulator is fitted to the cylinder. Fig. 2 - Example of a Type of
This will blow all dust and other foreign matter Regulator used for
Welding Purposes
clear.
• the adjusting screw of the regulator must always be released before the cylinder valve
is opened, and the cylinder valve must be opened gradually. If it is opened suddenly,
the abrupt compression of the gas will generate excessive heat which might be enough
to ignite the valve seat material or damage the gauge.
• periodic checks should be made to ensure that no gas is leaking from the regulator
when the pressure regulating screw is set at zero. A leak will cause a build-up of
pressure in the hose to the torch when the blowpipe valve is shut. Checks for gas
leakage from any part of the equipment should only be made with water containing
detergent. Bubbles in the detergent indicate the presence of a leak. (see Fig. 2)
27.4.2 hoses
hoses should be:-
• kept for one type of gas only, and colour coded for identification - red for acetylene or
other fuel gases (except LPG), orange for LPG and blue for oxygen.
• inspected daily before use to see that they are free from cuts, scratches, cracks, burnt
or worn patches.
• be effectively clipped or crimped to the equipment and protected at all times from sharp
edges, falling metal, passing traffic and sparks from the welding operation.

PART TWO
27.4.3 non-return valves and flashback arrestors

If oxygen and fuel gas become
mixed in one of the hoses, a mixed
gas explosion or “flashback” may
occur. To avoid the risk of igniting
such an explosive mixture, each
hose should be purged with its own
gas before the blowpipe is lit. This
operation should be carried out in a
well ventilated space away from any
source of ignition.
To prevent gas mixtures arising in

use, e.g. if the blowpipe nozzle
becomes blocked, non-return valves
should be fitted to each blowpipe
inlet connection. The additional use
of flashback arrestors (flame
Fig. 3 - DIAGRAM OF A FLASH BACK ARRESTOR
arrestors) is strongly recommended. “A” Indicator Button (in normal operation a green safety
In situations of high risk, flashback band shows around the button. After a flashback the
band does not show and the outer shroud must be
arrestors must be fitted. (see Fig.3) lifted).
“B” Pressure Sensitive Cut-Off Valve (In the event of a
Examples of such situations flashback, the pressure wave will activate the valve to
include: cut off the gas supply automatically).
“C” Thermal Cut off Device (Designed to cut off gas in
• in a confined space where the event of extreme temperature such as a hose fire.
access is difficult or the means of The unit is activated at 950 C).
“D” SINTERED METAL FLAME ARRESTING ELEMENT
escape may be endangered by (Extensive surface area designed to arrest a
fire/explosion. flashback flame quickly. The element surface area is
important to ensure long service life to permit high
• operations under hot work permit gas flow in normal operation).
adjacent to live operating plant. “E” NON-RETURN VALVE (Upstream of the flame
arresting element, this unit ensures no gas can
• near compressed air workings.
backfeed and ignite incoming gases.
• when operatives are under
training.
• where there is a device in the gas line with significant internal volume, e.g. a welding
flux container.
27.4.4 blowpipes
If the nozzle of a blowpipe becomes damaged or blocked, then a build up of pressure can
cause a reverse flow of gas and a flashback may occur. It is advisable, therefore, that
blowpipes should be dismantled and cleaned at regular intervals.

PART TWO

• only proprietary fittings should be used on gas welding equipment. If a cylinder valve
leaks and cannot be tightened with a spanner, the valve should be closed and the
cylinder returned to the supplier with a label indicating the fault. Cylinder valves should
never be packed with washers.
• on no account should oil, grease or other substances such as soap be allowed to come
into contact with an oxygen regulator valve or fittings, as these substances are
explosive in the presence of high pressure oxygen. Any leaking oxygen fittings should
not be tightened before closing the cylinder valve and venting the oxygen to
atmospheric pressure.
• it is dangerous to allow the flame to come into contact with the cylinders, or a lighted
torch to be hung on a regulator or its guard. It is equally dangerous to rest blowpipes on
empty oil drums or similar containers even after the flame has been extinguished. It has
been estimated that only half a fluid ounce of flammable material may he required to
give sufficient vapour to form an explosive mixture in a 40 gallon drum. Such a small
volume of liquid would be present as only a thin film inside the drum.
• fatal and other serious accidents are caused by oxygen enrichment of the atmosphere,
due to leaks from equipment or the deliberate "sweetening" of the atmosphere with
oxygen. In such circumstances, the area must be purged with fresh air until the oxygen
level is below 25 percent. All clothing should be well ventilated in the open air to prevent
the risk of spontaneous combustion. At the same time, all sources of ignition in the area
must be eliminated.
27.6 OPERATIONAL FAULTS

It is not unusual for operational faults such as minor explosions to occur during welding or
cutting operations. Some are more frightening than harmful; others can lead to very
dangerous conditions.
Types of explosions and other faults, descriptions, causes, preventative and corrective
actions are shown in the following table:-

PART TWO
Operational Description Cause Preventative Corrective Action

Faults Action
Explosions
Flame snap Unintentional • Both regulators at • Completely shut down both
extinction of the incorrect presure. torch valves.
out flame outside • Torch nozzle • Check regulator settings.
the nozzle obstructed • Check nozzles.
orifice. • Nozzle held too close • Re-light - ensuring
to the work. adequate gas flow
• Blowpipe valves not
opened enough to
allow adequate gas • Check correct
flow. pressure on both
regulators.
Sustained Retrogression of • regulators not set to • Ensure blowpipe • close both blowpipe valves,
the flame into correct pressure, valves are oxygen first.
back fire the blowpipe • nozzle obstructed, sufficiently • check cylinder pressures,
neck or body, • nozzle overheated. opened. • check and adjust regulator
the flame • Never hold settings,
remaining alight. nozzle too close • cool torch and check,
to o the work • clean nozzle orifice of any
obstruction,
• re-light after purging both
hoses.
Backfire • Retrogression • regulators not set to • close both blowpipe valves,
of the flame correct pressure. oxygen first.
towards the • light applied before • check cylinder pressure,
blowpipe flow of gas mixture • check and adjust regulator
mixer, properly established. setting,
• flame being • check torch,
either • re-light when gas flow is
extinguished properly established.
or re-ignited
at the nozzle.
Usually one of • Mixing of gasses • Ensure all • Close both blow pipe
Flashback
the hoses will occurs when the connections are valves.
have burst and hoses have been tight. • Close both cylinder valves.
possibly ignited disconnected from • Ensure all cylinder • Extinguish hose if alight.
blowpipes and/or valves are open and • Remove acetylene
regulators. blowpipe valves regulator, if “bull nose” is
closed. sooty, suspect a dangerous
• Purge each hose condition and carry out
seperately and procedure advised under
consecutively by heated cylinder.
opening blowpipe • If “bull nose” clean, replace
valve and allowing regulator, repair hose(s) or
gas to flow for obtain new ones.
sufficient time to • Check whether cut off valve
ensure only pure has closed: reset or replace
gas remains in as necessary.
hoses. • Re-assemble equipment,
• Close the valve for hoses and continue with
each gas as the work.
exercise is
complete.
This exercise should
only be carried out in
the open air or well
ventilated areas,

PART TWO
Operational Description Cause Preventative Corrective Action

Faults Action
Heated Cylinder • Rraise the alarm and
Ensuring that cylinders
Cylinder will show Where an acetylene ensure the Civil
are always kept clear
signs of heat, paint cylinder becomes Defence is called,
of direct heat and
will start peeling off accidentally heated • Rmove any external
sunlight.
and a white heat or gets hot due to source of heat, if
spot will become internal possible,
apparent outside decomposition, • Close cylinder valves, if
cylinder. possible.
• Evacuate the area,
• Liaise with the Civil
Defence on arrival.
• Arrange for the
suppliers to remove the
cylinder.
27.7 ELECTRIC ARC WELDING

The current used for electric arc welding may be either direct or alternating but, whichever
system is used, it is important that the voltage be as low as is consistent with efficient
welding.
On building sites, arc welding is usually carried out with direct current (DC) supplied from a
diesel driven mobile generators. A welding lead takes the current from the generator to the
electrode holder. A welding return, usually, but incorrectly termed the "earth" carries the
return current from the work piece being welded back to the generator.
27.7.1 cables and cable couplings

Welding leads and welding return cables are frequently dragged over rough surfaces. Their
insulation should, therefore, be suitable for resisting hard wear and should be examined
frequently for defects, The part of the cable which is connected to the electrode holder
should be as flexible as possible so as not to hamper the movement of the welder. The
welding return should be of a section not less than that of the welding lead.
Joints between cable sections should be made with properly constructed insulated cable
couplings adequately shrouded, so that live metal is not exposed if the parts of the
connector are separated.
The welding return should be firmly connected to the metal on which welding is taking
place, by means of a well constructed clamp.

PART TWO
27.7.2 electrode holders . (see Fig.4)

An electrode holder is essentially a pair of
spring loaded jaws, or a threaded sleeve
fitted to the end of the welding lead. The
holder should be fully
insulated, so that the live portions cannot he
touched accidentally Fig. 4 - Example of fully
insulated Electrode
Holders
27.8 HAZARDS ASSOCIATED WITH WELDING

The principal hazards associated with gas welding are fires, explosions, burns, eye
damage, heat stress, respiratory disease and systemic poisoning. Additional hazards
which may result from arc welding are electric shock, ultra violet radiation and ozone.
27.8.1 fire and explosion

The potential for fires and explosions is always present unless gas cylinders are stored
and handled correctly. When any type of welding equipment is in use, the naked fame. or
arc, provides a source of ignition for any combustible material, flammable gas or vapour.
Where possible, flammable materials should he kept out of any area where welding is
taking place. Where such a course of action is not practicable, fire resisting sheets should
be used to protect the surroundings from the flame and from spatter. At least one fire
extinguisher should always be immediately available in the area of any welding operation.
27.8.2 burns
Skin burns may result from metal spatter or from
touching hot workpieces. The hands, arms, legs,
and feet are particularly vulnerable, so should be
protected by gloves or gauntlets.(see Fig.5) and
spats and jackets made from chrome leather. The
use of leather safety footwear is also
recommended.
Prolonged exposure to the heat from welding may Fig.5 - Example of Welders Leather Gloves.
lead to reddening of the skin of the face. In the
case of gas welding, discomfort may be avoided by
the use of a hand shield.

PART TWO
27.8.3 eye damage

During any welding operation, the eyes may be penetrated by sparks, spatter, slag and
other foreign bodies. During gas welding infra-red and of course visible light is emitted, but
not ultra-violet light. lnfra-red may dry the outer surface of the eye which may become
irritated.
Eyes must be protected from infra-red and visible light
by means of box goggles with a housing made to BS
1542, and filters made to BS EN 169 and 170.
Ultra-violet (UV) radiation, to which the eyes are very

sensitive, is produced during arc welding. The effect
of UV radiation on the eyes may vary from
conjunctivitis to possible permanent damage to the
retina.
In order to avoid these injuries, welders must use a

welding helmet or hand screen, with housing
complying with BS 1542, and fitted with appropriate
Fig.6 - Welders Helmet complying with
filters to BS EN 169 and 170. (see Fig.6) B.S. 1542 & B.S. EN 169/170
Further guidance on eye protection is given in (See Pt 2 section 12) PPE.
27.8.4 protection for others

Persons working in the vicinity of arc
welding also need protection from UV
radiation. This protection can be given by
means of screens placed around the
welders working area. (see Fig.7)
Fig. 7 - Example of a see through portable type

welding screen.
27.8.5 heat stress

The longer the duration of welding, the hotter the surroundings, including the welder
become. This heat stress is intensified the smaller the confines in which the welding
operation is taking place. In extreme cases the welder may faint.
If thermal stress is envisaged, then ventilation should be introduced and consideration

should be given to having a second person on standby in case of emergencies.

PART TWO
27.8.6 respiratory disease

Before carrying out welding operations, the materials involved should be identified, the
risks assessed and necessary control measures established.
Every welding process produces gas and fumes which may result in respiratory disease as
the hot metal vapour from the weld pool will produce fumes when the vapour is rapidly
cooled and oxidised by the surrounding air. Fumes consist mainly of a cloud of line
particles, predominantly iron oxide.
In addition to fumes, harmful gases may also be generated during gas welding, the
principal toxic gases produced being carbon monoxide and nitrous fumes which is only
formed in large enough amounts to be dangerous when combustion is incomplete.
Arc welding produces ozone, a gas which irritates the respiratory system. Nitrous fumes
are also produced, but to a smaller extent than during gas welding.
It cannot be assumed that natural ventilation will produce acceptably low gas and fume
concentrations in the welder’s breathing zone. If a number of welding operations are being
carried out in the same area, or the work is being carried out in a confined space, then the
risk is obviously increased.
The most effective form of fume control

equipment is the type which allows the
extractor hood to be placed as close to the weld
as possible. Ideally, the extracted fume-laden
air should be effectively filtered or exhausted
into the atmosphere and not allowed to enter
the air of the workplace. If fume control is
suspected of being inadequate, the air in the
breathing zone of the welder must be sampled
to determine its suitability for breathing. (see
Fig.8)
Fig.8 - Example of a portable fume
27.8.7 systemic poisoning extractor.
The fumes from galvanised metals, lead coated or other toxic metals may affect not only
the respiratory system, but also the rest of the body, particularly where the work which
produces the fumes is carried on for any length of time in poorly ventilated conditions.
The provision of an exhaust ventilation system for this type of work is essential and, in
addition, the use of respirators may be required.
Air sampling must be carried out to confirm the adequacy of the precautions.

SECTION 28
WORKING OVER OR ADJACENT TO

WATER
INTRODUCTION 1
28.1 PLATFORMS, GANGWAYS, ETC. 2

28.2 LADDERS 2
28.3 SAFETY NETS AND SAFETY HARNESSES 2
28.4 SITE TIDINESS 3
28.5 ILLUMINATION 3
28.6 WEATHER CONDITIONS 3
28.7 PROTECTIVE CLOTHING AND EQUIPMENT 3
28.8 FIRST AID 4
28.9 BUOYANCY AIDS 5
28.10 MEANS OF ACCESS: WATER TRANSPORT 5
28.11 RESCUE EQUIPMENT 6
SECTION 28
PART TWO
SECTION 28
WORKING OVER OR ADJACENT TO

WATER
INTRODUCTION
Any workplace over, on, or near water, presents a danger that persons might slip, fall or be swept off
their feet by a rapid rise of tide, strong current, or swell from passing water traffic. Whether or not a
person is injured by a fall, there is an immediate risk of drowning and/or being carried away by the
current.
Considerable effort must be made, firstly to prevent persons from tripping, falling or being swept into
the water and secondly, if the worst does happen, to ensure that they are rescued in the shortest time
possible before they can come to any further harm.

Ministerial Order No. 32 (year 1982) Article 7

ADM/H&S/Pt 2 01 March 2005 WORKING OVER OR ADJACENT TO WATER 1 of 7
PART TWO
28.1 PLATFORMS, GANGWAYS, ETC.

• platforms and gangways must be a minimum of 4 boards wide complete with guard rails
and toeboards.
• at all edges from which a person might fall into the water, secure barriers or fences are
required.
• warning notices must be erected at all edges and boundaries near water and set so that
they are easily seen by operatives approaching the danger point.
• where platforms or gangways are erected above tidal water, decking boards should be
secured so that they cannot become dislodged by rising water or high winds.
• the provision of additional handholds is always advisable as a precaution in the event of

high winds.
• barges, pontoons etc. used as working platforms, must be properly constructed and
sufficiently stable to avoid tipping.
For further information and guidance on scaffolds and working platforms –
(see Pt 2 section 29) Scaffolds and Working Platforms.
28.2 LADDERS
• must be sound and of sufficient length and strength.
• securely lashed to prevent slipping.
• where ladders are permanently fitted to plant over water, they should be fitted with safety
hoops.
For further information and guidance on ladders – (see Pt 2 section 29) - Scaffolding,
Working Platforms, Ladders and Safety Nets.
28.3 SAFETY NETS AND SAFETY HARNESSES

• safety nets should be properly secured and slung sufficiently far above high water level
for anyone caught in them to remain clear and so that free access of rescue craft is
always possible.
• manufacturers should be consulted on what type of net best suits the kind of work to be
carried out and the prevailing conditions.
• Safety belts or harnesses must be used where appropriate.
For further information and guidance on safety nets – (see Pt 2 section 29) - Scaffolding
and Working Platforms.

PART TWO
28.4 SITE TIDINESS

• tools, ropes and other materials not in use should be stored away and all rubbish cleared
up promptly.
• materials awaiting use should be stacked compactly and, particularly on pontoons, not
piled too high.
• slippery surfaces are extremely dangerous and should be treated immediately.
• oily or greasy surfaces should be gritted or treated with industrial salt or sand.
• drip trays should be sand filled and set beneath all machinery to prevent the development
of oily, slippery surfaces and, especially on pontoons to minimise fire hazards.
28.5 ILLUMINATION
• essential for night work, especially in shafts, dark corners and stairways.
• should have an even spread of light to avoid deceptive shadows and glare.
• area floodlit should always include the immediate water surface.
• spotlights on swivels, should be fixed at strategic points to assist in locating a person in

the water.
• Navigation lights may be needed on working places afloat or sighted close to the shore.
28.6 WEATHER CONDITIONS

Local weather conditions should be obtained and publicised at the beginning of each days
work or shift. Hot weather, rain, rising winds, fog, sea mist etc. are all potential dangers.
28.7 PROTECTIVE CLOTHING AND EQUIPMENT

Protective clothing and equipment, suitable for the work involved, must be provided and
worn.
For further information and guidance on PPE – (see Pt 2 section 12) – PPE.

PART TWO
28.8 FIRST AID

A first aider, trained in Cardiac Pulmonary Resucitation (CPR) and familiar with both rescue
and treatment of drowning, must always be readily available on all contracts involving
working adjacent to, or on water.
The ideal person to be trained to this standard would be the person in charge of the rescue
boat.
The following are the main points to consider when rescuing a person from drowning:-
• choose the safest way to rescue the • swim to the casualty and tow him only if you
casualty. If possible, stay on land and reach are a trained life saver, or if the casualty is
with your hand, or stick or throw a rope or unconscious. It is safer to wade, if you can,
float. than swim.
• when bringing the casualty out of the water, • treat for drowning and the possible effects of
carry him with his head lower than his chest, cold.
to minimise the dangers of vomiting. • take or send the casualty to hospital, even if
he seems to have recovered well.
minimum contents required in a first aid box:
NUMBER OF EMPLOYEES
1-5 6-10 11-50 51-100 101-500
GUIDANCE CARD (multi language) 1 1 1 1 1
WRAPPED STERILE ADHESIVE 10 20 40 40 40

DRESSINGS
STERILE EYE PADS 1 2 4 6 8
TRIANGULAR BANDAGES 1 2 4 6 8
STERILE COVERING FOR SERIOUS 1 2 4 6 8

WOUNDS
SAFETY PINS 6 6 12 12 12
MEDIUM SIZE STERILE

UNMEDICATED DRESSINGS 1 2 4 6 10
LARGE STERILE UNMEDICATED 1 2 4 6 10

DRESSINGS
EXTRA LARGE STERILE
UNMEDICATED DRESSINGS 1 2 4 6 10
STERILE WATER OR SALINE IN

1 1 3 6 6
300 ML.DISPOSABLES

PART TWO
28.9 BUOYANCY AIDS

Some form of buoyancy aid must be worn as standard
practice. (see Fig.1) A wide range of life jackets is
available. They should be suitable for the work and the
hazard, conform to BS 3595 or equivalent standard,
and in addition should:-
• provide sufficient freedom of movement for persons

required to wear and work in them.
• have sufficient buoyancy to bring persons to the

surface and keep them afloat, face up.
• be easily secured to the body. Fig.1 - Example of an Adult

Buoyancy Aid conforming to
• be readily visible. B.S. 3595 ( 50 Newtons)
(5kgs. or 11lbs).
• be capable of withstanding hard treatment.
• require minimum maintenance (inflatable types need frequent checking).
• not to be prone to snagging under water.
• have clip- on, self igniting lights.
28.10 MEANS OF ACCESS: WATER TRANSPORT

Where working places are situated on water, and access is only possible by passenger
carrying boats, these crafts are subject to the Abu Dhabi Ministry of Communication and
Coast Guard regulations main requirements of which are:-
• all passenger carrying crafts, prior to use, must be registered with the above
establishments.
• must have their registration renewed annually.
• are only allowed to operate within a stipulated number of passengers according to size.
• provided with the appropriate life - saving and fire fighting appliances as specified by the
regulatory department e.g.
approved life jackets distress flares
lifebuoy(s) with buoyant heavy line first aid box

attached
dry powder or foam type
v.h.f. radio if craft longer than 35ft. extinguisher(s)

PART TWO
28.11 RESCUE EQUIPMENT

28.11.1 lifebuoys and rescue lines
• lifebuoys which are normally 765mm outside diameter
should be fitted with a 30m buoyant life line, knotted at
every 3m to assist handhold. (see Fig.2)
• life lines should be long enough for the state of the tide,
height of working place above water, or for the person
being carried downstream by a current.
• lifebuoys may be constructed of either cork or canvas

covering, or of polyurethane foam with a rigid PVC cover.
• if night work is carried out, approved self ignition type

lights should be used. Fig.2 - Lifebuoy Station
complete with Life
• daily checks to be made to ensure that lifebuoys and Lines.
rescue lines are in their proper place and in serviceable
condition.
grab lines/throw lines

• to be attached to the working place, or at
other places downstream to give person
something to grab in an emergency.
• should be long enough to allow for the

Fig.3 - Throw Line with normal rise and fall in tide.
Buoyancy Bag
• should be of the buoyant type with a
marker float at the free end.
• trailing ends to be avoided so that there

is no risk of boats being fouled.
• daily checks to be made to ensure that

they are still in position and that their
condition is sound. (see Figs. 3 & 4)
Fig. 4 - Throw Lines with Buoyancy

Capsules.

PART TWO
28.11.2 rescue boat

• should be properly made and of sufficient
length to afford reasonable stability.
• where conditions merit, inflatable craft are

recommended since they provide a better
chance of getting a person aboard without
injury.
• for work in tidal or fast flowing river water, a power

driven craft is essential equipped with a fixed self Fig.5 - Typical example of a type of
starting device on the motor. (see Fig. 5) rescue Boat used for rescue
purposes, when men are
• engines of powered craft, when not patrolling, working adjacent to or over
water.
should be run several times a day to ensure full
efficiency.
• all rescue boats should carry three oars or paddles to cater for losing one overboard.
• rawlocks should be removable and on retaining lines so that they can hang from the side
without being lost.
• should be fitted with grab lines and carry at least one approved lifebuoy.
• two way communication between boat and shore is always advisable.
• if night work is to take place, a powerful spotlight should be fitted.
• should be manned continuously and on patrol whilst work is in progress by experienced
boatmen trained in basic first aid.
• if possible, there should be two persons to a boat so that one is free to to attend to the
person in the water.
• all first aid equipment on board should have waterproof protection.

28.11.3 rescue procedure
It is essential that:
• the number of persons at work is periodically checked to ensure that no one is missing
• operatives work in pairs so that there is always one to raise the alarm.
• each person is trained in what to do in the event of an emergency.
rescue procedure should consist of
• a set routine for raising the alarm.

• a set drill to provide rescue facilities.

PART TWO
• a set routine to for getting persons to hospital whether for check-up through immersion in
water, or for treatment as the result of an injury.

SECTION 29
SCAFFOLDING - LADDERS - CRADLES

- SAFETY NETS
INTRODUCTION 1
29.1 PROVISION OF SCAFFOLDS, ETC. 2

29.2 SUPERVISION OF WORK AND INSPECTION OF MATERIAL 2
29.3 CARE AND MAINTENANCE OF SCAFFOLDING 2
29.4 RUBBISH CHUTES
3
29.5 DISMANTLING
3
29.6 CONSTRUCTION AND MATERIAL 4
29.7 LADDERS USED IN SCAFFOLDS 6
29.8 LAYOUT OF A FULL INDEPENDENT SCAFFOLD 8
29.9 STABILITY OF SCAFFOLDS 9
29.10 WALKWAYS, GUARD RAILS AND TOE BOARDS 10
29.11 SCAFFOLD TOWERS 12
29.12 THROUGH AND REVEAL TIES FOR INDEPENDENT SCAFFOLDS 14
29.13 TRUSS-OUT SCAFFOLDS 15
29.14 CANTILEVER SCAFFOLDS 16
29.15 BIRDCAGE SCAFFOLDS 17
29.16 SUSPENDED SCAFFOLD (NOT POWER OPERATED) 20
29.17 SLUNG SCAFFOLDS 21
29.18 SUSPENDED ACCESS EQUIPMENT 22
29.19 SUSPENDED SAFETY CHAIR (BOSUN’S CHAIR) 26
29.20 SAFETY NETS 27
29.21 MOBILE ELEVATING WORK PLATFORMS 30
SECTION 29
PART TWO
SECTION 29
SCAFFOLDING - LADDERS - CRADLES

- SAFETY NETS
INTRODUCTION
Since work on many construction sites is required to be done at heights which cannot be reached from
the ground, means must be provided to prevent persons from falling from their place of work and
injuring themselves; precautions must also be taken to prevent falls of tools and materials.
In most case it will be practicable to provide a safe working platform supported by some form of
scaffold or, failing this, by using a suspended scaffold or mobile work platform.
Where it is not practicable to provide a working platform, or where provisions of such a platform would
be unreasonable because of the nature or short duration of the work, personal suspension equipment
must be provided and used. As a last resort, where none of these measures are practicable or
reasonable in the circumstances, injury from falls must be prevented by the provision and use of
safety nets or safety harnesses.
This section is therefore designed to give standards, and where applicable, guidance on the provision
and use of the above.
It covers the standard types of scaffold structures and ladder access, together with standards and
guidance on mobile work platforms and use of safety nets.

Ministerial Order No. (32) Year 1982 Article (19) B.

ADM/H&S/Pt 2 01 March 2005 SCAFFOLDING - LADDERS - CRADLES - SAFETY NETS 1 of 33
PART TWO
29.1 PROVISION OF SCAFFOLDS, ETC.

Where work cannot be safely done from the ground or from part of a building or other
permanent structure, there shall be provided, placed and kept in position for use, properly
maintained either scaffolds, or where appropriate, ladders or other means of support, all of
which shall be sufficient and suitable for the purpose.
Where a scaffold, or part of a scaffold is to be used by or on behalf of an employer other

than the employer for whose workmen it was first erected, the first mentioned employer
shall, before such use:
• take express steps, either personally or by a competent agent, satisfy himself that the
scaffold or part there of is stable,
• that the materials used in its construction are sound, and that the standards as laid down
in this manual are in adhered to.
29.2 SUPERVISION OF WORK AND INSPECTION OF MATERIAL

• no scaffold shall be erected or be substantially added to, altered or dismantled except
under the immediate supervision of a competent scaffolder possessing adequate
experience of such works.
• a competent person shall inspect all materials for any scaffold on each occasion before
being taken into use. Contractors shall appoint such competent persons and shall
arrange for their training as necessary.
29.3 CARE AND MAINTENANCE OF SCAFFOLDING

• the maintenance of all scaffolding materials is clearly very important. While they are not
in use, the materials should be properly stored.
• when tubes are supplied with a protective coating, care should be taken to protect the
coating so that the tubes do not deteriorate excessively.
• unprotected steel should not be used where the atmosphere is particularly corrosive.
Tubes which appear to be excessively corroded should be examined by a specialist
before they are used.
• tube straightening should only be carried out by specialists as there is a tendency

for work hardening and consequent brittleness to occur during bending and
straightening operations.
• split or damaged sections of tube should be cut out and discarded, all cuts being at
right angles to the tube axis.

PART TWO
• couplers and fittings should be examined before use. Moving parts should be free
from wear or damage and be well lubricated. Particular attention should be paid to
threads.
• scaffold boards should be inspected after each job and any showing signs of abuse,
decay or excessive warping should be discarded. End hoops, or bands, should be
replaced or re-fixed as necessary.
• where boards have split ends which do not exceed the limits specified in BS 2482,
nail plates may be used. No other repairs should be carried out and boards should not
be painted or treated in any way which could conceal defects.
• boards should be cleaned on return from site, then stacked flat, and raised from the
ground on cross battens.
• damaged boards are hazardous and therefore all forms of abuse must be avoided. Do not
use them as a base on which to stack materials, or as ramps at kerbs, or as temporary
roadways. Scaffold boards should not be used as makeshift crawling boards or for
shuttering or propping up door frames.
• boards or other components should never be dropped or thrown down from a height. The
impact resulting from this form of abuse may result in unseen but potentially lethal
damage.
29.4 RUBBISH CHUTES

Rubbish chutes are frequently attached to scaffolds and erected by scaffolding
contractors. It is essential that the design of a scaffold take account of the additional
loads which may be imposed in the normal use of a rubbish chute, by the additional wind
loading and by further loads in the event of a blockage. Further guidance on the
installation and use of rubbish chutes is given in (see Pt 2 Section 33) - Refurbishment
29.5 DISMANTLING
Normal procedure is to dismantle in the reverse order of erection - last up, first down, at
least in the case of more complicated scaffolds, get the same team that put it up to take it
down
• all dismantling activities should be carried out progressively, reversing the erection
process. Therefore scaffolders should work along the elevation removing the
guardrail(s) and then lowering the boards from that section to the lift below. Scaffolders

PART TWO
MUST NOT remove the guardrail(s) from the whole elevation before lowering the
boards.
• it may be necessary to insert additional ties and in any case no ties or braces should be
removed in advance of general dismantling.
• checks should be carried out as to the stability of the structure, and platforms should be
cleared of all materials and debris before dismantling begins.
• once a scaffold is partly dismantled, all possible access to the dismantled sections
should be barred and a warning sign prominently displayed.
• all materials must be lowered carefully; surplus boards and fittings must be removed
from the platforms as the work progresses and, particularly, at the end of each day.
• tube fittings should be stacked at ground level unless the first lift has been specially
designed to support the extra loading.
• the public must be protected at all times. If necessary, barriers should be erected round
the area where scaffolding is being dismantled.
29.6 CONSTRUCTION AND MATERIAL

29.6.1 general
• every scaffold and every part thereof shall be of good construction, suitable and sound
material and of adequate strength for the purpose for which it is used satisfying
recognised international standards.
• sufficient material shall be provided for, and shall be used in the construction of scaffolds.
• scaffold construction should take into consideration the type of work, load, height, and
also weather conditions.
• timber used for scaffold shall be of suitable quality, be in good condition and have the
bark completely stripped off.
• timber used for scaffolds, trestles, ladders and folding stepladders shall not be so painted
or treated that defects cannot be easily seen.
• metal parts used for scaffolds shall be of good quality, be in good condition and free from
corrosion or other patent defect likely to affect their strength.
• no defective material or defective part shall be used for a scaffold.
• all material and parts of scaffolds shall, when not in use, be kept in good condition and
kept apart from any materials or parts unsuitable for scaffolds.

PART TWO
• every scaffold shall be properly maintained/kept clean and every part shall be kept so
fixed, secured, or placed in position as to prevent, so far as is reasonably practicable,
accidental displacement.
29.6.2 partly erected or dismantled scaffolds

No scaffold or part of a scaffold shall be partly
erected or dismantled and remain in such a
condition that it is capable of being used unless
the scaffold complies with the following:
• a prominent warning notice indicating that

the scaffold, or any part thereof is not to be
used, positioned at or near any point of
access; (see Fig.1)
or, Fig.1 - Partly erected scaffold correctly

signed and blocked off
• access to the scaffold or any part thereof is,
as far as is reasonably practicable, effectively
blocked off.
29.6.3 standards and uprights

Should be vertical and spaced
closely enough for the intended
use of the scaffold.
base plates and timber sole

plates
Must be used to distribute the load

from the standard/upright over a
wider area, as well as to offset
possible local subsidence. (see
Fig.2 - Showing Timber Sole Plates and Base plates
Fig.2)
29.6.4 ledgers and transoms

• ledgers must be level and fixed to standards with right - angle couplers.
• In normal use, transoms should be spaced so that the spans of scaffold boards should
not be greater than:
∗ 32mm boards: 1.0m

PART TWO
• transoms must be firmly fixed to ledgers or standards and be so spaced according to the
expected load and thickness of the boards to be used on the platform. (see Fig.3)
Fig.3 -
LEDGERS: TRANSOMS:
Centres not to exceed 2.0 m, Maximum spacing 1.5 m.
but base lift may be a maximum of 2.7 m
29.7 LADDERS USED IN SCAFFOLDS

29.7.1 used as uprights
• to be strong enough for the load
• equally supported on each stile
• secured to prevent slipping
Note: Ladders are only to be used to support a scaffold platform when the work is light e.g.
painting.
29.7.2 provided for access

• top be supported by the stiles resting on a firm, even base.
• stiles should be securely lashed or;
• stairs must be kept free from all obstructions - materials and rubbish, and if they become
slippery, should be cleaned or sanded as quickly as possible
• fixed with a ladder clamp to the ledger or transom near the top to prevent slipping both
sideways and outwards

PART TWO
• set at a working angle of 75o to the

horizontal, i.e. one foot out for every four
foot of height, and extend at least 1.05m (5
rungs) above platform level to provide
adequate handhold at all stepping-off points.
(see Fig.4)
• rungs on a stepping-off points should be on

a level with the working platform.
• ladders required to rise more than 9m of

vertical height should have an intermediate
landing place provided.
• stairs must be provided with hand rails, and

where persons can fall more than 2m. There
must be guard-rails fitted at a height of 910
mm to 1.15 m above the centre of each step,
and a lower guard rail fitted since toe-boards
cannot be fitted.
Note: ladders should be either removed or boarded to prevent unauthorised access after
working hours.
Fig.4 - This ladder is securely tied to prevent

slipping. It is correctly angled (one out
for every four up) and extends above the
working platform to allow people to get
on and off safely.

PART TWO
29.8 LAYOUT OF A FULL INDEPENDENT SCAFFOLD
Fig. 5.
No.1 GIN WHEEL – To be secured on load bearing couplers S.W.L. Clearly marked. load not to exceed 50 KGS.
No.2 GUARD RAIL – Minimum height of 910mm on all structures over 2.00m high and secured on inside of standards.
A second lower guard rail or higher toe board should be provided to limit gap to 470mm.
No.3 TOE BOARDS - Min. height 150mm fixed on all structures.
No.4 BOARDING - To be close boarded and end butted throughout.
No.5 TRANSOMS – Maximun spacing 1.5m.
No.6 TARPAULINS – To be fixed only to structures designed for their use.
No.7 STANDARDS. – Centres dependent upon duty use.
No 8 LEDGERS – Centres not to exceed 2m, but base lift may be up to 2.7m max.
No.9 TIES – Hook, Lip, physical reveal etc. to be considered individually, and B.S. requirements observed.
No.10 LEDGER JOINTS – Not more than 1/3 into a bay and be staggered throughout i.e. adjacent bays or lifts.
No.11 STANDARD JOINTS – Must not occur at same height.
No.12 STANDARD/LEDGERS – Fixed with right angle couplers.
No.13 BRACING – Ledger, Zig Zag, Dog Leg, always secured on load bearing couplers at alternate pairs of
standards. Face, Façade, Longitudinal, Wind, 45o Angle over full structure height at 30m centres
secured with load bearing couplers and joined end with sleeves.
No.14 BASEPLATES – Generally below standards, and 150mm x 150mm size.
No.15 SOLE PLATES – Use in prescribed circumstances and no smaller than 1,000cm2 beneath one standard.

PART TWO
29.9 STABILITY OF SCAFFOLDS

Every scaffold shall:-
• be securely supported or suspended

• be rigidly connected to the building or structure
• where necessary, be sufficiently and properly strutted or braced to prevent collapse
(see Fig.6)
• be securely tied, or otherwise supported.
Reveal ties only provides a reliable support when a

reveal pin with a threaded wedge is wound securely into
position.
Viewed from
inside
Eyebolts fixed into the structure can

provide a secure tie – they are Through ties – ties which pass
Standards can be prevented from particularly useful when there are no through openings in the
sinking into soft ground by base openings. They are also useful when structure and are connected to
plates positioned on boards. window opening cannot be left open for an inner tube supported within
security reasons. the structure – provide a
secure tie.
Fig. 6 - Showing the requirement for reveal ties – through ties – fixing of eyebolts and position of base plates in
order to ensure stability of scaffold.

PART TWO
29.10 WALKWAYS, GUARD RAILS AND TOE BOARDS

29.10.1 walkways
Every board or plank forming part of working platform, gangway or run shall be:-
• strong enough for the intended work and not be less than Fig.7
200mm wide if 50mm thick or less, and not less than 150mm
wide if more than 50mm thick.
• board ends must not overlap their supports by more than

four times the thickness of the boards, unless they have
been secured against tipping. (see Fig.7)
• tripping hazards must be minimised by the fitting of bevelled

pieces wherever, of necessity, boards overlap or have Fig.7 - Board ends to overlap
their supports by not
become uneven must rest firmly on their supports, unless
more than 3 times
strong enough to have no excessive sag when supported board thickness
only by two.
29.10.2 width of walkways

Width of working platforms more than 2m high, must be:-
• 600mm wide (3 boards) when used for persons only and not for materials.
• 800mm wide (4 boards) when used for persons and for the deposit of materials, though
there must be a 430mm passage left for persons clear of materials. This passage must
be increased to 600mm if barrows are to be used.
• 1.05m wide (5 boards) if used to carry a trestle or any other higher platform, and 1.30m
wide (6 boards) if used by masons.
Note: 430mm wide (2 boards) platforms are, however permitted on ladders scaffolds, folding
trestles scaffolds in the vicinity of a roof and suspended scaffolds, when work is light
and of short duration.
29.10.3 toe boards and guard rails

• guard rails and toe boards are • the distance between the top of the toe
required at the outside of and ends of board and the underside of the guardrail
all working platforms from which men must not be more than 765mm.
and materials can fall more than 2m.
• where materials need to be stored,
(see Fig.8)
additional boards may be necessary to
• toe boards and guards rails must be stop materials falling, or it may be
fitted on the inside of standards to advisable to suspend wire mesh frames
prevent outward movement. from guardrail to toeboard to effect
complete closure. (see Fig.9)

PART TWO
• toe boards must rise at least 150mm above the working platform.
• guard rails must not be less than 910mm, nor more than 1.15mm above the working
platform.
• if guard rails and toe boards are removed to permit passage of men and materials, they
must be replaced as soon as possible afterwards.910mm, nor more than 1.15mm above
the working platform.
Fig.8 - Remember: Protection is also required at Fig. 9 – Brickguards should be positioned

edges of excavations and where people can so they are prevented from moving
fall into water. outwards by the toe board.
29.10.4 moving the working platform

Careful attention must be given to moving all boards from lift to lift, otherwise a well-
designed and prepared deck progressively becomes an incomplete and unsafe platform.
29.10.5 landing places

Landing places should be provided at each 9m of height and be fitted with both toe boards
and guard rails. All openings through which ladders and staircases pass should be as small
as possible and should not exceed 500mm in width.

PART TWO
29.11 SCAFFOLD TOWERS

Tower scaffolds are normally used by painters and others who need to work from a
lightweight structure that can be easily moved from place to place. When mounted on
wheels, they are known as mobile towers.
Towers may be made from normal tubes or fittings, but are frequently constructed from
proprietary components.
The following general standards apply to both types :
29.11.1 foundation
• erected and used on firm ground.
• static towers should have metal base plates.
• mobile towers must be used only on hard, level surfaces and fitted with wheels or castors
which should not be less than 125 mm in diameter.
• castors or wheels should be locked into the base of standards and be fitted with brakes
which cannot accidentally be released.
29.11.2 stability
Manufacturers recommendations will specify either the maximum height to which a tower
should be erected, or the maximum height to least base ratio for free standing towers. In
each case, the height of a tower is that to platform level.
For all towers, recommendations for maximum height to least base ratio are normally:-
Internal towers: 3.5-1 External towers: 3-1

Stabilisers, with pad feet or outriggers with castors, may be used to increase the effective
base size as illustrated in Fig.10.
Towers should be positioned to make the effective least base dimension as large as
possible.
29.11.3 working platforms

• fully boarded and at least 600mm wide, or at least 800mm wide when used for the
deposit of materials.
• protected from tipping or sliding by being properly supported by the use of cleats or other
proprietary fittings.
• any trap door or hatch on the platform should be closed when the platform is in use.

PART TWO
29.11.4 guard rails and toe boards

• fitted on all four sides of the platform.
• Toe boards must rise at least 150mm above
platform level
• guardrails must be between 910mm and 1.15m
above platform with the distance between top of
the toe board and guardrail not exceeding
765mm.
29.11.5 access
Access should be provided either by:-
• vertical ladders attached internally to the
narrow side.
• internal inclined ladders, or inclined stairway,
• ladder sections, integral with frame members
should be climbed from the inside as illustrated
in Fig.10.
• rungs should be no more than
300mm apart and the stiles not
more than 480mm apart
• climbing using the horizontal of
end frames should not be
permitted
• the maximum recommended free-
Fig. 10 - Prefabricated tower fitted with an internal
standing height for mobile towers
ladder, fully boarded working platform
is 9.6m, and for static towers, 12m. complete with guard rails and toe boards,
fitted with outriggers to assist stability and
lockable wheels.
29.11.6 precautions during use
• ladder or trestle must never be placed on the top platform to extend the height of the
tower as this will cause instability.
• mobile towers should have their casters turned outwards to provide maximum base
dimension and brakes locked “on” when tower is in use.
• mobile towers should be moved only by pulling or pushing at the base.
• working platform should be clear of persons and materials before towers are moved.
29.11.7 information from suppliers/manufacturers

Manufacturers, suppliers and hirers should provide adequate instructions for their erection,
which must always be available to, and followed by users.

PART TWO
29.12 THROUGH AND REVEAL TIES FOR INDEPENDENT SCAFFOLDS

Means of resisting both inwards and outwards movement of a scaffold is normally achieved
with ties to the facade at a number of points. Whatever type of tie is used, it should be
established that the strength of the building structure is adequate to sustain loads which will
be transferred to it.
The following types of ties are commonly used, depending on anticipated loading and the
nature of the facade.
through tie
Ledger
A tie assembly through a window or Bracing
other opening in wall. Safe working
capacity 6.25 KN. (see Fig.11)
Secured Packing
Tie fixed with right angle coupler

and placed close to the window
reveal
Fig.11 - Showing main safety requirements
when fixing through ties.
reveal tie
The assembly of a reveal tube with wedges or screwed fitting and timber pads, fixed
between opposing faces of an opening in a wall, together with a tie tube. Safe working
capacity (where relying solely on friction) 3.5KN inwards and outwards. Where the reveal
tube is tight behind a load- bearing feature, and there is a butt tube, the safe working
capacity is 6.5KN outwards. (see Fig.12)
Ledger
Bracing
Right Angle Couplers only

to be used
Tie should be attached to the reveal tube

Fig. 12 – Showing the main safety within 150 mm of the end opposite to the
requirements when reveal pin, whether latter is in the vertical
fixing reveal ties. or horizontal position

PART TWO
29.13 TRUSS-OUT SCAFFOLDS

A truss-out scaffold is an independent tied scaffold, constructed in accordance with the
recommendations of BS 5973, projecting from the face of a building or structure. The
supporting structure is known as a truss-out. (see Fig.13)
These scaffolds are generally used where it is impractical, or inadvisable, to build up

from ground level as, for example, for repairs to a parapet wall, or for work on upper
storeys in a tall building on a busy street.
They are entirely dependent upon the building for support.
Therefore:
1) the building itself should be examined to ensure that it is sound enough to take the
stresses involved in anchoring the scaffold and that all ledges and window sills, etc.
are strong enough to bear the load from the rakers,
2) only trained and experienced scaffolders should be permitted to erect truss-out

scaffolds.
Only steel tubes and fittings should be used and these must be specially checked before
use.
29.13.1 structure
• in the very simplest form of truss-out scaffold,
horizontal tubes (needles, protruding through
windows or similar openings), are anchored
within the building to vertical tubes securely
strutted between the ceiling and floor and
bearing hard against the inside wall.
• ledgers are connected with right-angle

couplers to the underside of the needle tubes
to form the base for the working platform.
• the outer ends are supported by rakers bearing

upon the outside wall and a short, vertical tube
is fixed between the foot of the raker and the
inner end of the needle. A ledger is fitted within
the junction of the raker and vertical tube to
which both are connected. Bracing is then
connected as illustrated.
Fig. 13 – Typical truss out independent
tied scaffold
• transoms are then connected to support
boards and a short upright fitted, with a right-angle coupler to the outer end of
transom or needle tube to accommodate toeboard and guardrail.

PART TWO
• these simple truss-outs are only intended for very light work and should certainly not be
loaded with materials.
29.14 CANTILEVER SCAFFOLDS

A Cantilever Scaffold is an independent
tied scaffold constructed in accordance with
BS 5973 but erected on beams cantilevering
out from a building.
• The scaffold should be specially designed

and generally takes the form illustrated in
Fig.14
• The strength of the structure of the building

should be checked to ensure that the
loads applied by the scaffold can be safely
resisted.
• The strictest control should be exercised

by the user on the loads transferred from
cantilever scaffolds. There should be full
liaison between the designer and user on Fig. 14 – Typical cantilever scaffold
this matter and the drawings and
calculations should state the load limitation
clearly.
29.15 BIRDCAGE SCAFFOLDS

Birdcage scaffolds are normally used for interior work in larger buildings like factories, public
halls, cinemas or churches to provide access to ceilings, walls or soffits for light work, such
as painting, plastering and decorating. They have a single working platform. (see Fig.15)
29.15.1 base
• The floor of the building has to carry the full load of the scaffold and the total weight
involved should be distributed as widely as possible.
• Floors must be examined before the scaffold is begun and if there is any doubt as to
whether they are capable of bearing the weight, they should be shored.
• Soleplates, to support the baseplates of standards, are not merely necessary to

distribute the load; they also help to avoid needless damage to flooring.

PART TWO
• Soleplates should always be set at right

angles to beams or joists.
29.15.2 standards
• Standards on baseplates should be set
vertically in rows at not more than 2.50m
centre to centre in each direction.
• Any joints that become necessary in

standards should occur near ledgers and
should be staggered, i.e. joints in adjacent
standards should not occur in the same lift.
• With birdcage scaffolds the floor of the

building has to carry the full weight of the
scaffold and its load Soleplates are therefore
necessary to help distribute the load as widely
as possible - and they should always be set at
Fig. 15 – Typical birdcage scaffold
right angles to beams or joists.
29.15.3 ledgers
• Ledgers, strengthening and keeping the standards in each row equidistant, should be
fixed horizontally to the standards with right angle couplers.
• The first lift should not be more than 2.50m high; subsequent lifts should be at 2m
intervals.
• Joints in ledgers should be staggered (i.e. joints in adjacent ledgers should not occur in
the same bay) and should preferably be made with sleeve couplers. Joints should be
positioned at not more than one third of the distance between two standards.
29.15.4 transoms
• On all lifts except the top, transoms should be set horizontally and fixed to standards
with right angle couplers.
• At working platform level, transoms spaced at not more than 1.50m intervals (assuming
38mm thick boards are used) should be fixed to ledgers with right angle or putlog
couplers. In each bay one transom should not be more than 300mm from the standard.
Intermediate transoms may be removed if not supporting boards, but those next to
standards should be left in place and fixed with right angle couplers.
• Where transoms need to be doubled to allow boards to butt, they should be spaced so
that no board overhangs by more than four times its thickness or by less than 50mm.
• In larger Birdcage Scaffolds transoms may frequently need to have joints in them. Joints
should preferably be made with sleeve couplers and all joints should be staggered.

PART TWO
29.15.5 bracing
• A single lift birdcage is not automatically stable because of its small height. It needs
bracing just as much as a multi lift scaffold. This is normally catered for by the use of
diagonal bracing and, where the birdcage is subject to wind forces, bracing should be
provided with one brace for every six verticals in each line, with the corner panels of
each section being tied in both directions. Bottom connections of the brace must be
attached to the bottoms of the standards by swivels or to a foot tie with right angle
couplers. Foot ties should be provided at a minimum of alternative bays in each
direction.
• For multi-lift birdcages the bracing may take the form of a diagonal tube from top to
bottom, or short tubes between lifts in a zig-zag, or all of one slope in every sixth bay.
29.15.6 tying
• Where the birdcage scaffold is within or against an existing structure, it is often more
satisfactory to use the structure to afford stability. The most satisfactory detail is to
extend the transoms or ledgers to butt the walls, or push/pull fixings may be used. No
vertical should be more than 6 tubes away from a restraint point and at least one should
be provided for every 40m2 of vertical face.
• A mixture of bracing and tying may be used but both directions must be taken into
account for stability.
• The working lift should be tied and butted to the main structure at approximately every
8m.
29.15.7 working platform

• The platform at the top of the scaffold, which only carries 0.75kN/m2, should be closely
boarded and should cover the whole plan area.
• Other platforms may be erected at any lift in the side bays and all requirements are
similar to any normal working platform.
29.15.8.1 toeboards and guardrails

• Guardrails and toeboards are required at every side of all working platforms from which
men and materials can fall more than 2m.
• Toeboards and guardrails should be fitted on the inside of standards to prevent outward
movement.
• Toeboards must rise at least 150mm and the main guardrail must be at least 910mm
above the working platform.
• There must not be an unprotected gap of more than 470mm in height in the means of
protection against a person's fall. An intermediate guardrail or other form of effective
barrier (eg brickguard frames) must therefore also be fitted. Where materials need to be

PART TWO
stored above toeboard height, additional boards, brickguards or similar mesh must be
fitted to prevent the fall of such material.
29.15.9 means of access

• Ladders provided for access purposes must be supported only by the stiles resting on a
firm, even base.
• The stiles should be lashed or clamped to a ledger or transom near the top to prevent
slipping both sideways and outwards.
• Ladders should be set at a working angle of 75° to the horizontal, i.e. one metre out for
every four metres of height and extend sufficiently above platform level to provide
adequate handhold at the stepping-off point. A distance of 1.05m (5 rungs) is
recommended.
• Rungs at stepping-off points should be on a level with the working platform.
• Ladders required to rise more than 9m of vertical height should have an intermediate
landing place provided -properly protected with guardrails, etc. as described above.
Toeboards are not required unless the landing place is used for the storage of
materials.
29.15.10 essential details

• Standards are to be not more than 2.50m centres in each direction.
• Ledgers for the first lift may be fixed at a maximum height of 2.50m and thereafter at 2m
vertical intervals.
• Bracing Single lift - diagonal bracing to every sixth bay in each direction.
• multi-lift- either diagonal bracing from top to bottom or zig-zag bracing in every sixth bay
in each direction.
• tying by transoms or ledgers abutting surrounding structure; the use of push/pull fixings,
or with box ties around columns.
• centres to be at a maximum of 8m. There should be at least one tie for each 40m2 of
vertical surface area.
29.16 SUSPENDED SCAFFOLD (NOT POWER OPERATED)

The following applies to all hand operated suspended scaffolds, together with associated
equipment, whether temporary or permanent :
• all ropes, winches, blocks and tackle must be strong enough and correctly rigged.
• safe anchorage for the suspension must be provided.

PART TWO
• have brakes which apply when the operating lever is released.
• be protected from the weather, falling dirt etc.
• maintained in good condition and platforms prevented from swaying whilst in use.
• steel wire rope must be used for the suspension of all platforms other than lightweight
cradles.
• lightweight cradles may be suspended by fibre ropes and pulley blocks which should not
be more than 3.20m apart. (only ropes recommended by manufacturers should be used).
29.16.1 outriggers
• be long enough and strong enough.
• be horizontal (light cradles are excepted).
• have stops at their outer ends (light cradles excepted).
• be tied down or properly counterweighted at the tail.
• be close enough together to support the rails and scaffolds properly.
29.16.2 counterweights
• be bolted or securely attached to the outriggers.
• be at least three times the overturning movement of load.
29.16.3 platforms
• hung clear of the building or face of the structure.
• be close boarded.
• be at least 430mm wide on lightweight cradles.
• be at least 600mm wide on all other types if used only for workmen, or be at least 800mm
wide if used for workmen and materials.
• never be used to carry another higher platform.
29.16.4 runways
• strong enough and in good condition
• have stops at each end
• be bolted or tied securely to their supports
29.16.5 suspension ropes or chains

must be properly secured, both overhead and to the frame of the platform

PART TWO
29.16.6 winches
• must have at least two full turns of rope on the drum when platform is in its lowest
position
• be marked with the length of rope on the drum
29.17 SLUNG SCAFFOLDS

The following standards apply to all slung scaffold which are suspended at a fixed height,
either below load-bearing projecting brackets or beams, or from the structural members of a
roof or other overhead structure. (see Fig.16)
29.17.1 suspension
• only tested wire ropes, chains or scaffold tubes may be used
• tested wire ropes should be secured to the overhead supports and to the ledgers of the
working platform as close as possible to junctions with transoms by two full round turns,
and the end held with three bulldog grips or woven or tested eye and shackle.
29.17.2 working platform

• ledgers should span suspension points and be set at about 2m centres. (2.5m maximum)
• transoms at 1.50m centres, should rest on the ledgers
• platform should be close boarded and evenly set with each board adequately secured
29.17.3 toe boards and guard rails

• toe boards (150mm above platform level) and guard rails (9110mm to 1.15m above
platform level and 765mm above top of toe boards) will normally be necessary on all
sides of the platform.
• angle couplers and a check coupler used at each end of the hanger.

PART TWO
Guard rail to perimeter of deck,

connected to wire by purpose made
fitting complete with toe boards Max grid of wires
2.5 x 2.5
2 round
turns of
wire and 3
bulldog
grips
2 round turns Alternatives

of wire and 3
bulldog grips
38mm thick boards

Fig.16 - Showing all the safety features required when erecting a suspended scaffold.
29.18SUSPENDED ACCESS EQUIPMENT
29.18.1 general
Suspended access equipment is most
frequently used for painting, glazing,
scaling, cleaning and light repair
work on tall buildings or structures
above busy streets. (see Fig.17)
Fig.17 - Showing a typical unhinged electrically powered

suspended cradle. Cradle is fitted with toe
boards and full guard rails.

PART TWO
All suspended access equipment incorporates the following elements:-
• a cradle or working platform
• suspension ropes and hoisting equipment
• a temporary or permanent roof rig to which the suspension ropes and cradle are
attached.
Suspended access equipment normally falls into two classes:
• those relying on counterweights for stability (usually temporary installed)
• those which are structurally attached to the roof or top part of the building (usually
permanently installed).
29.18.2 installation and rigging

Before installing or rigging suspended access equipment you should ensure that:
• installation is carried out by an experienced cradle erector.
• all equipment is thoroughly examined by a competent person after installation and /or
rigging and before being put into service.
• Particular attention is paid to the safety of those installing or rigging the equipment to
ensure that they are provided with appropriate means of fall prevention or fall arrest.
29.18.3 stability
All equipment relies on some form of roof rig to support the suspended platform. The
cantilevered portion of the roof rig consists of outriggers, which may be metal joists, timber
poles, scaffold tube framework, etc.
The following are the main points to consider when assessing the stability of any suspended
access equipment:
• roof rig should be designed by a competent engineer who should ensure that that the
supporting structure is able to withstand the imposed loading.
• when traversing tracks are used they should be set as nearly horizontal as possible.
• spacing of outriggers should be determined with reference to manufacturer’s

specification and the loads to be carried.
• where counterweights are used as the means of holding down the inboard end of an
outrigger they should be marked with their weight and firmly attached to the outrigger.
(Bags of sand, cement etc. are not appropriate counterweights).
• all outriggers must be strong enough to carry the weight of the suspended platform and
its load, with the appropriate safety factor.

PART TWO
29.18.4.1 working platforms

guard rails and toe boards
Whatever type of working platform is used, toe boards, at least 150mm high, and a main
guard rail at least 910mm above platform level must be fitted. A further guard rail, or other
suitable barrier must also be fitted so that the gap between any guard raill or barrier and toe
board does not exceed 470mm.
decking
Decking of the platform, which must be at least 600mm wide, should have a sound, slip
resistant surface and should be fixed so that it cannot be accidentally displaced. Except to
the extend necessary for drainage, the decking should be close – boarded, or plated.
29.18.5 prevention of falls

In order to prevent the access equipment from falling in the event of a rope failure, the
suspension system should include a secondary rope and fall arrest device.
Where it is not practical to fit a safety rope, each operative should be provided with a
suitable safety harness and lanyard of appropriate length which should be attached to an
independent safety line secured to a safe anchorage of the building.
29.18.6 electrically operated equipment

Equipment should be installed in accordance with the IEE Regulations for Electrical
installations and operated to ensure compliance with the Abu Dhabi Water and Electricity
Departments (ADWEA) Regulations.
The power point should be accessible at all times, and, when work is in progress, there
should be a notice clearly displayed to warn that power must not be switched off.
Power cables should be:
• looped and secured at roof level to prevent any risk of them being pulled out of their
sockets.
• cables and connections should not be allowed to lie in gutters where water can collect.
• pendant cables must be robust and of adequate length to allow for planned movement of
the platform.
Provisions must be made for winching operatives to safety in the event of a power failure.
All control units should be so marked that there is no confusion as to the purpose of various
controls.

PART TWO
29.18.7 operation
Suspended access equipment must be operated strictly in accordance with manufacturers
recommendations. It is recommended that the equipment is checked daily.
Main requirements:
• only trained people should be allowed to work on suspended access equipment.
• supervisors should be experienced and competent in the whole operation.
• working platforms should be raised and lowered with care so thaat they remain as near
horizontal as possible.
• mobile roof rigs should not be moved whilst operatives are on the platform.
• when work is being carried out from the platform , or it is left in place between periods of
work, it should be tied to each end of the building to prevent undue movement.
• a suitable emergeny procedure should be established and understood by all those

involved in the work.
• when left in position unattended, care should be taken to ensure that unauthorised
persons cannot easily reach trailing ends of suspension or safety ropes. Similarly, all
electrical gear should be out of reach and effectively isolated
• suspended access equipment should only be used for the purpose for which it was
intended. It should never be used for transferring persons from place to place.
• platform and equipment should be regularly washed down (taking care to prevent
wetting any electrical equipment).
• Precautions for the protection of the public, such as the provision of ground level bariers,
must always be considered in the use of suspended access equipment

PART TWO
29.19 SUSPENDED SAFETY CHAIR (BOSUN’S CHAIR)

Standard requirements (see Fig.18 & 19)
• must only be used by one operative at a time.
• all operatives using this equipment must be thoroughly trained.
• may be used only where the work is such short duration as to make all other forms of
suspended platforms not reasonably practicable.
• may be suspended on one or more blocks using fibre or wire rope.
• may be manually or mechanically operated.
• swivel connection must be fitted at the suspension point to prevent spinning.
• all ropes should be thoroughly examined before use for sign of wear.
• chair should not contain any loose material.
• in use, fall rope should always be maintained under, or around the cleat to act as a break.
• loading calculations should be based on a SWL of 115kg.
T O
Securely fixed to
support of adequate
strength.
Hook either
moused or fitted
Single sheave with safety catch
pulley blocks.
C
Chair to
Tying off point B.S. 2830
for handline.
Fig.18 - Showing Safety Factor using counterweight:

The counterweight ( w ) x tail length ( T )
Should be at least four times the projection length
(O) x weight of fully loaded chair ( C ).
Fig.19 - Showing Bosuns Chair and fittings meets all

the requirements of B.S. 2830.
Chair size should be:-
• between 450mm and 610mm wide
• not less than 225mm deep
• have a back not less than 250mm high
above seat.

PART TWO
29.20 SAFETY NETS

Safety nets should be erected as close as possible to the working level, and if on the outside
of the structure, should be higher at the outer edge than at the inner.
Sterling personnel safety
Two main types of safety nets are available net. 17,500 ft. pound test.
100 mm mesh.
personnel nets
100mm mesh. Intended to catch a man

falling from above. (see Fig.20) Material/debris net 3/18” sq
12mm x 19mm Double Layer
Throughout.
Fig.20 - Showing both Man Safety and Debris nets.
material or debris protection nets
Smaller mesh 12mm-19mm, intended to protect those below from falling objects. (see
Fig.20)
29.20.1 general requirements

• size and siting of the net are of
critical importance, the
recommended distance a person
should fall before encountering a net
is 6meters.
• for a fall of 1meter, the net must have

a horizontal projection beyond the
outermost working point of 2.2meters,
while for a fall of 6meters a projection
of 3.2meters is necessary.
• erection of safety nets should be

carried out by qualified persons in
compliance with standards and should
ensure that any supporting framework
can withstand impact or shock
loadings, and the framework itself
does not present a hazard to
personnel who may fall into the net.
(see Fig.21).
Fig. 21 - Showing Typical type of combined debris and
personnel net used during steel erection.

PART TWO
• When erecting nets in the vicinity of electricity lines or overhead power cables, the
appropriate authority should be consulted before work is commenced.
• nets should be securely attached to support

framework with tie cords, hooks rings or
thimbles spaced at a maximum of 750mm. The
actual tie should be at least double the strength
of the net, and if hooks are used, they must
have positive locking of some description. (see
Fig.22)
Fig.22 - Showing Hook with safety catch used to

attach safety net to a suitable support
framework.
• nets can be outrigged on scaffolding provided that the scaffold structure is securely tied
into a building or similar.
• a safe exit from the net must be provided for anyone who falls into it.
29.20.2 markings on safety nets

The safety net should bear a label marked with:-
• name/trade mark to identify the manufacturer.
• normal size of the safety net.
• british /european standard.
• date of manufacture.
• deflection at centre of net during prescribed test.
• maximum distance below the working height at which the net is designed for use.
29.20.3 test certificate

Supplied by the manufacturer, stating:
• type of net
• breaking strength of:
∗ mesh
∗ border cord
∗ under test
• height of drop withstood and deflection at centre when proof net tested.

PART TWO
29.20.4 periodic testing

Safety nets are provided with short lengths of test cord attached, normally eight.
At intervals not exceeding three months one cord should be tested and a record kept. For
net use after two years (ie eight times three months) or if there is any deterioration, advice
should be sought from the manufacturers.
Nets should be inspected weekly for damage, loose ties etc together with the framework and
anchorage points. All such inspections should be recorded.
Test cords must never be used as tie cords.
29.20.5 care and maintenance of nets

care
Care should be taken to reduce to a minimum unnecessary wear and mechanical damage
likely to weaken the net. Materials must not be stacked on it and deliberate jumping onto, or
dropping of objects into nets must be prohibited. The following sources of damage or wear
should be avoided as far as possible.
• dragging over rough surfaces
• contact with sharp edges
• accumulation of debris in the net
• sparks etc from welding and burning operations, hot gases from blow lamps, hot ash from
chimneys or furnaces
• chemical attack
maintenance
Regular inspection is necessary to ensure the nets remain serviceable. The net
manufacturer should be consulted when there is any doubt about the suitability of nets for
use in hazardous conditions, or after any known contamination.
It is necessary to wash nets occasionally and always before storing in order to remove grit
and soot and prevent abrasion. If contaminated by acids or alkalis, nets should be well
washed, preferably by hosing and allowed to dry naturally away from heat. Man-made fibre
nets may be stored wet without loss of strength, but natural fibre nets should always be dried
first.
29.20.6 storage
• wet nets should be dried naturally.
• nets should not be stored in a wet state (risk of rot with natural fibre nets)
• storage cupboards to be well ventilated (nets hung if possible)
• nets should be turned periodically to allow air circulation.
Note: Safety nets are intended to save lives and prevent injury; they are not
receptacles to catch unwanted items.

PART TWO
29.21 MOBILE ELEVATING WORK PLATFORMS (MEWP'S)

Mobile elevating work platforms (MEWP’s) are classified as lifting equipment for lifting
persons. They are designed to provide a temporary working platform which can be easily
moved from one location to another. They are particularly suitable for short duration tasks,
where the use of a ladder would be unsafe or the erection of a scaffolding platform, time
consuming or impracticable in relation to the job to be done. Some units have specialised
applications eg under-bridge work.
There is a number of differing types of MEWP. They can be classified according to:
• the type of carrier or chassis and

• the type of elevating structure
29.21.1 principal types of carrier

road vehicles
Most have hydraulic stabilisers and are stationary when in use. Some small platforms can
operate off locked-out suspension systems allowing low speed travel with the work platform
elevated.
trailers
Designed to be towed on the highway. Usually come with low capacity range. Most have
manually deployed stabilisers of the screw jack type and are stationary when in use.
self propelled
The superstructure is mounted on a purpose-built chassis designed to allow the machine to

be driven at slow speed with the boom and chassis in access use. The machines are
controlled from the working platform (with secondary controls at ground level).
29.21.2 principal machine types

scissor lifts (see Fig.23)
Generally vertical lift only. May be fitted with outriggers, depending on size and height to
which lift extends.
telescopic boom or jib (see Fig.24)
Gives direct straight line approach to the point of work but has a limited ability to clear
obstructions between the vehicle and the point of work.

PART TWO
Fig.23 - scissor lifts Fig.24 - telescopic boom
articulating boom (see Fig.25)
Gives a wide range of reach and height, with platform mobility.
combined telescopic and articulating boom (see Fig.26)
Gives maximum flexibility.
Fig.26 - combined
Fig.25 - articulating boom telescopic &

articulating boom
29.21.3 precautions (all types)

It is essential that the correct type of plant is specified for the intended work and the work
location is inspected for hazards. In particular, overhead electric cables or other obstructions
should be identified. If the working area is traversed by other vehicles or pedestrians,
temporary barriers, cones, etc should be used.

PART TWO
1. If outriggers are fitted, check they can be fully extended in the working area.
2. Check machine is level or can be levelled.
3. Check the ground is firm and will support loadings. Use adequate packing if necessary
under outriggers. Avoid basements, cellars, sewers, drains, manholes, old trenches,
joints in concrete, and cracks.
4. Only trained persons should be allowed to operate a MEWP. Operators should have
received training for the relevant class of machine and, in addition, should receive
familiarisation training for the particular make and model to be operated. Such
familiarisation training is typically provided by plant hire companies when a MEWP is
delivered to site. It does not constitute adequate training in itself.
5. Safety harnesses should be worn at all times by personnel working from the platform.
Harnesses must be attached to purpose-designed anchorage points (if provided) or
other suitable anchorage points as indicated in the manufacturers' instructions. Note that
the top guard-rail of the working platform may not be suitable as an anchorage point.
6. The safe working load must be clearly marked at the base of the machine and on the
working platform. The load specified must not be exceeded. Care needs to be taken to
reduce the build up of debris and material on the platform. Telescopic and articulating
machines are normally designed to carry operators and tools only. Scissor lifts may have
the capability to carry some materials. Manufacturers' instructions must be followed.
7. Persons should not leave the working platform whilst in an elevated position, nor
should materials be transferred.
8. Step ladders or hop-ups must never be used on the working platform to gain extra reach
or height.
9. MEWPs must only be used within the manufacturers recommended wind speeds. This
may necessitate a wind speed indicator being available.
10.If MEWPs are self-propelled, the operator must walk the intended route to identify any
hazards before commencing the operation. Travelling on inclines must only be carried out
within the limits specified by the manufacturer. Most MEWPs have very low gradient
tolerance and are fitted with tilt alarms to warn when the limits are exceeded.
11.MEWPs are fitted with emergency (auxiliary) lowering controls and an emergency stop
switch. Before using a MEWP the operator(s) and another responsible person on site
(who is not working on the platform) must know how to use the emergency controls.
12.On completion of the work, the MEWP should be parked in a designated area. It should
never be left in a raised position. The MEWP should have the engine/ motor switched off
and the key removed.

PART TWO
29.21.4 MEWP operator's daily safety checklist

from ground level
1. Check that manufacturer's handbook is with the machine.
2. Check fuel, water and oil levels and that batteries are fully charged. Ensure batteries are
secure, clean, free from corrosion and electrolyte level is adequate
3. Check the machine starts and that the emergency stop button (engine cut-out) works.
4. Check that tyres are free from significant damage and are inflated to the correct pressure.
Check that wheel nuts are in place and properly tightened.
5. Check structural parts for visible cracks or damage.
6. Check that the hydraulic system is free from leaks and that cables are in good condition.
7. Check that pins and retainers are in position and in good condition.
8. Check that signs identifying the controls, SWL, crush points, etc are in place and
readable.
9. Check that all powered movements for telescoping, raising, lowering and slewing are in
good working order.
10.Check that emergency lowering controls are fully functional. Always refer to
manufacturer's handbook.
from the working platform
1. Check that the platform structure is in good condition, clean and free from grease and
dirt, and that cage door locks are fully functional.
2. Check that decals identifying the controls, SWL, harness anchor points, maximum wind
speeds, etc are in place and readable.
3. Check that all powered movements for telescoping, raising, lowering and slewing are in
good working order.
4. Check that emergency lowering controls are fully functional.
5. Test lights and horn, when fitted.
6. Check that the steering controls function correctly in forward and reverse.
7. Test brakes to ensure that they are working efficiently in forward and reverse.
8. For machines designed to travel while the platform is raised, check that the "drive speed
is restricted when the platform is in the raised position.
NB When carrying out these checks operators must not work under a raised boom or
platform unless movement has been prevented by means of suitable locking devices.

SECTION 30
ERECTION OF STRUCTURES
INTRODUCTION 1
30.1 DESIGN AND PLANNING 2

30.2 SITE CONDITIONS 3
30.3 SPECIFIC SITE ACTIVITIES 4
30.4 STABILITY OF STRUCTURES 8
30.5 ACCESS AND WORKING PLACES 9
30.6 PERMANENT ACCESS 13
30.7 TRAINING AND SUPERVISION 14
ERECTION OF STRUCTURES SAFETY CHECKLIST

(ADM/H&S/CL/2.30/1)
SECTION 30
PART TWO
SECTION 30
ERECTION OF STRUCTURES
INTRODUCTION
The erection of structures can be both difficult and dangerous. Many fatal or serious accidents occur
during the erection process, the principal cause being falls from heights, either from working positions
or whilst gaining access to them. Other accidents occur because of structural instability during
erection and whilst handling, lifting and transporting materials.
This section of the manual, therefore, is designed to give guidance on the correct method of erecting
structures by establishing safe erection procedures and implementing them through effective
management control.

Ministerial Order No. (32) Year 1982 Article (19) B
Ministerial Order No. (32) Year 1982 Article (20)

ADM/H&S/Pt 2 01 March 2005 ERECTION OF STRUCTURES 1 of 14
PART TWO
30.1 DESIGN AND PLANNING

The designer should consider the risks to health and safety during construction,
maintenance and subsequent demolition.
For example, instead of assuming that construction work will be carried out insitu at height, it
would be better if the work was designed to be prefabricated in a factory, cast or assembled
with much greater safety on the ground at the site, and subsequently hoisted into position.
If the work can incorporate safety provisions such as edge protection or access provision, so
much the better. In this way the designer can eliminate some of the risks to health and safety
through the design and perhaps, also contribute positively to the quality of the completed
structure.
It is important to realise that the general term “design” can refer to all stages, from concept
through to main structural design and detailing. This is relevant to design for both permanent
and temporary works.
Planning for safe erection should commence at the initial design stage with designers taking
into account the need for, and the practicality of, safe methods of working during erection.
essential considerations to be assessed at each design stage include:

• stability at all stages of erection of the assembled structure, individually assembled
portions and single components.
• effect of the erection sequence on stability; where this is critical, the sequence should be
stipulated.
• realistic assessment of loadings at all stages of construction.
• provision of safe access and working places.
• ease of connecting components, e.g. by the provision of landing cleats, which allows a
beam to be safely located whilst suspended from a crane, and cut out the need to align
manually by podger.
• safe handling, lifting, storing, stacking and transportation of components, depending on
their size, shape and/or weight.
• for sub-assemblies, it is critical that overall weight and lifting points are identified on
drawings.
Design specifications should incorporate particular requirements and essential information
for the scheme to be planned and erected safely.
30.1.1 method statements

Preparation of a written method statement setting out the proposed erection scheme is an
important part of planning for a safe system of work.
The extent of detail in a method statement will depend upon the size and/or complexity of
the work. Before work commences on site, outline proposals produced at tender stage
should be developed into a method statement.

PART TWO
method statements should include but not be limited to the following:
• a detailed erection scheme.
• should be distributed to all those concerned with supervision of the erection.
• erection monitored to ensure that the planned sequence of operations is not deviated
from in any way.
• be reviewed and updated as necessary so that it remains current.
such information should include:-
• phasing of the work, particularly with that of other affected contractors.
• special requirements relating to the safe erection of the structure should be highlighted
at the pre-contract stage, (e.g. the need for temporary bracing/guying or the use of
mobile access platforms).
• site conditions
• ground conditions
Checklists for the production and checking of method statements relating to steel
erection, pre-cast concrete and timber frame erection are provided at the end of this
section.
30.2 SITE CONDITIONS

30.2.1 ground conditions
An important aid to safe erection is the provision of hard standing ground, suitable for mobile
access equipment and cranes prior to the commencement of erection.
This is particularly helpful for single storey work, when fixing sag bars. Good vehicular
access on to the hard standing ground should also be provided, and ground loadings and
vehicle turning circles must also be taken into account.
preparation and bases
A sound foundation is necessary for each column and should be capable of accepting both a
vertical load and also the additional horizontal thrust which is developed as soon as
temporary props have been removed.
Pre-cast frame columns are usually inserted into sockets cast into the foundation blocks and
consequently are required to be held temporarily in place after alignment. Wedges and
props are used for this purpose until the column has been made secure by grouting. Other
types of pre-cast columns incorporate a steel base plate, similar to the base of a
prefabricated steel column.

PART TWO
30.2.2 hazards and limitations

main points to consider:-
• access to erection areas, with regard to adverse ground conditions likely to contaminate
the erector’s footwear and increase the risk when aloft.
• site hazards and limitations.
• overhead electric power lines. (See Pt 2 section 6) – Overhead and Underground

Services.
• buried services, including underground electric cables, gas or other pipelines.
• restricted access to, and on, the site due to road alignment which may limit the size and
weight of structural members and plant, including cranes.
• restricted space for erection, maneuvering, storage and, if required, for on-site pre-
assembly manufacture of fabrication, low ground bearing capacity which may be due, for
instance, to made-up ground, or existing underground services or structures.
• proximity and condition of other buildings, roads, railways etc., which may affect the
planned method of erection and craneage.
• proximity of the general public to the site.
• activities of other contractors.
• area of the site affected by erection operations should be designed as a restricted area.
• barriers and notices should prohibit entry to non-erection personnel.
• toxic gases, chemicals, fluids or dust emitting from processes on or near the site.
30.3 SPECIFIC SITE ACTIVITIES

30.3.1 holding down bolts
• should be loosened off immediately after compaction of the concrete by rotating them in
their sleeves.
• are generally designed only for the loads experienced by the completed structure, and
are not always suitable far the more severe conditions encountered during early stages of
construction.
• will give rise to the danger of collapse, unless adequate temporary bracing is provided in
the form of props or guys.
• adequate supplies of steel plate packing pieces should be provided for use in levelling
prior to grouting operations once the frame is erected, lined, and levelled.
• essential that they are maintained tight.

PART TWO
30.3.2 cranes/material handling and slinging

Safety during lifting and handling requires careful consideration of all aspects of the methods
and systems to be used.
Factors specifically relating to the use of cranes, which should be co-ordinated, include:
• organising the appropriate number and • appointing a competent person to

type of cranes, bearing in mind that supervise the complete lifting operation,
the choice could be limited if cranes are particularly when tandem lifts are used.
to be hired locally.
• suitable facilities, ladders, etc., must be
• confirming that the designated siting available to ensure a safe place for
positions for cranes can be achieved, persons unloading vehicles.
with suitable hard standings provided. • when loads are of a consistent size, the
• checking for the presence of hazards or provision of a gantry, or a safety
development which may have altered the harness fixing point should be
site since the original plans were made considered.
• all fabricated units should have a distinctive mark identical to the erection drawings, in
order to ensure that structures are correctly assembled.
cranes
Detailed guidance on types of cranes most commonly used in construction processes and
on the safety requirements applicable are given in (see Pt 2 section 19). – Cranes & Hoists
manual handling
Care should be taken when manually handling components. Erectors should be trained in
the principles of manual handling, (see Pt 2 section 8) – Manual Handling.
lifting steel members:
• will normally be slung by the use of chain or flat slings in a conventional manner.
• in the case of concrete units, it is not safe to attach slings to projecting reinforcing steel.
One of a number of types of proprietary lifting devices cast into the concrete, should be
used.
• it is essential that the manufacturer’s instructions regarding installation and loading are
followed
• pre-cast units may have to remain attached to the crane until they are secured by
temporary props. In such cases, proprietary remote control devices, which can be
operated by the crane driver or the fixing contractor’s supervisor when the unit is safely
secured, may be valuable.

PART TWO
slinging
General principles of slinging are covered in Pt 2 section

20 - Lifting Gear.
sling release
Of prime consideration in slinging

structural steel members is the way in
which the slings may be released without Pin
placing the erectors at risk. ..
This may be achieved in a wide variety of

ways, including the use of remote Rubber belt.
release shackles. (see Fig.1)
Operating
ropes.
Fig.1 - Showing a remote release shackle device used

during column erection.
slinging materials
Materials may be slung in cradles, e.g. purlins in

purlin cages, which avoid the necessity of the
erectors manhandling purlins whilst moving along
the truss, portal, etc. (see Fig.2)
Consideration must also be given to the stability

and security of materials being lifted in case of
accidental impact of a suspended load with part of
the works, for example, when threading a load into
a partially completed steel frame.
Fig.2 - Type of Purlin Cage commonly used to

transport steel trusses safely,

PART TWO
30.3.3 material storage

Areas should be allocated for stacking and storing components and should be clearly
marked on site plans.
these areas should be:
• clear of obstructions, reasonably level, and of adequate size,
• on ground which is capable of withstanding loads imposed by the stored materials and
plant used in the area (investigation should include a check for the presence of
underground services in order to prevent damage from imposed loads),
• sited away from hazards such as overhead power lines,
• arranged so that clear access and lines of sight are provided and maintained between
stacks of components.
• provided with artificial lighting and weather protection, where appropriate, to aid handling.
• if on site manufacture fabrication modification or repair work is to be undertaken,

additional areas may be needed with facilities similar to those of storage areas.
stacking
Matters which should be taken into account when stacking or de stacking components
include:
• methods of stacking which ensure that no risk of collapse or sliding is induced.
• adequate supply of timbers, battens and wedges, which should be of suitable size and
strength.
• safe access for slinging purposes.
• components used to aid erection should be stacked on suitable timber battens and
packing pieces.
• not brought into contact with the ground, thereby preventing mud deposits which could
present a slipping hazard,
• prevent damage to projections, such as nibs and brackets.
• slings can be positioned easily around components.
• remote release shackle used during column erection.

PART TWO
Advantages can be gained in using

specialised devices such as mobile or
transportable storage racks or platforms,
particularly for small or common
components Such racks or platforms
should be designed to be stable when
some, or all of the components are
removed. They should be clearly marked
with a safe working load and self weight.
(see Fig.3)
Fig.3 - Example of a transportable storage rack.
30.4 STABILITY OF STRUCTURES

The requirement for stability at all stages of erection should be clearly understood by all
persons dealing with the erection work.
Particular care should be taken to verify stability in the following circumstances:
• temporary cessation of work.
• when fastenings may be incomplete, for example, in course of lining up and adjustment
of level,
• high wind or when high winds are expected.
• when the stage of completion of permanent work (for example brickwork, concrete, etc)
on which the stability depends is inadequate, or when the permanent work has not
developed adequate strength.
• when the structure or parts of it may be subject to construction loads for example - due
to impact, stacking of parts, and lifting or freeing of components which may have
become inadvertently wedged in position.
temporary supports (when specified) should be:
• of adequate design and construction as identified on drawings or on the method

statement,
• used in the way intended. Improvised supports should not be employed.
anchor points:
• should be such that they are able to resist any force likely to be imposed upon them.
• any movement of an anchor should be reported immediately and prompt remedial action
taken.

PART TWO
• steel cables for anchorage purposes should not enter the ground unless suitably
protected.
• fastening of guy lines to anchorages in the ground should be carried out using chains or
steel bars or sections.
• screw type anchors should be used in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
30.5 ACCESS AND WORKING PLACES

The necessity to work at height can be reduced by the assembly of all possible items at
ground level and the erection of units into position in a semi-complete state. Items which
lend themselves to this application include vertical glazing or cladding rails, together with ties
and struts.
Various means of temporary access may be used in the erection of structures, and type of
equipment to be used must be carefully considered in the preparation of the method
statement.
platforms
they may be used in an inclined position for general access to heights, but they require a
firm base and must always be securely fixed; means of fixing, e.g. lanyards, should be
permanently attached to ladders.
ladders
in concrete structures, ladder fixings may be incorporated into the columns. Ladders may
also be used vertically for access up columns; they should be fixed to columns prior to
erection and must be capable of safe removal after erection. All ladders must be provided
with safe landing places no more than 9m apart
General guidance on the safe use of ladders is given in (see Pt 2 section 19). – Scaffolding
and Working Platforms.
holes in floors
where any hole is left in a floor through which a person may fall, it must be provided with
guardrails and toe boards or; alternatively, it must be covered over. Such covers must be
strong enough for the purpose and either be secured in position or marked to indicate its
purpose.

PART TWO
30.5.1 mobile elevating work platforms (MEWP’s)

The above are now the preferred type of access
and working place provided for the majority of
work at height, especially in steel erection.
A firm hard standing from which to work is

required, and erection must be carefully planned
so that previously erected parts of the structure do
not hinder the operation of the work platform. (see
Fig.4 and in Pt 2 section 29) - Scaffolding
Fig.4 - Showing Type of Mobile elevating

working platform (Commonly known
as Cherry Picker)
30.5.2 man-riding skips and suspended cradles

Where it is not possible to use MEWPs, or
other equipment specifically designed for
lifting persons, then man-riding skips or
cradles suspended from cranes may be
used, as shown in Fig.5.
Fig.5 - Type of 2 men Power operated

Suspended Cradle complete with
guard rails and dead mans operating
handles.
30.5.3 scaffolds
tower
used for making low level connection where the cost of powered plant would be prohibitive.
Further details on tower scaffolds can be found in (see Pt 2 Section 29).- Scaffolding
independent scaffolds
may be used in timber frame or panel construction, or for the construction of ladder access
towers.
Further details on independent scaffolds and safety requirements can be found in (see Pt 2
Section 29). - Scaffolding.

PART TWO
purpose-built platforms
these are properly designed and fabricated

platforms which are used where a large number
of connections require fixing. They can be fixed
to components, e.g. the top of a column prior to
erection to avoid construction at height, and
can be removed for re-use at a new location.
Example of a close-boarded working platform,
fitted to the column at ground level before
erection is shown in Fig. 6. Fig.6 - Example of a close-boarded working
platform, fitted to column at ground level
before erection process.
30.5.4 access along beams
If it is necessary for persons to gain regular access along beams from which they can fall,
e.g. the top of a concrete beam, or the top or lower flange of a steel beam, the walkway must
be at least 430mm wide, or 600mm wide, if used for the passage of materials. Guardrail, at
least 910mm above the walkway, and toe boards, together with an intermediate guardrail or
other effective barrier must also be provided so that there is not an unprotected gap of more
than 470mm in height. This form of protection should, where possible, be fitted before
erection.
Where the above requirements are not met, access of short duration only may be
permitted by the following means:-
beam straddling
Beam “straddling” is acceptable provided the size

of the beam is suitable and supervisors are
satisfied that the method is safe. In such cases,
the following conditions must be met:-
• person must be able to place each foot firmly

on the bottom flange and have both hands
gripping each side of the top flange as they
move along.
• upper and lower beam surfaces must be free of
obstruction so as to allow the above movement.
• person must be wearing a safety harness Fig.7 - Showing Steel Erector straddling beam
wearing a full safety harness attached to
attached to a secure anchorage. (see Fig. 7) an overhead running line.
walking the bottom flange
where straddling is not possible, the practice of side walking the beam, with both hands on
the top flange and both feet on the same side of the bottom flange, is permitted provided
that:-

PART TWO
• flanges provide secure handhold and foothold, and
• the top flange is no higher than the person’s waist.
• the person must be wearing a safety harness attached to a secure anchorage.
30.5.5 safety nets and harnesses

Occasions will arise where recourse must be made to the use of safety nets and safety
harnesses.
Due to the lack of fixing points and the very short duration of work, such as bolting up, the
use of safety nets is often impracticable. However, where possible, brackets for the fixing of
such nets should be fixed to the beam prior to lifting, and provision mode for persons to gain
access to the fixing points and to handle the net.
Further details the use and safe installation of safety nets can be found in (see Pt 2 Section
29) –Scaffolding (Safety Nets).
safety harnesses
Where the use of safety nets is impracticable, safety

harnesses must be used, but it must be stressed
that the use of personal protection in the form of
harnesses must be considered a last resort.
The provision of a fixing to which the safety harness is

attached is of prime importance.
Where the fixing is to provide for movement along a

beam, it should be such that the harness does not
have to be released to allow such movement. Fig.8 - Example of a “Manuclave” type
Girder Grip anchorage device.
This can be achieved, for example, by the use of a taut steel wire rope set to run along the
beam. It should be stressed that any anchorage must be capable of withstanding the
likely impact loads. Where movement along a beam is necessary, then a fixing for a safety
harness may be achieved by the provision of additional holes at specific points on the steel
and the use of a proprietary device such as a girder grip. (see Fig.8)

PART TWO
Alternatively, the lanyard of the safety harness may be

wrapped around a structural member and clipped on to
itself, care being taken that it would not be damaged by
any sharp edge in the event of a fall. Such damage may be
prevented by providing a sheath around the lanyard. If
structural members are too large for the lanyard to be
wrapped around, steel wire rape of at least 8mm diameter
may be wrapped around a member to provide a fixing for
the harness. (see Fig.9)
Fig.9 - Lanyard wrapped around a steel column and

attached with a “Caribenna” type hook.
self retractable fall arrestors
Consideration should be given to the use of a self

retractable fall arrester attached to a safety harness.
(see Fig.10)
This is particularly useful where a considerable

vertical movement is necessary.
Harnesses should be to BS EN 361 and the

incorporation of tool frogs and pouches will enhance
their use. If safety nets are used, they should be to
BS EN 263-1.
Fig.10 - Showing Type Further guidance on safety harnesses is given in (see

of fall arrestor Pt 2 section 12)-PPE.
fitted with a 40m.
cable.
30.6 PERMANENT ACCESS

All permanent walkways, ladders and steps should be erected as early as possible to enable
the structure itself to be used for access. Edge protection must be adequate and temporary
guardrails should be fitted if the permanent rails are not available. Once an access route has
been established, gratings and boards should be removed only under a permit-to-work
system.

PART TWO

PART TWO
30.7 TRAINING AND SUPERVISION

An overall training programme should be planned for both riggers and supervisors, and
should include, but not limited to the following:-
• all aspects of rigging and erection methods, lifting equipment, use of tools and plant,
erection of scaffolds and stagings, together with safe working practices fall prevention
and statutory obligations.
• induction training for supervisory staff prior to, and to rigger/ erectors at, the
commencement of the project.
• project planning for structures
• establishment and running of the site organisation.
• procedures for dealing with emergencies and accidents.
• issue and explanation of the company safety policy, procedures and site rules, the
location of emergency telephones, first aid and medical services, and the use of
protective clothing and equipment.

SAFETY CHECKLIST - ERECTION OF STRUCTURES
CHECKLIST TO PRODUCE METHOD STATEMENTS
General
name(s) and address(es) of the contractors involved.
name and address of the site to which the method statement relates.
names of the supervisor / foreman and appointed safely adviser and arrangements for
description of the type of structure to be erected.
details of the personnel to be used and their training / experience.
details of PPE to be provided to personnel.
sequence of operations including starting points where this is critical to stability
Placing/erection of precast concrete

pitching/ Basing.
method of ensuring temporary stability of the assembled structure and components.
provision and maintenance of a safe place of work and means of acces/egress including:
vertical access including mobile elevating work platforms, ladders etc.
description of the work.
details of the personnel to be used and their training! experience.
details of PPE to be provided to personnel.
provision and maintenance of a safe place of work and means of access/egress including:
method statements for placing/erection of precast concrete.
name and address of the contractor involved.
name and address of the site to which the method statement relates.
names of the supervisor/foreman and appointed safety adviser and arrangements for
erection sequence and starting points(s).
method of ensuring temporary stability at all times.
ADM/H&S/CL/2.30/1 01 March 2005 SAFETY CHECKLIST - ERECTION OF STRUCTURES 1 of 1

SECTION 31
DEMOLITION
INTRODUCTION 1
31.1 TENDERING 2
31.2 DEMOLITION SURVEY 2
31.3 PREFERRED WORK METHOD 3
31.4 PRE-CONTRACT ACTIVITY AND PRECAUTIONS 3
31.5 SEQUENCE OF DEMOLITION 5
31.6 DEMOLITION HAZARDS 6
31.7 DEMOLITION TECHNIQUES 8
31.8 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR SPECIAL STRUCTURES 13
31.9 TRAINING AND COMPETENCE 14
CHECKLIST FOR DEMOLITION METHOD STATEMENTS

(ADM/H&S/CL/2.31/1)
SECTION 31
PART TWO
SECTION 31
DEMOLITION
INTRODUCTION
Demolition can not only be one of the most dramatic operations in the building/construction industry, it
can also, by its very nature, be one of the most dangerous.
Demolition work varies very widely from the controlled collapse of large structures from using
explosives, mechanical plant and even down to hand demolition of walls.
Demolition operations must only be carried out under the immediate supervision of a foreman with
personal experience of the work, or, by men who have the necessary experience and training on what
safe methods to adopt.
Ministerial Order No. (32) Year 1982 Article (19)

ADM/H&S/Pt 2 01 March 2005 DEMOLITION 1 of 14
PART TWO
31.1 TENDERING
31.1.1 provision of information
The client has duties to provide information, where necessary, after making reasonable
enquiries, which will enable them to ensure the preparation of the initial health and safety
plan. This information could include details of the construction of buildings, plant in the
structure and known hazards such as any contamination of the structure, plant, or land by
current or previous use.
The health and safety plan should include sufficient information on which demolition
contractors may base their tenders.
31.2 DEMOLITION SURVEY

Prospective contractors must ensure that the information with which they are provided with is
sufficiently detailed to allow identification of any structural problems, and the risks associated
with any flammable or hazardous substance.
the survey should take into account:
• presence of adjoining or adjacent • need for temporary works or shoring,

properties, e.g. hospitals, where noise, dust
• confined spaces, such as old tanks
or vibration might restrict the method of
or process vessels,
demolition,
• type of structure and its key elements, • overhead or underground services,
• condition of structural members and the • health hazards, such as lead dust or
contribution of floors, roofs, walls, etc. paint, residues from previous
processes, or contaminated land etc.
• suitable access for the proposed method of
demolition and vehicle access for the
removal of waste.

PART TWO
31.3 PREFERRED METHOD OF WORK

Demolition should, when possible, involve methods which make it unnecessary for persons
to work at heights. If this cannot be achieved the following methods should be considered:-
• deliberate controlled collapse, which minimises work at heights and limits exposure to
such danger.
• use of a balling machine, heavy duty grab, pusher arm or shears.
• when work cannot be safely carried out from part of the building or structure, working
platforms should be provided.
such platforms can be:-
∗ tube and fittings or proprietary systems.
∗ man-riding skips or mobile power-operated work platforms.
Where it is not practicable to provide such platforms, safety nets or safety harnesses should
be used. Guidance on the provision of working platforms and safety nets is given in Pt 2
Section 29, and safely harnesses in Pt 2 Section 12.
31.4 PRE-CONTRUCTION ACTIVITY AND PRECAUTIONS

Once a demolition contract has been awarded, the following steps and precautions should
be taken before work starts:
31.4.1 method statements
Demolition Contractor to prepare and submit a method statement outlining their proposals for
dealing with the health & safety aspects of the work, with special emphasis on safe working
at heights, and the sequence of demolition.
A general checklist for producing such a method statement is provided at the end of this
section.
31.4.2 notifications
Demolition Contractor may be required to notify utilities such as ADWEA, SPD, ADGAS. etc.
to request for the following information:
• drains and sewers to be sealed to prevent vermin gaining access to the site.(detailed
plans where possible).
• arrangements for the isolation or diversion of overhead or underground services,
• arrangements for temporary supplies for site operations
• location of underground services, (with detailed plans where possible)

PART TWO
31.4.3 construction health and safety plan

The contractor must develop the initial health and safety plan so that it incorporates the
approach to be adopted for managing health and safety during demolition.
31.4.4 protection of the public

Demolition is frequently carried
out in heavily populated areas
and particularly high standards
of site protection, safe systems
of work and effective
supervision are therefore
needed.
It is a requirement that a fence,

not less than 2 metres high be
erected to enclose all
demolition operations. Fence
should not be capable of being
Fig. 1 - Showing a typical of 2 mtr. high fence securely
easily climbed and access weighted with concrete blocks which would be the
gates should be secured minimum required during demolition operations.
outside working hours. (see
Fig.1)
Outside working hours, debris at ground level should be cleared, excavations should be
fenced, vehicles and plant effectively immobilised and electricity and gas supplies isolated
or enclosed and locked.
31.4.5 overhead and underground services

The survey should have identified the possible presence of any services and enquiry’s to
obtain more detailed information and assistance will have been made.
Further guidance on location of services and relevant precautions is given in (see Pt 2

Section 6). – Overhead and Underground Services.
31.4.6 flammable materials and gases
Where existing plant has contained flammable materials, special precautions must be
observed in order to avoid fire or explosion.
The assistance of a competent analyst may be required to identify residues, carry out air
monitoring and assess whether pockets of contamination remain. Any residual flammable
material must be rendered safe by, for example, cleaning, purging or the application of an
inert gas.

PART TWO
Where it is necessary to enter plant for cleaning or assessment purposes, the use of
breathing apparatus may be required, and a strict permit-to-work system should be
employed. (see Pt 2 section 11)
The fittings for any electric lighting used in such circumstances must be suitable for use in an
explosive atmosphere and conform to BS 5345: Electrical apparatus for use in potentially
explosive atmospheres.
31.5 SEQUENCE OF DEMOLITION

The design of a building will normally determine the sequence of demolition. In many cases,
this should be in the reverse order to the erection of the building and this will normally apply
to hand demolition where the required sequence will be established from the design of
individual columns, beams and floors.
In the case of mechanical demolition, the design of steel framed, reinforced concrete and, in
particular, pre-stressed concrete buildings or structures, may also determine the overall
sequence; the design will certainly determine the extent of any pre-weakening that can be
done prior to a deliberate collapse.
A sequence of operations must be established which allows debris to be cleared on a regular

basis, so that floors do not become overloaded and horizontal pressures on the walls is
avoided.
31.5.1 restricted areas and safe distances
Areas affected by each phase of the work, to which access will need to be restricted or made
safe, should be set out in the method statement.
Restrictions and control may be necessary during:-
• the dropping of debris.
• the operation of demolition plant.
• pre weakening activities.
• deliberate collapse or pulling over of buildings.
during debris dropping, the following main points should be observed:
• a radius of 6m, or half the drop height (whichever is the greater), should be used to
determine the restricted area to be kept clear
• a space of 6m minimum width from the face of the building to be demolished should be
allowed for the operation of cranes, grabs, balling machines, pusher arms and similar
equipment.

PART TWO
• If wire rope pulling is used, a distance of three quarters of the exposed length of pull rope
should be allowed an either side of the rope, and also behind the winch or pulling vehicle.
• when tall structures are being felled, a distance of not less than twice the total height
should be allowed along the proposed line of fall to cater for parts coming free in flight, or
bouncing and rolling on impact.
• structures should be felled into clear areas
• on slender structures, a 20 degree arc either side of the line of fall should be clear of
obstructions, and an area of radius not less than twice the total height should be cleared
of persons before the actual felling.
31.6 DEMOLITION HAZARDS

31.6.1 health hazards
Health hazards in demolition arise primarily from substances which are inhaled or ingested,
or which can react with or be absorbed through the skin. Noise and vibration are also
hazardous to health.
In demolition, it may not be practicable to control these hazards by means such as exhaust
ventilation and emphasis should therefore be placed on the following:-
• using processes which do not generate hazardous dust and fumes,
• segregation of workers,
• operating work permit systems to reduce the numbers exposed to risk,
• ensuring that suitable personal protective equipment is provided and used,
• ensuring that airborne hazards do not escape from the site to affect members of the
public.
lead
Lead as a toxic dust or fume arises from cutting and burning steelwork covered with lead
based paint and the handling of old petrol tanks from filling stations.
In demolition, it is essential to identify any lead paint or lead-containing material before

operations begin. If adequate information is not readily available, a sample of the paint or
material should be analysed to determine the lead content.
The cutting of steelwork often has to be carried out within the confines of a building, where
the dust and fume has little chance to disperse and there is risk of a very rapid absorption of
lead, Under these circumstances, exposure should be assessed.
Where information on lead-in-air concentrations from a particular type of work is lacking, air
monitoring should be carried out. Assessment should be made when exposure is likely to be

PART TWO
at a maximum level. Monitoring may not be necessary for work where there is a clear need
for the wearing of respiratory protective equipment but, if other persons are working, or likely
to be in the vicinity, air monitoring may still be needed to ensure that such persons are not
exposed to risk..
Where persons are likely to be exposed to concentrations above the lead-in-air standard,
suitable approved respiratory protective equipment must be provided and used.
Arrangements should be made for such equipment to be cleaned and stored at the end of
each shift, and to be regularly maintained.
asbestos
Asbestos dust will be generated whenever demolition involves work on asbestos in sprayed
coatings, thermal and acoustic insulation materials, fire resistant walls and partitions,
asbestos cement sheets, or flooring materials.
Asbestos insulation or coating should be removed by specialist contractors only, and,
where possible, before any other demolition work is started.
Clients should ensure that contractors have relevant experience and knowledge of the
necessary precautions when dealing with Asbestos.
PCB’s
PCBs (Polychlorinated Biphenyls) are toxic substances which were used as dielectric filler
fluids in electrical transformers and capacitors and are still used in some refrigeration and
heating equipment.
In demolition it is important to identify equipment containing PCBs, either from labels, or by

enquiry’s from manufacturers or former owners. Where equipment is to be removed or
transported, leakage of PCB fluid is always a danger and checks for leakage at welds or
flanges must be made. If equipment is to be dismantled or broken up, it is essential that the
fluid is removed first.
Drainage of PCB fluid must be carried out in an open or well ventilated area and full
protective clothing including respirator and chemical eye protection, must be worn.
Note: Waste PCB fluid must not be disposed of by pouring into drains, on to land, or by
burning other than in a licensed incinerator.

PART TWO
31.6.2 entry into confined spaces

Tanks and other vessels may contain toxic gases and vapours from their previous use, or
residues which produce toxic or flammable vapours if heated, for example during cutting.
Water in a tank may have caused corrosion and a reduction of the level of oxygen in the
tank. It is essential, therefore, that any confined space is ventilated and the atmosphere
tested, before it is entered or any demolition work is permitted.
Entry to and work in confined spaces should be controlled by pre-planned “permit” systems
and backed up by a rescue procedure.
For further information on entry into Confined Spaces, (see Pt 2 section 21).
31.6.3 noise
Demolition plant, such as compressors and concrete breakers, frequently create noise
“levels” in excess of 100dB(A). Jobs likely to expose workers to an 8-hour noise dose above
90 dB(A) should be identified and arrangements made to ensure that ear muffs or plugs are
provided and worn.
Machines, were appropriate, should be marked with a prominent notice to warn that
operators should wear ear protection.
Ear protection must be suitable for the circumstances, supervision and training in its care
and use must be provided and there must be adequate facilities for its maintenance and
storage. Further guidance on Noise is given in Pt 2 section 3.
31.6.4 vibration
Pneumatic drills and breakers are among many hand held tools likely to give rise to vibration
white finger, particularly in cold weather. Keeping warm with waterproof and wind resistant
clothes and gloves, and restricting the time which individual workers operate such tools, can
reduce the risk of serious disability.
Plant and tools should be selected, as far as possible, to minimise the harmful effects of
vibration or jolting motions.
31.7 DEMOLITION TECHNIQUES

Demolition techniques may be categorised as:
• piecemeal demolition, using hand held tools, or machines, to reduce the height of the
building or structure gradually, or
• deliberate controlled collapse, demolition being completed at ground level.

PART TWO
31.7.1 piecemeal demolition by hand
Although only hand-held tools are used in this

technique, lifting appliances may be necessary to
hold larger structural members during cutting and
for lowering severed members and other debris.
Chutes should be used, where practicable, to
discharge debris into a vehicle or hopper. (see
Fig.2)
Parts of floors may be removed to allow the faIl of
debris, but access to those areas should be
effectively barred. Where access cannot be
prevented, guardrails should be fixed sufficiently far
back from the edges of openings to ensure
protection from falling debris.
Asbestos cement sheets should not be dropped or

unnecessarily damaged during hand demolition as
this could cause a health hazard; where possible,
sheets should be unbolted and safely stacked for
lowering to ground level.
Work on roofing sheets should be carried out from a FIG.2 - Example of a type of Rubbish
Chute commonly used in both
working platform, or crawling boards spanning the demolition and building
purlins. In many cases, demolition of asbestos operations.
cement sheeting may be achieved more effectively
by properly controlled machine methods, with a fan
of sprayed water onto the sheeting to control dust
emmission.
work on roofs.
A safe place of work must always be provided for hand demolition; the top of an unprotected
wall is not a safe place of work. Where scaffolding provides a working platform, it should
normally be dismantled progressively as the building is demolished, so that scaffold tubes
do not project mare than 3m above the work. Scaffold towers should not project above the
work more than one lift.
When scaffolding is tied to a building, additional ties may need to be provided at a lower
level before the upper ties are removed as the demolition proceeds. The working platform
should never be more than 6m above the highest row of ties. For further guidance on roof
work see Pt 2 section 32, and for use of scaffolding and mobile towers see Pt 2 section
29.
In all work on roofs, such as the recovery of second-hand tiles and slates, edge protection
must be provided where possible, or safety harnesses used.

PART TWO
steel framed buildings
Each main structural member, including roof trusses, should be supported by crane or
temporary props whilst the ends are unbolted or cut. Care should be taken due to the
possible springing of members when load restraining connections are removed. Structural
members and trusses should be carefully lowered to ground level.
Suitable working platforms, e.g. man-riding skips, must be provided for the cutting and
disconnecting of members at height. Existing structural steelwork is not normally suitable for
use as a working platform. Properly anchored safety harnesses should be used where
necessary.
Timber joists spanning the beams of steel framed buildings may be severed by chain saw.
Where material is allowed to drop to a lower level, the area below should be sealed to
prevent anyone entering.
31.7.2 piecemeal demolition by machine
Roof structures supported on wall plates should normally be demolished to wall plate level by
hand. Where the building to be demolished is attached to another structure, the two
properties should be separated by a minimum of 1m, using hand methods, before machine
demolition begins.
Only the machine operator and a trained banks man should be allowed within the restricted
area of 6m from the part of the building being demolished. The cabs of all machines should
be strong enough to protect the operator against the fall of debris; in particular the
windscreen and any roof light should be of shatterproof material and guarded by a grille of
steel bars or substantial steel mesh.
The following are the main demolition by machine methods:
balling
BaIling is normally carried out using a lattice jib

crane mounted on a drag-line crawler chassis.
The demolition ball, suspended from the lifting
rope and swung by the drag rope, should be fitted
with a steel anti-spin device. Balling is a skilled
operation and should be carried out only by
trained operators under the control of experienced
supervisors.
(see Fig. 3) showing photo of Crane using a

demolition ball, and (Fig.4) showing different types
FIG.3 - Crane fitted with Demolition Ball
of demolition balls used.

PART TWO

• machines must be properly maintained and stand on firm, level ground.
• manufacturers should be consulted to establish any restrictions on the type or length of
jib, or the weight of the ball machines
• jib head should always be at least 3m above the part of the building being demolished,
but should be decreased as the height of the building is reduced.
• length of jib will also be determined by the need to avoid the underside of it striking any
part of the structure and for the angle of the jib not to exceed 60 degrees to the
horizontal, which might cause it to spring back over the cab.
• walls or columns may be demolished by swinging the ball in line with the stationary jib
using the drag rope.
• the ball should not be swung by slewing or derricking the jib.
• minimum effective weight of ball should be selected; a weight of one ton or less is often
adequate, and In order to reduce shock loading, ball may be suspended from a rubber
tyre shackled to the end of the hoist rope; in this case, a restraining chain must also be
fitted to ensure the ball cannot become detached in the event of tyre failure.
Where a crane is to be returned from demolition balling duties to lifting duties, it should first
be subjected to a thorough examination which should include:
• detailed inspection of the parts of the crane which may have been subject to damage or
deterioration during the balling operations.
• ropes and jib sections.
• rated capacity indicators and limiters.
Note: machines with fly jibs or telescopic booms should not be used.
Cylinderical Type Star Shape Type Pear Shape Type
Fig. 4 - Types of Demolition Balls common used for demolition purposes.

PART TWO
impact hammers
Impact hammers may have a track or wheeled mounted chasis with an articulated boom
which can be vibrated by hydraulic or pneumatic power and is fitted and used to walls or
columns in courses not greater than 600mm in depth. Steel reinforcement should be cut
separately as necessary.
hydraulic pusher arm
The hydraulically powered pusher arm, or pole, is normally mounted on a tracked or

wheeled chasis and has a toothed plate or hook for applying horizontal force to brick or
masonary wall. The machine should stand on a firm level base and apply force by a
controlled movement of pusher arm.
shears
Special attachments such as powerful

steel cutting shears of various capacities
can be fitted to certain hydraulic
excavators in place of the dipper arm.
Shears are particularly useful in cold
cutting of steel structures such as roof
trusses, thereby avoiding the need for
burners to work at height in dangerous
positions, and chemical plant where
stringent precaution would be required
for hot cutting work. (see Fig.5)
FIG.5 - Heavy duty Shears fitted to a Tracked Excavator
31.7.3 deliberate controlled collapse

Buildings normally have structural elements designed to safely carry the loading likely to be
imposed.
Prior to a deliberate controlled collapse, after loads such as furnishings, plant and machinery
have been removed, it may be possible to weaken some structural elements and remove
those which have become redundant. This pre weakening must be carefully planned and
take into account the ability of the remaining elements to resist wind or impact loads until the
intended deliberate collapse. The indiscriminate cutting of steel members until the structure
collapses (“Cut and run”), is highly dangerous.
Steel structural elements are normally pre weakened by cutting, wholly or partially, through
the section, with a gas torch or thermic lance. For small sections, a cutting disc may be used.
A variety of different types of cut may be used to suit the planned method of collapse.
Brick or masonry buildings may be pre weakened by cutting rectangular or triangular

openings at predetermined positions around the base, using hand tools, hand-held vibrating
picks or machine-mounted pneumatic hammers. Further weakening can be achieved by

PART TWO
removing selected internal walls and floors where they join external walls.
Reinforced concrete walls may be similarly pre weakened by breaking out the concrete along
the outline of the required opening and cutting away the exposed steel. Selected concrete
columns may be removed completely, or weakened by exposing some of the reinforcing
bars,
31.7.4 overturning / wire rope pulling

Deliberate controlled collapse may also be induced by the application of a horizontal force at
high level. The structure is pulled with wire ropes attached to winches or vehicles, demolition
being achieved by impact on overturning.
Ropes should be attached to the structure before pre weakening is carried out; mobile work
platforms, or other suitable equipment, may be needed to gain access, and be in good
condition and not less than 38mm circumference
When used with winches of sufficient rope capacity and tractive effort, an adequate steel cab
or cage should protect the winch or vehicle operator which should be at a minimum distance
from the building of one and a half times its height, or twice the height where parts of the tap
of the structure may separate.
Unsuccessful attempts to pull over a building or structure may render it unstable or

dangerous to approach, therefore, an alternative method of work must then be used.
Note: Brick or masonry buildings over 21m high should not be demolished by rope pulling.
31.8 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR SPECIAL STRUCTURES

Certain types of structure present particular problems, requiring more detailed research in
selecting a method of work and more specific precautions than those outlined in the
foregoing paragraphs.
Examples of some of these problems are given below:-
prestressed concrete
A pre stressed concrete component has pre compression applied by steel wire, cables or
threaded bars tensioned to counteract the tensile forces induced by the working load.
Special precautions are necessary in demolition as it is dangerous to allow uncontrolled

release of the potential energy stored in the tensile elements.
Demolition of a pre stressed concrete structure should be under the supervision of an

engineer who understands the construction principles and is experienced in the demolition of
more conventional structures.

PART TWO
chimneys
When a chimney is demolished by hand, debris may be dropped down the inside and
cleared at intervals through a narrow opening cut at ground level. Where practicable, a
working platform complying with the requirements in Pt 2 section 29 must be provided and
used.
If provision of such a working platform is not practicable, personal suspension equipment

(i.e. bosun’s chairs or abseiling equipment) must also be provided and used.
31.9 TRAINING AND COMPETENCE

The inherent risks and dangers involved in the demolition industry is well known. It is therefore
of the utmost importance that those who plan and manage the demolition project, together
with those who carry out the demolition work receive adequate training in all aspects of the
work
Training should cover, but not be limited to the following:-
• Relevant Ministerial Orders • Fire
• Accident prevention • Noise
• Personal protection • Oxygen/fuel gas cutting
• Asbestos and lead • Emergency first aid
• Electricity (on site) • Fitting of abrasive wheel

SAFETY CHECKLIST - DEMOLITION
CHECKLIST FOR DEMOLITION METHOD STATEMENTS

Name and address of the demolition contractor.
Names of the supervisor/foreman and appointed safety adviser and details for monitoring the
work.
Description of the works to be carried out.
Details of the personnel to be used and their training/ experience.
Details of PPE to be provided to personnel.
Details of any scaffolding required including name of scaffolding firm, details of Municipality
Licenses required.
Arrangements for statutory inspections
Arrangements for progressive dismantling.
Arrangements for the removal of demolition waste
Assessment of existing services with arrangements for making them safe.
Temporary services available or required.
The sequence, programme and working hours.
The way in which the work will be carried out safely.
How safe access/egress and a safe place of work will be provided for each operation.
Edge protection at stairwells, lift shafts and external floor edges.
Plant and machinery to be used.
Details of any temporary support required.
Arrangements for the protection of the public.
Arrangements for storage/use of LPG and compressed gases.
Assessments of hazardous substances e.g. asbestos, chemicals, lead paint, abandoned

materials etc.
Welfare facilities provided.
Environmental considerations e.g. noise, dust, vibration, crushing plant.
Note
ADM/H&S/CL/2.31/1 01 March 2005 SAFETY CHECKLIST - DEMOLITION 1 of 1

SECTION 32
SAFE WORKING ON ROOFS
INTRODUCTION 1
32.1 ACCESS AND WORKING PLATFORMS 2

32.2 ROOF WORK (GENERAL) 3
32.3 WORKING ON OR NEAR FRAGILE ROOFING MATERIALS 5
32.4 METHOD STATEMENT 5
32.5 ADDITIONAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS REQUIRED 6
32.6 PROTECTION OF THE PUBLIC 6
CHECKLIST FOR PRODUCING METHOD STATEMENT AND WORKING ON

FRAGILE ROOFS
(ADM/HSE/CL/2.32/1)
SECTION 32
PART TWO
SECTION 32
SAFE WORKING ON ROOFS
INTRODUCTION
Working on a roof can be dangerous. Falls account for more deaths and serious injuries in
construction than anything else. Nearly half of them are from or through roofs and frequently involve
fragile materials. Any fall from a roof inevitably involves serious injuries.
The risks are substantial however long or short the work. Many have been killed who only meant to be
on the roof for a few minutes ‘to have a quick look’.
The information in this section is aimed at people who actually carry out roof work or are directly
responsible for managing or supervising it, and sets out key safeguards
falls occur:
• from the edges of roofs
• through gaps or holes in roofs
• through fragile roof materials and roof lights
In addition, many people have been seriously injured by material falling or thrown from roofs.
Accidents occur not only to those building roofs, but also to people maintaining, cleaning, demolishing
and inspecting them.
Any work on a roof is high risk. High safety standards are essential however long or short term the
work is. The nature of the precautions needed may vary from one job to another, but not providing any
safeguards is simply unacceptable.

Ministerial Order No. (32) Year 1982 - Article (7) H

ADM/H&S/Pt 2 01 March 2005 SAFE WORKING ON ROOFS 1 of 6
PART TWO
32.1 ACCESS AND WORKING PLATFORMS

32.1.1 roof edge protection
Where persons or materials are liable to fall more than 2 meters or there are roof edges or
where work is over water, liquid or dangerous materials, edge protection must be provided.
(see Fig.1, 2 & 3) showing typical type of edge protection required for both sloping and flat
roofs.
Guard Rail Gap between rails no

Intermediate Rail more than 470mm.
Max. Gap
Max 910mm. 910mm.
To raise the
Scaffold line of the
Board roof slope
with a min.
height of
150mm.
Fig.1 - Scaffold Supported from

Window Opening.
Fig 2 - Working Platform below the eaves – Dimensions to
be as indicated above.
Counterweight removed and

base plate fitted.
Fig.3 – Flat Roof edge Protection: Proprietary Counterweight System.

This system allows one of the counterweight to be removed, and the base plate raised to enable
work at edge to continue unhindered while guard rail remains in position.

PART TWO
32.1.2 openings in roofs

• all holes in roofs must be guarded or
securely covered. The covering must be of a
suitable material, securely fixed and clearly
marked 'Hole below'. (see Fig.4)
• open joists through which a man could fall

more than 2 meters must be boarded over
and secured to provide safe access to a
Fig.4 - Showing type of cover and
working place. signage used to protect openings
in roofs.
exemptions
Guard rails toe boards and covers may be removed to allow access for men and materials,
but must be replaced as soon as possible. This does not apply to demolition work unless
it is left unattended.
32.2 ROOF WORK (GENERAL)

32.2.1 flat roofs
A roof having a pitch of less than 10 degrees is classed as a flat roof. Safe access to the
roof must be provided and maintained.
If there is no parapet or similar barrier against falling, edge protection must be provided. This
may take the form of standard guard rails and toe board or, providing nobody will approach
the edge of a barrier, set back from the edge.,
Where work on the leading edge is actually in progress, guard rails may be removed or left
off, subject to the requirements that:
• a safe system of working which prevents falls is maintained.
• barriers are erected or re-erected as soon as the work ceases.
32.2.2 sloping roofs

A sloping roof is defined as any roof having a pitch of more than 10 degrees.
Work on a sloping roof with a pitch of more than 30 degrees or between 10 degrees and 30
degrees if slippery, should:
• only be done by those who are physically capable.
• be done using crawling ladders or boards which must be securely fixed to prevent
slipping.

PART TWO
• employ either a suitable catch barrier or platform erected at the eaves, or a two board
430mm wide working platform with guard rails.
Note: this applies to any work on a sloping roof including access and egress to other work
places.
32.2.3 steep roofs

If the steepness of the roof is such as to prevent a secure foothold, a working platform will be
required. Roofs pitched at over 50 degrees should be regarded as 'steep' as should be
shallower slopes if they are slippery (see Figs. 5 & 6) which shows the use of crawling
boards and roof ladders to cater for both sloping and very steep roofs.
Ridge Iron.
Hip Iron.
Fig.5 - Showing roof ladder fitted with wheels–to Fig.6 - Showing ridge and hip irons which should be
facilitate the ladder being placed in of sufficient size so that when in position,
position over roof ridge. they are clear of the ridge and tiles.
32.2.4 curved roofs

Short sections of ladders or crawling boards should be used so that the shape of the roof is
closely followed and only the shortest length of ladder or board is left unsupported at any
point. Sections must be fastened together and securely anchored. On some shaped roofs,
traditional tube and fitting scaffolding may be the only means of following the roof contours.
crawling ladders/boards must:
• be of good construction, strong enough and properly maintained.
• properly supported
• securely fixed to the sloping part of the roof over the ridge. Ridge hooks must not bear
on ridge tiles or capping tiles.
If the spacing of the battens is greater than 400mm and persons could fall through, roof
ladders or crawling boards must be used.

PART TWO
32.3 WORKING ON OR NEAR FRAGILE ROOFING MATERIALS

Fragile roofing materials include glass, plastic, cement sheet and other similar brittle
surfaces.
Substantial - looking roof cladding can be dangerously corroded. Surface coatings or dirt
may conceal the fragile nature of the material, giving an appearance of solidity to glass,
plastic, etc.
When working on or passing across fragile roofing materials, crawling boards must be used
so that the workman's weight is on the board, never on the fragile roof sheeting, various
plastic materials are particularly brittle and shatter without warning. At least two crawling
boards should be used, one to support the workman while the other is moved to a new
position.
The practice of trying to 'walk the line of the bolts' is dangerous and akin to walking a tight
rope. Where walkways are not provided, a safe system of work such as that described
above must be employed.
Work involving the handling of sheeting and cladding requires extra care in windy conditions,
when a sheet may act like a 'sail' - causing the person holding it to lose balance.
32.3.1 walkways
Valleys, parapets, gutters or channels etc. where access is
required, must be provided with suitable guardrails or the
fragile material should be suitably covered to prevent any
possibility of anyone falling through,
32.3.2 warning notices

Must be fixed at all approaches to roofs constructed with
fragile materials. (see Fig.7)
Fig. 7 – Approved
sign for identifying
fragile roofs
32.4 METHOD STATEMENTS

It is always good practice to produce a method statement prior to carrying out any roof work
in order to establish both the type and condition of the roof that you will have to work from,
and the precautions necessary for safe working.
(A general check list for working on roofs, also for producing a method statement for
working on fragile roofs can be found at the end of this section)

PART TWO
32.5 ADDITIONAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS REQUIRED

32.5.1 safety nets
If safety nets are used, make sure that they are properly installed by competent riggers as
close as possible below the roof involved to minimise the distance fallen.
Installing a net does not mean that proper working platforms and edge protection can be
ignored, because the first priority is to stop people falling.
Further details on the provisions of safety nets can be found in (see Pt 2 section 29).-
Scaffolds and Working Platforms.
32.5.2 safety harnesses &safety belts

If harnesses/safety belts are used, make sure that they securely attached to a sufficiently
strong anchorage point and that they are also worn. This requires user discipline and active
management monitoring.
Further details re types of harnesses and belts available can be found in (see Pt 2
Section 12) - PPE, and details regarding safe anchoring points etc. can be found in (see Pt
2 Section 30). –Erection of Structures.
32.5.3 scaffolding & working platforms

In addition to the provision of edge protection for roof work, it will also be necessary to
provide access onto roof via ladders, mobile scaffold platforms or independent type scaffold.
Further details re the safe use of ladders, mobile and independent scaffolds can be found in
(see Pt 2 section 29). – Scaffolds and Working Platforms.
32.6 PROTECTION OF THE PUBLIC

Members of the public must be protected from the hazards of any falling material during roof
work operations. This may entail the provision of brick guards, fans or other similar
precautions.
It may also be necessary to lay sheeting or boarding to prevent material falling through gaps
in the working platform, or between working platform and the building.
Barriers at ground level may also be necessary.

SAFETY CHECKLIST - WORKING ON ROOFS
PREPARING METHOD STATEMENTS FOR WORKING ON BOTH NORMAL AND

FRAGILE ROOFS
Name and address of contractor involved.
Name and address of site to which method statement relates.
Description of fragile materials and their location.
Means of access/egress to/from the roof or other workplace.
Means of protecting fragile materials which persons work near or pass close to.
Arrangement for providing safe access across fragile materials.
Arrangements for protection against falls from the edge of the roof and other workplaces.
Do the roof battens provide safe hand and foot holds? If not, are crawling ladders or boards
provided and used?
Are suitable barriers, guard rails or covers, etc provided where people pass or work near fragile
material such as glass. Plastic and roof lights?
Are people excluded from the area below the roof work? If this is not possible, have additional
precautions been taken to stop debris falling onto them?
Details of any hazardous substances and arrangements for safe working and disposal of waste.
Note:
This checklist is intended to aid the production, and approval of method statements. It is not
an exhaustive list of every possible issue that may need to be addressed for any given task.
ADM/H&S/CL/2.32/1 01 March 2005 SAFETY CHECKLIST - WORKING ON ROOFS 1 of 1

SECTION 33
REFURBISHMENT
INTRODUCTION 1
33.1 PLANNING 2
33.2 PRE TENDER HEALTH AND SAFETY PLAN 2
33.3 STORAGE 3
33.4 WELFARE FACILITIES 3
33.5 ACCESS 3
33.6 SCAFFOLDING AND ROFWORK 4
33.7 TEMPORARY WORKS 4
33.8 WORKING IN PARTIALLY OCCUPIED BUILDINGS
AND ADJACENT TO THE GENERAL PUBLIC 5
33.9 SERVICES 6
33.10 LIFTS 6
33.11 RUBBISH CHUTES 6
SECTION 33
PART TWO
SECTION 33
REFURBISHMENT
INTRODUCTION.
The refurbishment of buildings can be complex whatever the age of the building. In older buildings, all
or part of the building, may be the subject of strict control under Planning Legislation.
Very detailed preparation and planning will be necessary where extensive shoring-up operations are
to be carried out and professional advice from a structural engineer or a surveyor should be obtained
before any structural members are removed.
Temporary supports will invariably be required, or loads transferred to other areas to avoid an
unplanned collapse.
Buildings being refurbished may be located between, or form part of a complex of other buildings
which must not be disturbed. This creates additional problems relating to the space available and the
possibility of nuisance to occupiers. Every effort must be made to establish good working relationships
with existing occupiers and neighbours.
Many more contemporary buildings are now reaching a stage where major refurbishment is
contemplated. This is particularly relevant in the case of commercial buildings where work patterns
have changed and the provision of extensive services is seen as a particular need. Many of these
buildings were speculatively built and little, if any, detailed record of their construction exists. Great
care is therefore needed in planning the work. There are often hidden dangers in their construction
that need to be thoroughly investigated at an early stage.

Ministerial Order No. (32) Year 1982 - Articles 7, 9, 17 & 20

ADM/H&S/Pt 2 01 March 2005 REFURBISHMENT 1 of 6
PART TWO
33.1 PLANNING
The primary rule in planning the refurbishment of old buildings is that the fabric of the
building cannot be assumed to be sound. In addition to the likely differences from modern
construction, it must be realised that maintenance work and previous refurbishment may
have been carried out over the years.
Assumptions should not be made regarding the load bearing elements of the structure and
in particular supporting members e.g. joists, since these may have been replaced in a
completely different format to the original structure. Planning will invariably be much more
complex than is the case with a new construction.
33.2 PRE TENDER HEALTH AND SAFETY PLAN

The owner/client should ensure that as much information as possible about the building and
type of construction is provided to the contractor. This information, together with details of
hazards identified by surveys carried out on behalf of the client (e.g. for asbestos) should be
included in the pre-tender health and safety plan, which the consultant has to ensure, is
prepared. The pre-tender health and safety plan should contain sufficient information to
enable a prospective contractor to be aware of the likely hazards before tendering for the
work.
Work should not start until an in depth survey has been carried out to determine the real
extent of deterioration and other hidden hazards which may not be known at the tender
stage. The building fabric may have been covered by plaster, panelling, floor coverings etc.
The need for further demolition and remedial work due to damp, dry rot, presence of
asbestos, etc. may only become apparent as work progresses. The health and safety plan
will therefore need to be reviewed and updated at each stage of the work after close
consultation between the principal contractor, designers and other contractors. The planning
supervisor must be advised of these changes.
Each aspect of the refurbishment work needs to be carefully planned and detailed method
statements produced where appropriate. It is particularly important that any demolition
should be covered by a method statement which takes into account the integrity of the
remainder of the building, any temporary works required and a checking or monitoring
system for the falsework before demolition takes place.
The health and safety plan should also co-ordinate all aspects of the work in order to
achieve a correct sequence of operations. Plant and equipment must be positioned in its
correct place, especially since space may be limited and access may not be ideal.

PART TWO
33.3 STORAGE
Storage facilities are usually very restricted. However; adequate and proper facilities must be
provided for the storage of items such as highly flammable liquids and LPG which are a
potential fire hazard Preplanning of the storage areas, together with the provision of
appropriate Floor loading notices, is necessary at the start of the contract. Where necessary,
materials should be stored off site and only the minimum quantities called in as required.
Adequate and suitable fire fighting equipment must be provided and supervisors must be
made aware of the dangers of carelessly stored materials or overloaded floors, resulting
from the accumulation of debris or temporary loads.
33.4 WELFARE FACILITIES

It is important that good welfare facilities are provided, even where space is limited. It will
often be necessary to give considerable thought to the provision and siting of these facilities
(see Pt 1 section 6) - Setting Up Site.
33.5 ACCESS
In many situations, there is only limited access to the site, particularly in congested town and
city areas. It is essential, at tendering stage, to investigate the means of access required
during the contract and the provisions to be made for the unloading of materials, plant and
equipment and the removal of rubbish.
In particular the safety of the public, occupiers, and any adjacent occupiers needs to be
considered, also allowance must be made for any fans, hoardings, safety netting or gantries
required.
Safe access from floor to floor is paramount during the course of the works. If the building
has only a single staircase access to upper floors and this is to be replaced or repositioned,
then consideration needs to be given to its provision or repositioning as a first priority.
A ladder access tower should be erected as a temporary measure only. If this cannot be
achieved then a temporary external scaffold staircase should be provided particularly where
the existing staircase is suspect as to strength.
Consideration should also be given to the provision of a passenger/goods hoist where there
are more than three floor levels.

PART TWO
33.6 SCAFFOLDING AND ROOFWORK

Scaffolding requirements are different for refurbishment work. The main structure is already
in existence, so scaffolding for roof works and external repairs and decoration is normally
taken immediately up to roof level, and work is then carried out from the top downwards.
On contracts where major roof works are required, it may be necessary to install a
temporary roof, with or without side sheeting. This decision has to be made at an early
stage, preferably prior to tendering and the scaffold designed to take the roof loads, wind
loads etc. Specialist advice should be sought for all but the simplest of structures.
Further, there are difficulties in tying the scaffold into a possibly unsound structure.
Moveable ties (through reveal, or box ties) rely on the strength of the structure for their
security. Where non-movable ties (e.g. drilled anchors) are to be used in unreliable material,
it is essential that tests are carried out as recommended by the anchor manufacturer.
In order to ensure a sound tie, it may be necessary to connect the front and rear elevations
of scaffold right through the building. Further guidance on ties and scaffolding in general, is
given in (see Pt 2 section 29). – Scaffolding.
33.7 TEMPORARY WORKS

It is always necessary to do a certain amount of cutting of new openings and generally
convert the existing structure. If this is done without careful planning and supervision, a
dangerous situation can easily arise. If the main load bearing walls are to be removed or
radically altered, there will be a need for supporting formwork.
Unlike formwork in most building contracts, the major problem with refurbishing is where to
transmit a load to an adequate support. It is absolutely vital that the foundation aspects are
dealt with as a priority item and completed prior to alterations to the main structure.
It is also essential for each situation to be carefully assessed and all formwork designed by a
competent person. Any underpinning and foundation works must be conducted under the
supervision of an experienced structural engineer; as the imposed loads can be quite
deceptive in older buildings. A temporary works co-ordinator may be essential in this type of
work.
For further information on formwork – (see Pt 2 section 25). – Falsework.

PART TWO
33.8 WORKING IN PARTIALLY OCCUPIED BUILDINGS AND ADJACENT TO

THE GENERAL PUBLIC
Working in partially occupied buildings and adjacent to the general public calls for particular
care, and special precautions need to be taken to protect the occupants and visitors. Their
means of access and escape must always be maintained and additional temporary
measures may be necessary. Measures must also be taken to protect them against falls,
falling materials, dust, vibration, fumes and other hazards.
33.8.1 fire alarm systems

fire alarm system must be maintained, although part of a smoke/heat detection system may
have to be temporarily disconnected when hot work such as burning or welding operations
are carried out; a hot work permit system should be laid down for such work. All planning
should be carried out in close liaison with the building occupier and, where appropriate, the
local fire authority.
33.8.2 inspection of services

the need for services to be inspected before commencement of work is particularly important
when dealing with partially occupied buildings. Arrangements must be made before the
starting date to ensure that services to the occupied section are not attached and that the
power supply is adequate to cope with both the needs of the contractor and the remainder of
the building.
Consideration should be given to fitting residual current earth leakage circuit breakers on
services which may be damaged by contractors’ activity.
During refurbishment it is sometimes necessary to enhance services to meet modern

information technology and environmental requirements. This can entail breaching fire
stopping in services, recesses, ducts and voids where fire can spread rapidly.
Wherever possible, temporary fire stopping should be provided as work proceeds, and at the
end of each day's work. Care should be taken that occupants are not put at risk during such
work.
33.8.3 welfare facilities

it is important to maintain welfare facilities to both sections. For example, if the drainage is to
be renewed, the work must be carried out in such a way as to leave the drainage to the
occupied section still working satisfactorily. The same applies to gas, electricity and water
supplies.
33.8.4 noise
there can also be major problems with noise levels and vibration which affect not only the
workers, but also other persons and their employees during office or opening hours,
depending on the use of the buildings, and the hours being worked. In such cases, planning
needs to be directed towards noise-reduced compressors and other machinery, in order to

PART TWO
minimise the inconvenience.

Where noise levels are written into the conditions of contract, it will be necessary to carry out
a noise monitoring exercise to ensure compliance and to satisfy the occupants of the
building or adjacent buildings that the contractor has treated the matter seriously.
33.9 SERVICES
In all refurbishment contracts, especially where buildings have been left empty, all services
must be checked carefully, particularly electricity and gas since any persons temporarily
occupying these premises may have illegally reconnected services, often in a dangerous
manner. Where any suspect installation is found, the appropriate authorities must be
contacted to eliminate any faults.
It is often a wise precaution to have temporary supplies provided but, before this is done, all
existing services should be identified. Where existing services are to remain live, their
positions must be located and clearly marked.
On a larger type of refurbishing contract, the installation of a temporary supply is very similar
to that on any building contract. The only difference is that, in refurbishing as the structure
already exists, most of the temporary supply is required to be put in at the beginning. The
lighting must be of the right type and in the right place (e.g. stairs must be well lit) and
waterproof lampholders provided if moisture is present inside the building, or if rain can
penetrate. Tungsten filament lamps should always be protected by guards or shades.
For further information electricity – (see Pt 2 section 7) – Electricity at Work.
33.10 LIFTS
Refurbishment in large buildings sometimes necessitates use of passenger lifts for transfer
of building materials. Copies of thorough examination certificates should be obtained; it may
be necessary to increase the frequency of inspection and examinations to take account of
heavy usage.
33.11 RUBBISH CHUTES

The disposal of non-hazardous waste can be a problem in refurbishment. Materials must not
be thrown down and rubbish chutes should be used, where possible. Properly installed and
used, a rubbish chute, with a hopper at the upper end and a skip at ground level, provides a
safe method of conveying surplus materials from considerable heights with minimal risk.
Chutes may be attached directly to a building, or to a scaffold and often have branched
connections at different working levels. Sections are raised and lowered by means of a
winch, rope or crane and most designs rely on gear such as U-bolts, eyebolts, chains and
shackles, etc. for suspension and the attachment of one section to another.

SECTION 34
MAINTENANCE
INTRODUCTION 1
34.1 MAIN HAZARDS 2

34.2 PLANNING 2
34.3 PRELIMINARY SURVEY 2
34.4 CONDITION OF STRUCTURE 3
34.5 EXISTING SERVICES 3
34.6 MACHINERY 4
34.7 TOXIC SUBSTANCES 4
34.8 PERSONS NOT EMPLOYED IN MAINTENANCE WORK 5
34.9 STORAGE 6
34.10 ACCESS AND WORKING PLACES 6
34.11 WORKING PLACES (GENERAL) 7
34.12 PLANT 8
34.13 SCAFFOLDS 9
34.14 DEBRIS 10
34.15 HEALTH HAZARDS 11
34.16 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT 11
34.17 ROOFS 11
34.18 PROTECTIVE CLOTHING AND EQUIPMENT 11
34.19 MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL 12
SECTION 34
PART TWO
SECTION 34
MAINTENANCE
INTRODUCTION
Maintenance work is dangerous. Around 40% of all fatal accidents on building operations occur during
maintenance; yet the seriousness of the problem is too often underestimated by management, safety
advisers and operatives because the jobs are usually relatively simple, and of short duration.
Many of these accidents could be prevented by the properly planned implementation of well
understood precautions, so there is clearly considerable scope for reducing their number - but this will
only happen if there is a drastic change in industry’s approach to maintenance work.
Preparing guidance on maintenance safety is difficult because so many different trades are involved,
all with their own distinctive hazards, while at the same time, the individual trades encounter some
common problems when engaged in maintenance work.
Detailed guidance on the risks and precautions in individual sectors will be found in other sections of
the manual. This section highlights the factors which create special risks during maintenance, looks
briefly at the accident background and draws together the most important lessons from other sections
of the manual and from other sources.
Ministerial Order No. (32) Year 1982 – Articles 5, 7 & 9

ADM/H&S/Pt 2 01 March 2005 MAINTENANCE 1 of 12
PART TWO
34.1 MAIN HAZARDS

Some of the important factors which influence attitudes to maintenance and produce the
distinctive hazards associated with the work are:
• the short duration of much of the work, which can encourage the use of the least time-
consuming and least safe means of access,
• its repetitive nature, which breeds complacency about the risks and contempt for safety
procedures and precautions,
• the difficulties in supervising and monitoring small mobile groups working away from their
base,
• the deterioration in the structure, or the disguising of its fragile nature after years of use,
• the building often remains in use, creating problems for the maintenance workers, and
risks to the occupants.
34.2 PLANNING
In view of the high level of risk likely to be involved in maintenance, it is essential for the
work to be properly planned. Planning should include:
• ensuring that all relevant information on the building and on activities within it is provided
by the occupier or client,
• carrying out a preliminary survey to identify the type of structure, the range of
maintenance work required and the hazards likely to be encountered,
• preparing safe systems of work to eliminate or reduce the risks from identified hazards,
• where work is to be carried out in occupied premises, ensuring adequate arrangements
for the health and safety of occupiers,
• ensuring that employees are adequately instructed, trained and supervised.
Identified hazards should be included in the pre-tender health and safety plan which the
consultant must ensure is prepared. Relevant safety precautions and procedures should be
included in the construction phase health and safety plan which the main contractor must
ensure has been sufficiently developed before the work is carried out.
34.3 PRELIMINARY SURVEY

Many hazards encountered in building maintenance will arise not only as a result of the work
itself, but from the condition of the structure, the proximity of live services, the presence of
toxic materials or the necessity to work in locations where there are persons not employed in
maintenance work, i.e. employees of other employers or the occupier, or the general public.

PART TWO
In addition, work may be carried out close to machinery which is continuing to be operated. It
is therefore essential that, prior to detailed planning of working procedures, a thorough
survey of the building and its contents is implemented by persons whose experience and
training will enable them to identify such circumstances which may give rise to risks during
the maintenance.
Note should also be taken of any safety rules imposed by the occupier, with which
maintenance workers must comply.
34.4 CONDITION OF STRUCTURE

The physical condition of the structure of the building must be investigated to determine the
presence and condition of:
• fragile roofs including any gutters which may be required to be used either as a working
place or as a means of access. Asbestos-cement roofs for instance, should always be
treated as fragile and materials such as corrugated metal decking should be examined
for deterioration due to prolonged exposure to the elements or corrosion from processes
within the building..
• floor joists and roof trusses which may be required to support scaffolds, falsework, plant
and materials or any other load hitherto not imposed on those members.
• walls which may be required to accept scaffold ties or fixings for safety nets or
harnesses. Where the strength of the wall is in doubt, then further investigation may be
required by a Structural Engineer.
• existing facilities for access and working places.
Note:
Maintenance work may involve the use of permanent equipment which has not been used
for many years, and any such permanent metal access ladders, gantries, safety harness
anchorages, etc., should be thoroughly inspected and where necessary, tested before any
assumption is made that they may be used in the maintenance operation.
34.5 EXISTING SERVICES

All existing services must be located and their routes traced, marked and recorded. These
will include electrical, gas, water, air lines, fuel lines, both liquid and gaseous, any supply
lines required for processes within the building and any extraction or exhaust equipment
carrying toxic or otherwise hazardous substances. (see Pt 2 section 6) – Overhead and
Underground Services.

PART TWO
Where there is any risk of damage to any of the services arising from the maintenance
operation, every attempt must be made to isolate them prior to the commencement of the
work.
Any such isolation procedures must be controlled by a formal “Permit to Work” system
incorporating the use of “lock off” devices with the key in the possession of the person
carrying out the maintenance. If it is necessary to maintain the services, then isolation may
still be achieved by diverting the supply away from the area where the work is to be carried
out. (see Pt 2 section 11) – Permit to Work.
34.6 MACHINERY
When persons are required to work in elevated positions then they may be in close proximity
to dangerous parts of moving machines which would otherwise be safe by position. In such
cases, the machines must be locked off with the maintenance operator holding the key, and
the activity controlled by a “Permit to Work” system.
Where it is necessary to keep any such machine working, then the maintenance should be
re-scheduled to a time when it is possible to close the machine down or, alternatively,
protective screens must be erected to prevent the risk of contact with the dangerous parts.
Erection of such screening would take place with the machine locked off under a “Permit to
Work” system. Particular attention should be given to the situation where persons are
required to work on or near the wheel track of an overhead travelling crane, or any other
position where he can be struck by a part of that crane.
The crane should either be locked off or have stops fitted to the rail to ensure that the crane
does not approach within 6.0m of that person.
34.7 TOXIC SUBSTANCES

34.7.1 asbestos
The survey must take account of work which may give rise to the presence of dust and
fumes, paying particular attention to asbestos. It is necessary to establish the type of
asbestos which may be encountered. Unless this is known, samples of the asbestos must
be analysed to determine the nature and concentrations involved. (See Pt 2 section 5) –
Substances Hazardous to Health.
34.7.2 lead
Particular attention should be paid to steelwork which has been coated with lead based
paint. If such steel is to be burned, wire brushed, ground, etc., then samples of paint must be
taken to establish the lead content. Control measures or personal protection will be required
in accordance with (See Pt 2 section 5) – Substances Hazardous to Health.

PART TWO
34.8 EFFECTS OF MAINTENANCE WORK ON PERSONS OTHER THAN

THOSE EMPLOYED
Maintenance work may give rise to other persons, such as when work is carried out above
members of the general public or building occupiers or if materials and debris are deposited
in such a way that access routes are being impeded.
Serious consideration must therefore be given to the adverse effects which maintenance
work may have on persons not employed, particularly where domestic premises and public
places to which children, the elderly and the blind or otherwise handicapped persons have
access. For example:
34.8.1 public highways
Where it is necessary to obstruct any public highway, including footpaths, for the purpose of
depositing material, erecting scaffolds, etc., then the requirements of Abu Dhabi Municipality
Traffic Section.
34.8.2 access routes

Care should be taken to ensure that plant and material do not impede pedestrian and
vehicular accesses without prior permission of the building occupier who may be able to
make alternative arrangements. To this end, good housekeeping is of utmost importance. It
will be necessary to investigate fire escape routes in all circumstances where they may be
obstructed by maintenance activity and to ensure that such work will not delay evacuation in
the case of fire. This may involve designing scaffolds in corridors and stairwells so that
accesses are not obstructed.
34.8.3 maintenance plant

In many cases the use of traditional construction plant may not be suitable for maintenance
operations. High noise levels from pneumatic breakers could place building occupiers at risk
as could exhaust fumes from dumpers, hoists, etc.
34.8.4 overhead work

Maintenance operations are often carried out above areas normally accessed by the public
or building occupiers.
If exclusion zones cannot be established below such work then it is imperative that adequate
protection is provided to ensure that tools, material, debris, etc. cannot fall. This can be
achieved by the use of fans, by meshing the face of the scaffolds, by boarding below
platform level or by slinging debris nets.
If the maintenance involves such operations as breaking out brickwork, painting or other
work where falling particles would be extremely small, then sheeting should be used instead
of nets, bearing in mind the additional wind loading this may impose on a scaffold.
If welding or burning is to be carried out then the protection must be non-combustible and it
may be necessary to provide welding screens to protect persons from the effect of welding
flash.

PART TWO
34.9 STORAGE
Before bringing plant and materials to the site of maintenance operations, careful
consideration must be given to storage facility.
Care must be taken to establish areas which do not give rise to obstructed access either to
the occupiers of the building or to persons engaged in maintenance work. It should be noted
that the storage of traditional building materials such as timber, due to its flammability, or
hazardous chemicals, due to their interaction with processes carried out within the building
or arising out of the proximity of the storage areas with fire escape routes, may give rise to
risks to safety and health. In order to minimise such risks, it is important that close liaison
exists between persons carrying out the maintenance work and the persons in control of
processes within the building.
34.10 SAFE MEANS OF ACCESS

The introduction to this section identifies the inadequacy of access as giving rise to the
majority of accidents associated with maintenance work.
This is often due to the short duration of a particular operation and the fact that no suitable
form of access or working place exists
The high accident frequencies highlight the need for a serious commitment to the provision,
inspection and maintenance of places of work together with the routes used to gain access
to them.
It may be possible to use permanent accesses and gantries etc. within a building, but they
must be checked for their suitability for the passage of persons and material. Where any
such facility has not been used for some time they should be checked for deterioration,
paying particular attention to the integrity of decking and any handrails and their points of
attachment to the structure.
lighting
many accesses and working places used in maintenance operations will be in areas not
served by the permanent lighting within the building and will have to be provided with
temporary lighting as described in (see Pt 2 section 7) – Electricity at Work.
ladders
these are the most commonly used means of access to an elevated working place. Ladders
are also widely used as working places but this should be allowed only after careful
consideration that it is safe to do so. This will depend on the type and duration of the work
and on the security of the ladder.
full guidance on the safe use of ladders is given in (see Pt 2 section 29) -Scaffolding, but
the following criteria are particularly relevant to maintenance work:
• ladders must be inspected prior to their use, and those with missing or damaged rungs or

PART TWO
damaged stiles must not be used.
• home-made ladders must not be used.
• ladders must be set at a working angle of approximately 75°, i.e. 4 units vertical to I
horizontal (unless fixed to the side of a scaffold tower; when they will be fixed vertically).
• ladder stiles should normally rest on a firm level base. If it is intended to rest the ladder
on an uneven base or stairway, etc. then a levelling device must be fixed to the lower end
of the stile or stiles to ensure that the ladder is supported evenly. Bricks, blocks of wood,
etc. must not be used to pack up stiles an uneven ground.
• where possible, ladders must be secured near the upper resting point by both stiles. In
certain cases, the use of spreader arms attached to the top of the ladder may satisfy this
requirement, but it must first be established that the ladder; so fitted, cannot slip in the
circumstances in which it is used..
• ladders must be placed so that there is a clear space behind each rung to permit the
secure placing of a person’s feet.
• suitable access to a working place must be provided at the stepping off point. Persons
must not be required to climb aver or through guardrails and toe boards. Gaps in
toeboards and guardrails must, however; be kept as small as possible.
• single board runs to ladders must not be used.
• only one person should be permitted on a ladder at any one time.
34.10.3 step ladders and trestles

great care must be exercised to ensure the sound condition of step ladders and trestles,
particularly of the safety restraints
34.11 WORKING PLACES

Where injury might result, precautions must be taken to prevent falls from any working place.
These precautions will normally consist of edge protection, comprising toeboards at least
150mm high and main guardrails at least 9 -10mm above the working place.
Intermediate guardrails, or other forms of barriers (e.g. brickguards), must also be fitted so
that there is not an unprotected gap of mare than 470mm in height. This standard of edge
protection must, where practicable, always be provided where persons could fall more than
2m.
34.11.1 safety nets and safety harnesses

where it is not practicable to use, bosun’s chairs, cradles etc. as a last resort, safety
harnesses or safety nets may be used. For further information on the use and installation of
safety nets, and on safety harnesses. (see Pt 2 section 12) - PPE, and Pt 2 section 29 -
Scaffolding.

PART TWO
34.11.2 holes in floor

Holes in floors through which a person can fall must be guarded. Alternatively, the hole can
be provided with a cover of adequate strength which must be either marked to indicate its
purpose, or secured in position.
34.12PLANT
34.12.1 power operated platforms
It is important to recognise the limitations as well as the
advantages of such equipment. Normally, they should be
used only to elevate persons. tools and materials into a
position where they can carry out the maintenance work
from the platform.
Persons should not leave the platform whilst in an

elevated position nor should materials be transferred. If
the appliance is used to transfer persons or goods from
one level to another (i.e. not as a working platform), it
may be deemed a hoist or lift and, as such, the relevant
regulations would apply.
Fig. 1- Power operated platform
Where it is necessary to operate the work platform in with a full , and safe working
platform and operating
areas congested with live services, the precautions controls situated on working
outlined previously in this section must be adhered to. platform.
(see Fig.1)
Detailed information on power operated platforms is given in (see Pt 2 section 29) –

Scaffolding.

PART TWO
34.12.2 fork lift trucks (also see Pt 2 section 14) – Mobile Plant & Equipment
the provision of a platform on the forks of a fork lift truck is common in maintenance
operations. In such cases the following safeguards are necessary:
• platform to be secured to the forks or

carriage must be provided with double
guardrails and toeboards, and a self-
closing gate (not opening outwards)
interlocked so that it cannot be
opened when the platform is elevated.
Platforms must only be fitted to fork lift
trucks designed for the purpose.
(See Fig. 2)
• on machines with tilting masts, the

mast must be secured in the vertical Fig.2 – Safety Platform specially designed for use with
position and the horizontal, slip Fork Lift trucks , fitted with a double guardrails
and toe boards.
resistant platform should be as small
as possible, normally large enough to
accommodate not mare than two
persons.
If the truck is fitted with side shift, this should be fixed in mid position.
• the capacity of the machine should be established from the manufacturer and this must
be marked on the truck together with its weight. The platform must not be overloaded.
• additional guarding of dangerous parts of the machine may be necessary.
• only trained competent persons may operate the platform on the fork lift truck.
• preferably, the controls for lifting and lowering should be fitted an the platform.
• fork lift truck must not be travelled whilst a person is an the platform unless the truck has
been specifically designed to allow only small positioning movements at creep speed.
• when a platform is fitted, the fork lift truck should not be used for the transfer of persons
or material from one level to another.
34.13 SCAFFOLDS
The requirements in relation to scaffolds, including slung and suspended scaffolds are
covered in (see Pt 2 section 29). Particular attention must be given to the condition of any
roof or rail used to support cradles.
The use of scaffolds in maintenance work is often hindered by lack of space and by the
difficulty experienced in tying them. These difficulties mainly arise when the building eleva-
tions to be scaffolded do not contain any openings through which to tie, particularly in metal

PART TWO
or clad buildings.
This difficulty in tying locations will promote the use of drilled-in anchorage but care must be
taken to ensure that the material into which they are drilled will permit the necessary pull out
values.
Where the structure material is questionable then either of the following tests must be
carried out:-
• proof load of 1.25 times the design load should be applied to at least 1 in 20 anchors.
(minimum 1 anchor)
• test to destruction on at least 1 in 50 anchors (minimum 3 anchors) should be applied

where the strength is judged to be weakest. The lowest Failure value is identified and a
safety factor of 1 .5 applied to determine the safe working load.
If the scaffold is used in places to which the public have access then care must be taken to
remove access ladders at the end of the working day. This is particularly important for the
protection of children.
34.14 DEBRIS FROM WORKING PLACES

• maintenance work often gives rise to the removal of debris and usually this has to be
brought to the ground. Debris must not be thrown from scaffolds etc. but removed in
some contained system. This may take the form of buckets and gin wheels, or similar, or
by the use of chutes.
• chutes should be fully enclosed and have no internal projections which are likely to
retain material discharged into them. The openings at the top of the chutes should be
large enough to adequately to receive the material being put into them. If there is any
risk of spillage then additional protection (possibly mesh) should be fixed around the
opening.
• the discharge end of the chute should also be designed to prevent material bouncing out
of the skip or other receptacle. This is often achieved by wrapping a tarpaulin around the
bottom of the chute and the top of the skip or alternatively by fixing mesh screens to the
side of the skip.

PART TWO
34.15 HEALTH HAZARDS

• persons involved in maintenance work are exposed to many of the same health hazards
that face operatives in the rest of the construction industry. In addition, they may be
exposed to additional health hazards arising out of processes carried out in the building.
• it is essential, particularly when the maintenance is carried out by a contractor with little
or no knowledge of hazards arising out of the processes or plant in the building, that
close liaison exists between the maintenance supervisors, and the persons in control. It
may be necessary that certain medical precautions be taken if the process demands e.g.
work near lead or radiation where initial or periodic medical examinations may be
necessary.
• consideration should be given not only to the processes currently carried out in the
building, but also to those which have been discontinued and may have given rise to
toxic dusts which are still found in pipe ducts etc. Where such a possibility exists, dust
samples should be analysed and all necessary precautions taken.
34.16 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Maintenance work is often considered to be the commercial or industrial equivalent to DIY
but it must be stressed that maintenance work is an industrial activity and the tools and
equipment used should be commensurate with that activity. The standards for tools and
power supplies, etc. are contained in (see Pt 2 section 16) – Portable Tools,
34.17 ROOFS
Work on roofs is the biggest single cause of fatal accidents in maintenance work, either from
falls from the edge or the even greater cause of falls through fragile roof material.
For further information on working on both Flat and Sloping Roofs (see Pt 2 section 32) –
Safe Working on Roofs.
34.18 PROTECTIVE CLOTHING AND EQUIPMENT

• persons involved in maintenance work, particularly when employed by the occupier and
carrying out maintenance work spasmodically may find that there is need for types of
protective clothing and equipment not normally held in the premises.
• the maintenance work may involve the use of eye protection which incorporates Grade 1
impact capabilities, or indeed chemical protection, when all that is held in the Company
stares are general purpose safety glasses.
• ear defenders, generally supplied, may not have sufficient attenuation to protect persons

PART TWO
working adjacent to considerable noise source for long periods, and it would be unlikely
that respirators held in the stores would be suitable to combat specific toxic hazards such
as asbestos or those found when entering confined spaces.
• the person in charge of the maintenance operation must evaluate the hazards associated
with that operation. If the hazards still exist after statutory compliance and carrying out
such measures as are reasonably practicable, but can be further reduced by the use of
protective clothing and equipment, then such clothing and equipment, being suitable for
the operative and for the operation, must be provided, used and maintained.
• in addition, the person using it must be trained in its use and maintenance and given
adequate facility for its storage.
For further information on PPE (see Pt 2 section 12) - PPE.
34.19 MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL

• persons carrying out maintenance work need to be as highly skilled and effectively
supervised as those carrying out other building and construction operations.
• the significant death toll amongst those involved in maintenance work will not be
reduced whilst persons walk directly an fragile roofs, work on platforms and other
working places without guardrails and toeboards or without appropriate safety nets or
harnesses, or work from unsecured ladders, makeshift platforms and fail to observe the
many necessary precautions appertaining to maintenance operations.
• maintenance of premises is not something that should be carried out by unskilled

workers in slack periods, neither should the short duration of many operations cause the
precautions to be ignored. It does not take long for a person to fall to his death.
The use of skilled operatives, who have been trained to recognise hazards associated with
maintenance work and to overcome those hazards, together with adequate supervision and
close liaison with the persons in control of processes carried out in the premises, will go
some considerable way to improve the standards of accident prevention in this hazardous
occupation.

SECTION 35
SPECIALIST PROCESSES
MAIN APPLICABLE U.A.E. LEGISLATION 1
35.1 HIGH PRESSURE WATER JETTING 2

35.2 LASERS 4
35.3 SITE INVESTIGATION 7
35.4 WATERCRAFT AND DREDGING 11
35.5 DIVING 17
SECTION 35
PART TWO
SECTION 35
35.1 HIGH PRESSURE WATER JETTING
INTRODUCTION
The term “high pressure water jetting'' covers all jetting including the use of additives and
abrasives at pressure above 140 bars. Pressures currently used can exceed 2500 bar.
This is a high risk operation that requires a high level of supervision and control.
Only adequately trained and competent persons should operate and supervise high
pressure water jetting equipment. The operation is normally carried out by a team and
they should therefore be trained as a team and not as individuals.
Most teams consist of three men:

• supervisor or team leader
• operator at the lance nozzle end of the equipment
• pump operator training must include emphasis on not pointing the lance at parts of the
body even if they are protected by gloves or boots.

Ministerial Order No. (32) Year 1982 - Article (19) B
Ministerial Order No. (32) Year 1982 - Article (1), (6), (9), (15) & (22).

ADM/H&S/Pt 2 01 March 2005 SPECIALIST PROCESSES 1 of 24
PART TWO
35.1.1 hazards
The main hazards involved in working with high pressure water jetting equipment include:
• use of electricily
• combination of a wet environment and the use of electricity
• pressure injection iniuries
• being struck by material dislodged during operations
35.1.2 precautions
Where possible, the work piece to be jetted should be removed to an isolated area. If this is
impracticable, area limits should be defined with barriers and notices restricting access.
When carrying out the operation with chemical additives, extra precautions may be
necessary, due to the presence of the chemical see Pt 2 section 5 - Substances Hazardous
to Health.
Rigid or semi-rigid lances having nozzles fitted to them with any combination of forward,
backward or 90 degree angle jets shall be used. These must be fitted with a safety shut-off
device or dead mans handle device, which should be checked before use to ensure it is in
good working order.
In certain conditions, e.g. in confined spaces, or in areas surrounded by operational plant,

the operations should be carried out under a permit to work system. Where there is close
interface with normal site operations it may be necessary to carry out work out of hours.
Good access, a safe working platform and secure footing is essential. When working at
heights appropriate fall prevention systems must be in place (see Pt 2 section 29).
Where necessary, safety harnesses should be provided and used.
High pressure water jetting should not be used to clean asbestos cement sheets.
35.1.3 maintenance of equipment

Maintenance schedules, as laid down by manufacturers, should be strictly adhered to.
daily checks should be carried out to ensure that:
• the pump unit lubricant and coolant • where the equipment is electrically
levels are up to the mark, operated, all junction boxes, switches
and cables are watertight and free from
• filters on pump units and suction pick-
defects,
up are clear,
• spark arresters on internal combustion
• all hoses and connections are in good
driven equipment are functioning
condition and correctly made,
correctly,
• the foot control and guard are
• a serviceable fire extinguisher, (C02), is
functioning properly,
readily available.
• all guns/lances, together with jets and

PART TWO
orifices, are serviceable and free from

obstruction
All the above should be recorded in a maintenance! inspection, log or register, and any
adjustments to the equipment must not be attempted when it is under pressure.
35.1.4 protective clothing and equipment (see Fig.1)

protective clothing arid equipment should consist of:
• eye protection
• safety footwear including where necessary additional
• strap-on protective shields
• ear defenders
• safety helmets
• waterproof clothing
35.1.5 accidents
Anyone injured while carrying out water jetting
operations can sustain injuries greater than is
possibly visible on the surface.
Fig.1 – showing an operator using a
Medical. advice should be sought immediately portable High pressure Jetting
following any injury however minor, and lance to clean concrete, and
wearing the appropriate PPE.
information should be provided on the nature of the
operation and details of any chemicals involved.

PART TWO
SECTION 35
35.2 LASERS
INTRODUCTION
For many years, laser equipment has been finding increasing application in the surveying
and construction industry, offering as it does a means for rapid and accurate alignment and
the facility for precise distance measurement.
As with other civil engineering plant, it is common for firms to hire laser survey equipment
which may then be used by operators who may have received scant training and information
on its safe use. Such equipment will frequently be used on open construction sites with
ready public access.
Most laser instruments have a variety of optical attachments to allow wide changes in the
direction of the beam and its power intensity, which may present significant alterations in the
potential hazard to persons in the vicinity.
It is essential, therefore, that all those involved in the use of lasers, particularly in out-of-
doors situations, where invariably long exposed beam paths are present, are made aware of
the hazards which may exist and the control procedures that are necessary to secure the
safety of everyone, including members of the public.


PART TWO
35.2.1 hazards
Because of the wide ranges possible in wavelength, energy content and pulse length of a
laser beam, the hazards associated with lasers vary widely. It is therefore considered
impracticable to regard lasers as a single group to which common standards can apply.
Three aspects of laser application may influence the total hazard evaluation and thereby
influence the application of control measures:
• the laser or laser system’s capability of injuring personnel, which may include burns to
the skin or severe damage to the eyes,
• the environment in which the laser is used,
• the personnel who operate the laser and the personnel who may be exposed.
Fig.1 denotes the approved type of Safety Signs required when Laser Operations are in
progress.
Fig.1
35.2.2 classification
One practical means of evaluation and control of laser radiation hazards is for the
manufacturer to classify laser products according to their relative hazard potential, following
rules set out in British (and international) Standards and then to specify appropriate controls
for each class. The use of such a classification will, in most cases, preclude on the part of
the end user of the laser product, any requirement for radiometric measurements. BS EN
60825 groups laser products into five classes based on accessible emission levels (AELs),
i.e. the measured level of radiation to which human access is possible. To conform with BS
EN 60825, the manufacturer is required to label the laser product with the classification
number and to provide certain engineering controls, warning signals etc. Corresponding
details on control precautions necessary for the “user” to implement in respect of each class
are also specified in the standard.

PART TWO
35.2.3 precautions
In line with the laser product classification philosophy, the recommendations for laser safety
vary with the class of laser product in use and may be broadly summarised as follows:
Class 1
These products are safe under all viewing conditions but are not practicable for many
construction applications.
Class 2
The laser beam should, where reasonably practicable, be terminated at the end of its useful
path.
The laser should not be aimed at vehicles or personnel, particularly at head height.
Class 3A
While it is preferred that Class 2 laser products be used wherever possible, there are times
when, for example, due to high ambient light levels, more power may be required than is
available from Class 2 laser products. In such cases, 3A laser products may be used but
their use requires additional precautions, e.g.:
• person competent to supervise the safe use of lasers should be appointed wherever
lasers above Class 2 are in use.
• suitable and adequately trained personnel should be assigned to install, adjust and
operate the laser equipment.
• areas where such lasers are used should be treated as controlled areas, be posted with
standard laser warning signs, and access restricted to personnel who have been advised
as to the precautions they should take.
• precautions should be taken to ensure that the laser beam is not intentionally directed at
specularly reflecting surfaces such as mirrors, lenses etc.
• similarly, care must be taken to ensure that such reflecting surfaces are not accidentally
introduced into the beam path.
Class 3B and 4
Such lasers are hazardous, particularly as the beam may be invisible to the eye. They
require extreme caution and careful evaluation prior to their use.
Engineering controls such as physical barriers, interlocks limiting beam traverse and
elevation etc., should be used whenever practicable to augment the administrative controls,
and the need for eye protection must be assessed. (see Pt 2 section 12) - PPE.

PART TWO
SECTION 35
35.3 SITE INVESTIGATION

INTRODUCTION
A site investigation comprises the necessary phases of work entailed in obtaining a
geotechnical and chemical appraisal of a chosen site.
Until the advent of high land prices, investigation was usually confined to natural, or green
field sites. On such sites, if fill material was encountered, it was considered only for its
geotechnical properties. Many investigations are now carried out on contaminated and
derelict sites; such work involves chemists and environmental specialists, to sample and test
for contaminated materials to ensure control or elimination of hazards in the development
and future use of the land.
This section deals only with the safety and health aspects of personnel undertaking site
investigations of land,


PART TWO
35.3.1 phases of site work

A site investigation is made up of the following phases:
desk study
The desk study comprises the inspection of available geological records, Ordnance Survey
data, local archive and authority maps, memoirs and records, aerial photographs and
consultation with public utility authorities.
It is essential to carry out a desk study in order to establish the past usage of a site and thus
to advise contractors of the possible presence of harmful and toxic materials, or
subterranean hazards.
walkover survey
A walkover inspection of a site can provide very useful information with regard to the
planning of the subsequent investigation.
Great care must be taken to avoid falling into unrecorded cavities, such as old mine shafts or
uncapped underground tanks which may have been used as liquor or tar wells at disused
gas works or chemical sites.
The possible instability of staircases and suspended floors must also be considered when
entering derelict structures and basements.
Shafts and manholes must not be entered without taking account of the potential risks from
atmospheric contamination by the ingress of such gases as hydrogen suiphide, methane or
carbon dioxide. Advice on safe systems of work for entry into confined spaces is given in Pt
2 section 21 -Safe Working in Confined Spaces.
trial pits and trenches
which are unsupported should be excavated by machine, or by hand up to a maximum depth

of 1.2m, to enable visual inspection and sampling and simple in situ testing from ground
level. Such pits and trenches deeper than 1.2m must not be entered by personnel.
inspection pits
dug to a maximum depth of 1.2m, for the purpose of locating underground services.
observation pits and trenches,
• excavated by hand or machine, which are properly supported to enable personnel to

enter safely and carry out in situ examination, soil sampling and necessary testing.
• Sampling and testing may need to take place in the side of the excavation, in which case
the support system will need to be designed to allow sections to be exposed, whilst
retaining the stability of the excavation.
Guidance on systems of support is given in Pt 2 section 23- Excavations

PART TWO
• Observation pits or trenches should be checked for gas ingress, or oxygen deficiency,
using a suitable atmosphere testing device, and may need to be treated as confined
spaces, requiring special precautions before entry is permitted. Guidance on appropriate
precautions is given in section 21 - Working in Confined Spaces.
buried services
Prior to any excavation it is essential to obtain all possible relevant information on buried
services from all the appropriate authorities, also from land or building owners.
The position of any services in or near the proposed work should then be pinpointed as
accurately as possible by means of a locating device. Power tools or mechanical excavators
should not be used until the position of services has been confirmed. Further guidance is
given in Pt 2 section 6 – Overhead and Underground Services.
open trenches
• spoil from the pit or trench should not be placed adjacent to the walls of the excavation,
as this causes additional ground stresses and hazards to persons who enter even
shallow trenches.
• in unstable ground, a continuous check must be made for the presence of tension cracks,
which may indicate the imminent collapse of a trial pit or trench.
35.3.2 boreholes
The general safety and health precautions to be adopted by personnel operating and
supervising the construction of boreholes are similar to those discussed in the paragraphs
dealing with the excavation of trial pits. In addition, attention must be given to the stability
and operation of the drilling rig, deep services and tunnels, overhead power cables and
noise.
It is essential that the boring or drilling rig is set up in a stable manner. This is of particular
importance when working on sloping ground.
The precautions already outlined for avoiding underground services apply equally to bore
holes. However, due to the greater depth of penetration, consideration must be given to the
possible presence of deep sewers, gas mains and cable tunnels.
The noise from drilling and boring rigs should be assessed and, where possible, reduced.
Where persons are likely to be exposed to 90 dBA, or above, over a working day, hearing
protection must be provided and worn.
Further guidance on noise is given in Pt 2 section 3 – Noise at Work.
Persons must not enter a borehole of less than 760mm diameter. Suitable equipment must
be used for lowering a person into the hole and a Type E safety harness must be worn. A
rescue procedure must be prepared and persons trained in its operation.
Further guidance is given in Pt 2 section 21 – Safe Working in Confined Spaces.

PART TWO
35.3.3 in-situ loading tests

Large scale loading tests, normally up to a total load of 1,000 tonnes, are carried out on test
plates positioned in trial pits or boreholes, or on test piles, to check the validity of design.
Where tests require the use of grillages to support dead weight kentledge or anchored
reaction cables, it is essential to establish that the ground below the grillage is able to safely
support the imposed loading. Care must be taken not to work or walk in the line of anchored
cables.
All test equipment must be checked and calibrated before use to ensure that the correct
pressure or loading is applied to the test plate or pile.
The lifting appliance and lifting gear used to place load test materials must be suitable for the
purpose and have current test and examination certificates. The ground bearing capacity of
the surrounding area must also be considered before putting a lifting appliance to work.
Further guidance on lifting appliances and lifting gear is given in Pt 2 section 19 - Cranes
and Hoists and section 20- Lifting Gear.
35.3.4 occupational health and first aid

Because of the sometimes isolated nature of sites and the possibility of dealing with
contaminated land, the following basic health and first aid measures should be considered:
protective clothing
Suitable protective overalls, gloves, safety helmets, and protective footwear must be
provided. All items should be selected to provide the degree of personal protection that
ensures adequate protection for the worst case of contamination. Hand protection is
essential when handling samples.
washing facilities
The provision of washing facilities is essential for use prior to eating, smoking or attending to
bodily functions.
bacterial infection
Persons engaged in handling samples should be encouraged to keep up to date with anti
tetanus injections and be provided with information regarding Ieptospirosis (Weil’s Disease),
first aid
First aid provisions should be made depending on the size of workforce but, as a minimum,
there should be a travel pack with each vehicle
Instructions must be available to deal with emergency situations involving accidents to

persons or plant, fires, flooding, explosions and, in particular; the striking of overhead or
underground services etc.

PART TWO
35.3.5 site security

Where site investigation operations extend over a period of days or weeks, particularly if the
work is carried out on contaminated land, measures must be adopted to ensure, as far as
possible, that trespassers, vandals or children are denied access to the site.
Fencing of site operations, securely covering excavations, isolating all plant and equipment
and ensuring secure storage of materials are essential minimum procedures to be adopted.
If the excavated spoil is contaminated, the hazard should be clearly indicated on notices.

PART TWO
SECTION 35
35.4 WATERCRAFT AND DREDGING

INTRODUCTION
This section sets out the requirements for watercraft and dredging. The requirement for
actual watercraft and dredging equipment is also discussed, as well as the requirements for
personnel performing such watercraft and dredging operations.
Inspection, training, certification and various operating activities are discussed in detail.

inisterial Order No. (32) Year 1982 – Article (20)

PART TWO
35.4.1 general requirements for watercraft operations

construction of vessels
To construct all watercraft and perform all watercraft operation in accordance with the
standards and local requirements laid down by the Abu Dhabi Coast Guard and Marine
Department.
inspection and certification
Inspect, certify, license, and number all watercraft and equipment according to standards
and local requirements laid down by the Abu Dhabi Coast Guard and Marine Department.
capacity plates
Plainly marked on all watercraft with the maximum occupancy and carrying capacity allowed
on board for safe passage. Do not exceed this maximum occupancy or carrying capacity.
loading
make sure that each boat has enough room, freeboard, and stability to safely carry the
maximum cargo and passenger under various weather and water conditions.
flame arrestors
Equip gasoline engines, except for outboards types, with an approved backfire flame
arrestor. Make sure the arrestor is attached to the air intake with a flame – tight connection.
It must be kept clean and in serviceable condition.
fire extinguishers
For watercraft less than 65 feet in length, a minimum two x 10lb Dry Powder extinguishers
should be provided. Watercraft 65 feet or larger must carry sufficient fire extinguishers to
meet Abu Dhabi Coast Guard and Marine Department’s requirements.
ventilation
Watercraft with permanently installed gasoline engines must have powered ventilation
systems to remove gasoline vapours from the vessel.
fuel
Fuel must be stored in approved containers suitable for marine use. Fuel lines must be
equipped with a valve to cut off fuel flow. In addition, if the watercraft will not be in use for a
period of 8 hrs or longer, then the valve must be closed.
navigation lights
Watercraft must be able to display navigation lights required by the Abu Dhabi Coast Guard
and Marine Department. Display navigation lights between sunset and sunrise and any other
time visibility is reduced (fog, haze, rain etc).

PART TWO
operator training and qualification
Reclamation employees and others who operate a Reclamation – owned watercraft must
first be certified or licensed to operate the watercraft in accordance with the Abu Dhabi
Coast Guard and Marine Department.
float plans
If the operator expects watercraft to activities to take longer than 4 hrs from time of departure
until time of return, a float plan must be prepared. The float plan must include the following
information:
• watercraft information (vessel, make, model or local identity).
• personnel on board
• activity to be performed
• expected time of departure, route and time of return.
• means of communication.
personnel floatation devices (PFD)
Equip watercraft with one approved PFD for each occupant, and one approved throw line
type onboard the watercraft. Wear a PFD whenever you are onboard or working around
bodies of water where drowning hazard exist. For further information on PFD see Pt 2
section 28 - Working over or adjacent to Water.
safety equipment
Equip all watercraft with adequate safety equipment to meet the Abu Dhabi Coast Guard and
Marine Department’s requirements and any hazards that may be encountered during normal
operations.
swimming
No one should swim from the watercraft or any floating equipment unless you are a certified
diver whose duties require such swimming.
35.4.2 dredging operations

inspections
A qualified person must inspect dredges and related equipment before they are entered into
service, and at least yearly thereafter to make sure they are in a safe operating condition.
The inspector must have a recognised degree, certificate or licence, or professional

standing, as well as extensive knowledge, training and experience in solving problems
related to the work. Inspections must be documented and accessible to personnel.

PART TWO
maintenance and repair
Before performing repair or maintenance work on the pump, suction or discharge lines below
the water line, or within the hull, in addition to the normal process of securing hoisting
machinery, you must raise the ladder (or drag arm) above the water line and positively
secure it. Set blank or block plates in suction or discharge lines as appropriate.
pipeline marking
Dredge pipelines that float or are supported on trestles must display lights at night and when
visibility is restricted.
safety plans
Prepare a comprehensive safety plan for each dredging operation that may pose hazards to
navigation or to the public.
submerged dredge pipeline
• where a pipeline crosses a navigation channel or other area subject to boat traffic,
submerged pipeline must rest on the channel bottom. The top pipeline and any anchor
securing the pipe must be no higher than the maximum draft of traffic expected in the
area where pipe is placed.
• when buoyant or semi buoyant pipeline is used, the dredge operator must make sure the
pipeline remains fully submerged and on the bottom. When raising the pipeline, warn
boat traffic of the pipeline hazard. Adequately mark the entire length of the pipeline.
• mark the entire location of the submerged pipe to ensure anchorage.
• remove all anchors and related materials when removing the submerged pipe.
floating pipeline
Floating pipeline is any pipeline not anchored on the channel bottom. Clearly mark floating
pipeline, including rubber discharge hoses. Do not allow pipelines to fluctuate between the
water surface and the channel bottom or to lie partially submerged.
If floating pipelines are used as accessways, equip them with a walkway and handrail on
one side. Personnel using the walkway must wear an approved (PFD)
dredge design
Design dredges so that failure or rupture of any of the dredge pump components (including
dredge pipe) will not cause dredge to sink.
dredge pumps
Any dredge with a dredge pump below the water line must have a bilge alarm or
automatically shutdown in the event of a pump leak.

PART TWO
fall protection
Provide guard rails, bulwarks, or taut cable guard lines for deck openings, elevated surfaces,
or other locations where a person may slip or fall from them.
walking and working surfaces
• provide anti slip surfaces on all working decks, stair treads, vessel ladders, and other
walking or working surfaces that may become wet during operation.
• remove obstructions in walking and working surfaces if possible. Where obstructions

cannot be removed, post appropriate warning signs or distinctively mark them.
• where the distance between the vessel and docks or landing exceeds 18 inches
horizontal, or 12 inches vertical, provide gangways. Gangways must be at least 22 inches
wide, with standard railings and able to support 250 pounds (with a safety factor of 4-1) at
its midpoint.

PART TWO
SECTION 35
35.5 DIVING
INTRODUCTION
In the absence of any specific U.A.E. Safety Regulations covering Diving Operations, ADM
have decided to use, as their standard, the current United Kingdom’s Diving At Work
Regulations 1997 as a guideline, and have based the following procedure on the above
Regulations and expect, as far as is reasonably practicable, all diving operation carried out
on any of their Projects to meet the following standards.

None present - refer to Ministry of Labour & Social Affairs
MAIN APPLICABLE INTERNATIONAL LEGISLATION

The Diving at Work Regulations (DWR) 1997

PART TWO
35.5.1 application of the standards

These standards are concerned with the safety of divers working as employees or in a self-
employed capacity. They are also concerned with the safety of any person who is exposed
to a pressure greater than 300 millibars above atmospheric pressure, either in a surface
compression chamber used in connection with any diving operation, or in the testing or
evaluation of any plant or equipment for use in diving operations.
The standards apply to diving operations from the time a diver commences his preparations
for diving until he has left the water, and is no longer subject to raised pressure and it may
reasonably be anticipated that he will not need therapeutic recompression.
Diving supervisors, all members of the diving team, and any person concerned with the
recompression or decompression of a diver are deemed to be engaged in a diving operation.
35.5.2 exemptions from the application of the standard

These standards do not apply to diving operations in which the diver uses a submersible
craft or a pressure resistant suit, and whilst doing so is exposed to a pressure no greater
than 300 millibars above atmospheric pressure. Neither do the regulations apply where the
diver uses no underwater breathing apparatus or only snorkel type apparatus.
35.5.3 people involved in the diving project

the client and others
There are a number of people whose actions can affect the safety of the diving project, even
though they are not part of the diving team. These people include the client for whom the
diving project is being carried out. Others include vessel operators and the owners of the site
where the diving project is taking place.
Although their responsibilities vary, they all have a duty to co-operate with the diving
contractor and supervisor. This is to ensure that standards are complied with, and that their
actions do not affect the safety of the dive team.
The client who commissions the work has responsibilities which include:
• ensuring that they appoint a diving contractor who is competent to undertake the duties;
• ensuring that the site is safe to use;
• identifying known hazards to the diving contractor, such as underwater obstructions and
contaminated water;
• supporting the supervisor and diving contractor in the event of an emergency.

PART TWO
the diving contractor
The diving contractor is normally the person who employs the divers for a diving project. A
diving project is the term used for the overall diving job (whether it lasts two hours or two
months). Depending on the size of the diving project, it can be made up of a number of
diving operations. A diving operation is the portion of the diving project which can be safely
supervised by one person. A supervisor must be appointed for each diving operation.
The diving contractor is the person who plans and conducts a diving project. No diving work
may go ahead without a diving contractor being appointed.
The diving contractor has the main responsibility to ensure a safe diving project. The diving
contractor should ensure that the diving project is planned, conducted and managed in a
safe way.
The diving contractor's responsibilities include:
• assessing risks, and ensuring that a diving project plan is prepared;
• ensuring that the dive team is aware of the plan;
• ensuring that there are suitable and sufficient divers who are competent in both diving
and the actual work to be undertaken, such as in the use of tools;
• ensuring that the place from which the diving is to be carried out is suitable and safe;
• providing sufficient and suitable plant and equipment, and ensuring that it is correctly
certified and maintained;
• ensuring that adequate arrangements exist for first aid and medical treatment;
• ensuring that diving project records are kept;
• ensuring that all other relevant regulations are complied with.
the supervisor
The supervisor must be appointed in writing by the diving contractor.
The supervisor should be qualified as a diver, and be competent in the techniques being
used in the diving project.
Supervisors are responsible for the safety of the diving operation that they are supervising,
and should be on site and in direct control of the diving operation.
The supervisor's responsibilities include:
• checking that divers are competent to dive and can carry out the work underwater;
• ensuring that everyone in the diving operation is aware of the diving project plan, and
that the plan is kept up to date;
• maintaining proper records of the diving operation;
• ensuring that there is adequate communication with the divers in the water;

PART TWO
• checking the site on the day of the dive, and when conditions change, confirming that
the risk assessment is still current;
• checking that the diving equipment provided is appropriate and adequate for the project.
the divers
Divers have a number of responsibilities. These include:
• holding an approved qualification for diving;
• being competent to work safely;
• holding a valid certificate of medical fitness to dive;
• complying with the directions of the supervisor and the dive plan;
• maintaining a daily record of their dives which they should keep for at least two years.
35.5.4 diver competence

All divers at work must be competent and hold an approved qualification.
There are three standards of competence. These are the main techniques used for
commercial diving:
• Surface Supplied
• SCUBA
• Closed Bell
If divers hold an Surface Supplied for onshore surface supplied diving, and want to work
offshore using surface supply, they will need to be assessed against a 'top up' standard.
Only divers with a Surface Supplied Top Up are eligible to be assessed for a Closed Bell
certificate. Before assessment, they must have gained at least one year's diving experience
at that level.
If a person fails to reach the required competence, a diver assessment organisation will
refuse to award the qualification.
35.5.5 medicals
Divers must hold a certificate of medical fitness to dive issued by an approved medical
examiner of divers.

PART TWO
The medical examiner considers the diver's ability to meet the physical requirements of
diving work and the physiological consequences of work under pressure. If passed fit, they
are given a certificate of medical fitness to dive, which they must show to prospective
employers.
It is the responsibility of both the diving contractor and the supervisor to ensure that divers
are medically fit and hold the relevant certificates.
Divers must see an approved medical examiner at intervals, not exceeding 12 months, for
an assessment of their fitness to work underwater for the next 12 months. They may decide
to take the medical up to one month before the expiry date. This certificate is valid for 12
months from the original expiry date, and not from the date the medical was taken.
The cost of the medical varies, depending on any further tests that a medical examiner may
have to carry out.
35.5.6 first aid

The diving contractor has a responsibility to ensure that suitable and sufficient people are
available at the dive site to provide first aid.
As part of diver training and assessment, divers are taught diving physiology (which includes
the function of the nervous and musculoskeletal systems), and diving medicine (which
includes decompression illness and ear problems).
First Aid training should provide the immediate initial treatment to reduce the effects of the
common injuries or illnesses suffered at work, for example bleeding, fractures, shock, burns
and respiratory arrest.
When considering who should be in a dive team, the diving contractor will include people
who can offer these skills.
As divers may forget their first-aid skills over time (hopefully they will not need to use them),
they may decide that carrying out refresher first-aid training will improve their employment
opportunities.
his must be done with a recognised first-aid organisation.
Refresher training should be done before the diver's current certificate expires. If undertaken
up to three months before the expiry date, the new certificate will be valid from the original
expiry date and not the date the refresher course was completed.
It may also be necessary to train divers in other first-aid procedures such as the emergency
administration of pure oxygen to an injured diver.

PART TWO
35.5.7 client / main contractor basic checklist

• has the diving contractor been appointed in writing?
• is the diving company a registered diving contractor?
• have the diving supervisors been appointed in writing?
• is there a Diving Operations Log Book? (see chapter below)
• do all divers have valid certificates of training for the type of diving to be executed?
• are all diving personnel in possession of an in date Diver First Aid Certificate?
• where required, do suitable persons have Diver-Medic Certificates?
• do all divers have valid Certificates of Medical Fitness?
• are there sufficient divers to safely execute all planned work?
• are there Diving Rules on site for the work being executed?
• does each diver have a copy of the relevant parts of the Rules?
• is all the correct plant and equipment on site?
• are there valid Certificates on site for this plant and equipment? Are they attached or
contained in a register kept for the purpose?
• is the correct first aid and medical equipment, medication, etc. available?
• has a method statement been produced detailing the diving work to be executed, means
of notifying other persons (including Port Authorities) that diving is being undertaken and
for raising the alarm in the event of an emergency.
35.5.8 matters to be entered in the diver’s logbook

The following matters shall be entered in the diver’s logbook in respect of each diving
operation in which he takes part:
• the name and address of the diving contractor
• the date
• the name or other designation and the location of the offshore installation, work site, craft
or harbour from which the diving operation was carried on
• the name of the diving supervisor
• the maximum depth reached on each occasion

PART TWO
• the time he left the surface, his bottom time and the time he reached the surface on each
occasion
• where the dive includes time spent in a compression chamber, details of any time spent
outside the chamber at a different pressure
• the type of breathing apparatus and mixture used by him
• any work done by him on each occasion and the equipment (including tools) used by him
in that work
• any decompression schedules followed by him on each occasion
• any decompression sickness or other illness, discomfort of injury suffered by him.
35.5.9 consideration in respect to diving operation plans

planning
Consideration of:
• meteorological conditions, including forecasted conditions
• tidal information including local tide tables and indications of speed of current to be
expected
• proposed shipped movements
• underwater hazards of the diving site, including any culverts, penstocks, sluice valves or
areas where differences in hydrostatic pressure may endanger the diver
• depth and type of operation
• suitability of plant and equipment
• availability and qualifications of the person and the effect on a diver of changes of air
pressure if he flies after diving
• the activities of any person who will be diving in connection with the diving operation
whether or not he is a diver for the purposes of these regulations.
preparations
Consultation with persons having any control over or information related to the safety of any
diving operation; and in particular persons having control of lifting appliances or having
control of information about shipping movements.
• selection of the breathing apparatus and mixtures
• check of plant and equipment
• allocation of personnel

PART TWO
• personal fitness of divers for underwater operations
• precautions against cold in and out of the water; signaling procedures
• precautions against underwater hazards of the diving site
procedures during diving
Responsibilities of diving supervisor, divers and surface support:
• use of all types of personal diving equipment
• supply of gas and gas mixture, including
• maximum and minimum partial pressure of gases
• operations direct from an installation, work site or craft
• operations in relation to diving bell
• working in different locations
• operations and use of equipment under water
• limits on depth and time under water
• descent, ascent and recovery of divers
• descent, ascent and recovery of diving bell
• diving tables for use in decompression procedures for both single and repetitive diving
and in therapeutic decompression procedures; and for inland waters the need to take
account of the effect on pressure of the altitudes at which the diving takes place
• control in changing conditions
• time for which divers are to remain in vicinity of the surface compression chamber
• maintenance of logbooks.
• emergency signaling
• emergency assistance under water and on the surface
• therapeutic recompression and decompression and the availability of chambers for that
purpose
• first aid and medical assistance (see note below)
• calling assistance from emergency services including advance liaison with those services
where appropriate
• precautions in the event of evacuation of the installation, work site, vessel, hovercraft or
floating structure
• provision of emergency electrical supplies

PART TWO


Part 2 - English

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Part 2 - English

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Emirate of Abu Dhabi

Municipalities & Agricultural Dept.

Health & Safety

Definitions and Contact Details

SITE TRANSPORT, PLANT & EQUIPMENT

SITE TOOLS & MACHINERY

Undersecretary of Municipalities & Agricultural Department

Document No. Revision Date Section title (i)

TABLE OF CONTENTS - PART TWO

DEFINITIONS & CONTACT DETAILS

SITE TRANSPORT, PLANT & EQUIPMENT

TABLE OF CONTENTS - PART TWO continued

Document No. Revision Date Section title (ii)

SITE TOOLS & MACHINERY

Document No. Revision Date Section title (ii)

Definition of terms used in Part Two

H&S Health and Safety

ADM Municipalities & Agricultural Dept. Abu Dhabi Municipality

Consultant Company appointed by the Owner/Client for all

Contractor Main Contractor appointed by the Owner/Client for the

Sub Contractor Company appointed by the Contractor, Owner or Client to

CE mark Recognised mark for personal protective equipment tested

ADWEA. Abu Dhabi Water and Electricity Authority

Document No. Revision Date Section title (iii)

ADM/H&S/Pt 2 01 March 2005 Definition of Terms used in Part 2 1 of 1

1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT AND MINIMISATION OF IMPACTS 3

1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING AND ONGOING INSPECTIONS 4

1.5 THE FEDERAL LAW ON PROTECTION AND DEVELOPMENT OF THE 5

MAIN APPLICABLE U.A.E. LEGISLATION

Document No. Revision Date Section title 1

MAIN APPLICABLE BEST PRACTICE AND TECHNICAL GUIDELINES

ERWDA (2003). Technical Guidance Document

EXECUTIVE REGULATIONS AND LOCAL ORDERS

Document No. Revision Date Section title 1

1.2 ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT-

• noise generated by machinery or construction activities.

• dusts and/or fumes produced by construction activities.

1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT AND MINIMISATION OF IMPACTS

b) the production of noise, dusts or fumes,

c) the de-watering of ground and disposal of water arising,

d) the disposal of waste materials arising,

Document No. Revision Date Section title 1

• Environmental Control Plan

1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING AND ONGOING INSPECTIONS

Any laboratory testing is required to be conducted in ERWDA approved laboratories.

Document No. Revision Date Section title 1

1.5 THE FEDERAL LAW ON PROTECTION AND DEVELOPMENT OF THE

The law aims at achieving the following purposes:-

• maximum fine of 10 million Dirhams.

Document No. Revision Date Section title 1

Document No. Revision Date Section title 1

ADM & TP H&S Contact Details

Roads Directorate Eng. Issa Mubarak Al Mazrouie 02-6772227 02-6794518

Roads Directorate Dr. Rasin Kadri Mufti 02-6764002 02-6956367

Sewerage Directorate Eng. Nader Asaad Bin Taher 02-6711244 02-6790218

Town Planning Eng.Fadel ali Al Briki 02-6978283 02-6786716

Agriculture Section Eng. Helmy Abbas Abu Atia 02-6956716 02-6793699

Forestry Section Eng. Abdul Hakeem Eida El Jaberi 02-5839159 02-5839030

Municipality Garage Mohamed Saeed Muhair El Qubaisi 02-4446500 02-4444038

Municipality Garage Hakeem Abdulla Nasser Shayaa 02-4446500 02-4444037

Stores Directorate Abdul Latif Ali Ibrahim Al Mansoori 02-4446619 02-4444746

Financial Affairs Directorate Mohammed Osman Abasher 02-6955518

I.T. Section Zayed Ahmed El Hamely 02-6955910 02-6775877